Fingerprint Command Reference

User Guide
Disclaimer
Honeywell International Inc. (“HII”) reserves the right to make changes in specifications
and other information contained in this document without prior notice, and the reader
should in all cases consult HII to determine whether any such changes have been made.
HII makes no representation or warranties regarding the information provided in this
publication.
HII Shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein; nor
for incidental or consequential damages resulting from the furnishing, performance, or
use of this material. HII disclaims all responsibility for the selection and use of software
and/or hardware to achieve intended results.
This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights
are reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated
into another language without the prior written consent of HII.
© 2024 Honeywell Group of Companies. All rights reserved.
Web Address: sps.honeywell.com.

Trademarks
Other product names or marks mentioned in this document may be trademarks or
registered trademarks of other companies and are property of their respective owners.

Patents
For patent information, please refer to www.hsmpats.com.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Customer Support x

Chapter 1 - Fingerprint Command Reference 1

About Direct Protocol 1

Chapter 2 - Commands Listed by Name 3

ABS 12
ACTLEN 13
ALIGN 14
ASC 16
BARADJUST 17
BARCODENAME$ 18
BARFONT 19
BARFONT ON/OFF 21
BARHEIGHT 22
BARMAG 23
BARRATIO 24
BARSET 25
BARTYPE 27
BATTERY$ 28
BEEP 29
BREAK 29
BREAK ON/OFF 30
BUSY 31
CHDIR 32
CHECKSUM 33
CHR$ 33
CLEANFEED 34
CLEAR 35
CLIP 36
CLL 37
CLOSE 38
COM ERROR ON/OFF 39

Fingerprint Command Reference iii

 COMBUF$ 41
COMSET 42
COMSET OFF 44
COMSET ON 46
COMSTAT 47
CONT 49
COPY 50
COUNT& 51
CSUM 53
CURDIR$ 54
CUT 54
CUT ON/OFF 55
DATE$ 56
DATEADD$ 57
DATEDIFF 59
DBBREAK 60
DBBREAK OFF 61
DBEND 62
DBSTDIO 62
DBSTEP 63
DELETE 64
DELETEPFSVAR 65
DEVICES 65
DIM 67
DIR 68
DIRNAME$ 72
DISPLAY IMAGE 73
DISPLAY KEY 74
DISPLAY STATE 75
END 76
EOF 76
ERL 77
ERR 79
ERR$ 79
ERROR 80
EXECUTE 82
External Command: ZMODEM 83
FIELD 85
FIELDNO 85
FILE & LOAD 86
FILENAME$ 87
FILES 88
FLOATCALC$ 90

iv Fingerprint Command Reference

 FONT 91
FONTD 93
FONTNAME$ 93
FONTS 94
FOR...TO...NEXT 94
FORMAT 96
FORMAT DATE$ 98
FORMAT INPUT 99
FORMAT TIME$ 100
FORMAT$ 101
FORMFEED 105
FRE 106
FUNCTEST 107
FUNCTEST$ 108
GET 109
GETASSOC$ 110
GETASSOCNAME$ 111
GETPFSVAR 112
GOSUB 113
GOTO 114
HEAD 116
IF...THEN...(ELSE) 117
IMAGE BUFFER MIRROR 119
IMAGE BUFFER SAVE 120
IMAGE LOAD 121
IMAGENAME$ 122
IMAGES 123
IMMEDIATE 124
INKEY$ 126
INPUT 127
INPUT ON/OFF 129
INPUT# 130
INPUT$ 131
INSTR 132
INVIMAGE 133
KEY BEEP 134
KEY ON/OFF 135
KEYBMAP$ 136
KILL 137
LAYOUT 139
LAYOUT END 143
LAYOUT INPUT 144
LAYOUT RUN 145

Fingerprint Command Reference v

 LBLCOND 146
LED ON/OFF 148
LEFT$ 149
LEN 150
LET 151
LINE INPUT 152
LINE INPUT# 153
LIST 154
LISTPFSVAR 155
LOAD 156
LOC 157
LOF 158
LSET 159
LTS& ON/OFF 160
MAG 160
MAKEASSOC 161
MAP 162
MERGE 164
MIBVAR& 165
MID$ 166
MKDIR 167
NAME DATE$ 168
NAME WEEKDAY$ 169
NASC 170
NASCD 173
NEW 173
NORIMAGE 173
ON BREAK GOSUB 174
ON COMSET GOSUB 175
ON ERROR GOTO 177
ON GOSUB 178
ON GOTO 179
ON HTTP GOTO 180
ON KEY GOSUB 180
ON MIBVAR& GOSUB 182
ON/OFF LINE 183
ON PORTIN 183
OPEN 184
OPTIMIZE "BATCH" ON/OFF 187
PORTIN 188
PORTOUT ON/OFF 189
POWER 191
PRBAR 192

vi Fingerprint Command Reference

 PRBOX 193
PRBUF 198
PRBUF Protocol 199
PRDIAGONAL 201
PRELLIPSE 203
PRIMAGE 204
PRINT 205
PRINT KEY ON/OFF 206
PRINT# 207
PRINTFEED 209
PRINTONE 211
PRINTONE# 212
PRLINE 213
PRPOS 214
PRSTAT 216
PRTXT 219
PUT 221
RANDOM 222
RANDOMIZE 223
READY 224
REBOOT 225
REDIRECT OUT 225
REM 226
REMOVE IMAGE 227
RENDER ON/OFF 228
RENUM 229
REPRINT ON/OFF 230
RESUME 231
RETURN 232
REWINDCONTROL 233
REWINDVOID 234
RIGHT$ 235
RSET 235
RUN 236
SAVE 238
SET FAULTY DOT 239
SETASSOC 240
SETPFSVAR 241
SETSTDIO 242
SETUP 243
SETUP GET 247
SETUP KEY 248
SETUP WRITE 248

Fingerprint Command Reference vii

 SGN 251
SORT 252
SOUND 253
SPACE$ 254
SPLIT 255
STOP 256
STORE IMAGE 257
STORE INPUT 259
STORE OFF 260
STR$ 260
STRING$ 261
SYSHEALTH 262
SYSHEALTH$ 263
SYSVAR 264
TAGFIELD 273
TAGFORMAT 274
TAGPROTECT 276
TAGREAD 277
TAGWRITE 278
TESTFEED 279
TICKS 280
TIME$ 281
TIMEADD$ 282
TIMEDIFF 283
TRANSFER KERMIT 284
TRANSFER NET 285
TRANSFER STATUS 286
TRANSFER ZMODEM 287
TRANSFER$ 288
TRANSFERSET 289
TRON/TROFF 290
VAL 291
VERBON/VERBOFF 292
VERIFIER RESULT 293
VERSION$ 293
WEEKDAY 294
WEEKDAY$ 295
WEEKNUMBER 296
WHILE...WEND 298
XORMODE ON/OFF 299

viii Fingerprint Command Reference

 Chapter 3 - SETUP Command Information for Network Para-
meters 301
802.11 Wireless Parameters 301
Bluetooth Parameters for SETUP 316
Ethernet Network Parameters 319

Chapter 4 - Supported Barcode Information 323

Supported Symbologies 323
About Composite Barcodes 369
About AddOn Codes 394

Chapter 5 - Supported RFID Tag Formats 397

About Tag Formats 397
About the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) 398
Using Non-Standard Tag Formats 398
RFID Tag Formats: GIAI-96 399
RFID Tag Formats: GID-96 399
RFID Tag Formats: GRAI-96 399
RFID Tag Formats: SGLN-96 400
RFID Tag Formats: SGTIN-96 400
RFID Tag Formats: SSCC-96 401
RFID Tag Formats: USDOD-96 401
About Tag Memory Allocation Standards 401
Other EPC Tag Input Methods 407
EPC Tag Writing Example 408

Chapter 6 - Reference Information 411

Fonts 411
Character Sets 416
Printer Keypad Layouts 444
Error Codes 456
Fingerprint Syntax Conventions 463
Fingerprint Variable and Line Label Names 464
Fingerprint and Applicator Signals Behavior 465
Direct Protocol and Applicator Signals Behavior 467
General 468
Inline Text Formatting 469
Authenticate as Privileged User 471

Fingerprint Command Reference ix

Customer Support
Technical Assistance
To search our knowledge base for a solution or to log in to the Technical Support
portal and report a problem, see Technical Support.

For our latest contact information, see sps.honeywell.com.

Product Service and Repair

Honeywell International Inc. provides service for all of its products through service
centers throughout the world. Go to sps.honeywell.com and select Support to find a
service center near you or to get a Return Material Authorization number (RMA #)
before returning a product.

Limited Warranty
For warranty information, go to sps.honeywell.com and click Support > Warranties.

x Fingerprint Command Reference

 CHAPTER
FINGERPRINT COMMAND
1 REFERENCE

Fingerprint is a BASIC-inspired, printer-resident programming language you use to

write custom printer application software.
Click a link below to see:

Commands Listed by Name

802.11 Wireless Network Parameters

Supported Barcode Information

Supported RFID Tag Formats

Supported Printers
Printer Type Printer Model
Mobile RP2f, RP4f
OT810, OT820, PC23d, PC42d,
PC42t, PC42E-T, PC43d, PC43K,
Desktop
PC43t, PC45d, PC45t, PC300T,
PC310T
PD43, PD43c, PD45, PD45S,
PM23c, PM42, PM43, PM43c,
Industrial PM45, PM45c, PM65, PX240,
PX240S, PX940A, PX940V, PX4ie,
PX6ie

About Direct Protocol

Direct Protocol is a subset of Fingerprint, which you can use to download layouts and
variable data from a host and combine them into labels, tickets, and tags with
minimum programming. Direct Protocol also includes a versatile error handler and a
flexible counter function.
Some Fingerprint commands are supported only when Direct Protocol is enabled. To
enable or disable Direct Protocol, use the INPUT ON/OFF command.

Fingerprint Command Reference 1

2 Fingerprint Command Reference
 CHAPTER
COMMANDS LISTED BY NAME
2
Command Name Purpose
ABS Returns the absolute value of a numeric expression.
ACTLEN Returns the length of the most recently executed PRINTFEED,
FORMFEED, or TESTFEED statement.
ALIGN (AN) Specifies which part (anchor point) of a text field, barcode field, image
field, line, or box will be positioned at the insertion point.
ASC Returns the decimal ASCII value of the first character in a string expres-
sion.
BARADJUST Enables or disables automatic adjustment of barcode position in order
to avoid faulty printhead dots.
BARCODENAME$ Returns the names of the barcode symbologies stored in the printer.
BARFONT (BF) Specifies fonts for the printing of barcode interpretation.
BARFONT (BF) ON/OFF Enables or disables the printing of barcode interpretation.
BARHEIGHT (BH) Specifies the height in dots of a barcode.
BARMAG (BM) Specifies a magnification for the width of the bars in a barcode.
BARRATIO (BR) Specifies the ratio between the wide and the narrow bars in a barcode.
BARSET Specifies a barcode and sets additional parameters for complex bar-
codes.
BARTYPE (BT) Specifies the type of barcode.
BATTERY$ Returns the voltage level, status, and charging status of the battery.
BEEP Orders the printer to emit a beep.
BREAK Specifies a break interrupt character separately for the keyboard and
each serial communication channel.
BREAK ON/OFF Enables or disables break interrupt character separately for the key-
board and each serial communication channel.
BUSY Orders a busy signals for example XOFF, CTS/RTS, or PE, to be
transmitted from the printer on the specified communication channel.
CHDIR Changes to the specified directory.
CHECKSUM Calculates the checksum of a range of program lines in connection with
the transfer of programs.

Fingerprint Command Reference 3

 Command Name Purpose
CHR$ Returns the character represented by a decimal ASCII code.
CLEANFEED Runs the printer’s feed mechanism.
CLEAR Clears strings, variables, and arrays in order to free memory space.
CLIP Enables or disables the printing of partial fields.
CLL Partial or complete clearing of the print image buffer.
CLOSE Closes one or several files and/or devices for input/output.
COM ERROR ON/OFF Enables or disables error handling on the specified communication
channel.
COMBUF$ Reads the data in the buffer of the communication channel specified by
a COMSET statement.
COMSET Sets the parameters for background reception of data to the buffer of a
specified communication channel (see COMBUF$).
COMSET OFF Turns off background data reception and empties the buffer of the spe-
cified communication channel.
COMSET ON Empties the buffer and turns on background data reception on the spe-
cified communication channel.
COMSTAT Reads the status of a communication channel buffer.
CONT Resumes execution of a program that has been interrupted by means
of a STOP, BREAK, or DBBREAK statement.
COPY Copies files.
COUNT& Creates a counter (Direct Protocol only).
CSUM Calculates the checksum of an array of strings.
CURDIR$ Returns the current directory as the printer stores it.
CUT Activates an optional cutter.
CUT ON/OFF Enables or disables automatic cutting after PRINTFEED execution.
Optionally, CUT ON/OFF can adjust the media feed before and after the
cutting.
DATE$ Variable for setting or returning the current date.
DATEADD$ Returns a new date after a number of days have been added to, or sub-
tracted from, the current date or a specified date.
DATEDIFF Returns the difference between two dates as a number of days.
DBBREAK Adds or deletes a breakpoint for the Fingerprint Debugger.
DBBREAK OFF Deletes all breakpoints for the Fingerprint Debugger.
DBEND Terminates the Fingerprint Debugger.
DBSTDIO Selects the standard IN/OUT channel for the Fingerprint Debugger.

4 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Command Name Purpose
DBSTEP Specifies the interval between breaks for the Fingerprint Debugger and
executes the program accordingly.
DELETE Deletes one or several consecutive program lines from the printer’s
working memory.
DELETEPFSVAR Deletes variables saved at power failure.
DEVICES Returns the names of all devices on the standard OUT channel.
DIM Specifies the dimensions of an array.
DIR Specifies the print direction.
DIRNAME$ Returns the names of the directories stored in the specified part of the
printer’s memory.
DISPLAY IMAGE Specifies a custom image to be shown on the display when a specific
error occurs.
DISPLAY KEY Specifies a custom image to be shown on the display.
DISPLAY STATE Specifies a custom image to be shown on the display when the printer
runs your application.
END Ends the execution of the current program or subroutine and closes all
open files and devices.
EOF Checks for an end-of-file condition.
ERL Returns the number of the line on which an error condition has
occurred.
ERR Returns the code number of an error.
ERR$ Returns the explanation of an error code in plain text.
ERROR Defines error messages and enables error handling for specified error
conditions (Direct Protocol only).
EXECUTE Executes a Fingerprint program line or a file with Fingerprint program
lines from within another Fingerprint program.
External Command; External commands for receiving and sending data using the ZMODEM
ZMODEM protocol.
FIELD Creates a single-record buffer for a random file and divides the buffer
into fields to which string variables are assigned.
FIELDNO Gets the current field number for partial clearing of the print buffer by a
CLL statement.
FILE& LOAD Receives and stores binary files in the printer’s memory.
FILENAME$ Returns the names of the files stored in the specified part of the
printer’s memory.
FILES Lists the files stored in one of the printer’s directories to the standard
OUT channel.
FLOATCALC$ Calculates with floating point numbers.

Fingerprint Command Reference 5

 Command Name Purpose
FONT (FT) Selects a scalable TrueType, OpenType, or bitmap font for printing sub-
sequent PRTXT statements.
FONTD Obsolete but retained for compatibility. See FONT.

FONTNAME$ Returns the names of the fonts stored in the printer’s memory.
FONTS Returns the names of all fonts stored in the printer’s memory to the
standard OUT channel.
FOR...TO...NEXT Creates a loop in the program execution, where a counter is incre-
mented or decremented until a specified value is reached.
FORMAT Formats either the printer’s permanent memory or a USB storage
device.
FORMAT DATE$ Specifies the format of the string returned by DATE$("F") and
DATEADD$(..... , "F") functions.
FORMAT INPUT Specifies separators for the LAYOUT RUN statement used in the Direct
Protocol.
FORMAT TIME$ Specifies the format of the string returned by TIME$("F") and
TIMEADD$("F") functions.
FORMAT$ Formats a number represented by a string.
FORMFEED (FF) Feeds out or pulls back a specified length of media.
FRE Returns the number of free bytes in a specified part of the printer
memory.
FUNCTEST Performs various hardware tests.
FUNCTEST$ Returns the result of various hardware tests.
GET Reads a record from a random file to a random buffer.
GETASSOC$ Gets a value from a string association.
GETASSOCNAME$ Traverses the tuples of a string association.
GETPFSVAR Recovers saved variables.
GOSUB Branches to a subroutine.
GOTO Branches unconditionally to a specified line number or line label.
HEAD Returns the result of a thermal printhead check.
IF...THEN...(ELSE) Specifies conditional execution controlled by the result of a numeric
expression.
IMAGE BUFFER Mirrors the print image around the Y-axis.
MIRROR
IMAGE BUFFER SAVE Saves the content of the image buffer as a file.
IMAGE LOAD Receives, converts, and installs image and font files.

6 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Command Name Purpose
IMAGENAME$ Returns the names of the images stored in the printer memory.
IMAGES Returns the names of all images stored in the printer memory to the
standard OUT channel.
IMMEDIATE Enables or disables Immediate mode in connection with program edit-
ing without line numbers, for reading the current mode, or for reading
the current standard IN and OUT channels.
INKEY$ Reads the first character in the receive buffer of the standard IN chan-
nel.
INPUT (IP) Receives input data via the standard IN channel during the execution of
a program.
INPUT ON/OFF Enables or disables the Direct Protocol.
INPUT# Reads a string of data from an open device or sequential file.
INPUT$ Returns a string of data, limited in regard of number of characters, from
the standard IN channel, or optionally from an open file or device.
INSTR Searches a specified string for a certain character, or sequence of char-
acters, and returns its position in relation to the start of the string.
INVIMAGE (II) Inverts the printing of text and images from "black-on-white" to "white-
on-black."
KEY BEEP Resets the frequency and duration of the sound produced by the
beeper when any of the keys on the printer keyboard are pressed.
KEY ON/OFF Enables or disables a specified key on the printer’s front panel to be
used in connection with an ON KEY...GOSUB statement.
KEYBMAP$ Returns or sets the keyboard map table.
KILL Deletes a file, directory, or complete directory sub-trees from a printer-
accessible file system.
LAYOUT Handles layout files.
LAYOUT END Stops the recording of a layout description and saves the layout (Direct
Protocol only).
LAYOUT INPUT Starts the recording of a layout description (Direct Protocol only).
LAYOUT RUN Provides variable input data to a predefined layout (Direct Protocol
only).
LBLCOND Overrides the media feed setup.
LED ON/OFF Controls the dual-color "Status" indicator on icon printers.
LEFT$ Returns a specified number of characters from the start (the extreme
left side) of a given string.
LEN Returns the number of character positions in a string.
LET Assigns the value of an expression to a variable.

Fingerprint Command Reference 7

 Command Name Purpose
LINE INPUT Assigns an entire line, including punctuation marks, from the standard
IN channel to a single string variable.
LINE INPUT# Assigns an entire line, including punctuation marks, from a sequential
file or a device to a single string variable.
LIST Lists the current program completely or partially, or lists all variables, to
the standard OUT channel.
LISTPFSVAR Lists variables saved at power failure.
LOAD Loads a copy of a program residing in the current directory or in
another specified directory into the printer working memory.
LOC Returns the current position in an open file, or returns the status of the
buffers in an open communication channel.
LOF Returns the length in bytes of an open sequential or random file, or
returns the status of the buffers in an open communication channel.
LSET Places data left-justified into a field in a random file buffer.
LTS& ON/OFF Enables or disables the label taken sensor.
MAG Magnifies a font, barfont, or image with regard to height and width.
MAKEASSOC Creates an association.
MAP Changes the ASCII value of a character when received on the standard
IN channel, or optionally on another specified communication channel.
MERGE Merges a program in the printer’s current directory (or in another spe-
cified directory) with the program currently residing in the printer’s
working memory.
MIBVAR& Reads or writes MIB variables for the Simple Network Management Pro-
tocol (SNMP).
MID$ Returns a specified part of a string.
MKDIR Creates a directory.
NAME DATE$ Formats the month parameter in return strings of DATE$("F") and
DATEADD$(...,"F").
NAME WEEKDAY$ Formats the day parameter in return strings of WEEKDAY$.
NASC Selects a single-byte character set, alternatively the multi-byte char-
acter set UTF-8.
NASCD Selects a double-byte character set, typically the multi-byte character
set UTF-8.
NEW Clears the printer’s working memory in order to allow a new program to
be created.
NORIMAGE (NI) Returns the print mode to normal printing after an INVIMAGE state-
ment has been issued.
ON BREAK GOSUB Branches to a subroutine when a break interrupt instruction is received.

8 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Command Name Purpose
ON COMSET GOSUB Branches to a subroutine when the background reception of data on
the specified communication channel is interrupted.
ON ERROR GOTO Branches to an error-handling subroutine when an error occurs.
ON GOSUB Branches conditionally to one of several subroutines.
ON GOTO Branches conditionally to one of several lines.
ON HTTP GOTO Branches to a subroutine when a request for an application CGI is
received.
ON KEY GOSUB Branches to a subroutine when a specified key on the printer’s front
panel is activated.
ON MIBVAR& GOSUB Branches to a subroutine when a specified SNMP MIB variable is
changed.
ON/OFF LINE Controls the Select signal on the "centronics:" communication channel.
OPEN Opens a file or device (for example, a network connection), or creates a
new file—for input, output, or append, allocating a buffer, and specifies
the access mode.
OPTIMIZE BATCH Enables or disables optimization for batch printing.
ON/OFF
ON PORTIN Used as a condition for branching to another routine

PORTIN Reads the status of a port on a Serial/Industrial Interface Board.

PORTOUT ON/OFF Sets relay ports or optical ports on a Serial/Industrial Interface Board to
either on or off.
POWER Places the portable printer in standby or deep sleep mode.
PRBAR (PB) Provides input data to a barcode.
PRBOX (PX) Creates a box containing a single text line or a frame of multiple
hyphenated text lines.
PRBUF Receives and prints bitmap image data using the PRBUF protocol.
PRDIAGONAL Creates a diagonal line.
PRELLIPSE Creates an ellipse.
PRIMAGE (PM) Renders an image stored in the printer's memory to the label buffer.
PRINT Outputs data to the standard OUT channel.
PRINT KEY ON/OFF Enables or disables printing of a label by pressing the Print key.
PRINT# Outputs data to a specified opened device or sequential file.
PRINTFEED (PF) Prints and feeds out one or a specified number of labels, tickets, tags,
or portions of strip, depending on the printer setup.
PRINTONE Outputs characters (specified by their ASCII values) to the standard
OUT channel.

Fingerprint Command Reference 9

 Command Name Purpose
PRINTONE# Outputs characters specified by their ASCII values to a device or
sequential file.
PRLINE (PL) Creates a line.
PRPOS (PP) Specifies the insertion point for a line of text, a barcode, an image, a
box, or a line.
PRSTAT Returns the current printer status or the current position of the inser-
tion point.
PRTXT (PT) Provides the input data for a text field.
PUT Writes a given record from the random buffer to a given random file.
RANDOM Generates a random integer within a specified interval.
RANDOMIZE Reseeds the random number generator, optionally with a specified
value.
READY Orders a ready signal, for example XON, CTS/RTS or PE, to be trans-
mitted from the printer on the specified communication channel.
REBOOT Restarts the printer.
REDIRECT OUT Redirects the output data to a created file.
REM Adds headlines and comments to the program without including them
in the execution.
REMOVE IMAGE Removes a specified image from the printer memory.
RENDER ON/OFF Enables or disables the rendering of text, barcode, image, box, and line
fields.
RENUM Renumbers the lines of the program currently residing in the printer’s
working memory.
REPRINT ON/OFF Enables or disables the reprinting of a label in Direct Protocol.

RESUME Resumes program execution after an error-handling subroutine has

been executed.
RETURN Returns to the main program after having branched to a subroutine
due to a GOSUB statement.
REWINDCONTROL Controls the internal rewind motor in PM-series printers.
REWINDVOID Rewinds VOID labels with the liner in PM-series printers with RFID
enabled.
RIGHT$ Returns a specified number of characters from a given string, starting
from the end (extreme right end) of the string.
RSET Places data right-justified into a field in a random file buffer.
RUN Starts the execution of a program.
SAVE Saves a file in the printer’s memory or in a USB storage device.

10 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Command Name Purpose
SET FAULTY DOT Marks one or several dots on the printhead as faulty, or marks all faulty
dots as correct.
SETASSOC Sets a value for a tuple in a string association.
SETPFSVAR Registers variables to be saved at power failure.
SETSTDIO Selects standard IN and OUT communication channel.
SETUP Enters Setup mode or changes the setup.
SETUP GET Gets the current setting for a single setup object.
SETUP KEY Enables or disables the access to Setup mode from the printer keypad.
SETUP WRITE Creates a file containing the current printer setup, or returns the setup
file on a specified communication channel.
SGN Returns the sign (positive, zero, or negative) of a specified numeric
expression.
SORT Sorts a one-dimensional array.
SOUND Makes the printer beeper produce a sound specified in regard of fre-
quency and duration.
SPACE$ Returns a specified number of space characters.
SPLIT Splits a string into an array according to the position of a specified sep-
arator character and returns the number of elements in the array.
STOP Terminates execution of a program and returns the printer to Imme-
diate mode.
STORE IMAGE Sets up parameters for storing an image in the printer memory.
STORE INPUT Receives and stores protocol frames of image data in the printer
memory.
STORE OFF Terminates the storing of an image and resets the storing parameters.
STR$ Returns the string representation of a numeric expression.
STRING$ Repeatedly returns the character of a specified ASCII value, or the first
character in a specified string.
SYSHEALTH Sets or retrieves the system health and controls the Ready-to-Work
indicator on the printer front panel.
SYSHEALTH$ Returns the error causing the current system health status.
SYSVAR System array for reading or setting system variables.
TAGFIELD Defines a field in the RFID tag memory area available for RFID oper-
ations.
TAGFORMAT Specifies the format of the data to be read from or written to an RFID
tag.
TAGPROTECT Protects tag data from being overwritten.

Fingerprint Command Reference 11

 Command Name Purpose
TAGREAD Reads an RFID tag field.
TAGWRITE Writes to an RFID tag field.
TESTFEED Adjusts the label stop, ribbon end/low and paper low sensors, and RFID
module while running the media and ribbon feed mechanisms.
TICKS Returns the elapsed time since the last power up in the printer,
expressed in number of "TICKS" (1 TICK = 0.01 sec).
TIME$ Sets or returns the current time.
TIMEADD$ Returns a new time after a number of seconds have been added to or
subtracted from the current time or from a specified time.
TIMEDIFF Returns the difference between two specified times in number of
seconds.
TRANSFER KERMIT Transfers data files using the KERMIT communication protocol.
TRANSFER NET Transfers files to and from the printer using FTP.
TRANSFER STATUS Checks the last TRANSFER KERMIT or TRANSFER ZMODEM operation.
TRANSFER ZMODEM Transfers data files using the ZMODEM communication protocol.
TRANSFER$ Executes a transfer from source to destination as specified by a
TRANSFERSET statement.
TRANSFERSET Enters setup for the TRANSFER$ function.
TRON/TROFF Enables or disables tracing of the program execution.
VAL Returns the numeric representation of a string expression.
VERBON/VERBOFF Specifies the verbosity level of the communication from the printer on
the standard OUT channel (serial communication only).
VERSION$ Returns the firmware version, printer family, or type of CPU board.
WEEKDAY Returns the weekday of a specified date.
WEEKDAY$ Returns the name of the weekday from a specified date.
WEEKNUMBER Returns the number of the week for a specified date.
WHILE...WEND Executes a series of statements in a loop providing a given condition is
true.
XORMODE ON/OFF Enables or disables the xor/flip mode of Fingerprint in connection with
graphical operations.
VERIFIER RESULT Retrieve or print out a summary of the label verification results.

ABS
Purpose
Returns the absolute value of a numeric expression.

12 Fingerprint Command Reference

Syntax
ABS(<nexp>)

Parameters
nexp
Numeric expression from which the absolute value will be returned.

Notes
The absolute value of a number is always positive or zero. Note that the expression
must be enclosed within parentheses.

Examples
Input Results in

PRINT ABS(20-25) 5
PRINT ABS(25-20) 5
PRINT ABS(5-5) 0
PRINT ABS(20*-5) 100

ACTLEN
Purpose
Returns the length in dots of the most recently executed PRINTFEED, FORMFEED, or
TESTFEED statement.

Syntax
ACTLEN

Notes
Due to technical reasons concerning the stepper motor control and label gap
detection, a small deviation from the expected result may occur.

Example
In this example, a 12 dots/mm printer is loaded with 90-mm (1080-dot) labels
separated by a 3-mm (36-dot) gap. Start- and stop adjust setup values are both set to
0:
10 FORMFEED
20 PRINT ACTLEN
RUN
This results in:

Fingerprint Command Reference 13

 1121
The deviation from the expected result (1116) is normal and should have no practical
consequences (less than 1 mm).

ALIGN
Purpose
Specifies which anchor point of a text field, barcode field, image field, line, or box will
be positioned at the insertion point. This command can be abbreviated as AN.

Syntax
ALIGN<nexp>
or
AN<nexp>

Parameters
<nexp>
Anchor point of the object. Range is 1 (default) to 9. Reset to default by PRINTFEED
execution.

Notes
Each text, barcode, or image field has nine possible anchor points, whereas lines and
boxes have three. The selected anchor point determines the position of the object
relative to the insertion point. The field will be rotated around the anchor point
according to the nearest preceding DIR statement.
The nine anchor points of a text, barcode, or image field are oriented this way:

Lines and boxes have only three anchor points: left, center, and right.

Text Field Anchor Points

A text field makes up an imaginary box limited in width by the length of the text, and
in height by the matrix size of the selected font. In text fields, the anchor points 4, 5,
and 6 are situated on the baseline.

14 Fingerprint Command Reference

Barcode Field Anchor Points
A barcode field makes up an imaginary box sufficiently large to accommodate the
barcode interpretation, regardless if it will be printed or not (provided that the
selected type of barcode may include an interpretation at all).

However, for EAN and UPC codes, the box is restricted in width by the size of the bar
pattern, not by the interpretation. This implies that the first digit of the barcode
interpretation will be outside the imaginary box.

For composite barcodes, the human readable barcode interpretation for the 2-
dimensional element is outside the imaginary box.

Image Field Anchor Points

The size of an image field is decided when the field is created. Note that an image
field consists of the entire area of the original image, including a white or transparent
background.

7 8 9
5
4 6

1 2 3

Line Anchor Points

Lines have only three anchor points:

Fingerprint Command Reference 15

 The ALIGN command does not apply to diagonal lines (PRDIAGONAL).

Box Anchor Points

The anchor points are situated at the lower side of the line or box relative to the
selected print direction. Lines and boxes have only three anchor points, each of which
can be specified by means of three different numbers.

A special case is multi-line text fields in a box. The fields can be aligned in nine
positions in relation to the box, while the box itself only has three anchor points, as
described above. For more information on alignment of multi-line text fields, see
PRBOX (PX).

Example
This example prints one line of text aligned left on the baseline:
10 PRPOS 30,250
20 DIR 1
30 ALIGN 4
40 FONT "Univers"
50 PRTXT "Hello!"
60 PRINTFEED
RUN
The text "Hello!" is positioned with the baseline aligned left to the insertion point
specified by the coordinates X=30; Y=250 in line 10.

ASC
Purpose
Returns the decimal ASCII value of the first character in a string expression.

Syntax
ASC(<sexp>)

Parameters
<sexp>
String expression from which the ASCII decimal value of the first character is
returned.

16 Fingerprint Command Reference

Notes
ASC is the inverse function of CHR$. The decimal ASCII value is given according to the
selected character set (see NASC statement).

Example 1
10 A$="GOOD MORNING"
20 PRINT ASC(A$)
RUN
This results in:
71

Example 2
10 B$="123456"
20 C% = ASC(B$)
30 PRINT C%
RUN
This results in:
49

BARADJUST
Purpose
Enables or disables automatic adjustment of barcode position in order to avoid faulty
printhead dots.

Syntax
BARADJUST<nexp1>,<nexp2>

Parameters
<nexp1>
Maximum left offset in dots. Default is 0.
<nexp2>
Maximum right offset in dots. Default is 0.

Notes
Occasionally a printer may have to run for some time with a faulty printhead before a
replacement printhead can be installed.

Single faulty dots will produce very thin "white" lines along the media. Faulty dots may
make horizontal (picket fence) barcodes unreadable.

However, if the barcode is moved slightly to the left or right, the trace of a faulty dot

Fingerprint Command Reference 17

 may come between the printed bars of the barcode and the symptom is remedied
temporarily. BARADJUST attempts to adjust the barcode even if several faulty dots
have been specified, but returns error 1052 if it is unable to adjust the barcode
successfully.

The BARADJUST statement allows Fingerprint to automatically readjust the barcode

position within certain limits when a faulty dot is detected (see HEAD) and marked as
faulty (see SET FAULTY DOT). The maximum deviation from the original position, as
specified by the PRPOS statement, can be set up separately for left and right. Setting
both parameters to 0 (zero) disables BARADJUST.
The BARADJUST statement does not work with:
l Vertically printed barcodes (ladder style)
l Stacked barcodes (such as Code 16K)
l Barcodes with horizontal lines (such as DUN-14/16)
l EAN/UPC-codes (interpretation not repositioned)

Example
This example enables BARADJUST within 10 dots to the left and 5 dots to the right of
the original position for a specific barcode, then disables BARADJUST:
10 BARADJUST 10,5
20 PRPOS 30,100
30 BARSET "CODE39",2,1,3,120
40 BARFONT ON
50 PRBAR "ABC"
60 BARADJUST 0,0
70 PRINTFEED

BARCODENAME$
Purpose
Returns the names of the barcodes stored in the printer.

Syntax
BARCODENAME$(<nexp>)

Parameters
<nexp>
Set to true (non-zero value) or false (0). False indicates first barcode. True indicates
next barcode.

18 Fingerprint Command Reference

Notes
BARCODENAME$(0) produces the first barcode name in alphabetical order.
BARCODENAME$(≠0) produces the next name. If no barcodes remain, an empty
string is returned. This statement can be repeated as long as there are barcode names
remaining.

Example
Use a program like this to list the names of all barcodes installed on the printer:
10 A$ = BARCODENAME$ (0)
20 IF A$ = "" THEN END
30 PRINT A$
40 A$ = BARCODENAME$ (-1)
50 GOTO 20
RUN
A typical result could be as follows:
ADDON2
ADDON5
C2OF5
C2OF5IND
C2OF5INDC
C2OF5MAT
CODABAR
CODE11
CODE128
CODE128A
CODE128B
CODE128C
CODE16K
CODE39
CODE39A
CODE39C
CODE49
CODE93
DATAMATRIX
DUN
EAN128
EAN128A
EAN128B
...

BARFONT
Purpose
Specifies fonts for the printing of barcode interpretation. This command can be
abbreviated as BF.

Fingerprint Command Reference 19

Syntax
BARFONT[#<ncon>,]<sexp1>[,<nexp1>[,<nexp2>[,<nexp3>[,<nexp4> [,<nexp5>[,<nexp6>
[,<nexp7>[,<nexp8>[,<nexp9>]]]]]]]]][ON]
or
BF[#<ncon>,]<sexp1>[,<nexp1>[,<nexp2>[,<nexp3>[,<nexp4> [,<nexp5>[,<nexp6>
[,<nexp7>[,<nexp8>[,<nexp9>]]]]]]]]][ON]

Parameters
#<ncon>
(Optional) Specifies which parameter in the syntax is the first parameter in the
statement (possibly bypassing some of the initial parameters). Default is #1.
<sexp1>
Name of the font selected for barcode interpretations. Corresponds to the FONT
statement, but only affects barcode interpretation.
<nexp1>
Font height in points. Default is 12. Corresponds to the FONT statement, but only
affects barcode interpretation.
<nexp2>
Clockwise slant in degrees. Range is 0° to 90°. Values greater than 65° to 70° will be
unreadable. Slanting increases clockwise. Default is 0. Corresponds to the FONT
statement, but only affects barcode interpretation.
<nexp3>
Distance in dots between the bottom of the barcode pattern and the top of the
character cell. Default is 6.
<nexp4>
Magnification in regard to height. Range is 1 (default) to 4. Corresponds to the MAG
statement.
<nexp5>
Magnification in regard to width. Range is 1 (default) to 4. Corresponds to the MAG
statement.
<nexp6>
Width enlargement in percent relative to height. Range is 1 to 1000 (for example, 200
doubles the width). Default is 100. Not valid for bitmap fonts. When using this
parameter, all parameters in the syntax must be included in the statement (name,
height, slant, and width).
<nexp7>
Insertion point for the barcode interpretation. A value between 1 and 9 can be set,
corresponding to positions in the figure. The values 4, 5, and 6 are interpreted as 7, 8,
and 9 respectively. Default is 0 (disabled). This function overrides the ALIGN
command.

20 Fingerprint Command Reference

 <nexp8>
Horizontal offset in dots from the insertion point for the barcode interpretation.
Default is 0. The offset is set with respect to the barcode direction, not necessarily the
paper feed direction.
<nexp9>
Vertical offset in dots from the insertion point for the barcode interpretation. Default
is 0. The offset is set with respect to the barcode direction, not necessarily the paper
feed direction.

Notes
Reset to default by executing a PRINTFEED. If a MAG statement is executed after a
BARFONT statement, the size of the barfont is affected by the MAG statement.
The printing of barcode interpretation can be enabled by a trailing ON, which
corresponds to a BARFONT ON statement. Exceptions to this condition are as follows:
l In all EAN and UPC barcodes, the interpretation is an integrated part of the code.
Such an interpretation is not affected by a BARFONT statement, but will be printed
in according to specification, provided that interpretation printing has been enabled
by a BARFONT ON statement.
l Certain barcodes, like Code 16K, cannot contain any interpretation at all. In this
case, the selected barfont will be ignored.

Example
This example prints a Code 39 barcode, selects the same barfont for all directions,
and enables printing of the barcode interpretation:
10 PRPOS 30,400
20 DIR 1
30 ALIGN 7
40 BARSET "CODE39",2,1,3,120
50 BARFONT "Univers",10,8,5,1,1,100 ON
60 PRBAR "ABC"
70 PRINTFEED
80 END

BARFONT ON/OFF
Purpose
Enables or disables the printing of barcode interpretation. This command can be
abbreviated as BF ON|OFF.

Fingerprint Command Reference 21

Syntax
BARFONT ON|OFF[,<nexp>]
or
BF ON|OFF[,<nexp>]

Parameters
<nexp>
Numerical expression that disables or enables guard bar printing for EAN/UPC
barcodes. Default is enabled. Reset to default by executing a PRINTFEED.

Notes
Typically, you start a print program by selecting a suitable barcode interpretation font
with the BARFONT command. Then you use BARFONT ON and BARFONT OFF to
control whether to print the interpretation or not, depending on the application.
BARFONT ON can be replaced by a BARFONT statement appended by a trailing ON.
When printing EAN/UPC barcodes, the trailing parameter 0 can be specified after the
BARFONT OFF command to disable the printing of the guard bars, which by default
will print.
BARFONT OFF,0 disables printing of the guard bars. BARFONT OFF,1 is the default
(guard bars enabled) and is equivalent to BARFONT OFF.

Examples
This example sets up a Code 39 barcode, selects a barfont for each direction, and
enables the printing of the barcode interpretation. Compare with the example for
BARFONT statement:
10 PRPOS 30,400
20 DIR 1
30 ALIGN 7
40 BARSET "CODE39",2,1,3,120
50 BARFONT "Univers",10,8,5,1,1
60 BARFONT ON
70 PRBAR "ABC"
80 PRINTFEED
90 END
This example sets up an EAN8 barcode and disables the guard bars:
10 BARTYPE "EAN8"
20 BARFONT OFF,0
30 PRBAR "1234567"
40 PRINTFEED

BARHEIGHT
Purpose
Specifies the height of a barcode. This command can be abbreviated as BH.

22 Fingerprint Command Reference

 This command is not applicable to QR Code.

Syntax
BARHEIGHT<nexp>
or
BH<nexp>

Parameters
<nexp>
Height of the bars in the barcode expressed in number of dots. Default is 100. Reset
to default by executing a PRINTFEED.

Notes
In barcodes consisting of several elements on top of each other (for example, Code
16K) the barheight specifies the height of one element. The height is not affected by
BARMAG statements. BARHEIGHT can be replaced by a parameter in the BARSET
statement.

Example
This example sets up a Code 39 barcode, selects a barfont for all directions and sets
the barcode height to 120 dots:
10 PRPOS 30,400
20 DIR 1
30 ALIGN 7
40 BARTYPE "CODE39"
50 BARRATIO 2,1
60 BARHEIGHT 120
70 BARMAG 3
80 BARFONT "Univers"ON
90 PRBAR "ABC"
100 PRINTFEED
A more compact method is illustrated by the example for BARSET.

BARMAG
Purpose
Specifies a magnification for the width of the bars in a barcode. This command can be
abbreviated as BM.

Syntax
BARMAG<nexp>
or
BM<nexp>

Fingerprint Command Reference 23

Parameters
<nexp>
Magnification for the width of the bars in the barcode. Range depends on type of
barcode. Default is 2. Reset to default by executing a PRINTFEED.

Notes
The magnification only affects the barcode width, not the height of the bars (see
BARHEIGHT). For example, for 1D barcodes, by default BARRATIO is 3:1 and the
BARMAG is 2, which means that the wide bars will be 6 dots wide and the narrow bars
will be 2 dots wide (2 × 3:1 = 6:2).
The magnification also affects the interpretation in EAN/UPC barcodes, since the
interpretation is an integrated part of the EAN/UPC code. BARMAG can be replaced
by a parameter in the BARSET statement.

Examples
This example sets up a Code 39 barcode, selects a barfont for all directions and sets
the magnification to 3:
10 PRPOS 30,400
20 DIR 1
30 ALIGN 7
40 BARTYPE "CODE39"
50 BARRATIO 2,1
60 BARHEIGHT 120
70 BARMAG 3
80 BARFONT "Univers" ON
90 PRBAR "ABC"
100 PRINTFEED
A more compact method is illustrated by the BARSET example.

BARRATIO
Purpose
Specifies the ratio between the wide and the narrow bars in a barcode.
This command can be abbreviated as BR.

Syntax
BARRATIO<nexp1>,<nexp2>
or
BR<nexp1>,<nexp2>

Parameters
<nexp1>
Thickness of the wide bars relative to the narrow bars.

24 Fingerprint Command Reference

 <nexp2>
Thickness of the narrow bars relative to the wide bars.
Default ratio is 3:1. Reset to default by executing a PRINTFEED.

Notes
This statement specifies the ratio between the wide and the narrow bars in a barcode.
To decide the width of the bars in number of dots, the ratio must be multiplied by the
BARMAG value.
For example:
The default BARRATIO is 3:1 and the default BARMAG is 2.
(3:1) × 2 = 6:2
That is, the wide bars are 6 dots wide and the narrow bars are 2 dots wide.
Note that certain barcodes, such as EAN/UPC codes, have a fixed ratio. In those
cases, BARRATIO is ignored. BARRATIO can be replaced by two parameters in the
BARSET statement.

Example
This example sets up a Code 39 barcode, selects a barfont for all directions and
enables printing of the barcode interpretation:
10 PRPOS 30,400
20 DIR 1
30 ALIGN 7
40 BARTYPE "CODE39"
50 BARRATIO 2,1
60 BARHEIGHT 120
70 BARMAG 3
80 BARFONT "Univers"ON
90 PRBAR "ABC"
100 PRINTFEED
A more compact method is illustrated by the BARSET example.

BARSET
Purpose
Specifies a barcode and sets additional parameters for complex barcodes.

Syntax
BARSET[#<ncon>,][<sexp>[,<nexp1>[,<nexp2>[,<nexp3>[,<nexp4>[,<nexp5>[,<nexp6>
[,<nexp7>[,<nexp8>[,<nexp9>[,<nexp10>[,<nexp11>]]]]]]]]]]]

Fingerprint Command Reference 25

Parameters
Each barcode symbology uses BARSET parameters differently. For more information
on how your selected symbology affects the syntax of this command, or for
programming examples, see Supported Symbologies.
#<ncon>
Start parameter which specifies which parameter in the syntax is the first optional
parameter (#1-#12). This way you may bypass some of the initial parameters (for
example, ratio and enlargement). Default is 1.
<sexp> (#1)
Barcode symbology. No default. Corresponds to BARTYPE.
<nexp1> (#2)
Thickness of the wide bars relative to the narrow bars. Default is 3. Corresponds to
BARRATIO.
<nexp2> (#3)
Thickness of the narrow bars relative to the wide bars. Default is 1. Corresponds to
BARRATIO.
<nexp3> (#4)
Enlargement. Default is 2. Corresponds to BARMAG.
<nexp4> (#5)
Height of the code in dots. Default is 100. Corresponds to BARHEIGHT.
<nexp5> (#6)
Barcode specific parameter. Default is 2.
<nexp6> (#7)
Barcode specific parameter. Default is 3.
<nexp7> (#8)
Barcode specific parameter. Default is 1.
<nexp8> (#9)
Barcode specific parameter. Default is 0.
<nexp9> (#10)
Barcode specific parameter. Default is 0.
<nexp10> (#11)
Barcode specific parameter. Default is 0.
<nexp11> (#12)
Barcode specific parameter. Default is 0.

Notes
This statement can replace the statements BARHEIGHT, BARRATIO, BARTYPE, and
BARMAG. Although primarily intended for 2-dimensional and composite barcodes,
BARSET can be used for any type of barcode if irrelevant parameters are left out (for
example, <nexp5> to <nexp11>).

26 Fingerprint Command Reference

Example
This example shows how to use a BARSET statement to print a Datamatrix barcode:
10 BARSET "DATAMATRIX",3,1,4,1,1
20 PB "This is a long string in Datamatrix format"
30 PF
This example shows how to use a BARSET statement to specify a Code 39 barcode:
10 PRPOS 30,400
20 DIR 1
30 ALIGN 7
40 BARSET "CODE39",2,1,3,120
50 BARFONT "Univers",10,8,5,1,1 ON
60 PRBAR "ABC"
70 PRINTFEED

BARTYPE
Purpose
Specifies the barcode symbology to use. This command can be abbreviated as BT.

Syntax
BARTYPE<sexp>
or
BT<sexp>

Parameters
<sexp>
Specifies the barcode symbology to use. Must be a valid barcode name. There is no
default value. For a list of valid barcode names, see Supported Symbologies.

Notes
The selected barcode type must exist in the printer memory and must be entered as a
string expression. BARTYPE can be replaced by a parameter in the BARSET statement.

Example
This example sets up a Code 39 barcode, selects a barfont for all directions, and
enables printing of the barcode interpretation:
10 PRPOS 30,400
20 DIR 1
30 ALIGN 7
40 BARTYPE "CODE39"
50 BARRATIO 2,1
60 BARHEIGHT 120
70 BARMAG 3

Fingerprint Command Reference 27

 80 BARFONT "Univers" ON
90 PRBAR "ABC"
100 PRINTFEED
RUN
A more compact method is illustrated by the BARSET example.

BATTERY$
This command is supported only by printers with a battery.

Purpose
Returns the voltage level, status, and charging status of the battery.

Syntax
BATTERY$(<nexp>)

Parameters
<nexp>
Specifies the parameter to return. Must be one of the following:

Value Description

0 (Default) Returns the current battery voltage.

1 Returns the current battery status: "battery depleted", "battery low", "battery
good", or "battery full". For definitions of these battery parameters, see the
documentation for your printer or battery.
2 Returns the current battery charging status: "not charging", "charging com-
plete", "charging in progress" or "charging error".

Notes
A hardware limitation causes the printer to return "battery not installed" if
BATTERY$(1) is issued while the printer is printing. This message is returned even if
the printer is equipped with a battery and connected to an external power supply.

Example
This example sets the low battery threshold value to 12.5 V and returns the current
battery status:
10 SETUP "BATTERY,LOW BATTERY,12.5"
20 PRINT BATTERY$(1)
RUN

28 Fingerprint Command Reference

BEEP
Purpose
Orders the printer to emit a beep.

Syntax
BEEP

Notes
This statement makes the printer emit a beep of ~800 Hz for 1/4 of a second. If a
different frequency and/or duration is desired, use a SOUND statement instead.

Example
In this example, the printer beeps when an error occurs:
10 ON ERROR GOTO 1000
.....
.....
.....
1000 BEEP
1010 RESUME NEXT

BREAK
Purpose
Specifies a break interrupt character separately for the keyboard and serial
communication channels.

Syntax
BREAK<nexp1>,<nexp2>

Parameters
<nexp1>
0: "console:"
1: "uart1:"
6: "usb1:" (Supported when the virtual COM port is enabled)
<nexp2>
Decimal ASCII value for the break interrupt character. The default value for PM series
printers is ASCII 136 (Shift+C). The default value for PC series printers is ASCII 8 (Back
key).

Fingerprint Command Reference 29

Notes
The execution of a program can be interrupted using a method specified by the
BREAK statement.

The BREAK statement allows you to specify other ways of interrupting the execution,
such as by pressing another combination of keys on the printer keyboard or
transmitting another ASCII character from the host.

A specified break interrupt character is saved in the temporary memory until the
printer is restarted or using the REBOOT command, which may be confusing when
switching between programs. To change a break interrupt character, specify a new
one for the same device using a BREAK statement, or to remove it from memory use a
BREAK OFF statement.

The use of break interrupt is enabled or disabled separately for each device by BREAK
ON or BREAK OFF statements. By default, break interrupt on the "console:" is enabled,
and break interrupt on any of the communication channels is disabled.

To prevent an erroneous program from running in an unbreakable loop, Honeywell

strongly recommends that you include some facility for issuing a break interrupt from
the host computer in startup (autoexec) files.

Examples
In this example, the ASCII character 13 decimal (Enter key) is selected and enabled as
BREAK character on the console:
10 BREAK 0,13
20 BREAK 0 ON
30 GOTO 30
Reset BREAK to default by turning the printer off and on.

BREAK ON/OFF
Purpose
Enables or disables break interrupt separately for the keyboard and serial
communication channels.

Syntax
BREAK<nexp>ON|OFF.

Parameters
<nexp>
0: "console:"
1: "uart1:"
6: "usb1:" (Supported when the virtual COM port is enabled)
ON|OFF
Enable or disable the break function.

30 Fingerprint Command Reference

Notes
The use of the break interrupt specified by a BREAK statement can be enabled or
disabled separately for each serial communication channel, or for the printer
keyboard by BREAK ON or BREAK OFF statements.

By default, break interrupt is enabled from the keyboard and disabled from all
communication channels. BREAK OFF deletes any existing break interrupt character
stored in the printer temporary memory for the specified device.

Example
In this example, the ASCII character 127 decimal is selected and enabled as BREAK
character on the communication channel "console:". At the same time, BREAK from
the printer keyboard is disabled.
10 BREAK 1,127
20 BREAK 0 ON
.....
.....
.....

BUSY
Purpose
Orders a busy signal, for example XOFF, CTS/RTS, or PE, to be transmitted from the
printer on the specified communication channel.

Syntax
BUSY[<nexp>]

Parameters
<nexp>
(Optional) Specifies the channel as:
1: "uart1:"
2: "uart2:"
3: "uart3:"
4: "centronics:"
6: "usb1:" (Supported when virtual COM port is enabled)
7: "uart4:"
8: "uart5:"

Notes
A communication protocol usually contains some "busy" signal, which tells the host
computer that the printer is unable to receive data.

Use the BUSY statement to order a busy signal to be transmitted on the specified
communication channel. If no channel is specified, the signal is transmitted on the
standard OUT communication channel. For more information, see SETSTDIO.

Fingerprint Command Reference 31

 To allow the printer to receive more data, use a READY statement.

For the optional "centronics:" communication channel, BUSY/READY control the PE

(paper end) signal on pin 12 according to an error-trapping routine (BUSY = PE high).

Example
This example prevents the printer from receiving more data on "uart1:" during the
process of printing a label:
10 FONT "Univers"
20 PRTXT "HELLO!"
30 BUSY1
40 PRINTFEED
50 READY1
RUN

CHDIR
Purpose
Changes to the specified directory.

Syntax
CHDIR<scon>

Parameters
<scon>
Specifies the current directory (see DEVICES). Default is "/c".

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR(43) to 1 before running
this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

By default, the printer permanent memory ("/c" ) is the current directory. The current
directory is used if the Fingerprint command does not specify a directory (such as
FILES). This implies that to access other directories (such as "d:", "tmp:", or "/rom"),
you must include such a reference in your instructions (such as FILES "/rom".)

Example
In this example, the current directory is changed to "d:", all files in "d:" are listed, and
finally the current directory is changed back to "/c". This example is included to
illustrate the principles of changing the current directory. It is more efficient to use
FILES "d:" to read its contents.
10 CHDIR"d:"
20 FILES
30 CHDIR"/c"
RUN

32 Fingerprint Command Reference

CHECKSUM
Purpose
Calculates the checksum of a range of program lines in connection with the transfer
of programs.

Syntax
CHECKSUM(<nexp1>,<nexp2>)

Parameters
<nexp1>
Number of the first line in a range of program lines.
<nexp2>
Number of the last line in a range of program lines.

Notes
The checksum is calculated from parts of the internal code using an advanced
algorithm. Honeywell recommends that you let the printer calculate the checksum
before the transfer of a program. After the transfer is completed, let the receiving
printer do the same calculation and compare the checksums.

Example
In this example, the checksum is calculated for all program lines between line 10 and
line 2000 in the program "DEMO.PRG".
NEW
LOAD "DEMO.PRG"
PRINT CHECKSUM(10,2000)
This results in:
60095

CHR$
Purpose
Returns the character represented by a decimal ASCII code.

Syntax
CHR$(<nexp>)

Parameters
<nexp>
Decimal ASCII code to be converted to a readable character.

Fingerprint Command Reference 33

Notes
This function is useful for entering characters that cannot be produced from the host
keyboard, such as non-printable characters ASCII 0 to ASCII 31 decimal. Only integers
between 0 and 255 are allowed. Values less than 0 or larger than 255 result in an
error 41, "Parameter out of range."

Example
In this example, the decimal ASCII code for "A" is 65 and for "B" is 66.
10 A$ = CHR$(65)
20 B$ = CHR$(40+26)
30 PRINT A$
40 PRINT B$
RUN
This results in:
A
B

CLEANFEED
Purpose
Runs the printer feed mechanism.

Syntax
CLEANFEED<nexp>.

Parameters
<nexp>
Feed length expressed as a positive or negative number of dots.

Notes
The CLEANFEED statement activates the stepper motor that drives the printer’s
platen roller (the rubber roller beneath the printhead). For thermal transfer printers, it
may also drive the ribbon mechanism. The motor runs regardless of possible error
conditions, such as if the printhead is lifted, or if there is no ribbon or media supply
left. Thus, the CLEANFEED statement is suitable for cleaning and for the loading of
transfer ribbon.

A positive CLEANFEED value makes the stepper motor rotate the rollers forward, such
as when feeding out a label.

A negative CLEANFEED value makes the stepper motor rotate the rollers backwards,
such as when pulling back a label.

Executing a CLEANFEED, as opposed to TESTFEED, does not affect the adjustment of

34 Fingerprint Command Reference

 the label stop sensor or black mark sensor, regardless of what type of media or other
object passes the sensor.

Note that CLEANFEED, as opposed to FORMFEED, must always specify the feed
length.

Example
This example pulls a cleaning card back and forth under the printhead three times. To
set this up, three 1200-dot positive CLEANFEEDs and three 1200-dot negative
CLEANFEEDs are performed:
10 FOR A%=1 TO 3
20 CLEANFEED 1200
30 CLEANFEED -1200
40 NEXT
RUN

CLEAR
Purpose
Clears strings, variables, and arrays in order to free memory space.

Syntax
CLEAR

Notes
The CLEAR statement empties all strings, sets all variables to zero, and resets all
arrays to their default values, making more free memory space available.

Example
In this example, the CLEAR statement empties the strings to free up memory:
10 A$ = "ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ"
20 B$ = "abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz"
30 FOR I%=0 TO 3:FOR J%=0 TO 3:FOR K%=0 TO 20
40 C$(I%,J%)=C$(I%,J%)+A$
50 NEXT K%:NEXT J%:NEXT I%
60 PRINT "String A before: ";A$
70 PRINT "String B before: ";B$
80 PRINT "Free memory before: ";FRE(1)
90 CLEAR
100 PRINT "String A after: ";A$
110 PRINT "String B after: ";B$
120 PRINT "Free memory after: ";FRE(1)
RUN
This results in:
String A before: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
String B before: abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz

Fingerprint Command Reference 35

 Free memory before: 1867368
String A after:
String B after:
Free memory after: 1876200
Ok

CLIP
Purpose
Enables or disables the printing of partial fields.

Syntax
CLIP [[BARCODE [HEIGHT|INFORMATION|X|Y]]|TEXTBOX|X ][ON|OFF]

Parameters
BARCODE
Toggles between partial barcode fields enable/disable.
HEIGHT
Clips the height of the bar so the barcode will fit inside the print window. A one-
dimensional barcode may still be readable. Only used with the BARCODE parameter.
INFORMATION
Clips the barcode lengthwise, so some bars will be missing, making the barcode
unreadable. Only used with the BARCODE parameter.
X
Clips the part of the barcode that is outside the X-dimension of the print window. Only
used with the BARCODE parameter.
Y
Clips the part of the barcode that is outside the Y-dimension of the print window. Only
used with the BARCODE parameter.
TEXTBOX|X
Toggles between partial text fields enable/disable.
ON|OFF
Enables or disables use of partial text, image, line, and box fields.

Notes
"Partial fields" means that the firmware accepts and prints text, barcode, image, lines,
and box fields even if they extend outside the print window as specified by the printer
setup with regard to X-Start, Width, and Length.

Negative PRPOS values are allowed. However, all parts of the fields outside the print
window are excluded from the printout and the field is clipped at the borders of the
print window.
There are two main cases:

36 Fingerprint Command Reference

 l CLIP BARCODE [HEIGHT|INFORMATION|X|Y] is used for barcode fields only. Note
that some barcodes, like Maxicode, consist of images and should in this context be
regarded as image fields.
l CLIP TEXTBOX ON|OFF or CLIP X ON|OFF is used only for the PRBOX command.
l CLIP ON|OFF is only used for text, image, line, and box fields. When the use of par-
tial fields is disabled, error 1003 ("Field out of label") results if any field extends out-
side the print window. Note the difference between the physical size of the label and
the size of the print window specified by the printer setup, which determines where
the fields will be clipped.

Example
In this example, only the last part of the text will be printed:
10 CLIP ON
20 PRPOS -100,30
30 PRTXT "INTERMEC PRINTER"
40 PRINTFEED
RUN

CLL
Purpose
Partially or completely clears the print image buffer.

Syntax
CLL [<nexp>]

Parameters
<nexp>
Specifies the field from which the print image buffer should be cleared. If no value for
<nexp> is specified, the entire print image buffer is cleared.

Notes
The print image buffer stores the printable image after processing while awaiting the
printing to be executed. The buffer can be cleared, partially or completely, by the use
of a CLL statement. Note that there must be no changes in the layout between the
PRINTFEED and the CLL statements, or the layout will be lost. Also note that partial
clearing always starts from the end, which means that the fields which are executed
last are cleared first.
l CLL<nexp> partially clears the buffer from a specified field to the end of the pro-
gram. The field is specified by a FIELDNO function. Partial clearing is useful in con-
nection with print repetition. To avoid superfluous reprocessing, one or several
fields can be erased from the buffer and be replaced by other information, while the
remaining parts of the label are kept in the buffer.

Fingerprint Command Reference 37

 l CLL (without any field number) clears the buffer completely. When certain error con-
ditions have occurred, it is useful to be able to clear the print image buffer without
having to print a faulty label. Should the error be attended to, without the image buf-
fer being cleared, there is a risk that the correct image will be printed on top of the
erroneous one on the same label. When you are working with more complicated pro-
grams in which all implications may be difficult to grasp, Honeywell recommends
that you include a CLL statement in your error-handling subroutines.

Examples
This example demonstrates partial clearing. Two labels are printed, each with two
lines of text. After the first label is printed, the last line is cleared from the print image
buffer and a new line is added in its place on the second label:
10 PRPOS 100,300
20 FONT "Univers"
30 PRTXT "HAPPY"
40 A%=FIELDNO
50 PRPOS 100,250
60 PRTXT "NEW YEAR!"
70 PRINTFEED
80 CLL A%
90 PRPOS 100,250
100 PRTXT "BIRTHDAY!"
110 PRINTFEED
RUN
This example demonstrates complete clearing. The print image buffer is completely
cleared if error 1030 ("Character missing in chosen font") occurs.
10 ON ERROR GOTO 1000
.....
.....
.....
1000 IF ERR=1030 GOSUB 1100
1010 RESUME NEXT
.....
....
1100 CLL
1110 PRINT "CHARACTER MISSING"
1120 RETURN

CLOSE
Purpose
Closes one or several files and/or devices.

Syntax
CLOSE[[#] <nexp> [, [#] <nexp>...]]

38 Fingerprint Command Reference

Parameters
#
(Optional) Indicates that whatever follows is a number.
<nexp>
Number assigned to a file or device when it is opened using the OPEN command.

Notes
This statement is the opposite of OPEN. Only files or devices which already have been
open using the OPEN command, they can be closed using the CLOSE command.

A CLOSE statement for a file or device opened for sequential output indicates that the
data in the buffer will be written to the indicated file/device automatically before the
channel is closed.

You must CLOSE the file or it will not be saved if the printer is turned off.

When a file opened for random access is closed, all its FIELD definitions will be lost.

END, NEW, and RUN also close all open files and devices.

Examples
This statement closes all open files and devices:
200 CLOSE
A number of files or devices (1 through 4 in this example) can be closed
simultaneously using any of the following types of statement:
200 CLOSE 1,2,3,4
or
200 CLOSE #1,#2,#3,#4
or
200 CLOSE 1,2,#3,4

COM ERROR ON/OFF

Purpose
Enables or disables error handling on the specified communication channel.

Syntax
COM ERROR<nexp>ON|OFF

Parameters
<nexp>
One of the following communication channels:

Fingerprint Command Reference 39

 1: "uart1:"
2: "uart2:"
3: "uart3:"
4: "centronics:"
7: "uart4:"
8: "uart5:"
Default is COM ERROR OFF on all channels.

Notes
This function is closely related to COMSET, ON COMSET GOSUB, COMSET ON,
COMSET OFF, COMSTAT, and COMBUF$. Each character received is checked for the
following errors:
l Received break
l Framing error
l Parity error
l Overrun error
Note: If any of these errors occur and COM ERROR is ON for the channel in question,
reception is interrupted. This condition can be read by means of a COMSTAT function,
but you cannot read exactly what type of error has occurred. COM ERROR OFF
disables this type of error handling for the specified channel.

Example
In this example, a message appears on the printer's screen if reception is interrupted
by any of the four specified COMSET conditions:
10 COM ERROR 1 ON
20 A$="Max. number of char. received"
30 B$="End char. received"
40 C$="Attn. string received"
50 D$="Communication error"
60 COMSET 1, "A",CHR$(90),"#","BREAK",20
70 ON COMSET 1 GOSUB 1000
80 COMSET 1 ON
90 IF QDATA$="" THEN GOTO 90
100 END
1000 QDATA$=COMBUF$(1)
1010 IF COMSTAT(1) AND 2 THEN PRINT A$
1020 IF COMSTAT(1) AND 4 THEN PRINT B$
1030 IF COMSTAT(1) AND 8 THEN PRINT C$
1040 IF COMSTAT(1) AND 32 THEN PRINT D$
1050 PRINT QDATA$:RETURN

40 Fingerprint Command Reference

COMBUF$
Purpose
Reads the data in the buffer of the communication channel specified by a COMSET
statement.

Syntax
COMBUF$(<nexp>)

Parameters
<nexp>
Describes one of the following communication channels:
1: "uart1:"
2: "uart2:"
3: "uart3:"
4: "centronics:
5: "net1:"
6: "usb1:"
7: "uart4:"
8: "uart5:"
9: "usbhost:"
10: "bluetooth:"
11: "ftp1:"
12: "http1:"
13: "lpr1:"

Notes
This function is closely related to COMSET, ON COMSET GOSUB, COMSET ON,
COMSET OFF,COM ERROR ON/OFF, and COMSTAT.

With COMBUF$, the buffer can be read and its content used in your program. When
the communication has been interrupted by "end character", "attention string", or
"max. no. of char." (see COMSET), you may use an ON COMSET GOSUB subroutine
and assign the data from the buffer to a variable as illustrated in the example below.

COMBUF$ filters out any incoming ASCII 00 decimal characters (NUL) by default.
Filtering can be enabled/disabled using SYSVAR(44).

Fingerprint Command Reference 41

Example
In this example, the data from the buffer is assigned to the string variable A$ and
printed on the screen:
1 REM Exit program with #STOP&
10 COMSET1,"#","&","ZYX","=",50
20 ON COMSET 1 GOSUB 2000
30 COMSET 1 ON
40 IF A$ <> "STOP" THEN GOTO 40
50 COMSET 1 OFF
.....
.....
1000 END
2000 A$= COMBUF$(1)
2010 PRINT A$
2020 COMSET 1 ON
2030 RETURN

COMSET
Purpose
Sets the parameters for background reception of data to the buffer of a specified
communication channel (see COMBUF$).

Syntax
COMSET<nexp1>,<sexp1>,<sexp2>,<sexp3>,<sexp4>,<nexp2>

Parameters
<nexp1>
Describes one of the following communication channels:
1: "uart1:"

2: "uart2:"

3: "uart3:"

4: "centronics:"

5: "net1:"

6: "usb1:"

7: "uart4:"

42 Fingerprint Command Reference

 8: "uart5:"

9: "usbhost:"

10: "bluetooth:"

11: "ftp1:"

12: "http1:"

13: "lpr1:"
<sexp1>
Specifies the start of the message string. Maximum 12 characters.
<sexp2>
Specifies the end of the message string. Maximum 12 characters.
<sexp3>
Specifies characters to be ignored. Maximum 42 characters.
<sexp4>
Specifies the attention string. Maximum 12 characters.
<nexp2>
Specifies the maximum number of characters to be received. Enter a value > or = 1. If
<nexp2> = 0, the first character is lost.

Notes
Data can be received by a buffer on each of the communication channels without
interfering with the running of the current program. At an appropriate moment, the
program can fetch the data in the buffer and use them according to your instructions.
Such background reception has priority over any ON KEY GOSUB statement.

Related instructions are COMSTAT, ON COMSET GOSUB, COMSET ON, COMSET OFF,
COM ERROR ON/OFF, and COMBUF$. The communication channels are explained in
connection with the DEVICES statement.

The start and end strings are character sequences which tell the printer when to start
or stop receiving data. Each string can be up to 12 characters and may be " " (ASCII
character 32).

It is possible to make the printer ignore certain characters. Such characters are
specified in a string of up to 42 characters, where the order of the individual
characters does not matter, and may be " ". The attention string (maximum 12
characters) interrupts reception and may be " ".

The length of the COMSET strings are checked before they are copied into the
internal structure. If any of these strings are too long, error 26 ("Parameter too large")
occurs.

When the printer receives the specified maximum number of characters without
previously encountering any end string or attention string, the transmission is
interrupted. The maximum number of characters also decides how much of the
memory is allocated to the buffer.

Fingerprint Command Reference 43

 The reception of data to the buffer can be interrupted by four conditions:
l If an end string is encountered.
l If an attention string is encountered.
l If the maximum number of characters is received.
l If error-handling is enabled for the communication channel in question (see COM
ERROR ON/OFF) and a communication error occurs.
This condition can be checked by a COMSTAT function. Any interruption will have a
similar effect as a COMSET OFF statement (interrupting reception), but the buffer will
not be emptied and can still be read by a COMBUF$ function. After reception is
interrupted, an ON COMSET GOSUB statement can be issued to control what
happens next. COMSET does not support auto-hunting (see SETSTDIO).

Example
This example shows how to open "uart1:" for background communication.
Any record starting with the character # and ending with the character & will be
received. The characters X, Y and Z are ignored. The character = stops reception. A
maximum of 50 characters are allowed.
1 REM Exit program with #STOP&
10 COMSET1,"#","&","ZYX","=",50
20 ON COMSET 1 GOSUB 2000
30 COMSET 1 ON
40 IF A$ <> "STOP" THEN GOTO 40
50 COMSET 1 OFF
.....
.....
1000 END
2000 A$= COMBUF$(1)
2010 PRINT A$
2020 COMSET 1 ON
2030 RETURN

COMSET OFF
Purpose
Turns off background data reception and empties the buffer of the specified
communication channel.

Syntax
COMSET<nexp>OFF

Parameters
<nexp>
Describes one of the following communication channels:
1: "uart1:"

44 Fingerprint Command Reference

 2: "uart2:"
3: "uart3:"
4: "centronics:"
5: "net1:"
6: "usb1:"
7: "uart4:"
8: "uart5:"
9: "usbhost:"
10: "bluetooth:"
11: "ftp1:"
12: "http1:"
13: "lpr1:"

Notes
This statement is closely related to COMSET, ON COMSET GOSUB, COMSTAT,
COMSET ON, COM ERROR ON/OFF, and COMBUF$. The COMSET OFF statement
closes the reception and empties the buffer of the specified communication channel.

Example
In this example, the COMSET OFF statement closes "uart1:" for background reception
and empties the buffer:
1 REM Exit program with #STOP&
10 COMSET1,"#","&","ZYX","=",50
20 ON COMSET 1 GOSUB 2000
30 COMSET 1 ON
40 IF A$ <> "STOP" THEN GOTO 40
50 COMSET 1 OFF
.....
.....
1000 END
2000 A$= COMBUF$(1)
2010 PRINT A$
2020 COMSET 1 ON
2030 RETURN

Fingerprint Command Reference 45

COMSET ON
Purpose
Empties the buffer and turns on background data reception on the specified
communication channel.

Syntax
COMSET<nexp>ON

Parameters
<nexp>
Describes one of the following communication channels:
1: "uart1:"
2: "uart2:"
3: "uart3:"
4: "centronics:"
5: "net1:"
6: "usb1:"
7: "uart4:"
8: "uart5:"
9: "usbhost:"
10: "bluetooth:"
11: "ftp1:"
12: "http1:"
13: "lpr1:"

Notes
This statement is closely related to COMSET, ON COMSET GOSUB, COMSTAT,
COMSET OFF, COM ERROR ON/OFF, and COMBUF$.

Use COMSET ON to open any of the communication channels for background data
reception with an empty buffer, provided the communication parameter for the
channel has already been set up by a COMSET statement.

When reception is interrupted by the reception of an end character, an attention

string or the maximum number of characters, issue a new COMSET ON to empty the
buffer and reopen reception.

46 Fingerprint Command Reference

Example
In this example, the COMSET ON statement on line 30 opens "uart1:" for background
reception. After the buffer has been read, it is emptied and the reception is reopened
by a new COMSET ON statement in the subroutine on line 2020:
1 REM Exit program with #STOP&
10 COMSET1,"#","&","ZYX","=",50
20 ON COMSET 1 GOSUB 2000
30 COMSET 1 ON
40 IF A$ <> "STOP" THEN GOTO 40
50 COMSET 1 OFF
.....
.....
1000 END
2000 A$= COMBUF$(1)
2010 PRINT A$
2020 COMSET 1 ON
2030 RETURN

COMSTAT
Purpose
Reads the status of a communication channel buffer.

Syntax
COMSTAT(<nexp>)

Parameters
<nexp>
Describes one of the following communication channels:
1: "uart1:"

2: "uart2:"

3: "uart3:"

4: "centronics:"

5: "net1:"

6: "usb1:" (Hardware handshake bit supported when virtual COM port is enabled)

7: "uart4:"

Fingerprint Command Reference 47

 8: "uart5:"

9: "usbhost:"

10: "bluetooth:"

11: "ftp1:"

12: "http1:"

13: "lpr1:"

Notes
This function is closely related to COMSET, ON COMSET GOSUB, COMSET ON,
COMSET OFF, COM ERROR ON/OFF, and COMBUF$. It allows you to find out if the
buffer is able to receive background data, or if not, what condition has caused the
interruption.

The buffer status is indicated by a numeric expression, which is the sum of the values
given by the following conditions:

Value Condition

0 or 1 Copy of hardware handshake bit. Not valid on "net1:" or

"usbhost:".
2 Interruption: Maximum characters received.
4 Interruption: End character received.
8 Interruption: Attention string received.
32 Interruption: Communication error. Not valid on "net1:" or
"usbhost:".

Example
In this example, a message appears on the screen when the reception is interrupted
by any of four specified COMSET conditions:
10 COM ERROR 1 ON
20 A$="Max. number of char. received"
30 B$="End char. received"
40 C$="Attn. string received"
50 D$="Communication error"
60 COMSET 1, "A",CHR$(90),"#","BREAK",20
70 ON COMSET 1 GOSUB 1000
80 COMSET 1 ON
90 IF QDATA$="" THEN GOTO 90

48 Fingerprint Command Reference

 100 END
1000 QDATA$=COMBUF$(1)
1010 IF COMSTAT(1) AND 2 THEN PRINT A$
1020 IF COMSTAT(1) AND 4 THEN PRINT B$
1030 IF COMSTAT(1) AND 8 THEN PRINT C$
1040 IF COMSTAT(1) AND 32 THEN PRINT D$
1050 PRINT QDATA$
1060 RETURN

CONT
Purpose
Resumes execution of a program that has been interrupted by means of a STOP,
BREAK, or DBBREAK statement.

Syntax
CONT

Notes
When you use a CONT statement to resume program execution after a STOP,
BREAK, or DBBREAK, execution continues at the point where the break occurred
with the STDIO settings restored.

CONT is usually used in conjunction with DBBREAK or STOP for debugging. When
execution is stopped, you can examine or change the values of variables using
direct mode statements, and then use CONT to resume execution. CONT is invalid
if the program has been edited during the break.

It is also possible to resume execution at a specified program line using a GOTO

statement in the immediate mode.

Example
10 A%=100
20 B%=50
30 IF A%=B% THEN GOTO QQQ ELSE STOP
40 GOTO 30
50 QQQ:PRINT "Equal"
RUN
PRINT A%
100
Ok
PRINT B%
50
Ok

Fingerprint Command Reference 49

 B%=100
Ok
CONT
Equal
Ok

COPY
Purpose
Copies files.

Syntax
COPY<sexp1>[,<sexp2>]

Parameters
<sexp1>
Name and optional directory of the original file.
<sexp2>
(Optional) New name and/or directory for the copy.

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR(43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you
specify.

This statement allows you to copy a file to another name and/or directory as an
alternative to LOADing the file in question and then SAVEing it.

If no directory is specified for the original and/or copy, the current directory is
used by default. By default, the current directory is "/c", which is the printer
permanent memory. If the file is to be copied from or to another directory than the
current one, the file name must contain a directory reference. A file cannot be
copied to the same name in the same directory.

In addition to copying files to the printer permanent or temporary memory (or a

USB storage device), a file can also be copied to an output device such as the
printer's screen or a serial communication channel.

Copying a program to the standard OUT channel has the same effect as LOADing
and LISTing it.

Note that bitmap fonts and images are not files and therefore cannot be copied.

In the next examples, "/c" is the current directory.

Example 1
Copy a file from "d:" to the current directory without changing the file name:

50 Fingerprint Command Reference

 COPY "d:LABEL1.PRG"

Example 2
Copy a file from "d:" to the current directory and changing the file name:
COPY "d:FILELIST.PRG","COPYTEST.PRG"

Example 3
Copy a file from "/c" to a directory other than the current one without changing the
file name:
COPY "/c/FILELIST.PRG","d:FILELIST.PRG"

Example 4
Copy a file in the current directory to a new name within the same directory:
COPY "LABEL1.PRG","LABEL2.PRG"

COUNT&
Purpose
Creates a counter (Direct Protocol only).

Syntax
COUNT& <sexp1>,<nexp1>,<sexp2>

Parameters
<sexp1>
Specifies the type of counter parameter to be set:
START
Start value. Decides the first value to be printed:
If a single letter is entered (A to Z), the counter becomes an alpha counter. Default is A
for alpha counters.
If one or several digits are entered the counter is numeric. Numeric values can be
positive or negative. Negative values are indicated by a leading minus sign. Default is
1 for numeric counters.
WIDTH
Minimum number of digits to be printed. Used only in numeric counters. If the
counter value contains a lesser number of digits, leading zero (0) characters are
added until the specified number of digits is obtained. If the number of digits in the
counter value is equal to or larger than specified in the width parameter, the value is
printed in its entirety. Default is 1 (no leading zeros).

Fingerprint Command Reference 51

 COPY
Determines how many copies (of labels, graphics, or other components) will be
printed before the counter is updated according to the INC parameter. Default is 1.
INC
Sets the value by which the counter should be incremented or decremented when it is
updated. In case of decrementation, the value should contain a leading minus sign.
Default is 1.
STOP
Sets the value after which the counter should begin again at the value specified by
RESTART.
If a single letter is entered (A to Z), the counter becomes an alpha counter, and if one
or several digits are entered the counter is numeric. When a counter is decremented, a
stop value less than the start value must be given, since the default stop value will
never be reached otherwise. Default is 2,147,483,647 (numeric) or Z (alpha).
RESTART
Sets the value at which the counter begins again after exceeding the STOP value. If a
single letter is entered (A to Z), the counter becomes an alpha counter, and if one or
several digits are entered the counter is numeric. Default is 1 (numeric) or A (alpha).
<nexp1>
Specifies the counter reference number (integers only).
<sexp2>
Parameter value.

Notes
This instruction can only be used in the Direct Protocol.

The counters can be used in text and barcode fields. The counters are global, which
means that they are not connected to any special label or layout, but are updated at
every execution of PRINTFEED statements where the counter in question is used.

Counters are designated using positive integers. When used for printing, they are
referred to by "CNT<ncon>$" variables, where <ncon> is the number of the counter as
specified by COUNT&, for example CNT5$. A counter variable without a matching
counter is regarded as a common string variable.

The value of the start, stop, and restart parameters decide the type of counter (alpha
or numeric). If different types of counters are specified in these parameters, the last
entered parameter decides the type. Alpha counters count A to Z. Numeric counters
use numbers with no practical limit.

Counters are not saved in the printer memory, but are recreated after each power up.
Therefore, you may need to save the COUNT& statements as a file in the host.

Example
This example creates a counter that starts at 100 and is updated by a value of 50 after
every second label until the value 1000 is reached. Then the counter starts again at
the value 200. All values are expressed as 4-digit numbers with leading zeros.
COUNT& "START",1,"100"

52 Fingerprint Command Reference

 COUNT& "WIDTH",1,"4"
COUNT& "COPY",1,"2"
COUNT& "INC",1,"50"
COUNT& "STOP",1,"1000"
COUNT& "RESTART",1,"200"

CSUM
Purpose
Calculates the checksum of an array of strings.

Syntax
CSUM<ncon>,<svar>,<nvar>

Parameters
<ncon>
Specifies the type of checksum calculation:
1: Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC). XOR in each character in each string array
[0][0] xor array[0][1] ... array[n][n]
2: Diagonal Redundancy Check (DRC). Right rotation, then XOR on each character in
each string rot(array[0][0] xor array[0][1]
3: Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC). Strip string of DLE (0x10) before doing the
LRC
<svar>
If <ncon> = 1 or 2: The array of strings of which the checksum is to be calculated.
If <ncon> = 3: Checksum string.
<nvar>
The variable in which the result is presented.

Notes
These types of checksum calculations can only be used for string arrays, not for
numeric arrays. In case of CSUM 3,<svar>,<nvar>, the resulting variable becomes the in
data for next CSUM calculation unless the variable is reset.

Example
This example calculates the DRC checksum of an array of strings:
10 ARRAY$(0)="ALPHA"
20 ARRAY$(1)="BETA"
30 ARRAY$(2)="GAMMA"
40 ARRAY$(3)="DELTA"

Fingerprint Command Reference 53

 50 CSUM 2,ARRAY$,B%
60 PRINT B% :REM DRC CHECKSUM
RUN
This results in:
252

CURDIR$
Purpose
Returns the current directory as the printer stores it.

Syntax
CURDIR$

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR(43) to 1 before running
this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you inquire about.

Example
CHDIR "/c/DIR1/DIR2"
PRINT CURDIR$
This results in:
/c/DIR1/DIR2

CUT
Purpose
Activates the label cutter if a cutter is installed.
You must first set the CUT ON/OFF command to OFF before you can use this
command. Sending the CUT OFF command allows you to cut labels manually. If your
printer is not set to cut manually, labels are cut immediately after they are printed.

Syntax
CUT

Notes
This statement only works with printers fitted with a cutter, which cuts non-adhesive
paper strip or through the liner between self-adhesive labels. You must use a
PRINTFEED command before using the CUT statement.

54 Fingerprint Command Reference

Example
This program orders the printer to print text and then cut off the media:
10 PRPOS 250,250
20 DIR 1
30 ALIGN 4
40 FONT "Univers"
50 PRTXT "Hello everybody!"
60 PRINTFEED
70 CUT
RUN

CUT ON/OFF
Purpose
Enables or disables automatic cutting after PRINTFEED execution. Optionally, CUT
ON/OFF can adjust the media feed before and after the cutting.

Syntax
CUT [<nexp>] ON|CUT OFF

Parameters
<nexp>
(Optional) Sets the length of media to be fed out before cutting and pulled back
after cutting. Default is CUT OFF.

Notes
This statement makes it possible to enable or disable automatic execution of a
CUT operation directly after the execution of each PRINTFEED statement. This
statement only works with printers fitted with a cutter, which cuts non-adhesive
paper strip or through the liner between self-adhesive labels.

If any extra media feed in connection with the cutting operation is required, use
start adjust and stop adjust setup, or specify the desired length of media to be fed
out before the cutting is performed and pulled back afterwards in the CUT ON
statement.

The amount of media feed (<nexp>) is not automatically reset to 0 by a CUT OFF
statement. You must manually specify 0 to reset the media feed amount to 0 (for
example, CUT 0 ON:CUT OFF). However, restarting the printer resets this media
feed distance to 0.

Fingerprint Command Reference 55

Example
This example enables automatic cutting and orders the printer to print text and
feed out an extra amount of strip before cutting the media. The media is then
pulled back the same distance:
10 CUT 280 ON
20 PRPOS 250,250
30 DIR 1
40 ALIGN 4
50 FONT "Univers"
60 PRTXT "Hello everybody!"
70 PRINTFEED
RUN

DATE$
Purpose
Variable for setting or returning the current date.

Syntax 1
Setting the date:
DATE$=<sexp>

Parameters 1
<sexp>
Sets the current date by a 6-digit number specifying the year, month, and day in the
format YYMMDD.

Syntax 2
Returning the date:
<svar>=DATE$[(<sexp>)]

Parameters 2
<svar>
Returns the current date according to the printer’s calendar.
<sexp>
(Optional) Flag "F", indicating that the date should be returned as specified by
FORMAT DATE$.

56 Fingerprint Command Reference

Notes
This variable works best if a real-time clock circuit (RTC) is fitted on the printer CPU
board. Honeywell mobile printers do not have an RTC. The RTC has a battery backup
circuit and keeps record of the time if the power is turned off or lost.

If no RTC is installed, the internal clock is used. After startup, an error occurs when
trying to read the date or time before the internal clock has been manually set by
means of either a DATE$ or a TIME$ variable. If only the date is set, the internal clock
starts at 00:00:00 and if only the time is set, the internal clock starts at Jan 01, 1980.

After setting the internal clock, you can use the DATE$ and TIME$ variables the same
way as when an RTC is included, until a power off or REBOOT causes the date and
time values to be lost.
By default, date is always entered and returned in the format YYMMDD, where:
l YY = Last two digits of the year (for example, 2007 = 07).
l MM = Two digits representing the month. Range is 01 to 12.
l DD = Two digits representing the day. Range is 01 to 31.
Example: December 1, 2007 is entered as "071201".
The built-in calendar corrects incorrect values for the years 1980-2048 (for example,
the incorrect date 031232 is corrected to 040101). The format for how the printer
returns dates can be changed by means of FORMAT DATE$ and returned by
DATE$("F").

Example
This example sets and returns the date in two different formats:
10 DATE$ = "071201" : 'sets date

20 FORMAT DATE$ "DD/MM/YYYY" : 'sets date format

30 PRINT DATE$ : 'returns unformatted date

40 PRINT DATE$("F") : 'returns formatted date

RUN

This results in:

071201

01/12/2007

DATEADD$
Purpose
Returns a new date after a number of days have been added to or subtracted from the
current date or a specified date.

Fingerprint Command Reference 57

Syntax
DATEADD$([<sexp1>,]<nexp>[,<sexp2>])

Parameters
<sexp1>
Any date given according to the DATE$ format.
<nexp>
Number of days to be added to or subtracted from the current date, (or, optionally, the
date specified by <sexp1>).
<sexp2>
(Optional) One or two flags, "F" or "M":
"F" specifies that the date will be returned according to the format specified by
FORMAT DATE$.
"M" specifies the value given in <nexp> indicates months instead of days.

Notes
This variable works best if a real-time clock circuit (RTC) is fitted on the printer’s CPU
board. Honeywell mobile printers do not have an RTC.

The original date (<sexp1>) should be entered according to the syntax for the DATE$
variable, that is in the order YYMMDD, where:
l YY = Last two digits of the year (for example, 2007 = 07).
l MM = Two digits representing the month. Range is 01 to 12.
l DD = Two digits representing the day. Range is 01 to 31.
For example, December 1, 2007 is entered as "071201".
The built-in calendar corrects incorrect values for the years 1980-2048 (for example,
the incorrect date 031232 is corrected to 040101).
Specify the number of days to be added or subtracted as a positive or negative
numeric expression.
If no "F" flag is included in the DATEADD$ function, the result is returned according to
the DATE$ format.
"F" and "M" flags can be combined in the same instruction without any separating
character, that is, "FM" or "MF". No other characters are accepted.

Example 1
10 DATE$ = "071201"
20 A%=15
30 B%=-10
40 FORMAT DATE$ "DD/MM/YY"

58 Fingerprint Command Reference

 50 PRINT DATEADD$("071201",A%)
60 PRINT DATEADD$("071201",A%,"F")
70 PRINT DATEADD$("071201",B%,"F")
RUN
This results in:
071216
16/12/07
21/11/07

Example 2
10 DATE$="080131"
20 FORMAT DATE$ "YYYY/MM/DD"
30 ? DATEADD$(1,"F"),DATEADD$(1,"M"),DATEADD$(1,"FM")
RUN
This results in:
2008/02/01 080229 2008/02/29

Example 3
? DATEADD$("080131",1,"F"), DATEADD$("080131",2,"M"),DATEADD$("080131",3,"FM")
This results in:
2008/02/01 2008/03/31 2008/04/30

DATEDIFF
Purpose
Returns the difference between two dates as a number of days.

Syntax
DATEDIFF(<sexp1>,<sexp2>)

Parameters
<sexp1>
Specifies one of two dates (date 1).
<sexp2>
Specifies the other of two dates (date 2).

Fingerprint Command Reference 59

Notes
This variable works best if a real-time clock circuit (RTC) is fitted on the printer’s CPU
board. Honeywell mobile printers do not have an RTC.

To get the result as a positive numeric value, the two dates should be entered with the
earlier of the dates (date 1) first and the later of the dates (date 2) last. See the first
example below.

If the later date (date 2) is entered first, the resulting value will be negative, as seen in
the second example.
Both dates should be entered according to the syntax for the DATE$ variable, that is
in the order YYMMDD, where:
l YY = Last two digits of the year (for example, 2007 = 07).
l MM = Two digits representing the month. Range is 01 to 12.
l DD = Two digits representing the day. Range is 01 to 31.
For example, December 1, 2007 is entered as "071201".
The built-in calendar corrects incorrect values for the years 1980-2048 (for example,
the incorrect date 071232 is corrected to 080101).

Example 1
This example calculates the difference in days between October 1, 2007 and
November 30, 2007:
10 A%=DATEDIFF("071001","071130")
20 PRINT A%
RUN
This results in:
60

Example 2
This example demonstrates what happens if the later date is entered first:
10 A%=DATEDIFF("071130","071001")
20 PRINT A%
RUN
This results in:
-60

DBBREAK
Purpose
Adds or deletes a breakpoint for the Fingerprint debugger.

60 Fingerprint Command Reference

Syntax
DBBREAK<nexp>|<sexp>[ON|OFF]

Parameters
<nexp>
Line number where the debugger breaks, and serves as the name of the breakpoint.
<sexp>
Line label where the debugger breaks, and serves as the name of the breakpoint.

ON adds the specified breakpoint (default).

OFF deletes the specified breakpoint.

Notes
Program execution breaks at each program line specified as a breakpoint, and the
message "break in line nnn" is transmitted on the Debug STDOUT port. If a CONT
statement is issued, the execution continues at the next line. If RUN is issued, the
execution starts again from the first program line.

The line number or line label does not to have to exist when a breakpoint is added, but
if a nonexistent breakpoint is deleted an error 39 or 70 occurs.

There is no error given if a breakpoint is added more than once. When a breakpoint is
deleted, all breakpoints with the same name are deleted at the same time. There is
only one break for each line even if there is more than one breakpoint on that line.

When a NEW statement is issued, all breakpoints are deleted. If a breakpoint is set on
a line with a call to a FOR or WHILE loop, there is only one break on that line the first
time it is executed.

Related instructions are DBBREAK OFF, DBEND, DBSTDIO, DBSTEP, and STOP.

Example
10 PRINT "A"
20 PRINT "B"
30 PRINT "C"
DBBREAK 20 ON
RUN
This results in:
A
Break in line 20

DBBREAK OFF
Purpose
Deletes all breakpoints for the Fingerprint debugger.

Fingerprint Command Reference 61

Syntax
DBBREAK OFF

Notes
This statement is similar to DBBREAK<nexp>|<sexp>OFF but deletes all breakpoints
instead of just one breakpoint at the time.

Related instructions are DBBREAK, DBEND, DBSTDIO, and DBSTEP.

DBEND
Purpose
Terminates the Fingerprint debugger.

Syntax
DBEND

Notes
This statement terminates the Fingerprint debugger immediately and restores the
previous STDIO settings.

Related instructions are DBBREAK, DBBREAK OFF, DBSTDIO, and DBSTEP.

DBSTDIO
Purpose
Selects the standard IN/OUT channel for the Fingerprint debugger.

Syntax
DBSTDIO <nexp1>,<nexp2>[,<sexp1>,<sexp2>]
DBSTDIO [<nexp1>,<nexp2>,]<sexp1>,<sexp2>

Parameters
<nexp1>
Desired Debug STDIN channel:
0: "console:"
1: "uart1:" (default)
2: "uart2:"
3: "uart3:"
4: "centronics:"
5: "net1:"
6: "usb1:"
7: "uart4:"
8: "uart5:"

62 Fingerprint Command Reference

 9: "usbhost:"
10: "bluetooth:"
<nexp2>
Desired Debug STDOUT channel:
0: "console:"
1: "uart1:" (default)
2: "uart2:"
3: "uart3:"
5: "net1:"
6: "usb1:"
7: "uart4:"
8: "uart5:"
9: "usbhost:"
<sexp1>
Preamble (default: empty string)
<sexp2>
Postamble (default: empty string)

Notes
The maximum size of the preamble or postamble strings is 12 characters.

Related instructions are CONT, DBBREAK, DBBREAK OFF, DBEND, DBSTEP, and
STOP.

Example
This statement selects "uart2:" as Debug STDIO channel. Preamble is specified as "in"
and postamble as "out":
DBSTDIO 2,2,"in","out"

DBSTEP
Purpose
Specifies the interval between breaks for the Fingerprint debugger and executes the
program accordingly.

Syntax
DBSTEP<ncon>

Parameters
<ncon>
Number of lines to be executed before break. Default is 1 line.

Fingerprint Command Reference 63

Notes
If <ncon> is omitted, one line is executed, but if <ncon> = 0, nothing happens.

DBSTEP cannot be used in execution mode, which results in error 78. When DBSTEP
is used on the last line in a program, the line is executed but there is no break.

If DBSTEP is used in a program with a FOR or WHILE loop, there is only one break on
the line that calls for the FOR or WHILE loop the first time it is executed.

Related instructions are CONT, DBBREAK, DBBREAK OFF, DBEND, and DBSTDIO.

Example
10 PRINT "11"
20 PRINT "22"
30 PRINT "33"
40 PRINT "44"
50 PRINT "55"
60 PRINT "66"
70 PRINT "77"
80 PRINT "88"
90 PRINT "99"
DBSTEP 4
11
22
33
44
Break in line 50
Ok
DBSTEP
55
Break in line 60
Ok
DBSTEP 2
66
77
Break in line 80
CONT
88
99
Ok

DELETE
Purpose
Deletes one or several consecutive program lines from the printer working memory.

Syntax
DELETE<ncon1>[-<ncon2>]

64 Fingerprint Command Reference

Parameters
<ncon1>
Line, or the first line in a range of lines, to be deleted.
<ncon2>
(Optional) Last line in a range of program lines to be deleted.

Notes
This statement can only be used for editing the current program in the Immediate
mode and cannot be included as a part of the program execution.

Examples
DELETE 50 deletes line 50 from the program.
DELETE 50–100 deletes line 50 thru 100 from the program.
DELETE 50– deletes all lines from line 50 to the end of the program.
DELETE –50 deletes all lines from the start of the program to line 50.

DELETEPFSVAR
Purpose
Deletes variables saved at power failure.

Syntax
DELETEPFSVAR<sexp>

Parameters
<sexp>
Name of the variable to be deleted.

Notes
Related instructions are SETPFSVAR, GETPFSVAR, and LISTPFSVAR.

Examples
DELETEPFSVAR "QCPS%"
DELETEPFSVAR "QS$"

DEVICES
Purpose
Returns the names of all devices on the standard OUT channel.

Fingerprint Command Reference 65

Syntax
DEVICES

Notes
Most devices available to the user in Honeywell Fingerprint firmware will be listed
whether they are active or not. There are also a number of devices for internal use
only. The list below indicates if and how the device can be opened using the OPEN
command. If you try to OPEN a disconnected or uninstalled device, the message
"Error in file name" is printed to the standard OUT channel (see SETSTDIO). Note that
all names of devices are lowercase and most are appended by a colon (:).

Device Explanation Can be opened for

c: (= "/c/") The printer permanent read/write memory Input/Output/Random

(Flash SIMMs). It supports file systems with dir-
ectories, and retains its content when the
power is switched off. For backwards com-
patibility, "ram:" is also accepted.
d: (= "/d/") Depending on the device, d: can be an external Input/Output/Random
memory unit such as a USB storage device or
a partition of the permanent read/write
memory. It supports file systems with dir-
ectories, and retains its content when the
power is switched off.
centronics: The Centronics parallel port. Input
console: Printer screen and/or keyboard. The keyboard Input/Output
can be used for input only and the screen for
output only. External keyboards are not sup-
ported.
dll: Special applications only. -
finisher: The device controlling the finisher interface, Input/Output
where a device such as a cutter can be con-
nected.
ftp1: FTP printing port. Input
http1: HTTP printing port. Input/Output
lpr1: LPR printing port. Input
net1: Communication channel for the EasyLAN inter- Input/Output
face board.
par: Special applications only. -

66 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Device Explanation Can be opened for

rom: An alias for tmp:. Input

(="/rom/")
tmp: The printer temporary read/write memory Input/Output/Random
(SDRAM SIMMs). It will lose its content when
the power is turned off or at a power failure.
Valuable data that cannot be recreated should
be copied to "/c/". One advantage of using
"tmp:" instead of "/c" is that data can be written
to SDRAM faster than to the flash memory. To
speed up operation, the Honeywell Fingerprint
firmware (except program modules with
dynamic downloading) is copied from "/rom/"
to "tmp:" at startup and used from "tmp:".
uart1: Standard RS-232 port for serial com- Input/Output
munication.
uart2: Additional serial port on an optional interface Input/Output
board.
uart3: Additional serial port on an optional interface Input/Output
board.
uart4: Additional serial port on an optional interface Input/Output
board.
uart5: Additional serial port on an optional interface Input/Output
board.
usb1: USB device port. Input/Output
usbhost: USB host port. Input/Output

DIM
Purpose
Specifies the dimensions of an array.

Syntax
DIM<<nvar>|<svar>>(<nexp1>[,<nexp2>...])....
[,<<nvar>|<svar>>(<nexp1>[,<nexp2>...])]

Parameters
<nvar>|<svar>
Name of the array.

Fingerprint Command Reference 67

 <nexp1>
Maximum subscript value for the first dimension.
<nexp2-10>
(Optional) Maximum subscript values for the following dimensions (2 through 10).

Notes
An array is created by entering a variable followed by a number of subscripts
(maximum of 10) separated by commas. All subscripts are enclosed by parentheses
and each subscript represents a dimension. The first time an array is referred to, the
number of subscripts in the array variable determines its number of dimensions
regardless of line number. By default, the number of elements in each dimension is
restricted to four (numbered 0 to 3).

Note that 0 = 1st element, 1 = 2nd element, and so on. If more than 4 elements in any
dimension are desired, a DIM statement must be issued. For example, ARRAY$(1,2,3)
creates a three-dimensional array, where the dimensions each contain 4 elements (0
to 3) respectively. This corresponds to the statement DIM ARRAY$(3,3,3).

It is not possible to change the number of dimensions of an array that already has
been created during runtime, and error 57 ("Subscript out of range") occurs in this
case.

Considering the limited amount of printer memory and other practical reasons, be
careful not to make the arrays larger than necessary. A DIM statement can be used to
limit the amount of memory set aside for the array.

Example 1
This example creates an array containing three dimensions with 13 elements each:
100 DIM NAME$(12,12,12)

Example 2
In this example, two one-dimensional arrays are created on the same program line:
10 DIM PRODUCT$(15), PRICE%(12)
20 PRODUCT$(2)="PRINTER"
30 PRICE%(2)=1995
40 PRINT PRODUCT$(2);" $";PRICE%(2)
RUN

This results in:

PRINTER $1995

DIR
Purpose
Specifies the print direction.

68 Fingerprint Command Reference

Syntax
DIR<nexp>

Parameters
<nexp>
Print direction (1, 2, 3, or 4). Default is 1.

Notes
A change of print direction affects all printing statements (PRTXT, PRBAR, PRIMAGE,
PRBOX, PRDIAGONAL, or PRLINE) that are executed later in the program until a new
DIR statement or a PRINTFEED statement is executed. Use PRINTFEED to reset to
default values.

Print Direction for Text Fields

Fingerprint Command Reference 69

Print Direction for Barcode Fields

Print Direction for Images

70 Fingerprint Command Reference

Print Direction for Lines

Print Direction for Boxes and Diagonal Lines

Example 1
This example prints a label with one line of text and draws a line beneath the text:
10 PRPOS 30,300
20 DIR 1
30 ALIGN 4
40 FONT "Univers",18

Fingerprint Command Reference 71

 50 PRTXT "TEXT PRINTING"
60 PRPOS 30,280
70 PRLINE 555,10
80 PRINTFEED
RUN

Example 2
This example is similar but prints the same information vertically, requiring new
positioning to avoid Error 1003, "Field out of label."
10 PRPOS 300,30
20 DIR 4
30 ALIGN 4
40 FONT "Univers",18
50 PRTXT "TEXT PRINTING"
60 PRPOS 320,30
70 PRLINE 555,10
80 PRINTFEED
RUN

DIRNAME$
Purpose
Returns the names of the directories stored in the specified part of the printer
memory.

Syntax
DIRNAME$[(<sexp>)]

Parameters
<sexp>
The name of the memory device from which the first directory name will be listed.

Notes
In <sexp>, parts of directory names and wildcards (*) are allowed. If <sexp> is omitted,
the next directory name in the same memory device is listed.

DIRNAME$ can be repeated. When there are no directories left to list, the output
string is empty. For more information, see FILENAME$.

Example
10 PRINT "Subdirectories in /c"
20 qTemp$ = DIRNAME$("/c/*")
30 WHILE LEN (qTemp$) > 0
40 PRINT qTemp$
50 qTemp$ = DIRNAME$
60 WEND

72 Fingerprint Command Reference

DISPLAY IMAGE
Purpose
Specifies a custom image that appears on the printer's screen when a specific error
occurs.

Syntax
DISPLAY IMAGE <nexp>

Parameters
<nexp>
Image number, which corresponds to an image file in the printer memory. For more
information, see the Notes. These numbers are preassigned to existing images:
0: Remove the graphic on the display.
1: Generic error.
2: Field out of label.
3: Out of paper.
4: Head lifted.
5: Out of transfer ribbon.
6: Next label not found.
7: Printhead too hot.
8: Testfeed not done.
9: Cutter device not found, or cutter not responding.
39: Ignored unless user downloaded (due to legacy).
40: Maintenance.
41: IP link error.
42: Press feed not done.
43: Label not taken.
If the image number specified for DISPLAY IMAGE is not in the correct location, an
"Image not found" error is raised. For more information on the image and image
number, see the Notes.

Notes
You can override the default error images by using your own custom images and
specifying a default image number. For compatibility with future versions of
Fingerprint, Honeywell recommends that you use image numbers starting with 100.
Image numbers used in legacy versions of Fingerprint are supported, but those
images are no longer installed by default. Recommended values for n are from 100 to
1024.

The graphic for your custom image must be in PNG format and stored in the
/home/user/display/ directory. The filename must match the image number you want
to use. The file name must also be in the form of "image_x.png" where x is the number
used as <nexp>. For example if you had a file named display image_124.png, you
could send the command DISPLAY IMAGE 124.

Fingerprint Command Reference 73

 If the number you choose is the same as an existing image number, Fingerprint uses
your image instead of the default image.

DISPLAY KEY
Purpose
Specifies a custom key image to be shown on the printer screen. These images are
used for the printer soft keys.

Syntax
DISPLAY KEY <nexp1>, <nexp2>

Parameters
<nexp1>
Soft key pictogram to be changed. Range is 1 to 5, where 1 corresponds to the F1
(leftmost) key on the printer display.
<nexp2>
Pictogram number, which must correspond to a file in the DISPLAY directory or to one
of the following preassigned pictogram numbers:
0: Clear the pictogram area for the key specified by <nexp1>.
1: F1 key
2: F2 key
3: F3 key
4: F4 key
5: F5 key
6-10: Ignored unless user downloaded (due to legacy)
11: Left arrow
12: Up arrow
13: Right arrow
14: Down arrow
15: Enter key
16: Left arrow (pressed state)
17: Up arrow (pressed state)
18: Right arrow (pressed state)
19: Down arrow (pressed state)
20: Enter key (pressed state)
For more information on the pictogram and pictogram number, see the Notes.

Notes
You cannot override the preassigned values 0 through 5, but other values can be
overridden. For compatibility with future versions of Fingerprint, Honeywell
recommends that you use image numbers starting with 100. Image numbers used in
legacy versions of Fingerprint are supported, but those images are no longer installed
by default. Recommended values for n are from 100 to 1024.

The pictogram specified by <nexp2> appears until another key is pressed or another
DISPLAY KEY command is executed.

74 Fingerprint Command Reference

 The graphic for your custom image must be in PNG format and stored in the
/home/user/display/ directory. The file name must match the image number you
want to use. The file name must also be in the form "funckey_x.png" where x is the
number used as <nexp2>. For example if you had a file named funckey_121.png, you
could send the command DISPLAY KEY 1, 121.

If the number you choose is the same as an existing image number, Fingerprint uses
your image instead of the default image.

For PC Series printers, pictograms are automatically resized to be 60 pixels wide by 80

pixels tall. For PM43, PM43c, and PM23c printers, pictograms are autosized to be 42
pixels wide by 41 pixels tall.

DISPLAY STATE
Purpose
Specifies a custom background image that appears on the printer's screen when the
printer is running your application.
The PC-Series printer does not support DISPLAY STATE. There is insufficient room on
the display between the two-line text display and the function key areas for a
meaningful graphic to display. This command will not cause an error, but it will be
ignored.

Syntax
DISPLAY STATE <nexp>

Parameters
<nexp>
State image number corresponding to an image file in the printer memory that will
appear as the background.
0: Remove background (default background).
1: Setup mode.
2: Pause mode.
3: Information mode.
4-6: Ignored unless user downloaded (due to legacy).
7: Upgrading mode.
8: Idle mode.
9: Printing mode.

Notes
You can override the default images by using your own custom images and specifying
an image number. For compatibility with future versions of Fingerprint, Honeywell
recommends that you use image numbers starting with 100. Image numbers used in
legacy versions of Fingerprint are supported, but those images are no longer installed
by default. Recommended values for n are from 100 to 1024.

The graphic for your custom image must be in PNG format and stored in the
/home/user/display/ directory. The filename must match the image number you want

Fingerprint Command Reference 75

 to use: The file name must also be in the form of "background_x.png" where x is the
number used as <nexp1>. For example if you had a file named background_124.png,
you could send the command DISPLAY STATE 124.

If the number you choose is the same as an existing image number, Fingerprint uses
your image instead of the default image.

END
Purpose
Ends the execution of the current program or subroutine and closes all files devices
opened using the OPEN command.

Syntax
END

Notes
END can be placed anywhere in a program, but is usually placed at the end. It is also
useful for separating the "main" program from possible subroutines with higher line
numbers. It is possible to issue several END statements in the same program.

Example
A part of a program which produces fixed line-spacing might look like this:
10 FONT "Univers"
20 X%=300:Y%=350
30 INPUT A$
40 PRPOS X%,Y%
50 PRTXT A$
60 Y%=Y%-50
70 IF Y%>=50 GOTO 30
80 PRINTFEED
90 END
The Y-coordinate is decremented by 50 dots for each new line until it reaches the
value 50. The END statement terminates the program.

EOF
Purpose
Checks for an end-of-file condition.

Syntax
EOF(<nexp>)

76 Fingerprint Command Reference

Parameters
<nexp>
Number assigned to the file when it is opened using the OPEN command.

Notes
The EOF function can be used with files opened for sequential input (in connection
with the statements INPUT#, LINE INPUT#, and INPUT$) to avoid the error condition
"Input past end" which has no error message.

When the EOF function encounters the end of a file, it returns the value -1 (true). If
not, it returns the value 0 (false).

Example
10 DIM A%(10)
20 OPEN "DATA" FOR OUTPUT AS #1
30 FOR I%=1 TO 10
40 PRINT #1, I%*1123
50 NEXT I%
60 CLOSE #1
70 OPEN "DATA" FOR INPUT AS #2
80 I%=0
90 WHILE NOT EOF(2)
100 INPUT #2, A%(I%):PRINT A%(I%)
110 I%=I%+1:WEND
120 IF EOF(2) THEN PRINT "End of File"
RUN
This results in:
1123
2246
3369
4492
5615
6738
7861
8984
10107
11230
End of File

ERL
Purpose
Returns the number of the line on which an error condition has occurred.

Syntax
ERL

Fingerprint Command Reference 77

Notes
Also useful in connection with an ON ERROR GOTO statement.

Example 1
You can check at which line the last error since power up occurred like this:
PRINT ERL
A typical result might look like the following:
40

Example 2
The line number of the line where an error has occurred determines the action to be
taken. In this case the font size is too large for the label width:
10 ON ERROR GOTO 1000
20 FONT "Univers",100
30 PRTXT "HELLO EVERYBODY"
40 PRINTFEED
50 END
1000 IF ERL=40 THEN PRINT "PRINT ERROR"
1010 RESUME NEXT
RUN
This results in:
PRINT ERROR

Example 3
You can use ERL in programs without line numbers also, since these programs
automatically generate hidden line numbers that are revealed when the program is
LISTed. This is the same program as above but without line numbers:
NEW
IMMEDIATE OFF
ON ERROR GOTO QAAA
FONT "Univers",100
PRTXT "HELLO EVERYBODY"
PRINTFEED
END
QAAA: IF ERL=40 THEN PRINT "PRINT ERROR"
RESUME NEXT
IMMEDIATE ON
RUN
This results in:
PRINT ERROR

78 Fingerprint Command Reference

ERR
Purpose
Returns the code number of an error.

Syntax
ERR

Notes
Fingerprint can detect a number of error conditions, represented by code numbers
(for help, see Table of Error Codes). The ERR function enables the program to read the
coded error number. You can design your program to take proper action depending
on which type of error has occurred.

Example 1
In this example, the error code determines the action to be taken:
10 ON ERROR GOTO 1000
.....
.....
100 PRTXT "HELLO"
110 PRINTFEED
120 END
.....
.....
1000 IF ERR=1005 THEN PRINT "OUT OF PAPER"
1010 RESUME NEXT

Example 2
This example shows the number of the last error since power up:
PRINT ERR
This results in:
1022

ERR$
Purpose
Returns the explanation of an error code in plain text.

Syntax
ERR$(<nexp>)

Fingerprint Command Reference 79

Parameters
<nexp>
Error code number

Notes
The explanation of the error is returned in English. For a complete list of error codes,
see Table of Error Codes.

Example
PRINT ERR$(1003)
This results in:
Field out of label

ERROR
Purpose
Defines error messages and enables error handling for specified error conditions
(Direct Protocol only).

Syntax
ERROR <nexp1>[<[,<sexp>[,<nexp2>]]>|,<nexp3>]

Parameters
<nexp1>
Number of the error condition.
<sexp>
Desired error message.
<nexp2>
Number of the image to be shown on the printer's screen (along with the specified
error message) when the error occurs. If the specified image does not exist, image
number 1 is shown. For more information on error images, see DISPLAY IMAGE.
<nexp3>
Number of the image to be shown on the printer display (without an error message)
when the error occurs. If the specified image does not exist, image number 1 is
shown. For more information on error images, see DISPLAY IMAGE.

Notes
The ERROR statement can only be used in the Direct Protocol for the purpose of
enabling error-handling and creating customized error messages, as described below.
The built-in error-handler of the Direct Protocol will always handle these standard
errors:

80 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Message displayed on
Number Error Condition
printer

15 Font not found Font not found

18 Disk full Disk full
37 Printer cannot find cutter Cutter device not
found
43 Memory is overflowing Memory overflow
1003 Attempting to print to field which Field out of label
extends out of label
1005 Printer is out of paper Out of paper
1006 No field to print No field[s]
1022 Printhead lifted Head lifted
1027 Out of thermal transfer ribbon Out of ribbon
1031 Next label not found Label not found
1058 Transfer ribbon is installed Ribbon installed
1606 Testfeed not done Testfeed not done

Other errors are not handled unless they have been specified by an ERROR statement.
The ERROR statement also allows you to edit a suitable message in any language.
This message appears in the printer display if the error occurs. The error message is
truncated to 33 characters. Characters 1 through 16 appear on the upper line and
characters 18 through 33 appear on the lower line. Character 17 is always ignored.
An empty string removes any previously entered message for the error in question.
Likewise, an existing message can be replaced by a new one. When a standard error or
an error defined by an ERROR statement is detected, the printer sets its standard IN
port to BUSY, sets the Data transfer LED to on, and displays the error messages.
When you press the Print key, the error message is cleared, the LED is turned off, and
the standard IN port is set to READY. In some cases, the error itself must be cleared
(for example, by loading more labels).
Error messages are not saved in printer memory, but new ERROR statements must be
downloaded after each power up. Honeywell recommends that you save a set of
ERROR statements as a file in the host computer.
The ERROR statements affect both the error messages in the printer display and the
error messages returned to the host via the standard OUT channel (see SETSTDIO
statement).
By default, no error messages are returned to the host in the Direct Protocol, since the
statement INPUT ON sets the verbosity level to off (SYSVAR (18)= 0). However, the
verbosity level can be changed by VERBON/VERBOFF statements or the SYSVAR (18)
system variable.

Fingerprint Command Reference 81

 Different types of error messages to return on the standard OUT channel can be
selected by the SYSVAR (19) system variable. If SYSVAR (19) is set to 2 or 3, the error
message specified by ERROR is transmitted. If no such error message is available, a
standard error message in English will be transmitted. For more information, see Error
Code Messages.

Example
In these examples, a few errors are specified.
Note: Note the blank spaces for character position 17 in each message (space characters are
indicated by double headed arrows):
ERROR 1010,"HARDWARE.........ERROR"
ERROR 1029,"PRINTHEAD.VOLT-..AGE.TOO.HIGH"

EXECUTE
Purpose
Executes a Fingerprint program line or a file with Fingerprint program lines from
within another Fingerprint program.

Syntax
EXECUTE<sexp>

Parameters
<sexp>
One line of Fingerprint instructions or the name of a file containing at least one line of
a Fingerprint program.

Notes
\Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR(43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

This statement allows you to create a library of layouts, subroutines, texts, or other
functions which can be executed as a part of a program without having to merge the
programs.

The program called by EXECUTE must not contain any line numbers or line labels.

If the EXECUTE statement is followed by a string of Fingerprint instructions, they

should be separated by colons.

When an error occurs in an EXECUTE file, the line number in the error message is that
of the EXECUTE file, not of the program where the EXECUTE statement is issued.

EXECUTE is only allowed in the execute mode, not in the immediate mode (yields
error 69).

Recursive call of EXECUTE is not allowed (yields error 78).

82 Fingerprint Command Reference

Example
This example shows how a preprogrammed file containing a barcode is executed as a
part of a Fingerprint program, where the input data and printfeed are added:
IMMEDIATE OFF
DIR 1
ALIGN 7
BARSET "CODE39",2,1,3,120
BARFONT "Univers",10,8,5,1,1
BARFONT ON
IMMEDIATE ON
SAVE "tmp:BARCODE.PRG",L
NEW
10 PRPOS 30,400
20 EXECUTE "tmp:BARCODE.PRG"
30 PRBAR "ABC"
40 PRINTFEED
RUN

External Command: ZMODEM

Purpose
External commands for receiving and sending data using the ZMODEM protocol.

Syntax 1
RUN "rz [<switches>] [<filename>]" (receive data)

Parameters
<switches>

-c Forces no crash recov-

ery, even if sender
requests ZCRESUM
(resume interrupted file
transfer).
-e Prints last error to stand-
ard OUT channel.
-l [<logfile>] Sends verbose
output to logfile. Default
logfile name is "tmp:.
zmodemlog".

Fingerprint Command Reference 83

 -r If ZMCLOB is not set
and the file already
exists, replaces file if the
transfer is successful.
-v [<level>] Sets verbosity
level. Level is a decimal
number. Default level is
1.
-u Translates file name to
uppercase. If a filename
is given as parameter, no
translation is done.

<filename>
(Optional) The name to which the file will be saved.

Syntax 2
RUN "sz [<switches>] [<filename>]" (send data)

Parameters
<switches>

-l [<logfile>] Sends verbose

output to logfile. Default
logfile name is "tmp:.z-
modemlog".
-v [<level>] Sets verbosity
level. Level is a decimal
number. Default level is
1.

<filename>
The name of the file.

Notes
Note that rz and sz must be entered in lowercase characters.

If a file name is given in the rz statement, this name overrides the name given by the
transmitting unit.

For more information on the ZMODEM protocol, please refer to

http://www.omen.com. Related instruction is TRANSFER ZMODEM.

84 Fingerprint Command Reference

FIELD
Purpose
Creates a single-record buffer for a random file and divides the buffer into fields to
which string variables are assigned.

Syntax
FIELD[#]<nexp1>,<nexp2>AS<svar1>[,<nexp3>AS<svar2>...]

Parameters
#
(Optional) Indicates that whatever follows is a number.
<nexp1>
Number assigned to the file when it is opened using the OPEN command.
<nexp2-n>
Number of bytes to be reserved for the string variable that follows (Null not allowed).
<svar1-n>
Designation of the string variable, for which space has been reserved.

Notes
The buffer is divided into fields, each of which is given an individual length in bytes. A
string variable is assigned to each field. This statement only creates and formats the
buffer, allowing you to place the data using LSET and RSET statements.

Before using this statement, consider the maximum number of characters (including
space characters) needed for each variable. Make sure the total does not exceed the
record size given when the file was opened (default is 128 bytes). When a file is
CLOSEd, all its FIELD definitions are lost.

Example
This example opens and formats a file buffer for a single record. The buffer is divided
into three fields, with the size of 25, 30, and 20 bytes respectively.
10 OPEN "ADDRESSES" AS #8 LEN=75
20 FIELD#8,25 AS F1$, 30 AS F2$, 20 AS F3$
Imagine a spreadsheet matrix where the file is the complete spreadsheet, the records
are the lines and the fields are the columns. The buffer can only contain one such line
at the time.

FIELDNO
Purpose
Gets the current field number for partial clearing of the print buffer by CLL.

Fingerprint Command Reference 85

Syntax
FIELDNO

Remarks
By assigning the FIELDNO function to one or several numeric variables, you can
divide the print buffer into portions which can be cleared by CLL.

Example
10 PRPOS 100,300
20 FONT "Univers"
30 PRTXT "HAPPY"
40 A%=FIELDNO
50 PRPOS 100,250
60 PRTXT "NEW YEAR"
70 B%=FIELDNO
80 PRPOS 100, 200
90 PRTXT "EVERYBODY!"
100 PRINTFEED
110 CLL B%
120 PRPOS 100,200
130 PRTXT "TO YOU!"
140 PRINTFEED
150 CLL A%
160 PRPOS 100,250
170 PRTXT "BIRTHDAY"
180 PRPOS 100,200
190 PRTXT "DEAR TOM!"
200 PRINTFEED
RUN
prints three labels:

Label 1 Label 2 Label 3

HAPPY HAPPY HAPPY

NEW YEAR NEW BIRTHDAY
YEAR
EVERYBODY! TO YOU! DEAR TOM!

FILE & LOAD

Purpose
Receives and stores binary files in the printer memory.

Syntax
FILE& LOAD[<nexp1>,]<sexp>,<nexp2>[,<nexp3>]

86 Fingerprint Command Reference

Parameters
<nexp1>
(Optional) Number of bytes to skip before starting to read the file data.
<sexp>
Name for the file when stored in the printer memory. Maximum length is 30
characters including any extension.
<nexp2>
Size of the file in bytes.
<nexp3>
(Optional) Specifies a communication channel for opened for INPUT by the number
assigned to the device. Default is standard IN channel.

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR(43) to 1 before running
this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

This statement prepares the printer to receive a binary file on the standard IN channel
(see SETSTDIO statement) or on another communication channel for INPUT using the
OPEN command. Image files and font files can also be downloaded using the IMAGE
LOAD statement.

Unlike the IMAGE LOAD statement, FILE& LOAD does not immediately install the
fonts, but the font files remain in the printer memory until next power-up. The
optional first parameter makes it possible to use this statement in MSDOS (CR/LF
problem).

The name of the file, when stored in the printer memory, may consist of up to 30
characters, including possible extension. The size of the original file should be given
in bytes according to its size in the host.

Before the FILE& LOAD statement can be used on a serial channel, the setup must be
changed to 8 characters, RTS/CTS handshake. When a FILE& LOAD statement is
executed, the execution stops and waits for the number of bytes specified in the
statement to be received. During the transfer of file data to the printer, there is a 25-
second timeout between characters. If a new character is not received within the
timeout, an error 80 ("Download timeout") occurs. When the specified number of
characters is received, execution resumes.

Example
10 OPEN "uart2:" FOR INPUT AS 5
20 FILE& LOAD "FILE1.PRG",65692,5
30 CLOSE 5

FILENAME$
Purpose
Returns the names of the files stored in the specified part of the printer memory.

Fingerprint Command Reference 87

Syntax
FILENAME$[(<sexp>)]

Parameters
<sexp>
Name of the memory device from which the first file name (in alphabetical order) will
be listed. Parts of file names and wildcards (*) are allowed. Maximum size is 30
characters.
If <sexp> is omitted, the next file name in the same device is listed. This function can
be repeated. When there are no files left to list, the output string is empty.

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

Specified memory device must be mounted. The file name is case-sensitive and must
correspond to the name of the file stored in the memory device. Wildcards (* = ASCII
42 decimal) can be used. The list may include all types of files. Even system file
names preceded by a period character (for example, .FONTALIAS) may be listed.

No directories are listed and the order of listing is not specified. To list directories, see
DIRNAME$

Example
This example shows how all files in the printer permanent memory (/c/) are listed:
10 PRINT "Files in /c"
20 qTemp$ = FILENAME$("/c")
30 WHILE LEN(qTemp$) > 0
40 PRINT qTemp$
50 qTemp$ = FILENAME$
60 WEND
RUN

FILES
Purpose
Lists the contents of a printer directory to the standard OUT channel.

Syntax
FILES[<sexp>][,R][,A]

Parameters
<sexp>
(Optional) Specifies the directory. For more information, see DEVICES.

88 Fingerprint Command Reference

 R
Lists directories recursively.
A
Lists all files including system files (files with a name starting with a period (.)
character).

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

If no directory is specified, files in the current directory (default is "/c") are listed. To
change the current directory, see CHDIR

By including a reference to a memory device (such as "/c", "d:", or "tmp:"), the files of
the specified directory are returned without changing the current directory.

If the "A" flag is omitted, all files, except system files, are listed. The flags A and R can
be entered in any order, but R is always processed first. The number of bytes for each
file and the total number of free and used bytes in the specified directory will also be
included in the list.

Examples
The presentation may look like this on the host screen:
FILES "/c",
Files on /c
STDIO 2 FILE2 4
DIR1/ 0
Files on /c/DIR1/
FILE1 4 DIR2/ 0
STDIO 2
No files on /c/DIR1/DIR2
4121600 bytes free 12 bytes used
FILES,R,A
Files on /c
./ 0 ../ 0
DIR1/ 0 FILE2 4
STDIO 2 .setup.saved 239
Files on /c/DIR1/
./ 0 ../ 0
DIR2/ 0 STDIO 2
FILES
Files on /c/DIR1/DIR2/
./ 0 ../ 0
4121600 bytes free 251 bytes used
FILES "/c/DIR1"
Files on /c/DIR1
FILE1 4 DIR2/ 0

Fingerprint Command Reference 89

 STDIO 2
4121600 bytes free 6 bytes used

FLOATCALC$
Purpose
Calculates with floating point numbers.

Syntax
FLOATCALC$(<sexp1>,<sexp2>,<sexp3>[,<nexp1>])

Parameters
<sexp1>
First operand.
<sexp2>
The operator (+, -, *, or /).
<sexp3>
Second operand.
<nexp1>
(Optional) Precision in decimals (default 10).

Notes
Operands are float numbers (a string of digits with a decimal point to separate
decimals from integers). Operands can also contain leading plus (+), minus (-), and
space characters. Space characters are ignored. The usual mathematical rules apply
to plus and minus signs. All other characters, or plus, minus, and space characters in
positions other than leading, generate errors.
Note the mathematical rules:
- - yields +
- + yields -
+ - yields -
+ + yields +
The following arithmetic operators are allowed:

+ (addition) ASCII 043 decimal

- (subtraction) ASCII 045 decimal
* (multiplication) ASCII 042 decimal
/ (division) ASCII 047 decimal

Other operators or characters generate an error.

90 Fingerprint Command Reference

 The optional precision parameter specifies the number of decimals in the result of the
calculation. The result is truncated accordingly. For example, if the number of
decimals is specified as 5, the result 5.76123999 is presented as 5.76123.
The result of a FLOATCALC$ function can be formatted using a FORMAT$ function.

Examples
Addition:
A$ = "234.9"
B$ = "1001"
PRINT FLOATCALC$ (A$,"+",B$,5)
This results in:
1235.90000
Subtraction:
A$ = "234.9"
C% = 2
PRINT FLOATCALC$ (A$,"-","100.013",C%)
This results in:
134.88

FONT
Purpose
Selects a scalable TrueType, OpenType, or bitmap font for printing subsequent PRTXT
statements.
This command can be abbreviated as FT.

Syntax
FONT<sexp1>[,<nexp1>[,<nexp2>[,<nexp3>]]]
or
FT<sexp1>[,<nexp1>[,<nexp2>[,<nexp3>]]]

Parameters
<sexp1>
Font name. Default is Univers.
<nexp1>
(Optional) Font height in points. Default is 12. Use MAG to enlarge bitmap fonts.
<nexp2>
Clockwise slant in degrees. Range is 0 (default) to 90. Does not work with bitmap
fonts.

Fingerprint Command Reference 91

 <nexp3>
Width enlargement in percent relative to height. Range is 1 to 1000. Default is 100.
Does not work with bitmap fonts.
Reset to default by executing a PRINTFEED.

Font Support
Fingerprint supports scalable fonts that comply with the Unicode standard.
Fingerprint also supports right-to-left and bidirectional text, as well as cursive glyphs,
character shaping, and connecting headstrokes. You must specify a valid font and
character set for your current language when printing complex scripts. For more
information, see Complex Scripts.
Use a FONTS statement to list the names of all fonts installed in your own printer to
the standard OUT channel. For a list of fonts and font aliases, use a RUN command.
To maintain compatibility with programs created in earlier versions of Fingerprint, you
can also specify bitmap font names, such as "SW030RSN" or "MS060BMN.2". For a
standard bitmap font name, the firmware selects the corresponding scalable font in
the printer’s memory and sets font parameters so its direction, appearance, and size
come as close to the specified bitmap font as possible. The standard complement of
outline fonts must already be in the printer memory. For more information on legacy
bitmap font support, see Default Fonts.
Nonstandard bitmap fonts can also be used. They will retain the bitmap format but
will not produce any outline fonts. Any extension to the bitmap font name is ignored.

Slant Effects
Slanting means that you can create the same effect as in ITALIC characters. Higher
values increase the amount of clockwise slant. Slanting cannot be used with bitmap
fonts.
Examples:

Font Sizes
The height of the font is given in points (1 point = 1/72 inch, approximately 0.35 mm),
which means that text is printed in the same size regardless of the printhead density
of the printer. Sizes less than 4 points will be unreadable.
In case of bitmap fonts, use MAG to enlarge the font instead of specifying a font
height. Any font may be magnified up to 4 times separately in regard of height and

92 Fingerprint Command Reference

 width using a MAG statement. Bitmap fonts will get somewhat jagged edges when
magnified, whereas outline fonts will remain smooth. For more information, see MAG.
A scalable font can enlarged in terms of width relative to height. The value is given as
a percentage (range is 1 to 1000). This means that if the value is 100, there is no
change in the appearance of the characters. A value of 50 reduces the font width by
half, and a value of 200 doubles the width.

Examples
This example prints one line of 12p text with the default direction and alignment:
10 FONT "Univers"
20 PRTXT "HELLO"
30 PRINTFEED
RUN
This example prints the same text but at 24p, with 20° slant, and with 75% width:
10 FONT "Univers",24,20,75
20 PRTXT "HELLO"
30 PRINTFEED
RUN
This example prints the complex script using UTF-8:
(The MheiC-Medium-Big5HKSCS font is not installed by default. Install the font
before using this example, or use a different font that includes Chinese characters.)
10 FONT "MheiC-Medium-Big5HKSCS"
20 NASC "UTF-8"
30 PRTXT
CHR$(230);CHR$(136);CHR$(145);CHR$(232);CHR$(131);CHR$(189);CHR$(229);CH
R$(144);CHR$(158);CHR$(228);CHR$(184);CHR$(139)
40 PRINTFEED

FONTD
Purpose
Obsolete but retained for compatibility. See FONT (FT).

FONTNAME$
Purpose
Returns the names of the fonts stored in the printer memory, not including aliases.

Syntax
FONTNAME$(<nexp>)

Parameters
<nexp>
Specify 0 to return the first font name in memory, or specify non-zero value to return

Fingerprint Command Reference 93

 the next font name in memory. Can be repeated as long as there are font names left.
If there are no more font names in memory, this returns an empty string.

Example
This example lists all font names:
10 A$ = FONTNAME$ (0)
20 IF A$ = "" THEN END
30 PRINT A$
40 A$ = FONTNAME$ (-1)
50 GOTO 20
RUN

FONTS
Purpose
Returns the names of all fonts stored in the printer memory to the standard OUT
channel.

Syntax
FONTS

Notes
This command does not list font aliases. To list all of the fonts and font aliases
installed on the printer, use the following RUN command:

RUN "ls -l /printer/fonts"

FOR...TO...NEXT
Purpose
Creates a loop in the program execution, where a counter is incremented or
decremented until a specified value is reached.

Syntax
FOR<nvar>=<nexp1>TO<nexp2>[STEP<nexp3>]NEXT[<nvar>]

Parameters
<nvar>
Variable to be used as a counter.
<nexp1>
Initial value of the counter.
<nexp2>
Final value of the counter.

94 Fingerprint Command Reference

 <nexp3>
Value of the increment or decrement.

Notes
The FOR statement is always used with a NEXT statement.

The counter <nvar> is given an initial value by the numeric expression <nexp1>. If no
increment value (STEP <nexp3>) is given, the value 1 is assumed. A negative
increment value produces a decremental loop.

Each time the statement NEXT is encountered, the loop is executed again until the
final value (specified by <nexp2>), is reached. Then the execution proceeds from the
first line after the NEXT statement.

If the optional variable is omitted in the NEXT statement, the program execution loops
back to the most recently encountered FOR statement.

If the NEXT statement includes a variable, the execution loops back to the FOR
statement specified by the same variable.

FOR...NEXT loops can be nested, which means that a loop can contain another loop,
and so on. However, each loop must have a unique counter designation and the inside
loop must be concluded by a NEXT statement before the outside loop can be
executed.

Example 1
In this example, the counter A% is incremented from 10 to 50 in steps of 20:
10 FOR A%=10 TO 50 STEP 20
20 PRINT A%
30 NEXT
RUN
This results in:
10
30
50

Example 2
In this example, the counter B% is decremented from 50 to 10 in steps of 20:
10 FOR A%=50 TO 10 STEP -20
20 PRINT A%
30 NEXT
RUN
This results in:
50
30
10

Fingerprint Command Reference 95

Example 3
In this example, the counters A% and B% are used in a nested loop.
10 FOR A%=0 TO 3 STEP 1
20 FOR B%=0 TO 2 STEP 1
30 PRINT A%,B%
40 NEXT B%
50 NEXT A%
RUN
This results in:
0 0
0 1
0 2
1 0
1 1
1 2
2 0
2 1
2 2
3 0
3 1
3 2

FORMAT
Purpose
Formats the printer permanent memory.

Syntax
FORMAT<sexp>[,A]

Parameters
<sexp>
Specifies the device to be formatted.
A
Removes hidden and system files.

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

Be careful when using FORMAT "/c" to format the printer permanent memory. System
files use a leading period character (for example, .setup.saved). To format the
permanent memory without erasing the system files (soft formatting), do not include
an "A" flag in the statement. Your user permissions determine which files and
directories are erased.

96 Fingerprint Command Reference

 If an "A" flag is included in the statement, all files are removed, but the printer is not
reset to factory default settings. To reset the printer to factory default settings, use the
printer web page.

You can use the FORMAT command to erase all of the files on a USB storage device
attached to d:, but you cannot change its file system parameters.

Examples
In this example, issuing the statement FILES before and after a FORMAT "/c"
statement shows how the memory is affected. Note that system files starting with a
period character are not removed, since the FORMAT statement does not contain any
"A" flag:
FILES "/c",A

results in:

Files on /c
./ 0 ../ 0
APPLICATION 1 boot/ 0
ADMIN/ 0 .setup.saved 222
STDIO 4
2222080 bytes free 227 bytes used

Ok
FORMAT "/c"
Ok

FILES "/c",A
results in:

Files on /c
./ 0 ../ 0
boot/ 1 ADMIN 0
.setup.saved 222
222412 bytes free 222 bytes used

Fingerprint Command Reference 97

FORMAT DATE$
Purpose
Specifies the format of the string returned by DATE$("F") and DATEADD$(..... , "F")
instructions.

Syntax
FORMAT DATE$<sexp>

Parameters
<sexp>
String representing the year, month and date plus possible separating characters.
Default format is YYMMDD, where:
YY = Last two digits of the year (for example, 2007 = 07).
MM = Two digits representing the month. Range is 01 to 12.
DD = Two digits representing the day. Range is 01 to 31.
Example: December 1, 2007 is entered as "071201".

Notes
Reset to default by specifying an empty string (" ")

DATE$ and DATEADD$ only return formatted dates if these functions include the flag
"F".

In the FORMAT DATE$ statement, each Y, M or D character generates one digit from
the number of the year, month, or day respectively. If the number of Ys exceeds 4, or
the number of Ms or Ds exceeds 2, the extra characters generate leading space
characters.

The Y, M, and D characters return information from right to left.

Examples for the year 2007:

Y generates 7
YY generates 07
YYY generates 007
YYYY generates 2007
YYYYY generates .2007 (. represents a space)
Characters other than Y, M, or D are treated as separators and are returned as
entered.
The date format is saved in the temporary memory and must be transmitted to the
printer after each power-up.

Examples
This example changes the date format to British standard:

98 Fingerprint Command Reference

 FORMAT DATE$ "DD/MM/YY"
This changes the date format back to default (YYMMDD):
FORMAT DATE$ ""
This changes the date format to Swedish standard:
FORMAT DATE$ "YY-MM-DD"

FORMAT INPUT
Purpose
Specifies delimiting strings used by the LAYOUT RUN statement.

Syntax
FORMAT INPUT<sexp1>[,<sexp2>[,<sexp3>[,<sexp4>]]]

Parameters
<sexp1>
Start-of-record string (default is STX, ASCII 02 decimal).
<sexp2>
End-of-record string (default is EOT, ASCII 04 decimal).
<sexp3>
End-of-field string (default is CR, ASCII 13 decimal).
<sexp4>
String of characters to be filtered out.

Notes
The LAYOUT RUN statement is used in the Direct Protocol to transmit variable data to
a predefined layout. By default, the string of input data to the various layout fields
starts with a STX character and ends with an EOT character. The various fields are
separated by CR (carriage return) characters. Every field, including the last, ends with
a CR character.

To provide full compatibility with various protocols and computer systems, these
delimiting strings can be changed by means of the FORMAT INPUT statement. Each
delimiting string can have a maximum length of 10 characters.

Optionally, it is possible to specify a string (up to 10 characters) to be filtered out. By

default, the string is empty and is reset to default if a new FORMAT INPUT with less
than four arguments is issued.

There is a timeout if the end-of-field string is not found within 60 seconds after STX
has been received.

Always execute FORMAT INPUT in the Immediate mode.

If you are using the Direct Protocol, exit it using an INPUT OFF statement before

Fingerprint Command Reference 99

 changing the delimiting strings using a FORMAT INPUT statement. Then you can
enter the Direct Protocol again using an INPUT ON statement.

An error occurs if you issue a FORMAT INPUT statement where one, two or three
delimiting strings are identical to those already in effect without leaving the Direct
Protocol.

If a certain separating character cannot be produced by the keyboard of the host, use
a CHR$ function to specify the character by its ASCII value. The delimiting strings are
stored in the temporary memory and must be transmitted to the printer after each
power-up.

Example
This example changes the start-of-text string to #, the end-of-text separator to LF
(linefeed), and the end-of-field string to @ after temporarily switching to Immediate
mode.
INPUT OFF
FORMAT INPUT "#",CHR(10),"@"
INPUT ON

FORMAT TIME$
Purpose
Specifies the format of the string returned by TIME$("F") and TIMEADD$("F")
instructions.

Syntax
FORMAT TIME$<sexp>

Parameters
<sexp>
String format for reporting time, where:
H represents hours in a 24 hour cycle (one digit per H).
h represents hours in a 12 hour cycle (one digit per h).
M represents minutes (one digit per M).
S represents seconds (one digit per S).
P represents AM/PM in connection with a 12 hour cycle.
p represents am/pm in connection with a 12 hour cycle.
All other characters produce separator characters. Default string is HHMMSS. Reset
to default by sending an empty string.

Notes
Each H, h, M, and S character generates one digit. If the number of each character
exceeds 2, leading space characters are inserted. Each uppercase or lowercase P
character generates one character of AM/PM or am/pm respectively, when a 12-hour
cycle is selected.

100 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Hour, minute, and second fields are right-justified, and am/pm and AM/PM fields are
left-justified.

Example (the hour is 8 o’clock in the morning):

h generates 8 P generates A
hh generates 08 PP generates AM
hhh generates .08 p generates a
pp generates am

To get 12-hour cycle, all hour format characters must be lowercase "h".

Separating characters are returned as entered in the string. Any character other than
H, h, M, S, P, or p is regarded as a separator character.

The time format is saved in the temporary memory and has to be transmitted to the
printer after each power-up.

Examples
Changing the time format according to Swedish standard:
FORMAT TIME$ "HH.MM.SS"
Changing the date format to British standard:
FORMAT TIME$ "hh:MM pp"

FORMAT$
Purpose
Formats a number represented by a string.

Syntax 1
FORMAT$("<sexp1>","<nexp1>b"|"d")

Parameters 1
<sexp1>
String of integers or ASCII characters.
<nexp1>
Number of bytes to output in integer to ASCII conversion.
b
Specifies conversion from integer to ASCII format.
d
Specifies conversion from ASCII format to integer.

Syntax 2
FORMAT$(<sexp1>,<sexp2>)

Fingerprint Command Reference 101

Parameters 2
<sexp1>
String of digits which may contain a period (.) to separate integers from decimals. A
leading plus (+) or minus (-) is allowed.
<sexp2>
Specifies the format of the string.

Notes
When used as in Syntax 1, FORMAT$ converts strings from ASCII to integers and vice
versa.
In the command FORMAT$("<sexp1>","<nexp>b"), b signifies that the integer string
<sexp1> is converted to the corresponding characters in ASCII format. <nexp1>
specifies the number of bytes to output. For example, FORMAT$("1380337988","4b")
results in "RFID".
In the command FORMAT$("<sexp1>","d"), the d signifies that the string <sexp1> is
converted from an ASCII string to the corresponding number in integer format. For
example, FORMAT$("A","d") results in "65".
With Syntax 2, FORMAT$ can also be used to convert <sexp1> to a specific display
format. The format is specified by the string <sexp2> and can contain any characters,
but some have special significance as described in the next table:

Character Description

0 Digit placeholder. Displays a digit or zero.

l If the input number has fewer digits than there are zeros (on either
side of the decimal separator) in the format string, leading or trailing
zeros are displayed.
l If the number has more digits to the left side of the decimal separator
than there are zeros to the left side of the separator in the format
string, the digits are displayed.
l If the number has more digits to the right of the decimal separator
than there are zeros to the right of the separator in the format string,
the decimal is truncated to as many decimal places as there are
zeros.
# Digit placeholder. Displays a digit or nothing.
l If there is a digit in the position where the # appears in the format
string, display the digit or otherwise display nothing in that position.
l If the number has more digits to the left side of the decimal separator
than there are # to the left side of the separator in the format string,
the digits are displayed.

102 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Character Description

. Decimal separator between the integer and decimal digits.

, Decimal separator between the integer and decimal digits.
\ Display the next character in the format string. The backslash itself is
not displayed. Use two backslashes (\\) to print a single backslash. Only
the space character is displayed in the formatted string without a back-
slash.
Space Space, displayed as a literal character wherever it is in the expression
format.

Other rules to remember when using FORMAT$:

l An empty format string is equivalent to "0.##########".
l 0 and # cannot be mixed in every way. Before the decimal separator, use # first and
then 0. After the decimal separator, use 0 first and then #. For example:
####00.000### is OK but #00##0.##0#00 is not.
l A period (.) or a comma (,) separate integers and decimals. The decimal separator
used in the format is the returned separator type. Independent of the separator type
in the number, the format type controls the return type. Default type is a period.
l You can use space characters as separators between thousands or from a unit such
as dollars ($), as in this example: "$ ### ### 000.00".
l The attached number string is truncated to the decimal quantity of the format.
l Characters are not displayed on the left side of the decimal separator if there is a #
on the left side of the characters, and the string to be formatted does not have a
digit in the same position as the #. On the right side of the decimal separator, char-
acters are not displayed if there is a # on the right side of the characters, and the
string to be formatted does not have a digit in the same position as the #.

General Examples
This table shows the results of different format strings when applied to various input
strings, using Syntax 2.

FORMAT$(
Input String (<sexp1>) Format String (<sexp2>)
<sexp1>,<sexp2>)

1.1 55 0.33 55.33 "\$#\t\e\x\t0.0\t\e\x\t#\$" $1.1$ $5text5.0$ $0.3-

text3$ $5text5.3text3$
"5" "-5" "0.5" "55555" "" 5 -5 0.5 55555
"0.666666666666" 0.6666666666

Fingerprint Command Reference 103

 FORMAT$(
Input String (<sexp1>) Format String (<sexp2>)
<sexp1>,<sexp2>)

"5" "-5" "0.5" "55555" "0" 5 -5 0 55555 0

"0.666666666666"
"5" "-5" "0.5" "55555" "0.00" 5.00 -5.00 0.50 55555.00
"0.666666666666" 0.66
"5" "-5" "0.5" "55555" "\$0,0" $5,0 $-5,0 $0.5 $55555,0
"0.666666666666" $0,6
"5" "-5" "0.5" "55555" "0.0##" 5.0 -5.0 0.5 55555.0 0.666
"0.666666666666"
"5" "-5" "0.5" "55555" "###\,000.0" 005.0 -005.0 000.5
"0.666666666666" 55,555.0 000.6
"5" "-5" "0.5" "55555" "# 0 0.0" 0 5.0 -0 5.0 0 0.5 555 5
"0.666666666666" 5.0 0 0.6

Addition Example
B$="234.9"
C$="1001"
D$="# ##0.##"
A$=FLOATCALC$(B$,"+",C$,15)
PRINT A$
This results in:
"1235.900000000000000"

Subtraction Examples
A$=FLOATCALC$("234.90","-","100.013",2)
PRINT A$
This results in:
"134.88"
PRINT FORMAT$(A$,"\$ 0,000#")
This results in:
"$ 134,880"
If a higher precision is used in FLOATCALC$, A$ yields "$134,887".

Multiplication Example
B$="3"
A$=FLOATCALC$("100", "*", B$, 1)
PRINT A$

104 Fingerprint Command Reference

 This results in:
"300.0"
C$="0 0 0,00###"
PRINT FORMAT$(A$,C$)
This results in:
"3 0 0,00"

Division Example
B$="1.0"
A$=FLOATCALC$(B$,"/","3.0")
PRINT A$
This results in:
"0.3333333333"
PRINT FORMAT$(A$,"\$ 000.00###")
This results in:
"$ 000.33333"

FORMFEED
Purpose
Feeds out or pulls back a specified length of media.
This command can be abbreviated as FF.

Syntax
FORMFEED[<nexp>]
or
FF[<nexp>]

Parameters
<nexp>
(optional) Feed length expressed as a positive or negative number of dots.

Notes
If <nexp> is not specified, the printer feeds out one single label, ticket, tag, or portion
of continuous stock according to the printer setup. For more information, see the
printer user’s guide.
If <nexp> is specified, the media is fed out or pulled back by the corresponding
number of dots:

Fingerprint Command Reference 105

 l A positive number of dots makes the printer feed out the specified length of media.
l A negative number of dots makes the printer pull back the specified length of
media. To avoid causing a media jam, do not enter a value larger than the length of
the label.
It is important whether FORMFEED is issued before or after a PRINTFEED statement:
l FORMFEED issued before PRINTFEED affects the position of the origin on the first
copy to be printed.
l FORMFEED issued after PRINTFEED does not affect the position of the origin on
the first copy, but the next copy will be affected. Do not use FORMFEED as a
replacement for start and stop adjustments in the Setup mode or in connection with
batch printing.

Example 1
This example prints a line of text and feeds out an extra 60 dots of media after
printing:
10 FONT "Univers"
20 PRPOS 30,200
30 PRTXT "HELLO"
40 PRINTFEED
50 FORMFEED 60
RUN

Example 2
This example pulls back the media 20 dots before printing:
10 FORMFEED -20
20 FONT "Univers"
30 PRPOS 30,200
40 PRTXT "HELLO"
50 PRINTFEED
RUN
In this case, the positioning of the text line is performed after the media has been
pulled back.

FRE
Purpose
Returns the number of free bytes in a specified part of the printer memory.

Syntax
FRE(<<sexp>|<nexp>>)

106 Fingerprint Command Reference

Parameters
<sexp>
Designation of the part of the printer memory from which the number of free bytes
should be returned, for example "/c", "d:", or "tmp:".
<nexp>
Dummy argument that returns the number of free bytes in the printer temporary
memory ("tmp:").

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

The firmware looks for a colon (:) character in the argument for FRE. If the argument
is a valid name of a memory device, the number of free bytes in that device is
returned.

If the name of a device that is not a part of the printer memory (for example
"console:"), is entered as an argument, FRE returns 0. See DEVICES for more
information on memory and non-memory devices.

If the argument contains a colon, but is not a valid name of any device (for example
"QWERTY:"), error 1013 ("Device not found") occurs.

Any argument that does not include a colon character (for example, "7" or "QWERTY")
returns the amount of free bytes in the printer temporary memory ("tmp:").

Examples
Input Results in

PRINT FRE("tmp:") 2382384

PRINT FRE("con- 0
sole:")
PRINT FRE(1) 2382384

FUNCTEST
Purpose
Performs various hardware tests.

Syntax
FUNCTEST<sexp>,<svar>

Fingerprint Command Reference 107

Parameters
<sexp>
Type of test to be performed:

<sexp> Response Description

"HEAD" HEAD OK, Test was successful and n is the

SIZE:n DOTS number of printhead dots.
HEAD LIFTED Printhead is lifted and must be
lowered before test can be per-
formed.
FAULTY One or more dots on the print-
PRINTHEAD head are not working. Printhead
voltage is not checked. Use
HEAD for additional tests.

<svar>
Variable in which the result will be placed.

Notes
Any other input to <sexp> yields an empty string.

Example
This example shows how a test program using the FUNCTEST statement may be
composed:
10 FUNCTEST "HEAD", A$
20 PRINT "HEADTEST:", A$
RUN

This results in:

HEADTEST: HEAD OK,SIZE:832 DOTS

Ok

FUNCTEST$
Purpose
Returns the result of various hardware tests.

Syntax
FUNCTEST$(<sexp>)

108 Fingerprint Command Reference

Parameters
<sexp>
Type of test to be performed:

<sexp> Response Description

"HEAD" HEAD OK, SIZE:n Test was successful and n is the number of printhead
DOTS dots.
HEAD LIFTED Printhead is lifted and must be lowered before test
can be performed.
FAULTY One or more dots on the printhead are not working.
PRINTHEAD Printhead voltage is not checked. Use HEAD for addi-
tional tests.

Notes
Any other input to <sexp> yields an empty string.

Example
This example shows a test program using FUNCTEST$ (compare with the FUNCTEST
example):
PRINT "HEADTEST:", FUNCTEST$ ("HEAD")
This results in:

HEADTEST: HEAD OK,SIZE:1280 DOTS

Ok

GET
Purpose
Reads a record from a random file to a random buffer.

Syntax
GET[#]<nexp1>,<nexp2>

Parameters
#
(Optional) Indicates that whatever follows is a number.
<nexp1>
Number assigned to the file when it is opened using the OPEN command.
<nexp2>
Number of the record. Must be a positive integer (1 or greater).

Fingerprint Command Reference 109

Notes
The GET statement is used to read a specified record in a random file to a buffer,
where the record is assigned to variables based on the FIELD statement given for the
buffer. After the GET statement is executed, you can use references to the variables
defined by the FIELD statement to read the characters in the random buffer.

Numeric expressions converted to string expressions (by STR$ functions before being
put into the buffer) can be converted back to numeric expressions using VAL
functions.

Example
10 OPEN "PHONELIST" AS #8 LEN=26
20 FIELD#8,8 AS F1$, 8 AS F2$, 10 AS F3$
30 SNAME$="SMITH"
40 CNAME$="JOHN"
50 PHONE$="12345630"
60 LSET F1$=SNAME$
70 LSET F2$=CNAME$
80 RSET F3$=PHONE$
90 PUT #8,1
100 CLOSE#8
RUN
SAVE "PROGRAM 1.PRG "
NEW
10 OPEN "PHONELIST" AS #8 LEN=26
20 FIELD#8,8 AS F1$, 8 AS F2$, 10 AS F3$
30 GET #8,1
40 PRINT F1$,F2$,F3$
RUN
This results in:
SMITH — — — JOHN — — — — — — 12345630

GETASSOC$
Purpose
Gets a value from a string association.

Syntax
GETASSOC$ (<sexp1>, <sexp2>)

Parameters
<sexp1>
Name of the association (case-sensitive).
<sexp2>
Name of a tuple in the association.

110 Fingerprint Command Reference

Notes
An association is an array of tuples, where each tuple consists of a name and a value.

Example
This example defines a string, including three string names associated with three
start values, and changes one of them (time):
10 QUERYSTRING$="time=UNKNOWN&label=321&desc=DEF"
20 MAKEASSOC"QARRAY",QUERYSTRING$,"HTTP"
30 QTIME$=GETASSOC$("QARRAY","time")
40 QLABELS%=VAL(GETASSOC$("QARRAY","label"))
50 QDESC$=GETASSOC$("QARRAY","desc")
60 PRINT"time=";QTIME$,"LABEL=";QLABELS%,"DESCRIPTION=";QDESC$
70 SETASSOC"QARRAY","time",time$
80 PRINT"time=";GETASSOC$("QARRAY","time")
RUN
This results in:
time=UNKNOWN LABEL=321 DESCRIPTION=DEF
time=153355

GETASSOCNAME$
Purpose
Traverses the tuples of a string association.

Syntax
GETASSOCNAME$(<sexp>,<nexp>)

Parameters
<sexp>
Association to be traversed (case-sensitive).
<nexp>
Specifies the tuple in the association:
<nvar> = 0 (zero) specifies the first tuple.
<nvar> = non-zero specifies the next tuple. This number can be a positive or negative
integer.

Notes
An association is an array of tuples, where each tuple consists of a name and a value.
To get the first position in the string association, <nvar> should be zero. Consecutive
calls to GETASSOCNAME$ with <nvar> non zero traverses all variables in an undefined
order. When a blank string (" ") is returned, the last variable has been traversed.

Fingerprint Command Reference 111

Example
This example shows how "QARRAY" is traversed (run example from GETASSOC first):
10 LVAL$=GETASSOCNAME$("QARRAY",0)
20 WHILE LVAL$<>""
30 RVAL$=GETASSOC$("QARRAY",LVAL$)
40 PRINT LVAL$;"=";RVAL$
50 LVAL$=GETASSOCNAME$("QARRAY",1)
60 WEND
RUN
This results in:
label=321
desc=DEF
time=153355

GETPFSVAR
Purpose
Recovers saved variables.

Syntax
GETPFSVAR(<sexp>[,D])

Parameters
<sexp>
Name of the variable (uppercase characters only).
D
(Optional) Specifies that the variable is to be deleted after recovery.

Notes
Use GETPFSVAR to recover variables registered to be saved at power failure by means
of a SETPFSVAR statement. The function returns -1 on success or 0 at failure.

If a D flag is included, the variable is deleted after it has been recovered. Use this to
make sure that the variable is up-to-date. The variable name is limited to 20
characters.

Related instructions are SETPFSVAR, DELETEPFSVAR, and LISTPFSVAR.

112 Fingerprint Command Reference

Example
10 IF NOT GETPFSVAR("QS$") THEN QS$ ="<this is the default value, set a new one>"
20 IF NOT GETPFSVAR("QCPS%") THEN PRINT "No copies available":END
30 QSTATUS%=GETPFSVAR("AWE$",D):IF QSTATUS% THEN PRINT "Recovered
successfully!"
40 SETPFSVAR "QCPS%"
50 ’Build label
60 .....
99 PRINTFEED; QCPS%=QCPS%
100 .....

GOSUB
Purpose
Branches to a subroutine.

Syntax
GOSUB<ncon>|<line label>

Parameters
<ncon>
Number of the first line in the desired subroutine.
<line label>
Label of the first line in the desired subroutine.

Notes
After branching, the subroutine is executed line by line until a RETURN statement is
encountered.

The same subroutine can be branched to many times from different lines in the main
program. GOSUB always remembers where the branching took place, making it
possible to return to the correct line in the main program after the subroutine has
been executed.

Subroutines may be nested, which means that a subroutine may contain a GOSUB
statement for branching to a secondary subroutine and so on. Subroutines are
normally placed on program lines with higher numbers than the main program. The
main program should be appended by an END statement to avoid unintentional
execution of subroutines.

Example 1
This example makes use of line numbers:
10 PRINT "This is the main program"
20 GOSUB 1000
30 PRINT "You’re back in the main program"
40 END

Fingerprint Command Reference 113

 1000 PRINT "This is subroutine 1"
1010 GOSUB 2000
1020 PRINT "You’re back from subroutine 2 to 1"
1030 RETURN
2000 PRINT "This is subroutine 2"
2010 GOSUB 3000
2020 PRINT "You’re back from subroutine 3 to 2"
2030 RETURN
3000 PRINT "This is subroutine 3"
3010 PRINT "You’re leaving subroutine 3"
3020 RETURN
RUN
This results in:
This is the main program
This is subroutine 1
This is subroutine 2
This is subroutine 3
You’re leaving subroutine 3
You’re back from subroutine 3 to 2
You’re back from subroutine 2 to 1
You’re back in the main program
Ok

Example 2
This example has the same result as Example 1, but instead of line numbers, the
program uses line labels to make the program branch to subroutines:
IMMEDIATE OFF
PRINT "This is the main program"
GOSUB SUB1
PRINT "You’re back in the main program"
END
SUB1: PRINT "This is subroutine 1"
GOSUB SUB2
PRINT "You’re back from subroutine 2 to 1"
RETURN
SUB2: PRINT "This is subroutine 2"
GOSUB SUB3
PRINT "You’re back from subroutine 3 to 2"
RETURN
SUB3: PRINT "This is subroutine 3"
PRINT "You’re leaving subroutine 3"
RETURN
IMMEDIATE ON
RUN

GOTO
Purpose
Branches unconditionally to a specified line number or line label.

114 Fingerprint Command Reference

Syntax
GOTO<ncon>|<line label>

Parameters
<ncon>
Number of the line to be branched to.
<line label>
Label of the line to be branched to.

Notes
If the specified line contains an executable statement, both that statement and all
that follows are executed. If the specified line does not exist, an error condition
occurs.

GOTO can also be used in the Immediate mode to resume execution of a program
which has been terminated using a STOP statement at a specified program line.

Example
In this example the first bar of the tune "Colonel Bogey" is played only if the title is
entered correctly. The message "Try again" is displayed until you type the right name.
10 A$="COLONEL BOGEY"
20 B$="TRY AGAIN"
30 INPUT "TITLE"; C$
40 IF C$=A$ GOTO 100 ELSE PRINT B$
50 GOTO 30
60 END
100 SOUND 392,15
110 SOUND 330,20
120 SOUND 330,15
130 SOUND 349,15
140 SOUND 392,15
150 SOUND 659,25
160 SOUND 659,20
170 SOUND 523,25
180 GOTO 60
RUN
This results in:
TITLE
The way GOTO is used in line 50 to create a loop, which makes the printer await the
condition specified in line 40 before the execution is resumed. Instead of line
numbers, line labels can be used following the same principles as illustrated in the
second example for the GOSUB statement.

Fingerprint Command Reference 115

HEAD
Purpose
Returns the result of a printhead resistance check.

Syntax
HEAD(<nexp1>)
Or
<nexp2> = HEAD(<sexp>)

Parameters
<nexp1>
> 0: Specifies the number of a dot for which the resistance (in ohms) is returned. A dot
resistance value that deviates considerably from the mean resistance value of the
printhead indicates that the dot may be faulty. The dot numbering starts at 0 (zero),
so for example in an 832-dot printhead the dots are numbered 0 to 831.
-1: Printhead check. Returns -1 (true) if no dot is more than ±15% from the mean
resistance value, or 0 (false) otherwise.
-7: Returns mean printhead resistance in ohms. PD4X printers return the nominal
resistance value of the dots.
<nexp2>
Returns the total number of faulty dots.
<sexp>
Returns the dot number and resistance for each faulty dot.

Notes
There is no guarantee that all defect "dots" will be detected by HEAD, since only the
resistance is checked. For example, dirty or cracked dots can only be detected visually.

The second version of the HEAD function measures the dot resistance for every dot in
the printhead. Faulty dots are reported to the system, so you do not need to use a SET
FAULTY DOT statement to report bad dots one at a time.

Although this command may indicate a faulty printhead, the printhead may not
actually be defective even if the resistance measurement is not ±15% of the mean
resistance value.

Example 1
To read the resistance value of dot No. 5:
PRINT HEAD(5)
This results in (for example):
603

116 Fingerprint Command Reference

Example 2
To perform a printhead check:
PRINT HEAD(-1)
If the head condition is within normal ranges, this results in:
-1

Example 3
To read the mean resistance value of the printhead:
PRINT HEAD(-7)
In this example, the mean resistance value returned is:
613

Example 4
To check the printhead for faulty dots and their respective resistance values:
A%=HEAD(B$)
In this example, there are 5 potentially faulty dots. Note that the printer returns an Ok
message before the primary output:
Ok

PRINT A%
5
Ok

PRINT B$
25, 2944
42, 2944
106, 2944
107, 2944
140, 2944
Ok

IF...THEN...(ELSE)
Purpose
Specifies conditional execution controlled by the result of a numeric expression.

Syntax
(Periods are used here to indicate concatenation.)
IF<nexp>[,]THEN<stmt1>[ELSE<stmt2>]
IF<nexp>[,]THEN .

Fingerprint Command Reference 117

 <stmt1> .
[...<stmt1+n>] .
[ELSE .
<stmt2> .
[...<stmt2+n>]] .
ENDIF

Parameters
<nexp>
Numeric expression to be evaluated.
<stmt1>
Statement or list of statements telling the program what to do should the IF-condition
be true.
<stmt2>
Optional statement or list of statements specifying what happens should the IF-
condition be false.

Notes
THEN and ELSE statements may be nested. Multiple THEN and ELSE statements can
alternatively be entered on separate lines. If so, the instruction should be appended by
ENDIF. See second example below.

Example 1
10 A%=100:B%=20
20 C$="A LARGER THAN B"
30 D$="A NOT LARGER THAN B"
40 IF A%>B% THEN PRINT C$ ELSE PRINT D$
RUN
This results in:
A LARGER THAN B

Example 2
10 A%=VAL(TIME$)
20 IF A%>120000 THEN
30 PRINT "TIME IS ";TIME$; ". ";
40 PRINT "GO TO LUNCH!"
50 ELSE
60 PRINT "CARRY ON - ";
70 PRINT "THERE’S MORE WORK TO DO!"
80 ENDIF
RUN
This results in:
TIME IS 121500. GO TO LUNCH!

118 Fingerprint Command Reference

Example 3
IF ... THEN are often used in connection with GOTO. In this example, line numbering is
used. Also see the example for the GOTO statement.
10 A%=100
20 B%=50
30 IF A%=B% THEN GOTO 50 ELSE PRINT "NOT EQUAL"
40 END
50 PRINT "EQUAL":END
RUN
This results in:
NOT EQUAL

Example 4
This example corresponds to the preceding example, but line labels are used instead
of line numbers.
IMMEDIATE OFF
A%=100
B%=50
IF A%=B% THEN GOTO QQQ ELSE PRINT "NOT EQUAL"
END
QQQ: PRINT "EQUAL":END
IMMEDIATE ON
RUN
This results in:
NOT EQUAL

IMAGE BUFFER MIRROR

Purpose
Mirrors the print image around the Y-axis.

Syntax
IMAGE BUFFER MIRROR

Notes
This statement mirrors the current defined image buffer around the Y-axis (media
feed direction). Fields defined after execution of IMAGE BUFFER MIRROR are
rendered normally. The image buffer width is always 8-bit aligned, even when the X-
start parameter in the setup is not. Because of this, Honeywell recommends that you
test that the mirrored image is printed correctly where intended. In some cases, a
small correction using the PRPOS statement or the X-start parameter may be
necessary.

Fingerprint Command Reference 119

Example
NEW
10 PRPOS 50,300
20 FONT "Univers",40
30 PRTXT "MIRROR"
40 IMAGE BUFFER MIRROR
50 PRPOS 50,100
60 PRTXT "NORMAL"
70 PRINTFEED
This results in:

IMAGE BUFFER SAVE

Purpose
Saves image buffer content as a file.

Syntax
IMAGE BUFFER SAVE<sexp>

Parameters
<sexp>
Desired file name, with an optional reference to the device where the file should be
saved.

120 Fingerprint Command Reference

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

This statement saves the current content of the print buffer as an image file in RLL
format. After saving the file, it is automatically installed as an image which can be
printed using a PRIMAGE statement in DIR 1 and DIR 3. You can now create label
templates and easily add variable data.

The size of the print buffer image depends on the size of the print image at the
moment the buffer is saved. The width is determined by the Media, Media Size, Width
setup value, with the first pixel according to the Media, Media Size, Xstart setup value.
The height is determined by the actual height in the y-dimension of the print image.
Note that space characters or invisible "white" parts of an image are included in the
height of the print image, even if they are not visible on the printed label.

Example
IMAGE BUFFER SAVE "TEMPLATE7"

IMAGE LOAD
Purpose
Receives, converts, and installs image and font files.

Syntax
IMAGE LOAD[<nexp1>,]<sexp1>,<nexp2>[,<sexp2>[,<nexp3>]]

Parameters
<nexp1>
(Optional) Number of bytes to skip before starting to read the data.
<sexp1>
Desired name of the image or font to be created.
<nexp2>
Size of the original file in number of bytes.
<sexp2>
Optional flag: "S" specifies that the image or font will be saved in the printer’s
permanent memory ("/c"). This option may result in poor performance. An empty
string ("") specifies that the image or font will be stored in the printer’s temporary
memory ("tmp:").
<nexp3>
(Optional) Specifies a communication channel opened for INPUT by the number
assigned to the device. Default is standard IN channel.

Fingerprint Command Reference 121

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

IMAGE LOAD prepares the printer to receive an image file or a font file on the
standard IN channel or on another communication channel opened for INPUT. When
the file is received, it is automatically converted to an image in Fingerprint bitmap
format (if necessary) or to a scalable font. Fingerprint supports black and white (no
grayscale) images in PNG, PCX, GIF, and BMP formats.

The optional first parameter makes it possible to use this statement in MS-DOS
(CR/LF problem).

The name of an image may consist of a maximum of 30 characters including possible

extensions. The image will have the same direction as the original image file and can
only be rotated 180° using DIR. Honeywell recommends that you include the
extension .1 or .2 to indicate the intended print direction. Font file names are
restricted to only 30 characters. The size of the original file should be given in bytes
according to its size in the host.

Before IMAGE LOAD can be used on a serial channel, the setup must be changed to 8
characters, CTS/RTS handshake. When IMAGE LOAD is executed, the execution stops
and waits to receive the number of bytes specified. During the transfer of image file
data to the printer, there is a 25-second timeout between characters.

If a new character is not received within the timeout limit, Error 80 "Download
timeout" occurs. When the specified number of characters is received, the execution
resumes. If the download was successful, the downloaded image or font is installed
automatically and can be used without restarting the printer.

Example
IMAGE LOAD "Logotype.1",400,""

IMAGENAME$
Purpose
Returns the names of the images stored in the printer memory.

Syntax
IMAGENAME$(<nexp>)

Parameters
<nexp>
Specify 0 to return the name of the first image stored in memory. Specify a non-zero
number to return the name of the next image stored in memory.

122 Fingerprint Command Reference

Notes
This function can be used to produce a list of all images. You can also use the
IMAGES statement.

Image files downloaded by means of a TRANSFER KERMIT statement are not

returned, since the software regards them as files rather than images.

IMAGENAME$(0) produces the first name in the memory.

IMAGENAME$(_,0) produces the next name, and can be repeated as long there are
any image names left. When no more image files are found, IMAGENAME$ returns an
empty string.

Example
Use a program like this to list all image names:
10 A$=IMAGENAME$(0)
20 IF A$=""THEN END
30 PRINT A$
40 A$=IMAGENAME$(-1)
50 GOTO 20
RUN
A typical result looks like:
CHESS2X2.1
CHESS4X4.1
DIAMONDS.1
GLOBE.1
Ok

IMAGES
Purpose
Returns the names of all images stored in the printer memory to the standard OUT
channel.

Syntax
IMAGES

Notes
IMAGES (or IMAGENAME$) can be used to list all image names. Image files
downloaded by means of a TRANSFER KERMIT statement are not printed, since the
firmware regards them as files instead of images.

Example
Send this command to see a list of images stored in the printer memory:

Fingerprint Command Reference 123

 IMAGES
A typical result might be:
CHESS2X2.1 CHESS4X4.1
DIAMONDS.1 GLOBE.1
3568692 bytes free 1717812 bytes used
Ok

IMMEDIATE
Purpose
Enables or disables Immediate mode in connection with program editing without line
numbers, for reading the current mode, or for reading the current standard IN and
OUT channels.

Syntax
IMMEDIATE ON|OFF|MODE|STDIO

Parameters
ON
Enables Immediate mode.
OFF
Disables Immediate mode.
MODE
Prints a line to the STDOUT port with information on the current status of the
following modes (ON or OFF):
Execution
Immediate
Input
Layout Input
Debug STDIO (dbstdio)
STDIO
Prints two lines to the STDOUT port with information on current settings for the
STDIN and STDOUT channels.

Notes
Before you begin writing a program without line numbers, disable Immediate mode by
sending IMMEDIATE OFF. If not, each line will be executed immediately. After an
IMMEDIATE OFF statement, you can enter program lines without leading line
numbers. References to lines are done using "line labels," which are called in GOTO or
GOSUB and related statements.

A line label is a name followed by a colon (:). The label must not interfere with any
standard Fingerprint keywords or start with a digit, and the line must start with the
line label. When a line label is used as a reference to another line (for example, within
a GOTO statement), omit the colon.

124 Fingerprint Command Reference

 The program should be appended by a IMMEDIATE ON statement. At the execution of
this statement, the program lines are numbered automatically in ten-step incremental
order, starting with the first line (10- 20-30-40-50 and so on). These line numbers will
not appear on the screen until the program is LISTed, LOADed, or MERGEd. Line
labels are not converted to line numbers.

Do not issue RUN before sending IMMEDIATE ON, or an error occurs.

When you send IMMEDIATE MODE, the printer returns information on mode status as
follows:
l Execution On/Off indicates if a Fingerprint program is running or not.
l Immediate On/Off indicates whether the Immediate mode is enabled or disabled as
specified by IMMEDIATE ON/OFF.
l Input On/Off indicates whether Direct Protocol is enabled or disabled as specified
by INPUT ON/OFF.
l Layout Input On/Off indicates whether or not a layout is being recorded in Direct
Protocol as specified by LAYOUT INPUT and LAYOUT END.
l Dbstdio On/Off indicates whether the debug standard I/O is active or not.
The following conditions are not reported:
l Running a Fingerprint application.
l Execution of a TRANSFER KERMIT, FILE& LOAD, IMAGE LOAD, LOAD, and STORE
INPUT instruction.
l Running external commands (ush), for example RUN "z......"
l Running the Setup mode or execution of a SETUP statement.
When you send IMMEDIATE STDIO, two lines are transmitted on the STDOUT port
with connection information (port, baud rate, character length, parity, and stop bits)
for the current STDIN and STDOUT channels.

Example 1
A program can be written without line numbers. First send the following:
IMMEDIATE OFF
results in:
Ok
Then the following program is written without line numbers. QQQ is used as a line
label:
PRINT "LINE 1"
GOSUB QQQ
END
QQQ: PRINT "LINE 2"
RETURN
IMMEDIATE ON

Fingerprint Command Reference 125

 Ok
RUN
This results in:
LINE 1
LINE 2
Ok

Example 2
This example shows how to check mode status:
IMMEDIATE MODE
This results in:
execution=OFF, immediate=ON, input=OFF, layout input = Off

Example 3
This example shows how to check STDIN and STDOUT channel status:
IMMEDIATE STDIO
This results in:
stdin=uart1:, 9600, 8, NONE, 1
stdout=uart1:, 9600, 8, NONE, 1

INKEY$
Purpose
Reads the first character in the receive buffer of the standard IN channel.

Syntax
INKEY$

Notes
For information on standard I/O channels, see SETSTDIO.
As opposed to INPUT, INKEY$ does not interrupt the program flow to wait for input
data, unless a loop is created by means of a GOTO statement as seen in line 20 in the
example.
INKEY$ is useful when the host computer is unable to end the input data with a
"Carriage Return" (CR; ASCII 13 decimal), but must use some other character, for
example "End of Text" (ETX; ASCII 3 decimal). Then a routine interpreting the
substitute character as a carriage return can be created.

126 Fingerprint Command Reference

Example
In this example, none of the characters received on the standard IN channel are
printed on the host screen until a # character (ASCII 35 decimal) is encountered.
10 A$ = INKEY$
20 IF A$ = "" GOTO 10
30 IF A$ = CHR$(35) THEN PRINT B$
40 IF A$ = CHR$(35) THEN END
50 B$ = B$ + A$
60 GOTO 10
RUN
Type a number of characters on the host keyboard. They are not printed on the host
screen until you type #. Then all the characters appear simultaneously, except for the
#-sign.
Note the loop between line 10 and 20, which makes the program wait for you to
activate a key.

INPUT
Purpose
Receives input data via the standard IN channel during the execution of a program.
This command can be abbreviated as IP.

Syntax
INPUT[<scon><;|,>]<<nvar>|<svar>>[,<<nvar>|<svar>>...]
or
IP[<scon><;|,>]<<nvar>|<svar>>[,<<nvar>|<svar>>...]

Parameters
<scon><;|,>
(Optional) Prompt string, followed by a semicolon or comma.
<<nvar>|<svar>>
Variables to which the input data will be assigned.

Notes
For information on standard I/O channel, see SETSTDIO.
During program execution, INPUT interrupts the execution. A question mark or a
prompt appears on the host screen, indicating that the program is expecting
additional data to be entered. The prompt can be used to tell the operator what type of
data to enter.

Fingerprint Command Reference 127

 The prompt is appended by a question mark if a semicolon (;) is entered after the
prompt string. If a comma (,) is used in that position, the printing of the question mark
is suppressed.
If a prompt is not used, the question mark is always displayed. Do not enter a comma
or semicolon directly after the keyword, but only after the prompt, or to separate
variables.
The input data should be assigned to one or several variables. Each item of data
should be separated from the next item by a comma. The number of data items
entered must correspond to the number of variables in the list, or an error condition
occurs. The variables may be any mix of string variables and numeric variables, but
the type of input data must agree with the type of the variable to which the data is
assigned.
Input can also be done directly to the system variables TIME$, DATE$, and SYSVAR.
The maximum number of characters that can be read using an INPUT statement is
32,767 characters.

Notes
INPUT filters out any incoming ASCII 00 decimal characters (NUL). INPUT does not
support autohunting (see SETSTDIO).

Example 1
This example shows input to one numeric variable and one string variable:
10 INPUT "ADDRESS";A%,B$
20 PRINT A%;" ";B$
30 IF A% > 0 THEN GOTO 50
40 GOTO 10
50 END
RUN
This results in:
ADDRESS?
When the prompt "ADDRESS?" appears on the screen, you can type the input data on
the host keyboard:
999, HILL STREET
Note the separating comma. If the input text data contains a comma to be printed,
enclose the input data with quotation marks ("...."):
999, "HILL STREET, HILLSBOROUGH"
Numeric input data must not include any decimal points.

Example 2
This example shows how the date can be set directly from the host keyboard:
INPUT "Enter date: ",DATE$
This results in:

128 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Enter date:
When the prompt "Enter date:" appears on the host screen, you can type the date as a
six-digit combination of year, month and day (see DATE$ variable). Time can also be
set using the same method.

INPUT ON/OFF
Purpose
Enables or disables the Direct Protocol (disabled by default).

Syntax
INPUT ON|OFF

Notes
INPUT ON enables the Direct Protocol, which does the following:
l Enables reception of input data to a stored layout
l Enables the error handler
l Disables verbosity (SYSVAR (18) = 0)
l Shows "Direct Protocol" in the printer Ready screen (if the printer is set up to show
the command language)
INPUT OFF disables the Direct Protocol.
The following commands are supported only by Direct Protocol (after an INPUT ON
statement has been executed): COUNT&, ERROR, FORMAT INPUT, INPUT OFF,
LAYOUT END, and LAYOUT RUN.

Example
This example illustrates how to enable Direct Protocol, specify new separators, store a
layout in printer memory, combine variable data with the layout, print a label, and
disable Direct Protocol:
INPUT ON
FORMAT INPUT "#","@","&"
LAYOUT INPUT "tmp:LABEL1"
FT "Univers"
PP 100,250
PT VAR1$
PP 100,200
PT VAR2$
LAYOUT END
LAYOUT RUN "tmp:LABEL1"
#Line number 1&Line number 2&@
PF
INPUT OFF

Fingerprint Command Reference 129

INPUT#
Purpose
Reads a string of data from an OPEN device or sequential file.

Syntax
INPUT#<nexp>,<<nvar>|<svar>>[,<<nvar>|<svar>>...]

Parameters
<nexp>
The number assigned to the file or device when it is opened using the OPEN
command.
<<nvar>|<svar>>
Variable to which the input data will be assigned.

Notes
This statement resembles INPUT, but allows the input to come from other files, or
devices other than the standard IN channel. Like INPUT, commas can be used to
assign different portions of the input to different variables. INPUT# does not allow
prompts to be used.

When reading from a sequential file, the records can be read one after the other by
the repeating INPUT# with the same file reference.

Once a file record has been read, it cannot be read again until the file is closed using
the CLOSE command and then opened using the OPEN command.

INPUT # can access updated information in a file only if the file is OPENed, written to,
and then CLOSEd.

The maximum number of characters that can be read using an INPUT# statement is
32,767. INPUT# filters out any incoming ASCII 00 decimal characters (NUL).

Example
This example assigns data from the first record in the sequential file "Addresses" to
the three string variables A$, B$, and C$, and from the second record in the same file
to the string variables D$ and E$:
.....
.....
100 OPEN "ADDRESSES" FOR INPUT AS #5
110 INPUT#5, A$, B$, C$
120 INPUT#5, D$, E$
.....
.....

130 Fingerprint Command Reference

INPUT$
Purpose
Returns a limited-length data string from the standard IN channel (or optionally from
a file or device opened using the OPEN command).

Syntax
INPUT$(<nexp1>[,<nexp2>])

Parameters
<nexp1>
Number of characters to be read.
<nexp2>
(Optional) Specifies a file or device using the number assigned to it when it is opened
using the OPEN command.

Notes
If no file or device is specified, the input comes from the standard IN channel. For
more information, see SETSTDIO.

Otherwise, input comes from the specified file or device. The execution is held until
the specified number of characters have been received from the keyboard console,
file, or communication channel. If a file does not contain the specified number of
characters, execution is resumed as soon as all available characters in the file have
been received.

The maximum number of characters that can be returned using an INPUT$ statement
is 65,536 characters.

Example 1
This example reads a sequence of 25 characters from the printer built-in keyboard
and assigns them to a string variable named Z$:
.....
.....
1000 OPEN "CONSOLE:" FOR INPUT AS #1
1010 Z$=INPUT$(25,1)
.....
.....

Example 2
In this example, 10 characters are read from the standard IN channel and assigned to
a variable:
10 A$=INPUT$(10)

Fingerprint Command Reference 131

INSTR
Purpose
Searches a specified string for a certain character or sequence of characters, and
returns its position relative to the start of the string.

Syntax
INSTR([<nexp>,]<sexp1>,<sexp2>)

Parameters
<nexp>
(Optional) Position where the search will start.
<sexp1>
String to be searched.
<sexp2>
Character(s) for which the string is searched.

Notes
Optionally, it is possible to specify a certain position in the string from which the
search will start. If no start position is specified, the search starts at the beginning of
the string. The result is zero if:
l the start position value exceeds the length of the string.
l the string is empty.
l the searched combination of characters cannot be found.

Example 1
In this example, the string "INTERMEC_PRINTER_AB" is searched for the character
combination "AB". No start position is specified.
10 A$="INTERMEC PRINTER AB"
20 B$="AB"
30 PRINT INSTR(A$,B$)
RUN
This results in:
18

Example 2
In this example, the string "INTERMEC_PRINTER_AB" is searched for the character "I"
and the start position is specified as 4.
10 A$="INTERMEC PRINTER AB"
20 B$="I"

132 Fingerprint Command Reference

 30 PRINT INSTR(4,A$,B$)
RUN
This results in:
12

INVIMAGE
Purpose
Inverts the printing of text and images from "black-on-white" to "white-on-black."
This command can be abbreviated as II.

Syntax
INVIMAGE
or
II

Notes
Reset to default by executing PRINTFEED.

INVIMAGE can only be used in connection with the printing of text and images
(PRTXT and PRIMAGE). In the matrix of the font or image, all "white" dots will be black
and all black dots will be "white." Not all fonts are suited for inverse printing. Thin
lines, serifs, and ornaments may be difficult to distinguish. There may also be an
imbalance between the ascending and descending black background.

The same principles apply to images. The normally invisible background may be larger
than expected or be less favorably balanced. Small "white" details tend to be blurred
out by the black background. Therefore, before using an inverse image, make a
printout sample. INVIMAGE is revoked by a NORIMAGE statement.

Example
10 PRPOS 30,300
20 DIR 1
30 ALIGN 4
40 INVIMAGE
50 FONT "Univers"
60 PRTXT "Inverse printing"
70 PRINTFEED
RUN

Fingerprint Command Reference 133

KEY BEEP
Purpose
Resets the frequency and duration of the sound produced by the printer when any of
the keys on the printer keyboard are pressed.

Syntax
KEY BEEP<nexp1>,<nexp2>

Parameters
<nexp1>
Frequency of the sound in Hz (maximum value 9999, a higher value will be ignored
and give no sound).
<nexp2>
Duration of the sound in periods of 0.020 seconds each (no maximum limit).

Notes
This statement sets the response for all keys of the printer. To turn off the audible key
response, set the frequency to a value higher than 9999. A value higher than 9999 (no
sound) is the default behavior for KEY BEEP.
The table below illustrates the relation between frequencies and the musical scale
(same as in the SOUND statement).

Frequency in Hz

Pitch 1st octave 2nd octave 3rd octave 4th octave

C 131 262 523 1047

C#/Db 138 277 554 1109
D 147 294 587 1175
D#/Eb 155 311 622 1245
E 165 330 659 1319
F 175 349 699 1397
F#/Gb 185 370 740 1480
G 196 392 784 1568
G#/Ab 208 415 831 1662
A 220 440 880 1760

134 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Frequency in Hz

Pitch 1st octave 2nd octave 3rd octave 4th octave

A#/Bb 233 466 933 1865

B 247 494 988 1976

Note that C in the 2nd octave (262 Hz) corresponds to "middle C."

Example
In this example, the beeper produces a concert "A" for one second each time a key is
pressed down.
10 KEY BEEP 440,50
.....
.....

KEY ON/OFF
Purpose
Enables or disables a specified key on the printer front panel, to be used in
connection with an ON KEY...GOSUB statement.

Syntax
KEY(<nexp>)ON|OFF

Parameters
<nexp>
ID number of one of the keys on the printer front panel.
ON|OFF
Disables or enables the specified key.

Notes
Using an ON KEY... GOSUB statement, any key (except the Shift key) can be assigned
to make the program branch to a subroutine when pressed. The keys are enabled or
disabled individually and are specified by means of their respective ID numbers in
unshifted and shifted positions. To specify a shifted key, add 100 to the unshifted ID
number of the key.

ID numbers of the keys are not the same as the ASCII values they produce when
pressed. For more information, see KEYBMAP$.

For more information about printer keypad layouts, see Printer Keypad Layouts.

Fingerprint Command Reference 135

Example
In this example, the left arrow key (F1, ID number 10) is first enabled and then used to
branch to a subroutine, and finally disabled. Each time you press F1, a label is printed.
10 ON KEY (10) GOSUB 1000
20 KEY (10) ON
30 GOTO 30
.....
.....
.....
1000 FONT "Swiss 721 BT"
1010 PRPOS 30,100
1020 PRTXT "HELLO"
1030 PRINTFEED
1040 END
RUN

KEYBMAP$
Purpose
Returns or sets the mapping for a button on the printer front panel, if the printer has
keyboard buttons.

Syntax
To read the mapping for a key button:
<svar> = KEYBMAP$(<nexp>)
To set the mapping for a key button:
KEYBMAP$(<nexp>) = <sexp>

Parameters
<svar>
Returns the keyboard mapping string.
<nexp>
Type of keys to be returned or remapped:
0: Shift key not activated (64 characters)
1: Shift key activated (64 characters)
<sexp>
String specifying the ASCII value for each key position in the selected type of string.

Notes
In principle, each physical key can produce two different ASCII values: one in
unshifted position, and another in shifted position. One key is specified as Shift. When
Shift is pressed at the same time as another key, the unshifted ASCII value of the
second key is increased by 128.

136 Fingerprint Command Reference

 You can use KEYBMAP$ to:
l Read the keyboard mapping based on whether Shift is activated. The printer returns
a string of ASCII values in ascending key position number. Because many keys
return non-printable ASCII values (ASCII 00 to ASCII 31 decimal), not all are
returned to the host screen or printed on a label.
l Change the keyboard mapping. You can change the mapping of the keyboard so a
key produces a different ASCII value than before. To do so, create a string which spe-
cifies the ASCII value for each of all 64 unshifted, shifted, or Alt-initiated key pos-
itions in ascending order. Regardless of what the keyboard looks like, there are
always 64 theoretical key positions.
Characters that cannot be produced by the host keyboard can be substituted by CHR$
functions, where the character is specified by its ASCII decimal value according to the
character set selected by NASC. Key positions which should be disabled or are not
included in the physical keyboard can be mapped as NUL, using the function
CHR$(0). Note that the position of Shift cannot be remapped.
In Setup mode, the keys have fixed positions and are not affected by KEYBMAP$.
The KEYBMAP variable is reset each time the printer is restarted or the power is
cycled.
For more information about printer keypad layouts, see Printer Keypad Layouts.

Example
10 B$=CHR$(1)+STRING$(4,0)+CHR$(2)+ STRING$(4,0)+CHR$(3)
20 B$=B$+STRING$(4,0)+CHR$(4)+STRING$(4,0)+ CHR$(5)+STRING$(9,0)
30 B$=B$+CHR$(13)+CHR$(28)+CHR$(29)+CHR$(30)+ STRING$(6,0)
40 B$=B$+.147"+CHR$(0)+"0258"+CHR$(0)+CHR$(8)+"369"+CHR$(0)+(CHR$(31)
50 KEYBMAP$(0)=B$
RUN

KILL
Purpose
Deletes a file, directory, or complete directory sub-trees from the printer memory or
from external memory (such as a USB storage device).

Syntax
KILL<sexp>[,R[,A]]

Parameters
<sexp>
File or directory to be deleted.
R
Recursively removes all non-system files in the specified sub-tree and then removes
all empty directories in the same sub-tree.

Fingerprint Command Reference 137

 A
(Optional) Removes all files including system files.

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

The name of the file to be deleted must match the name given when the file was
saved and must include the extension. If no extension was entered manually when the
file was SAVEd, the extension ".PRG" is added automatically.

To KILL a file residing in a directory other than the current one, include a reference to
the directory in question when you specify the file (for example, "d:<filename>.XYZ").

KILL cannot be used for files residing in "rom:". A directory cannot be removed if it
contains files or directories unless the R flag is included in the KILL statement.
Otherwise error 1073 ("Directory not empty") occurs.

A trailing slash character (/) may be added to directory names but is not necessary.

The A and R flags are only applicable when removing directories, or error 1034 ("Not a
directory") occurs.

The current directory may be removed (for example KILL CURDIR$,R), but the root
directory of a device cannot be removed. The current directory is not changed after
such a command, but is invalid. A successful CHDIR statement is necessary to restore
the current directory to one that exists (CHDIR ".." may not work).

Example
10 ON ERROR GOTO 1000
20 CHDIR("/c")
30 MKDIR "DIR1" : 'Create the directory DIR1
40 FILES
50 COPY "STDIO", "DIR1" : 'Copy STDIO into DIR1
60 FILES "DIR1" : 'List files in DIR1
70 KILL "DIR1" : 'Try to remove DIR1
80 KILL "DIR1",R : 'Remove the directory recursively
90 FILES
100 END
1000 PRINT "error number "; ERR;"in line ";ERL
1010 RESUME NEXT
RUN
Here are the results of this example:

Files on /c
Dir1/ 0 APPLICATION 0

138 Fingerprint Command Reference

 boot/ 0 ADMIN/ 0
STDIO 4

22210562 bytes free 4 bytes used

STDIO 4
2220032 bytes free 4 bytes used
Error number 1073 in line 70
Files on /c

APPLICATION 0 boot/ 0
ADMIN/ 0 STDIO 4

2222080 bytes free 4 bytes used

LAYOUT
Purpose
Handles layout files.

Syntax
LAYOUT[F,] <sexp1>,<sexp2>,<svar>|<sexp3>,<nvar>|<sexp4>

Parameters
F
(Optional) Allows use of data and error files instead of arrays.
<sexp1>
Layout file.
<sexp2>
Logotype name file.
<svar>|<sexp3>
Data array (<svar>) or data file (<sexp3>).
<nvar>|<sexp4>
Error array (<nvar>) or error file (<sexp4>).

Fingerprint Command Reference 139

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.
The next table lists the format elements of a layout file in ascending order by bytes.
Input: H = hex digit, D = Numeric digit, C = Alpha character

Byte Layout
Parameter Input Notes
# Type

0-1 Element number HH

2 Layout type: C for all See Note 1
layout types
A - Logotype by name
B - Barcode
C - Text
E - Barcode extended field
H - Barfont on/off
J - Baradjust
L - Logotype by number
S - Line
X - Box
3 Direction A, B, C, D
L, S, X D
Barfont on/off: 0: off, 1: on
H D
Security
E
4 Alignment A, B, C, D
Aspect height ratio L, S, X D
E
Barfont alignment D
H
5-8 X-position A, B, C, DDDD
Aspect width ratio L, S, X D
Baradjust left E DDDD

Horizontal offset J CDDD

140 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Byte Layout
Parameter Input Notes
# Type

9-12 Y-position A, B, C, DDDD

Rows in barcode L, S, X D
Baradjust right E DDDD
J
Vertical offset CDDD
H
13- Font name C C (up to 10 chars) See Note 2
22 Logotype name A C (up to 10 chars)
Barcode name B C (up to 10 chars)
Barfont name H C (up to 10 chars)
Line length S DDDD
Box width X DDDD
Columns in barcode E DD
Truncate according to code specs E D Byte 13-14
Byte 15
23- Fixed text or alphanumeric data B or C C (up to 20 chars)
42 Fixed numeric data B D (up to 20 chars)
Logotype number L DD
Box height X DDDD
Line thickness S DDDD

Character set D DDDDD or C (up to

20 characters)
43- Number of chars to print from B or C DD
44 bytes 23-42
45- Image type (I = inverse image) A, C, L C
46 Barcode ratio (wide:narrow bars) B DD
47 Vertical magnification A, C, L D or C See Note 3
Barcode magnification B D or C See Note 3
48 Horizontal magnification A, C, L D
49- Barcode height B DDD
51 Line thickness X DDD

The barcode extended field record (I) corresponds to the six last parameters in the
BARSET statement. Must have a lower element number than the corresponding
barcode record (B), which specifies the other barcode parameters.
The horizontal and vertical offset of BARFONT can be a positive or negative value. For
negative values, the '-' sign must be defined in Byte 5 or Byte 9, or the offset is treated
as a positive value.

Fingerprint Command Reference 141

 The font name length in the LAYOUT statement must be exactly 10 characters.
Because most font names in Fingerprint are longer, use font name aliases that are
exactly 10 characters long.
If a magnification of 0-9 is sufficient, enter a numeric digit. If a higher magnification
than 9 is required, enter the character with the ASCII decimal number that
corresponds to the desired magnification minus 48. For example, if magnification 10
is desired, enter the character: (colon, ASCII 58 decimal).

Logotype name file format #1

Record 1–n, 10 bytes each. No embedded spaces in name.
C1...C10 Name for logotype 1
...
...
C1...C10 Name for logotype n

Logotype name file format #2

Record 1…–n, 13 bytes each. Records sorted in ascending logotype number order.
DD Logotype number (2 digits)
C Always ":" (colon). Separator. Distinguishes format 2.
C1...C10 Name of logotype (10 characters)
Logotype name file formats #1 and #2 are alternative.

Data array/file format

One array position/One file line. Sorted in ascending order.
HH Element number
C1...Cn Data
If a data element cannot be used in the layout, an error occurs. The index of the
unused element and error code -1 are placed in the error array/file.

Error array/file format

Sorted in ascending order.
Array position/File line 0: Record number for error 1
Array position/File line 1: Error number for error 1
...
...
Array position/File line 2n-2: Record number for error n
Array position/File line 2n-1: Error number for error n
To improve performance, Honeywell recommends that you create the layout and
logotype name files in the printer temporary memory ("tmp:"). Once they have been
created in "tmp:", they can be copied to the printer permanent memory to avoid losing
them at power off.
Note: Do not confuse this statement with the statements LAYOUT INPUT, LAYOUT END, and LAYOUT
RUN.

142 Fingerprint Command Reference

Example
Note that the 10 characters available to define a font in the LAYOUT statement in
most cases cannot accommodate modern outline font names. Instead, use font
aliases as seen in lines 90–120 and 150:
10 DIM QERR%(10)
20 LAYDATA$(0)="01DAY"
30 LAYDATA$(1)="04123456789012"
40 QERR%(0)=0
50 OPEN "tmp:LOGNAME.DAT" FOR OUTPUT AS 19
60 PRINT# 19,"DIAMONDS.1";
70 CLOSE 19
80 OPEN "tmp:LAYOUT.DAT" FOR OUTPUT AS 6
90 PRINT# 6,"01C11100 10 font alias 00I 11 ";
100 PRINT# 6,"01C11100 40 font alias 00 22 ";
110 PRINT# 6,"01C11100 100 font aliasWEDNES 06I 11 ";
120 PRINT# 6,"01C11100 130 font aliasSATURNUS 05I 11 ";
130 PRINT# 6,"02L11300 70 1 33 ";
140 PRINT# 6,"03S11100 210 300 3 ";
150 PRINT# 6,"04H1 font alias ";
160 PRINT# 6,"04B14100 300 EAN13 0 312 100";
170 CLOSE 6
180 LAYOUT "tmp:LAYOUT.DAT","tmp:LOGNAME.DAT",LAYDATA$,QERR%
190 IF QERR% (1) = 0 THEN GOTO 260
200 PRINT "-ERROR- LAYOUT 1"
210 I%=0
220 IF QERR%(I%)=0 THEN GOTO 260
230 PRINT " ERROR ";QERR%(I%+1);" in record ";QERR%(I%)
240 I%=I%+2
250 GOTO 220
260 PRINTFEED

LAYOUT END
Purpose
Stops the recording of a layout description and saves the layout. Supported only by
Direct Protocol.

Syntax
LAYOUT END

Notes
LAYOUT END can only be used in the Direct Protocol, and only after a layout has been
recorded by LAYOUT INPUT. After LAYOUT END, no more data is added to the layout.

By default, the layout is saved in the printer permanent memory ("/c"). To speed up
execution the layout can be saved in the temporary memory (see LAYOUT INPUT
statement). The layout can be copied and killed as with any program file.

Fingerprint Command Reference 143

Example
This example illustrates how to enable Direct Protocol, specify new separators, store a
layout in the printer temporary memory, combine variable data with the layout, print a
label, and disable Direct Protocol:
INPUT ON
FORMAT INPUT "#","@","&"
LAYOUT INPUT "tmp:LABEL1"
FT "Univers"
PP 100,250
PT VAR1$
PP 100,200
PT VAR2$
LAYOUT END
LAYOUT RUN "tmp:LABEL1"
#Line number 1&Line number 2&@
PF
INPUT OFF

LAYOUT INPUT
Purpose
Starts the recording of a layout description. Supported only by Direct Protocol.

Syntax
LAYOUT INPUT <sexp>

Parameters
<sexp>
Desired name of the layout (maximum 30 characters). Includes the name of the
device where the layout is to be stored.

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

LAYOUT INPUT can only be used in the Direct Protocol and starts the recording of a
layout. After sending a LAYOUT INPUT command, all formatting instructions (such as
PRPOS, MAG, FONT, BARFONT, BARSET, PRTXT, PRBAR, PRIMAGE, PRBOX, PRLINE,
and so on) sent to the printer before a LAYOUT END statement are included in the
layout.

Honeywell recommends that you create layouts in the printer temporary memory, or a
USB storage device. Once a layout has been created in the temporary memory, it can
be copied to permanent storage so it will not be lost after you restart the printer.

Variable input data to text, barcode, and image fields can be provided separately
using LAYOUT RUN. Such variable data are indicated in the layout by string variables

144 Fingerprint Command Reference

 VARn$ where n is the number of the field in the LAYOUT RUN string of data. For
example, the statement PRTXT "Hello" in the layout results in a fixed text, whereas the
statement PRTXT VAR1$ results in a variable text provided by the first field in a
LAYOUT RUN string.

The layout must not contain any PRINTFEED statements and is not saved until a
LAYOUT END statement is executed.

Example
This example illustrates how to enable Direct Protocol, specify new separators, store a
layout in the printer temporary memory, combine variable data with the layout, print a
label, and disable Direct Protocol:
INPUT ON
FORMAT INPUT "#","@","&"
LAYOUT INPUT "tmp:LABEL1"
FT "Univers"
PP 100,250
PT VAR1$
PP 100,200
PT VAR2$
LAYOUT END
LAYOUT RUN "tmp:LABEL1"
#Line number 1&Line number 2&@
PF
INPUT OFF

LAYOUT RUN
Purpose
Provides variable input data to a predefined layout. Supported only by Direct Protocol.

Syntax
LAYOUT RUN <sexp>

Parameters
<sexp>
Name of the layout (as specified by LAYOUT INPUT).

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

LAYOUT RUN can only be used in the Direct Protocol and selects a predefined layout
in a specified part of the printer memory. This command can also provide input to
string variables in the layout. Such variables are indicated by VARn$, where n
indicates a field in the string of data that should follow the LAYOUT RUN statement.

Fingerprint Command Reference 145

 The string of input data is composed according to the following syntax, where <Srec>
is the start-of-record string, <Efld> is the end-of-field string and <Erec> is the end-of-
record string (as defined in FORMAT INPUT):
l <Srec><input to VAR1$><Efld><input to VAR2$><Efld>&ldots;<input to
VARn$><Efld><Erec>
l Note that every field must end with the end-of-field string, including the last field.
l Before reverting to normal Fingerprint printing after using variable data (LAYOUT
INPUT, LAYOUT END, and LAYOUT RUN), clear the data using LAYOUT RUN with an
empty string (LAYOUT RUN " ").

Example
This example illustrates how to enable Direct Protocol, specify new delimiting strings,
store a layout in the printer temporary memory, combine variable data with the layout,
print a label, and disable Direct Protocol:
INPUT OFF
FORMAT INPUT "#","@","&"
INPUT ON
LAYOUT INPUT "tmp:LABEL1"
FT "Univers"
PP 100,250
PT VAR1$
PP 100,200
PT VAR2$
LAYOUT END
LAYOUT RUN "tmp:LABEL1"
#Line number 1&Line number 2&@
PF
INPUT OFF

LBLCOND
Purpose
Overrides the media feed setup.

Syntax
LBLCOND<nexp1>,<nexp2>|<nexp3>

Parameters
<nexp1>
Specifies the type of action:
0: Override the stop adjust.
1: Override the start adjust.
2: Turn off the Label Stop Sensor/Black Mark Sensor.
3: Select the mode specified by <nexp3>.

146 Fingerprint Command Reference

 <nexp2>
Specifies <nexp1> = 0, 1, or 2 as a number of dots.
<nexp3>
Specifies one of the following modes:
0: Legacy mode
1: IPL mode
2: Gap Truncate mode
Default is LBLCOND 3,2.

Notes
LBLCOND allows you to override the printer’s feed-adjust setup or to temporarily
disable the label stop sensor or black mark sensor.

<nexp1> = 0 temporarily sets the stop adjust to the value specified by <nexp2>.

<nexp1> = 1 temporarily sets the start adjust to the value specified by <nexp2>.

<nexp1> = 2 makes the label stop sensor (LSS) or black mark sensor temporarily
ignore any gaps or marks detected within the length of media feed specified by
<nexp2>. However, the label length must be greater than the distance between the
LSS and the tear bar (if not, use LBLCOND 3,xx). This allows the use of labels of such
shapes that would make the LSS react prematurely, or tickets with preprint at the
back of the media that would interfere with the detection of the black mark.
<nexp1> = 3 is useful as an alternative to LBLCOND 2,xx when the length of the label
or ticket is shorter than the distance between the LSS and the tear bar, making it
possible to select one of the modes specified by <nexp3>:
l Legacy mode (<nexp3> = 0): If the print image is longer than the physical length of
the label or ticket, the print image will extend into the next label until the media feed
stops according to the stop adjust setup (for example, when the gap becomes
aligned with the tear bar). This means that the print image may be truncated, the
next label may have to be discarded, and some of the print image may coincide with
a gap or slot. This mode was called "Default mode" in earlier versions of Fingerprint.
l IPL mode (<nexp3> = 1): If the print image is longer than the physical length of the
label or ticket, the print image will extend into the following labels) until the entire
print image has been printed. Then the media is fed out to the next gap or mark
according to the stop adjust setup. This means that the print image will not be trun-
cated but may extend into one or more consecutive labels, and some of the print
image may coincide with gaps or slots.
l Gap Truncate mode (<nexp3> = 2): If the print image is longer than the physical
length of the label or ticket, only the part of the print image that fits on the label or
ticket will be printed and the remainder will be ignored. This means that some of the
print image may not be printed at all, but the following labels will not be affected.
Verifying a start adjust or stop adjust value in the Setup mode by pressing key
number 16 (normally labeled "Enter"), or by setting the value using a setup file or
setup string, evokes any LBLCOND statement for the parameter in question.

Fingerprint Command Reference 147

 The label stop sensor is returned to normal operation by the statement:
LBLCOND 2,0
All current LBLCOND statements are revoked at startup or after you run a REBOOT
command. This means that the start and stop adjust are decided by the setup and the
label stop sensor works normally.

Example
In this example, the start adjust value in the setup mode is overridden and the label
stop sensor is set to ignore any gaps in the web within 20 mm (160 dots at 8
dots/mm; 240 dots at 12 dots/mm) of media feed:
10 LBLCOND 1,5: LBLCOND 2,160
20 FONT "Univers"
30 PRTXT "Hello"
40 PRINTFEED
RUN

LED ON/OFF
Purpose
This command specifies the behavior of the printer status LEDs. This command is
applicable only for the PC23d, PC43d, PC43t, PM23c, PM43, and PM43c icon model
printers.

Syntax
LED<nexp>ON|OFF|BLINK

Parameters
Where the values for <nexp> are as follows:

nexp LED

0 Data transfer
1 Error
2 Warning
3 Paper error
4 Ribbon error
5 Printhead lifted
6 Overheat
7 Configuration error

148 Fingerprint Command Reference

 nexp LED

8 Pause
9 Maintenance
nexp LED
0 Data transfer
1 Error
2 Warning
3 Paper error
4 Ribbon error
5 Printhead lifted
6 Overheat
7 Configuration error
8 Pause
9 Maintenance

Notes
The LED starts blinking when data is received on the standard input channel, and
stays lit when the channel has been silent for 0.8 seconds. The LED does not blink
during data transfer on PM23c, PM43, or PM43c printers.

Under Direct Protocol, the LED can also be affected by the error handler. See ERROR
for more information.

If the DATA IN flag is set with the BLINK mode, reception of data on the standard
input channel controls whether the LED blinks or is switched off.

For more information about icon layouts for your printer, see Printer Keypad Layouts.

LEFT$
Purpose
Returns a specified number of characters from the start (the extreme left side) of a
given string.

Syntax
LEFT$(<sexp>,<nexp>)

Fingerprint Command Reference 149

Parameters
<sexp>
String from which the characters will be returned.

<nexp>
Number of characters to be returned.

Notes
LEFT$ is the complementary function for RIGHT$. If the number of characters to be
returned is greater than the number of characters in the string, then the entire string
is returned. If the number of characters is set to zero, a null string is returned.

Example 1
10 PRINT LEFT$("THERMAL PRINTER",7)
RUN
This results in:
THERMAL

Example 2
10 A$="THERMAL PRINTER":B$="LABEL"
20 PRINT LEFT$(A$,8);LEFT$(B$,10);"S"
RUN
This results in:
THERMAL LABELS

LEN
Purpose
Returns the number of character positions in a string.

Syntax
LEN(<sexp>)

Parameters
<sexp>
String from which the number of characters will be returned.

Notes
The number of characters to be returned includes unprintable characters.

150 Fingerprint Command Reference

Example 1
In this example, lines 40 and 50 illustrate two ways of using the LEN function to add
up the number of characters from several string expressions.
10 A$="INTERMEC" : '8 char.
20 B$="THERMAL" : '7 char.
30 C$="PRINTERS" : '8 char.
40 PRINT LEN(A$+B$+C$)
50 PRINT LEN(A$)+LEN(B$)+LEN(C$)
RUN
This results in:
23
23

Example 2
This example demonstrates that unprintable characters (such as space characters)
are included in the value returned by the LEN function:
PRINT LEN("INTERMEC THERMAL PRINTERS")
This results in:
25

LET
Purpose
Assigns the value of an expression to a variable.

Syntax
[LET]<<nvar>=<nexp>>|<<svar>=<sexp>>

Parameters
<nvar>
Numeric variable to which a value will be assigned.
<nexp>
Numeric expression from which the value will be assigned to the numeric variable.
Or,
<svar>
String variable to which the content of the string expression will be assigned.
<sexp>
String expression from which content will be assigned to the string variable.

Fingerprint Command Reference 151

Notes
LET is retained for compatibility with previous versions of Fingerprint. The equal sign
(=) is sufficient to make the assignment. Both the expression and the variable most be
either string or numeric.

Example
10 LET A%=100 : 'numeric variable
20 B%=150 : 'numeric variable
30 LET C$="INTERMEC" : 'string variable
40 D$="THERMAL PRINTERS" : 'string variable
50 PRINT A%+B%,C$+" "+D$
RUN
This results in:
250 INTERMEC THERMAL PRINTERS

LINE INPUT
Purpose
Assigns an entire line, including punctuation marks, from the standard IN channel to
a single string variable.

Syntax
LINE INPUT[<scon>;]<svar>

Parameters
<scon>;
(Optional) Prompt plus a semicolon.
<svar>
String variable to which the input line is assigned.

Notes
For information on the standard I/O channel, see SETSTDIO.
LINE INPUT differs from INPUT in that an entire line of up to 32,767 characters is
read. Possible commas appear as punctuation marks in the string instead of dividing
the line into portions.
During the execution of a program, LINE INPUT interrupts execution. You can create a
prompt for the host screen that notifies the operator when a program is expecting
additional data to be entered. The input is terminated and the program execution
resumes when a carriage return character (ASCII 13 decimal) is received.
The carriage return character will not be included in the input line. Note that LINE
INPUT filters out any incoming ASCII 00 decimal characters (NUL).

152 Fingerprint Command Reference

Example
Print your own visiting card like this:
10 LINE INPUT "ENTER NAME: ";A$
20 LINE INPUT "ENTER STREET: ";B$
30 LINE INPUT "ENTER CITY: ";C$
40 LINE INPUT "ENTER STATE + ZIPCODE: ";D$
50 LINE INPUT "ENTER PHONE NO: ";E$
60 FONT "Univers", 8
70 ALIGN 5
80 PRPOS 160,300:PRTXT A$
90 PRPOS 160,250:PRTXT B$
100 PRPOS 160,200:PRTXT C$
110 PRPOS 160,150:PRTXT D$
120 PRPOS 160,100:PRTXT "Phone: "+E$
130 PRINTFEED
RUN

LINE INPUT#
Purpose
Assigns an entire line, including punctuation marks, from a sequential file or a device
to a single string variable.

Syntax
LINE INPUT#<nexp>,<svar>

Parameters
<nexp>
Number assigned to the file when it is opened using the OPEN command.
<svar>
String variable to which the input line is assigned.

Notes
This statement differs from the INPUT# statement in that an entire line of up to
32,767 characters will be read, and possible commas in the line are included in the
string as punctuation marks.

The lines can be read one after the other by repeating the LINE INPUT# statement
using the same file reference. Once a line has been read, it cannot be read again until
the file is closed using the CLOSE command and then opened using the OPEN
command.

LINE INPUT# is useful when the lines in a file have been broken into fields.

LINE INPUT# filters out any incoming ASCII 00 decimal characters (NUL).

Fingerprint Command Reference 153

Example
This example assigns data from the three first lines of the file "Addresses" to the string
variables A$, B$, and C$ respectively:
.....
.....
100 OPEN "ADDRESSES" FOR INPUT AS #5
110 LINE INPUT# 5, A$
120 LINE INPUT# 5, B$
130 LINE INPUT# 5, C$
.....
.....

LIST
Purpose
Lists the current program completely or partially, or lists all variables, to the standard
OUT channel.

Syntax
LIST[[<ncon1>[–<ncon2>]] | ,V | ,B]

Parameters
<ncon1>
Single line, or the first line number in a range of lines.
<ncon2>
Optionally the last line number in a range of lines.
,V
Lists all variables.
,B
Lists all breakpoints.

Notes
Protected applications cannot be listed. For more information on protecting an
application, see SAVE.

LIST is useful after LOADing a program, if you have changed or renumbered lines, or
added new lines and want to bring some order to the presentation on the screen of
the host. LIST also removes unnecessary characters and adds assumed keywords.
LIST is usually given in Immediate mode (on a line without a preceding line number).
The LIST statement can be used in several different ways:
l If no line number is entered after LIST, the entire current program is listed. If the pro-
gram has been written without line numbers (see IMMEDIATE), the lines are

154 Fingerprint Command Reference

 automatically numbered in 10-step increments starting with 10 (10-20-30-40-50
and so on).
l If a single line number is entered after LIST, only the specified line is listed.
l If a line number followed by a hyphen (-) is entered after LIST, all lines from the spe-
cified line to the end of the program are listed.
l If a hyphen (-) followed by line number is entered after LIST, all lines from the start
of the program through the specified line are listed.
l If two line numbers are entered after LIST, they specify the first and last lines in a
range of lines to be listed.
l If LIST,V is entered, all integer variables, integer array variables, string variables, and
string array variables in the printer memory are listed.
l If LIST,B is entered, all breakpoints of the Fingerprint Debugger (see DBBREAK) are
printed in line number order. Line labels that have not been updated (which occurs
at program execution) may be misplaced.

Examples
LIST : 'Lists all lines in the program.
LIST 100 : 'Lists line 100 only.

LIST 100- : 'Lists all lines from line 100 to the end of the program.

LIST -500 : 'Lists all lines from the start through line 500.

LIST,V : 'Lists all variables.

LIST,B : 'Lists all breakpoints.

LISTPFSVAR
Purpose
Lists variables saved at power failure.

Syntax
LISTPFSVAR

Notes
Related instructions are SETPFSVAR, GETPFSVAR, and DELETEPFSVAR.

Example
LISTPFSVAR
This results in:

Fingerprint Command Reference 155

 QS$
QCPS%
A%

LOAD
Purpose
Loads a copy of a program into the printer working memory.

Syntax
LOAD<scon>

Parameters
<scon>
Program to be loaded into the working memory.

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

If the program has the extension .PRG, the name of the program can be given with or
without an extension. Otherwise, the extension must be included in the name. If the
program resides in another directory than the current one (see CHDIR), the name
must also contain a reference to the directory in question.

LOAD closes any open files and deletes all program lines and variables residing in the
working memory before loading the specified program. If the previous program in the
working memory has not been saved, it is lost and cannot be retrieved.

While the program is loaded, a syntax check is performed. If a syntax error is detected,
loading is interrupted and an error message is transmitted on the standard OUT
channel.

Example 1
This example loads the program "LABEL127.PRG" from the current directory:
LOAD "LABEL127"
or
LOAD "LABEL127.PRG"
When "Ok" appears on the screen, the LOAD is complete. Use LIST to display the
program on the host screen.

Example 2
This example shows how to specify a directory other than the current one:
LOAD "/rom/MKAUTO.PRG"

156 Fingerprint Command Reference

 or
LOAD "d:PROGRAM1.PRG"
This creates a copy, which you can list or change and then save under a new name.

LOC
Purpose
Returns the current position in a file opened with the OPEN command, or returns the
status of the buffers in an OPEN communication channel.

Syntax
LOC(<nexp>)

Parameters
<nexp>
Number assigned to the file or communication channel when is opened using the
OPEN command.

Notes
In a random file, LOC returns the number of the last record read by a GET statement
or written by a PUT statement.

In a sequential file, LOC returns the number of 128-byte blocks that have been read
or written since the file is opened using the OPEN command.
LOC also checks the receive or transmit buffer of the specified communication
channel:
l If a channel is opened for INPUT using the OPEN command, the remaining number
of characters (bytes) to be read from the receive buffer is returned.
l If a channel is opened for OUTPUT using the OPEN command, the remaining free
space (bytes) in the transmit buffer is returned.
The number of bytes includes characters that will be MAPped as NUL.

Example 1
This example closes the file "addresses" when record 100 has been read from the file:
10 OPEN "ADDRESSES" FOR INPUT AS #1
.....
.....
.....
200 IF LOC(1)=100 THEN CLOSE #1
.....
.....

Fingerprint Command Reference 157

Example 2
This example reads the number of bytes remaining to be received from the receive
buffer of "uart2:":
100 OPEN "uart2:" FOR INPUT AS #2
110 A%=LOC(2)
120 PRINT A%

LOF
Purpose
Returns the length in bytes of an OPEN sequential or random file, or returns the
status of the buffers in an OPEN communication channel.

Syntax
LOF(<nexp>)

Parameters
<nexp>
Number assigned to the file or communication channel when it is opened using the
OPEN command.

Notes
LOF also checks the receive or transmit buffer of the specified communication
channel:
l If a channel is opened for INPUT using the OPEN command, the remaining free
space (bytes) in the receive buffer is returned.
l If a channel is opened for OUTPUT using the OPEN command, the remaining num-
ber of characters to be transmitted from the transmit buffer is returned.

Example 1
This example illustrates how the length of the file "Pricelist" is returned:
10 OPEN "PRICELIST" AS #5
20 A%=LOF(5)
30 PRINT A%
....
....

Example 2
The second example shows how to calculate the number of free bytes in the receive
buffer of communication channel "uart2:":

158 Fingerprint Command Reference

 100 OPEN "uart2:" FOR INPUT AS #2
110 A%=LOF(2)
120 PRINT A%

LSET
Purpose
Places data left-justified into a field in a random file buffer.

Syntax
LSET<svar>=<sexp>

Parameters:
<svar>
String variable assigned to the field by a FIELD statement.
<sexp>
Holds the input data.

Notes
After OPENing a file and formatting it using a FIELD statement, you can enter data
into the random file buffer using LSET and RSET (RSET right-justifies the data).

The input data can only be stored in the buffer as string expressions. Therefore, a
numeric expression must be converted to string format by the use of an STR$
function before LSET or RSET is executed.

If the length of the input data is less than the length of the field, the data is left-
justified and the remaining number of bytes are printed as space characters.

If the length of the input data exceeds the length of the field, the input data is
truncated on the right side.

Example
10 OPEN "PHONELIST" AS #8 LEN=26
20 FIELD#8,8 AS F1$, 8 AS F2$, 10 AS F3$
30 SNAME$="SMITH"
40 CNAME$="JOHN"
50 PHONE$="12345630"
60 LSET F1$=SNAME$
70 LSET F2$=CNAME$
80 RSET F3$=PHONE$
90 PUT #8,1
100 CLOSE#8
RUN
SAVE "PROGRAM 1.PRG "
NEW
10 OPEN "PHONELIST" AS #8 LEN=26
20 FIELD#8,8 AS F1$, 8 AS F2$, 10 AS F3$

Fingerprint Command Reference 159

 30 GET #8,1
40 PRINT F1$,F2$,F3$
RUN
This results in:
SMITH — — — JOHN — — — — — — 12345630

LTS& ON/OFF
Purpose
Enables or disables the label taken sensor (default is disabled). Before using this
command, you must first calibrate the label taken sensor (LTS) sensitivity. For more
information on how to calibrate the LTS, see your printer user manual.

Syntax
LTS& ON|OFF

Notes
The label taken sensor (LTS) can be fitted at the printer label outfeed slot and detects
if a printed label or ticket has been removed. Usually, a self-adhesive label is not fed
out completely, but remains partly stuck to the liner so it does not fall off.

Using the LTS& ON statement, you can order the printer to stop the execution at the
next PRINTFEED statement until the LTS no longer detects a label. Then the
PRINTFEED is executed. This is most useful when printing batches of labels or tickets.
As soon as a label is taken, the next one is printed and awaits handling.

LTS& OFF revokes LTS& ON.

Example
10 LTS& ON
20 FOR A%=1 TO 5
30 B$=STR$(A%)
40 FONT "Univers"
50 PRPOS 200,200
60 PRTXT B$
70 PRINTFEED
80 NEXT
RUN

MAG
Purpose
Magnifies a font, barfont, or image with regard to height or width.

160 Fingerprint Command Reference

Syntax
MAG<nexp1>,<nexp2>

Parameters
<nexp1>
Height magnification. Range is 1 (default) to 999.
<nexp2>
Width magnification. Range is 1 (default) to 999.

Notes
Reset to default by executing a PRINTFEED.
MAG makes the object grow in directions away from the selected anchor point. For
more information, see ALIGN.
The implementation of scalable fonts makes using the MAG statement unnecessary.
Although MAG works for such fonts, printout quality is improved by using a larger font
size instead of magnifying a smaller one. MAG is retained for backwards compatibility
with previous versions of Fingerprint.
MAG also works with images, but a larger version of an image gives better printout
quality than using MAG to enlarge a small image.
Note that the MAG statement cannot be used for barcode patterns (use BARHEIGHT
and BARMAG instead).

Example
This example illustrates how the image "GLOBE.1" is printed both with its original size
and magnified 4 times. Note the jagged edges of the curves in the enlarged image.
10 ALIGN 2
20 PRPOS 300,50
30 FONT "Univers"
40 PRTXT "Normal Size"
50 PRPOS 300,125
60 PRIMAGE "GLOBE.1"
70 PRPOS 300,300
80 PRTXT "Enlarged 4X"
90 PRPOS 300,375
100 MAG 4,4
110 PRIMAGE "GLOBE.1"
120 PRINTFEED
RUN

MAKEASSOC
Purpose
Creates an association.

Fingerprint Command Reference 161

Syntax
MAKEASSOC <sexp1>, <sexp2>, <sexp3>

Parameters
<sexp1>
Specifies the (case-sensitive) name of the association to be created.
<sexp2>
Contains an argument list of parameter tuples according to the convention in
<sexp3>.
<sexp3>
Should always be "HTTP" (case sensitive).

Notes
HTTP implies that the argument list in <sexp2> is encoded in "x-www-urlencoding."

Example
This example shows how a string, including three string names associated with three
start values, is defined and one (time) will be changed:
10 QUERYSTRING$ =
"time=UNKNOWN&label=321&desc=DEF"
20 MAKEASSOC "QARRAY", QUERYSTRING$, "HTTP"
30 QTIME$ = GETASSOC$("QARRAY", "time")
40 QLABELS% = VAL(GETASSOC$("QARRAY","label"))
50 QDESC$ = GETASSOC$("QARRAY", "desc")
60 PRINT "time=";QTIME$, "LABEL=";QLABELS%,
"DESCRIPTION=";QDESC$
70 SETASSOC "QARRAY", "time", time$
80 PRINT "time="; GETASSOC$("QARRAY", "time")
RUN
This results in:
time=UNKNOWN LABEL=321 DESCRIPTION=DEF
time=153355

MAP
Purpose
Changes the ASCII value of a character when received on the standard IN channel (or
optionally on another specified communication channel).

Syntax
MAP[<nexp1>,]<nexp2>,<nexp3>

162 Fingerprint Command Reference

Parameters
<nexp1>
(Optional) Specifies a communication channel:
0: "console:"
1: "uart1:"
2: "uart2:"
3: "uart3:"
4: "centronics:"
5: "net1:"
6: "usb1:"
7: "uart4:"
8: "uart5:"
9: "usbhost:"
10: "bluetooth:"
11: "ftp1:"
12: "http1:"
13: "lpr1:"
Default is the standard IN channel.
<nexp2>
Original ASCII decimal value.
<nexp3>
New ASCII decimal value after mapping.

Notes
This statement modifies a character set or filters out undesired characters. For
example, to print a Q (ASCII 81 decimal) as the letter Z (ASCII 90 decimal) instead,
enter the MAP statement as MAP 81,90. The mapping interprets any ASCII 81 decimal
value received on the standard IN channel as ASCII 90 decimal, so that when you
press Q on the keyboard of the host, the character Z is printed. However, pressing "Z"
still produces a "Z" because that character has not been remapped.
To reset the mapping, map the character back to its original ASCII value (MAP 81,81).
When the printer receives a character, it is processed with regard to possible MAP
statements before it "enters" the Fingerprint firmware. This allows you to filter
undesired control characters by mapping them as NUL (ASCII 0 decimal).
After processing, the selected character set controls how characters are printed or
displayed. If none of the character sets meets your demands completely, use MAP
statements to modify the set that comes closest. Note that MAP statements are
processed before any COMSET or ON KEY..GOSUB strings are checked.
NASC and NASCD statements are processed last.
Do not map any characters to ASCII values occupied by characters used in Fingerprint
instructions, such as keywords, operators, %, $, #, and certain punctuation marks.
Mapping is reset to normal after you restart the printer.

Fingerprint Command Reference 163

Examples
You can check what characters the host produces by using a simple program.
Pressing different keys on the host should produce the corresponding characters
both on the label and on the host screen. If not, try another character set (defined by
NASC). This example assumes that the keyboard produces ASCII 81 decimal and
ASCII 90 decimal when you press the Q and Z keys respectively. Should any
unexpected characters be printed on the labels or the screen, check the manuals of
the host for information on what ASCII values are produced by the various keys and
how the screen presents various ASCII values received from the printer.
10 FONT "Univers"
20 PRPOS 30,100
30 INPUT "Enter character";A$
40 PRTXT A$
50 PRINTFEED
By adding a MAP statement in line 5, you can test what happens. In this case we
remap the character Q to be printed as Z. After printing, we map the character Q back
to its original position.
5 MAP 81,90
10 FONT "Univers"
20 PRPOS 30,100
30 INPUT "Enter character";A$
40 PRTXT A$
50 PRINTFEED
60 MAP 81,81
Assume that a device connected to "uart2:" produces strings that always start with the
control character STX (ASCII 2 decimal). STX can be filtered out by mapping it as NUL
(ASCII 0 decimal):
10 MAP 2,2,0
Should "uart2:" be appointed the standard IN channel (see SETSTDIO), the first
parameter can be omitted from the example above:
10 MAP 2,0

MERGE
Honeywell recommends that you back up the current program before issuing MERGE.

Purpose
Merges a copy of a program with the program currently in printer working memory.

Syntax
MERGE<scon>

Parameters
<scon>
Name of the program to be merged with the program currently residing in the

164 Fingerprint Command Reference

 printer’s working memory.

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

MERGE creates a copy of a program and blends its lines into the program currently
residing in the printer working memory.

If there are lines with the same numbers in both programs, the lines in the program
currently residing in the working memory will be replaced by the corresponding lines
in the MERGEd program. This also applies to programs written without line numbers,
since they will automatically be assigned hidden line numbers at the execution of
IMMEDIATE ON.

To avoid overwriting any lines, you can SAVE a program without line numbers using a
SAVE <scon>, L statement. When MERGEd, it will be appended to the current program
and assigned line numbers that start with the number of the last line of the current
program plus 10.

MERGE makes it possible to store blocks of frequently used program instructions and
include them in new programs. The printer ROM memory contains a number of useful
programs which can be MERGEd into programs of your own creation.
Be careful not to include any MERGE statement as a part of a program, or else the
execution stops after the MERGE statement has been executed.
The EXECUTE statement offers an alternative method for combining Fingerprint
programs.

Examples
In this example, the program "XYZ.PRG" is merged with the current program. If there
are identical line numbers in both programs, the lines from "XYZ. PRG"replace those in
the current program.

MERGE "XYZ.PRG" (from current directory)

MERGE "/c/XYZ.PRG" (from permanent memory)
MERGE "tmp:XYZ.PRG" (from temporary memory)
MERGE "d:XYZ.PRG" (from USB storage device)

MIBVAR&
Purpose
Reads or writes MIB variables for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).

Fingerprint Command Reference 165

Syntax
MIBVAR&(<nexp>)

Parameters
<nexp>
Number of the variable to access. Range is 0 to 9.

Notes
SNMP MIB variables are normally used for network management tasks. These
variables can be set from the outside through SNMP, and are available to Fingerprint
programs through the MIBVAR& command. The SNMP variables must be of string
type (maximum 128 characters) and are placed under the SNMP node
"enterprises.1963.20.15.15.21.5.1.1., indexes 0-9." The public community is read-only
and the pass community is read-write. There are no read or write restrictions from
Fingerprint.
A related command is ON MIBVAR& GOSUB.

Example
MIBVAR&(1) = "ON"
A$ = MIBVAR&(1)
PRINT A$
This results in:
ON

MID$
Purpose
Returns a specified part of a string.

Syntax
MID$(<sexp>,<nexp1>[,<nexp2>])

Parameters
<sexp>
Original string from which a specified part is to be returned.
<nexp1>
Specifies which character position in the original string is to be the first character in
the part to be returned.
If this value is less than or equal to zero, then Error 44 ("Parameter out of range")
occurs. If this value exceeds the length of the original string, an empty string is
returned, but no error condition occurs.

166 Fingerprint Command Reference

 [,<nexp2>]
(Optional) Specifies the number of characters to be returned. If omitted, all characters
from the start position specified by <nexp1> to the end of the string are returned. If
this value is less than zero, then error 44 ("Parameter out of range") occurs.

Notes
If the value of <nexp1> does not exceed the length of the original string, but the sum
of <nexp1> and <nexp2> exceeds the length of the original string, the remainder of the
original string is returned.

Example 1
10 A$=MID$("INTERMEC PRINTERS",6,3)
20 PRINT A$
RUN
This results in:
MEC

Example 2
10 A$="INTERMEC PRINTERS"
20 B%=10
30 C%=7
40 D$=MID$(A$,B%,C%)
50 PRINT D$
RUN
This results in:
PRINTER

MKDIR
Purpose
Creates a directory.

Syntax
MKDIR<sexp>

Parameters
<sexp>
Specifies the directory to be created.

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

<sexp> Can end with a slash (/) character, but / is not required.

Fingerprint Command Reference 167

 Do not follow the directory name with a colon (:) character, which may cause
unexpected behavior.

Example
NEW
MKDIR "DIR1"
SAVE "DIR1/PROGRAM.PRG
FILES "/c/DIR1"
This results in:
FILES on /c/DIR1
PROGRAM.PRG 2
2220032 bytes free 2 bytes used

NAME DATE$
Purpose
Formats the month parameter used in DATE$("F") and DATEADD$(...,"F").

Syntax
NAME DATE$ <nexp>, <sexp>

Parameters
<nexp>
Month number. Range is 1 to 12.
<sexp>
Desired name of the month.

Notes
NAME DATE$ allows you to assign names to the different months in any form and
language you like. The names are returned instead of the corresponding numbers in
connection with DATE$("F") and DATEADD$("F"), provided that FORMAT DATE$ has
been executed.
The number of characters assigned to represent months in the FORMAT DATE$
statement decides how much of the names, as specified in the NAME DATE$
statement, will be returned.
The Y, M, and D characters return information from right to left.
Example:
FORMAT DATE$ "YY.MMM:DD"
NAME DATE$ 1,"JANUARY"
PRINT DATE$("F")
This results in:

168 Fingerprint Command Reference

 03.ARY.06
Usually, it is best to restrict the month parameter in the FORMAT DATE$ statement to
2 or 3 characters (MM or MMM) and enter the names of the months in the NAME
DATE$ statement accordingly.

Example
This example shows how to make the printer return dates in a U.S. format:
10 DATE$="090115"
20 NAME DATE$ 1, "JAN"
30 NAME DATE$ 2, "FEB"
40 NAME DATE$ 3, "MAR"
50 NAME DATE$ 4, "APR"
60 NAME DATE$ 5, "MAY"
70 NAME DATE$ 6, "JUN"
80 NAME DATE$ 7, "JUL"
.....
140 FORMAT DATE$ "MMM DD, YYYY"
150 PRINT DATE$("F")
RUN
This results in:
JAN 15, 2009

NAME WEEKDAY$
Purpose
Formats the day parameter in return strings of WEEKDAY$.

Syntax
NAME WEEKDAY$ <nexp>, <sexp>

Parameters
<nexp>
Number of the weekday according to the WEEKDAY$ function syntax (Monday = 1...
Sunday = 7).
<sexp>
Name of the weekday. Default is the full English name in lowercase characters
(monday, tuesday, and so on).

Notes
NAME WEEKDAY$ allows you to assign names to the different weekdays in any form
and language. The names are returned instead of the corresponding numbers in
connection with WEEKDAY$ function.

Fingerprint Command Reference 169

Example
This example shows how to make the printer return the name of the weekday as an
English 3-letter abbreviation:
10 FORMAT DATE$ ", MM/DD/YY"
20 DATE$="091201"
30 NAME WEEKDAY$ 1, "Mon"
40 NAME WEEKDAY$ 2, "Tue"
50 NAME WEEKDAY$ 3, "Wed"
60 NAME WEEKDAY$ 4, "Thu"
70 NAME WEEKDAY$ 5, "Fri"
80 NAME WEEKDAY$ 6, "Sat"
90 NAME WEEKDAY$ 7, "Sun"
100 PRINT WEEKDAY$ (DATE$) + DATE$("F")
RUN
This results in:
Fri, 12/01/09

NASC
Purpose
Selects a single- or double-byte character set.

Syntax
NASC<nexp>|<sexp>

Parameters
<nexp>
Reference number of a character set as described in the next table. Leading zeroes
are ignored:

Character Set Reference

Roman 8 1 (default)
UTF-8 8 or "UTF-8"
UTF-16 Little Endian* "UTF-16LE"
UTF-16 Big Endian* "UTF-16BE"
French 33
Spanish 34
Italian 39
Switzerland 41

170 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Character Set Reference

English (UK) 44
Swedish 46
Norwegian 47
German 49
Japanese Latin (Romají) 81
Portuguese 351
PCMAP -1
ANSI (same as 1252) -2
MS-DOS Latin 1 850
MS-DOS Greek 1 851
MS-DOS Latin 2 852
MS-DOS Cyrillic 855
MS-DOS Turkish 857
Thai 874
Shift-JIS (Japanese) 932
Simplified Chinese 936
Korean (Hangul) 949
Traditional Chinese (BIG-5) 950
Windows Latin 2 (Central Europe) 1250
Windows Cyrillic (Slavic) 1251
Windows Latin 1 (ANSI, same as -2) 1252
Windows Greek 1253
Windows Latin 5 (Turkish) 1254
Hebrew 1255
Arabic 1256
Windows Baltic Rim 1257
Vietnamese 1258
Johab/Wansung 1361
GB18030 Simplified Chinese "GB18030"

* UTF-16 encodings only support double-byte Unicode characters.

<sexp> is either:

Fingerprint Command Reference 171

 l "UTF-8" = UTF-8
l "file name" = NASC file character set.

Notes
For complete character set tables, see Character Sets.
By default, after processing any MAP statements, Fingerprint prints all characters
according to the Roman 8 character set. However, Fingerprint includes a number of
other character sets useful for displaying information in other languages or countries,
or for adapting the printer to the host operating system. Thus, an ASCII code received
by the printer may print or display a different character depending on the selected
character set.
Fingerprint supports right-to-left and bidirectional text, as well as cursive glyphs,
character shaping, and connecting headstrokes. You must specify a valid font and
character set for your current language when printing complex scripts. For more
information, see Complex Scripts.
If none of the character sets available contains the desired character(s), use a MAP
statement to reMAP the character set that comes closest to your needs. Note that
MAP statements are processed before NASC statements.
A NASC statement has these consequences:
l The font used is the one last specified by the FONT command. If none has been spe-
cified, the default (Univers) is used.
l Text on labels is printed according to the selected character set. However, parts of
the label that have already been processed and stored in the print buffer (before the
NASC statement is executed) are not affected. This allows for multiple character
sets in a single label, which could be used to create multi-lingual labels.
l New messages in the printer's screen are affected by a NASC statement. However, a
message that is already displayed is not updated automatically. The screen can
show all printable characters. In the Setup mode, all characters are mapped accord-
ing to US-ASCII standard.
l Data transmitted via any of the communication channels is not affected, since the
data is defined as ASCII values and not as alphanumeric characters.
l The active character set of the receiving unit determines the graphic presentation of
the input data (for example, the screen of the host).
l The pattern of printed barcodes reflects the ASCII values of the input data and is
not affected by a NASC statement. The barcode interpretation (the human readable
characters below the bar pattern) is affected by a NASC statement. However, the
interpretation of barcodes already processed and stored in the print buffer is not
affected.

Example
This example selects the Italian character set, prints the character corresponding to
123 decimal in that set, changes the set to Swedish, and prints the character

172 Fingerprint Command Reference

 corresponding to 123 decimal:
10 NASC 39
20 PRTXT CHR$(123)
30 NASC 46
40 PRTXT CHR$(123)
50 PRINTFEED
This results in:
àä

NASCD
Purpose
Selects a single- or double-byte character set.
This command is identical to NASC, and is preserved for compatibility purposes.

NEW
Purpose
Clears the printer working memory in order to allow a new program to be created.

Syntax
NEW

Notes
The NEW statement deletes the program currently residing in the printer working
memory, closes all files, and clears all variables and breakpoints. Note that clearing
the printer working memory does not imply that the host screen is cleared too. The
lines of the previous program remain on screen until replaced by new lines.
If the current program has not been saved (see SAVE statement), it is lost and cannot
be restored.
In the Direct Protocol, all counters are removed when a NEW statement is executed.

NORIMAGE
Purpose
Returns the print mode to normal printing after an INVIMAGE statement has been
issued. This command can be abbreviated as NI.

Syntax
NORIMAGE

Fingerprint Command Reference 173

 or

NI

Notes
Normal image is the default type of printing. Text and images are printed in black-on-
white.
Using an INVIMAGE statement, the printing of text and images can be inverted. Such
inverse printing is discontinued for all PRTXT and PRIMAGE statements that follow a
NORIMAGE statement.

Example
In this example, the first line is printed in inverted fashion and the second line in the
normal fashion:
10 PRPOS 30,300
20 ALIGN 4
30 INVIMAGE
40 FONT "Univers"
50 PRTXT "INVERSE PRINTING"
60 PRPOS 30, 200
70 NORIMAGE
80 PRTXT "NORMAL PRINTING"
90 PRINTFEED
RUN

ON BREAK GOSUB
Purpose
Branches to a subroutine when a break interrupt instruction is received.

Syntax
ON BREAK<nexp>GOSUB<ncon>|<line label>

Parameters
<nexp>
0: "console:"
1: "uart1:"
6: "usb1:" (Supported when virtual COM port is enabled)
<ncon>|<line label>
Number or label of the program line to which the program will branch on BREAK.

Notes
ON BREAK GOSUB is closely related to BREAK and BREAK ON/OFF. When break
interrupt is enabled (see BREAK ON) and the operator issues a break interrupt

174 Fingerprint Command Reference

 instruction (see BREAK), program execution is interrupted and branched to a
specified line in a subroutine.

Example
In this example, the printer emits a special signal when a break interrupt is issued
from the printer F1 key:
10 BREAK 0, 1 : 'FI key
20 BREAK 0 ON
30 ON BREAK 0 GOSUB 1000
40 GOTO 20
.....
.....
1000 FOR A%=1 TO 3
1010 SOUND 440,50
1020 SOUND 349,50
1030 NEXT A%
1040 END

ON COMSET GOSUB
Purpose
Branches to a subroutine when the background reception of data on the specified
communication channel is interrupted.

Syntax
ON COMSET<nexp1>GOSUB<nexp2>|<line label>

Parameters
<nexp1>
Communication channel:
0: "console:"
1: "uart1:"
2: "uart2:"
3: "uart3:"
4: "centronics:"
5: "net1:"
6: "usb1:"
7: "uart4:"
8: "uart5:"
9: "usbhost:"
10: "bluetooth:"
11: "ftp1:"
12: "http1:"
13: "lpr1:"
<nexp2>|<linelabel>
Number or label of the program line to be branched to.

Fingerprint Command Reference 175

Note
ON COMSET GOSUB is closely related to COMSET, COMSTAT, COMSET ON, COMSET
OFF, COM ERROR ON/OFF, and COMBUF$. Use this statement to branch to a
subroutine when:
l the end character is received.
l an attention string is received.
l the maximum number of characters is received.
These three parameters are set for the specified communication channel by a
COMSET statement.

Examples
In this example, the program branches to a subroutine to read the buffer of the
communication channel:
1 REM Exit program with #STOP&
10 COMSET1,"#","&","ZYX","=",50
20 ON COMSET 1 GOSUB 2000
30 COMSET 1 ON
40 IF A$ <> "STOP" THEN GOTO 40
50 COMSET 1 OFF
.....
.....
1000 END
2000 A$= COMBUF$(1)
2010 PRINT A$
2020 COMSET 1 ON
2030 RETURN
The same example written without line numbers looks like this:
IMMEDIATE OFF
REM Exit program with #STOP&
COMSET1,"#","&","ZYX","=",50
ON COMSET 1 GOSUB QQQ
COMSET 1 ON
WWW: IF A$ <> "STOP" THEN GOTO WWW
COMSET 1 OFF
.....
.....
END
QQQ: A$=COMBUF$(1)
PRINT A$
COMSET 1 ON
RETURN
IMMEDIATE ON

176 Fingerprint Command Reference

ON ERROR GOTO
Purpose
Branches to an error-handling subroutine when an error occurs.

Syntax
ON ERROR GOTO<ncon>|<line label>

Parameters
<ncon>|<line label>
Number or label of the line to which the program should branch when an error
condition occurs.
If an error condition occurs after this statement has been encountered, the standard
error-trapping routine is ignored and the program branches to the specified line,
which should be the first line in an error-handling subroutine.

If the line number is 0, the standard error-trapping routine is enabled and no error-
branching within the current program is executed.

Examples
If you try to run this example with the printhead raised (or if any other error occurs), a
warning signal sounds and the error LED turns on.
10 LED 0 ON:LED 1 OFF
20 ON ERROR GOTO 1000
30 FONT "Univers"
40 PRTXT "HELLO"
50 PRINTFEED
60 END
.....
1000 LED 0 OFF:LED 1 ON
1010 FOR A%=1 TO 3
1020 SOUND 440,50
1030 SOUND 359,50
1040 NEXT A%
1050 RESUME NEXT
The same example written without line numbers looks like this:
IMMEDIATE OFF
LED 0 ON:LED 1 OFF
ON ERROR GOTO QQQ
FONT "Univers"
PRTXT "HELLO"
PRINTFEED
END
.....
QQQ: LED 0 OFF:LED 1 ON
FOR A%=1 TO 3
SOUND 440,50

Fingerprint Command Reference 177

 SOUND 359,50
NEXT A%
RESUME NEXT
IMMEDIATE ON

ON GOSUB
Purpose
Branches conditionally to one of several subroutines, determined by input value.

Syntax
ON<nexp>GOSUB<ncon>|<line label>[,<ncon>|<line label>...]

Parameters
<nexp>
Numeric expression determining the index of the subroutine to branch to.

<ncon>|<line label>
Line label, number, or list to which the program should branch.

Notes
ON GOSUB is closely related to ON GOTO. The numeric expression may result in any
positive value. The expression is truncated to an integer value before the statement is
executed. If the resulting value is negative, 0, or larger than the number of
subroutines, the statement is ignored.

The value of the numeric expression determines which of the subroutines the
program should branch to. For example, if the value of the numeric expression is 2,
the program will branch to the second subroutine in the list.

Examples
In this example, different text strings appear on the screen depending on which key
(1, 2, or 3) you press on the host keyboard.
10 INPUT "PRESS KEY 1-3 ", A%
20 ON A% GOSUB 1000,2000,3000
30 END
1000 PRINT "You have pressed key 1"
1010 RETURN
2000 PRINT "You have pressed key 2"
2010 RETURN
3000 PRINT "You have pressed key 3"
3010 RETURN
The same example written without line numbers would look like this:
IMMEDIATE OFF
INPUT "PRESS KEY 1-3 ", A%
ON A% GOSUB QQQ,WWW,ZZZ

178 Fingerprint Command Reference

 END
QQQ: PRINT "You have pressed key 1"
RETURN
WWW: PRINT "You have pressed key 2"
RETURN
ZZZ: PRINT "You have pressed key 3"
RETURN
IMMEDIATE ON

ON GOTO
Purpose
Branches unconditionally to one of several subroutines, determined by input value.

Syntax
ON<nexp>GOTO<ncon>|<line label>[,<ncon>|<line label>...]

Parameters
<nexp>
Numeric expression determining the index of the subroutine to branch to.

<ncon>|<line label>
Line label, number, or list to which the program should branch.

Notes
This statement is closely related to the ON GOSUB statement. The numeric expression
may result in any positive value. The expression is truncated to an integer value before
the statement is executed. If the resulting value is negative, 0, or larger than the
number of lines, the statement is ignored.

<nexp> determines which of the lines the program should branch to. For example, if
<nexp> = 2, the program branches to the second line in the list.

Examples
In this example, different text is printed on the screen depending on which of the keys
(1, 2, or 3) you press on the host keyboard.
10 INPUT "PRESS KEY 1-3 ", A%
20 ON A% GOTO 1000,2000,3000
30 END
1000 PRINT "You have pressed key 1"
1010 GOTO 30
2000 PRINT "You have pressed key 2"
2010 GOTO 30
3000 PRINT "You have pressed key 3"
3010 GOTO 30
The same example written without line numbers looks like this:

Fingerprint Command Reference 179

 IMMEDIATE OFF
INPUT "PRESS KEY 1-3 ", A%
ON A% GOSUB QQQ,WWW,ZZZ
YYY: END
QQQ: PRINT "You have pressed key 1"
GOTO YYY
WWW: PRINT "You have pressed key 2"
GOTO YYY
ZZZ: PRINT "You have pressed key 3"
GOTO YYY
IMMEDIATE ON

ON HTTP GOTO
Purpose
Branches to a subroutine when a request for an application CGI is received.

Syntax
ON HTTP GOTO<ncon>|<line label>

Parameters
<ncon>|<line label>
Number or label of the line to which the program will branch when the CGI request is
received.

Notes
This statement can be used by any printer with a Wi-Fi or Ethernet connection, and
defines a Fingerprint subroutine that handles the CGI-request. Setting the line
number or line label to 0 disables the handler.

When a request for an application CGI is received, the current execution point is
pushed on to the stack and the execution commences in the handler with STDIN and
STDOUT redirected to or from the Web browser.

A related instruction is RESUME HTTP.

ON KEY GOSUB
Purpose
Branches to a subroutine when a specified key on the printer front panel is activated.

Syntax
ON KEY(<nexp>)GOSUB<ncon>|<line label>

180 Fingerprint Command Reference

Parameters
<nexp>
ID number of one of the keys on the printer front panel.
<ncon> | <line label>
Number or label of the line to which the program will branch when the specified key is
pressed down.

Notes
Each of the keys on the printer keypad can be enabled individually using its ID
number in a KEY ON statement. Then the key can be assigned, alone or in
combination with the Shift key, to make the program branch to a subroutine using an
ON KEY... GOSUB statement.

Shift adds 100 to the unshifted ID number of each key.

Note the difference between the ID numbers of the keys and the ASCII values they are
able to produce (see BREAK for more information).

BREAK takes precedence over any ON KEY statement, provided that break interrupt is
not disabled for the "console:" by a BREAK 0 OFF statement.

For more information about printer keypad layouts, see Printer Keypad Layouts.

Examples
This example illustrates how activating the F1 key (ID = 10) makes the program
branch to a subroutine containing the PRINTFEED statement. Note line 30 where the
execution waits for the key to be pressed.
10 ON KEY (10) GOSUB 1000
20 KEY (10) ON
30 GOTO 30
.....
.....
.....
1000 FONT "Univers"
1010 PRPOS 30,100
1020 PRTXT "HELLO"
1030 PRINTFEED
1040 END
RUN
The same example can be written without line numbers this way:
IMMEDIATE OFF
ON KEY (10) GOSUB QQQ
KEY (10) ON
WWW: GOTO WWW
.....
.....
.....
QQQ: FONT "Univers"
PRPOS 30,100

Fingerprint Command Reference 181

 PRTXT "HELLO"
PRINTFEED
END
IMMEDIATE ON
RUN

ON MIBVAR& GOSUB
Purpose
Branches to a subroutine when a specified SNMP MIB variable is changed.

Syntax
ON MIBVAR&(<nexp>)GOSUB<ncon>|<line label>

Parameters
<nexp>
Number of a MIBVAR& variable. Range is 0 to 9.
<ncon>|<line label>
Number or label of the line to which the program will branch when the specified MIB
variable is modified.

Notes
This statement makes the program branch to a subroutine whenever the specified
MIB variable is modified. This value is then maintained during the entire subroutine
execution. External changes during the subroutine execution cause a new subroutine
call at return. A related instruction is MIBVAR&.

Example
This example prints the value of MIBVAR&(1) on a label every time its value is
changed. Note that the program is idle (on line 20) as long as the MIBVAR& variable
remains unchanged.
10 ON MIBVAR&(1) GOSUB 1000
20 GOTO 20
.....
.....
.....
1000 FONT "Univers"
1010 PRPOS 30,100
1020 A$ = MIBVAR&(1)
1030 PRTXT A$
1040 PRINTFEED
1050 RETURN
RUN

182 Fingerprint Command Reference

ON/OFF LINE
Purpose
When the applicator port status is enabled, or when the applicator port style is
changed, the OUT signals will be reset.

This command allows a Fingerprint application to detect when all the OUT signals
have been reset, and move to a specified subroutine to perform initialization activity
when this happens.

Syntax
ON PORTOUT.RESET

Parameters
<nexp>
Specifies the communication channel.
4: "centronics:"

Notes
Pin 13 in the Centronics/IEEE 1284 interface connector contains the SELECT signal:
l ON LINE 4 sets the SELECT signal high.
l OFF LINE 4 sets the SELECT signal low.
If no ON/OFF LINE statement is issued, the SELECT signal is high (the Centronics
channel will be ON LINE). ON LINE/OFF LINE for the serial channel "usb1:" is
implemented according to USB Device Class for Printing Devices v1.09, January
2000.

Example
10 ON PORTOUT.RESET GOSUB 150

...

150 perform initialization

160 RETURN

ON PORTIN

Fingerprint Command Reference 183

Purpose
This command is used as a condition for branching to another routine, while
"PORTIN" can be used to retrieve the status value (0 or 1).
Note: This command “ON PORTIN” command is not supported by Direct Protocol.

Syntax
ON PORTIN.<sexp>

Valid values for IN signals:

STARTPRINT

FEED

REPRINT

PAUSE

APPERR1

APPERR2

APPERR3

RTWIINEXT

Example
ON PORTIN.STARTPRINT GOSUB nnn

OPEN
Purpose
Opens a file or device (such as a network connection), or creates a new file for input,
output, or append, allocating a buffer, and specifies the access mode.

Syntax
OPEN<sexp>[FOR<INPUT|OUTPUT|APPEND>]AS [#]<nexp1>[LEN=<nexp2>]

Parameters
<sexp>
File or device to be opened, or the file to be created. File names must not contain a
colon character (:). A network connection can be specified.
#
(Optional) Indicates that whatever follows is a number.

184 Fingerprint Command Reference

 <nexp1>
Designation number for the file or device opened using the OPEN command.
<nexp2>
(Optional) Length of the record in bytes. Default is 128.

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

An OPEN statement must be executed before a file or device can be used for input,
output, and/or append. A maximum of 25 files and/or devices can be open at the
same time.

You must CLOSE the file or it will not be saved if the printer is turned off.

Sequential Access Mode

The access mode can optionally be specified as sequential INPUT, OUTPUT, or
APPEND:
l INPUT: Sequential input from the file or device, replacing existing data. Existing
files/devices only.
l OUTPUT: Sequential output to the file or device, replacing existing data.
l APPEND: Sequential output to the file or device, where new data will be appended
without replacing existing data.

Random Access Mode

If no access mode is specified in the statement, the file or device is opened for both
input and output (RANDOM access mode). FIELD, LSET, RSET, PUT, and GET can only
be used on records in files opened in the RANDOM access mode using the OPEN
command.
See DEVICES for information on which devices can be opened for the different modes
of access.
Use FILES to get lists of the files stored in the printer memory.

Network Connections
Special syntax as follows can be used for the <sexp> expression that opens the Net1
device:
OPEN "net1:<host>[:port][,<timeout>]" AS #<nexp>
where:
<host> is an IP address or DNS name.
[:port] is the port number. Range is 0 to 65535. Default is 9100.
<timeout> is the timeout value expressed in ticks (0.01 sec). Range is 10 to 6000.
Default is 4500 (45 sec).

Fingerprint Command Reference 185

 Only one Net1 connection can be opened at a time. Once the device is open,
information can be sent or received according to the corresponding protocol.

Example 1
This example opens and writes to a file:
10 OPEN "TEST.TXT" FOR OUTPUT AS 1
20 PRINT#1,"AAAA"
30 PRINT#1,"!234"
40 CLOSE#1

Example 2
This example opens the file and prints it line by line:
10 OPEN "TEST.TXT" FOR INPUT AS #2
20 WHILE NOT EOF(2)
30 INPUT#2,qA$
40 PRINT qA$
50 WEND
60 CLOSE #2
RUN

Example 3
You can allow sequential output to the printer's screen using the OPEN statement this
way. The method is the same as for files:
10 OPEN "console:" FOR OUTPUT AS #1
20 PRINT#1:PRINT#1
30 PRINT#1, "GONE TO LUNCH"
40 PRINT#1, "BACK SOON";
RUN
The text appears as:
GONE TO LUNCH
BACK SOON

Example 4
This example opens the file "PRICELIST" for random access with the reference number
#8 and a record length of 254 bytes:
10 OPEN "PRICELIST" AS #8 LEN=254

Example 5
The following example opens the Net1 device to connect to the NIST Internet Time
Service (ITS) web site. Row 10 specifies socket port 13. Rows 30-40 create a delay to
allow the result to be received as A$ within the specified time of 500 ticks:
10 OPEN "net1:time.nist.gov:13" AS 1
20 PRINT #1, "time?"
30 QTICKS% = TICKS
40 WHILE TICKS-QTICKS% < 500

186 Fingerprint Command Reference

 50 WEND
60 LINE INPUT #1, A$
70 PRINT A$
80 CLOSE 1

OPTIMIZE "BATCH" ON/OFF

Purpose
Enables or disables optimization for batch printing.

Syntax
OPTIMIZE "BATCH" ON|OFF

Parameters
ON|OFF
Enables or disables optimization. Default is disabled (OFF). In Direct Protocol, default
is enabled (ON).

Notes
This facility is intended to speed up batch printing (uninterrupted printing of large
numbers of identical or similar labels). The program execution does not wait for the
printing of the label to be completed, but proceeds executing the next label image
into the other of the two image buffers as soon as possible.
OPTIMIZE "BATCH" is automatically enabled (ON) during a batch (PRINTFEED more
than one) if the following conditions are fulfilled:
1 LTS& OFF (default)
2 CUT OFF (default)

Examples
Run these two examples and note the differences in the printer performance:
10 OPTIMIZE "BATCH" ON
20 FOR I%=1 TO 10
30 PRTXT I%
40 PRINT "Before printfeed"
50 PRINTFEED
60 PRINT "After printfeed"
70 NEXT
RUN
10 OPTIMIZE "BATCH" OFF
20 FOR I%=1 TO 10
30 PRTXT I%
40 PRINT "Before printfeed"
50 PRINTFEED
60 PRINT "After printfeed"

Fingerprint Command Reference 187

 70 NEXT
RUN

PORTIN
Purpose
Reads the status of a port on a Serial/Industrial Interface Board, or checks the current
state of a specific signal (supported only when applicator port status is enabled).
Note: This command is not applicable to all printers.
This command allows the Fingerprint application to modify the DataReady signal in
Applicator. This is not allowed when the applicator port style is set to S-Style.

This command is not supported by Direct Protocol.

Syntax
PORTIN(<nexp>)|.<sexp>

Parameters
<nexp>
Number of the port to be read:
IN ports (optical): 101-108 (301-308)
OUT ports (relay): 201-204 (401-404)
OUT ports (optical): 221-228 (421-428)
.<sexp>
(With enabled applicator port only.) Specific signal to check the state of. Returns -1 if
the signal is currently asserted, or 0 if the signal is de-asserted.
Valid values for IN signals:
STARTPRINT
FEED
REPRINT
PAUSE
APPERR1
APPERR2
APPERR3
RTWIINEXT
Valid values for OUT signals:
RIBBONLOW
MEDIALOW
SERVICEREQ
ENDPRINT
MEDIAOUT
RIBBONOUT
RFIDTAGERROR
DATAREADY
RTWOUT

188 Fingerprint Command Reference

Notes
Values for .<sexp> are valid only if the applicator port on the printer is enabled.
This function works with the Serial/Industrial Interface Board and can read the status
of 8 IN ports with optocouplers, 8 OUT ports with optocouplers, and 4 OUT ports with
relays. For information on how to set the OUT ports, see the PORTOUT statement.
A current can be led through an optocoupler in each IN port:
l If the current is on, the PORTIN function returns the value -1 (true).
l If the current is off, the PORTIN function returns the value 0 (false).
This feature allows the execution of Fingerprint to be controlled by various types of
external sensors or non-digital switches.
The status of the OUT ports, as set by PORTOUT statements, can also be read by
PORTIN functions.
Some printers have more than one serial interface. In this case, the ports on the inner
board (that is, the board closest to the CPU board) are specified by the low numbers
(101-108, 201-204, and 221-228) while the ports on the outer board are specified by
the high numbers (301-308, 401-404, and 421-428).
See the documentation of the Serial/Industrial Interface Board for more information.

Example
The status of IN port 101 on a Serial/Industrial Interface Board decides when a label
is to be printed. The printing is held until the current is switched off:
10 FONT "Univers"
20 PRTXT "POWER IS OFF"
30 IF PORTIN (101) THEN GOTO 30
40 PRINTFEED
50 END

PORTOUT ON/OFF
Purpose
Sets relay ports or optical ports on a Serial/Industrial Interface Board to either on or
off.
Note: This command is not applicable to all printers.
This command allows the Fingerprint application to modify the DataReady signal in
Applicator. This is not allowed when the applicator port style is set to S-Style.

This command is not supported by Direct Protocol.

Syntax
PORTOUT[(<nexp>) ON|OFF]
PORTOUT.DATAREADY ON/OFF"

Fingerprint Command Reference 189

Parameters
<nexp>
Number of the port to be set:
OUT ports (relay): 201 to 204 (401 to 404)
OUT ports (optical): 221 to 228 (421 to 428)
See the Notes for more information on port numbers.

Notes
This statement works with the Serial/Industrial Interface Board and is able to control
8 IN ports with optocouplers, 8 OUT ports with optocouplers, and 4 OUT ports with
relays. For information on how to read the status of the various ports, see the PORTIN
function.

This feature allows Fingerprint to control various external devices like gates, lamps, or
conveyor belts.

Some printers have more than one serial port. In this case, the ports on the inner
board (that is, the board closest to the CPU board) are specified by the low numbers
(201 to 204 and 221 to 228) while the ports on the outer board are specified by the
high numbers (401 to 404 and 421 to 428).

See the documentation of the Serial/Industrial Interface Board for more information.

Example 1
The relay of OUT port 201 on a Serial/Industrial Interface Board is Opened and then
Closed like this:
.....
.....
1000 PORTOUT (201) ON
.....
.....
2000 PORTOUT (201) OFF
.....
.....

Example 2
PORTOUT.DATAREADY ON/OFF

PORTOUT.DATAREADY ON

PORTOUT.DATAREADY OFF

Where ON will assert the dataready signal LOW and OFF will de-assert the dataready
signal HIGH.

190 Fingerprint Command Reference

POWER
Purpose
Places the printer in either deep sleep or Standby mode, or wakes the printer when it
is in Standby mode.

Syntax
POWER OFF|STANDBY
POWER OFF is only applicable for PC23d, PC43d, and PC43t printers.

Parameters
OFF sends the printer into deep sleep mode, saving power. If no applications are
listed in the autoexec.bat file (to auto-start when the printer boots), the printer
restarts in Fingerprint mode.
STANDBY alternately places and wakes the printer from Standby mode. If the printer
has an LCD screen, the POWER STANDBY command turns the LCD screen off.

Notes
To turn off the Ready-to-Work™ indicator and the LCD backlight, the printer sleep
timer must be set to ALWAYS OFF before issuing a POWER STANDBY command.
When the printer wakes up after being in Standby mode, the application should reset
the sleep timer to the usual operating value.

Example
This example can be used to test the power implementation for Fingerprint
applications on the printer. The application performs different operations depending
on button presses.
10 ON ERROR GOTO ZERROR
20 QSTANDBY%=0
30 KEY 16 ON
40 ON KEY 16 GOSUB ZKEYA
50 KEY 17 ON
60 ON KEY 17 GOSUB ZKEYB
70 KEY 19 ON
80 ON KEY 19 GOSUB ZKEYC
90 KEY 20 ON
100 ON KEY 20 GOSUB ZKEYD
110 PRINT "starting"
120 ZSTART:
130 GOTO ZSTART
140 ZKEYA:
150 PRINT "POWER OFF"
160 RUN "sleep 1"
170 POWER OFF
180 RETURN
190 ZKEYB:
200 PRINT "FORMFEED"

Fingerprint Command Reference 191

 210 RUN "sleep 1"
220 FORMFEED
230 RETURN
240 ZKEYD:
250 PRINT "SETUP"
260 RUN "sleep 1"
270 SETUP
280 RETURN
290 ZKEYC:
300 PRINT "STANDBY"
310 RUN "sleep 1"
320 IF QSTANDBY%=1 THEN
330 SETUP "POWER,SLEEP TIMER,ALWAYS ON"
340 QSTANDBY%=0
350 ELSE
360 SETUP "POWER,SLEEP TIMER,ALWAYS OFF"
370 QSTANDBY%=1
380 END IF
390 POWER STANDBY
400 RETURN
410 ZERROR:
420 PRINT ERR
430 IF ERR=1022 THEN
440 END
450 END IF
460 RESUME NEXT

PRBAR
Purpose
Provides input data to a barcode. This command can be abbreviated as PB. You can
use a PRBAR command to generate AddOn barcodes for EAN and UPC symbologies.

Syntax
PRBAR<<sexp>|<nexp>>
or
PB<<sexp>|<nexp>>

Parameters
<<sexp>|<nexp>>
Input data to the barcode generator.

Notes
The barcode must be defined by BARSET, BARTYPE, BARRATIO, BARHEIGHT,
BARMAG, BARFONT, and/or BARFONT ON/OFF statements, or by the corresponding
default values. Make sure that the type of input data (numeric or string) and the
number of characters agree with the specification for the selected barcode type.

192 Fingerprint Command Reference

Example
Two different barcodes, one with numeric input data and one with string input data,
can be generated this way. You can also enter the input data using a variable.
10 BARFONT "Univers", 8 ON
20 PRPOS 50,400
30 ALIGN 7
40 BARSET "INT2OF5",2,1,3,120
50 PRBAR 45673
60 PRPOS 50,200
70 BARSET "CODE39",3,1,2,100
80 pC39$ = "ABC"
90 PRBAR qC39$
100 PRINTFEED
RUN

PRBOX
Purpose
Creates a box containing a single text line or a frame of multiple hyphenated text
lines. This command can be abbreviated as PX.

Syntax
PRBOX<nexp1>,<nexp2>,<nexp3>[,<sexp1>[,<nexp4>[,<nexp5>[,<sexp2>[,<sexp3>]]]]]
or
PX<nexp1>,<nexp2>,<nexp3>[,<sexp1>[,<nexp4>[,<nexp5>[,<sexp2>[,<sexp3>]]]]]

Parameters
<nexp1>
Box height in dots. Range is 1 to 6000.
<nexp2>
Box width in dots. Range is 1 to 6000.
<nexp3>
Line weight in dots. Range is 0 to 6000.
<sexp1>
Text to be written inside the box. Maximum of 20 lines. Single-byte fonts and code
points only (for example, no UTF-16 or multi-byte UTF-8 code points).
<nexp4>
Horizontal distance between inner edge of the box line and the text frame. Range is -
100 to 100 dots. Default is 0.
<nexp5>
Vertical distance between the inner edge of the box line and text frame, and between
each line of text in the frame. Range is -100 to 100 dots. Default is the same value as
<nexp4>.

Fingerprint Command Reference 193

 <sexp2>
Line delimiter (maximum 9 characters) that replaces the default delimiter string
CHR$(10) or CHR$(13). Each time this delimiter is encountered in the text string
(<sexp1>), the remaining text wraps to the next line.
<sexp3>
is a control string for hyphen delimiter and replacement.

Notes
PRBOX creates a transparent, rectangular region surrounded by a line, or specifies a
text frame that can contain up to 20 lines of hyphenated text. These two purposes can
be combined so the text frame is surrounded by a black box.

PRBOX supports inline formatting adjustments, such as boldface or italicization. For

more information, see Inline Text Formatting.

Creating a Simple Box

To create a simple box, specify the height, width, and line weight. The box is drawn
with its anchor point (see ALIGN) at the insertion point, as specified by the nearest
preceding PRPOS statement. A box can be aligned left, right, or center along its
baseline.
The print direction specifies how the box is rotated in relation to its anchor point.
The line weight increases inward from the anchor point. The heavier the line, the less
white area inside the box. Thus, it is possible to create a black area using a box with
very heavy lines. For a simple box with no text field, the line weight must be greater
than 0, and the white area inside a box can be used for printing. Boxes, lines, and text
may cross (also see XORMODE ON/OFF).
The next illustration shows how the height and width of the box are defined for
different print directions:

194 Fingerprint Command Reference

Creating a Multiline Text Field
The PRBOX statement can also create an area in which a field of wrapped and
hyphenated text is printed. There is no need to specify each line of text separately as
with the PRTXT statement.
The text field can be framed by the box (line weight > 0), or the box can be invisible
(line weight = 0). The maximum number of characters on each line is 300 and the
maximum number of lines is 20.
The position of the text frame inside the box is affected by the direction (set by DIR)
and alignment (set by ALIGN), and by <nexp4> and <nexp5> in the PRBOX statement.
The direction rotates the box with its text field around the anchor point as specified by
the alignment. The alignment specifies the anchor point of the box itself, and
determines field alignment inside the box and text justification.
Horizontal and vertical mean different things depending on how the text is printed.
For directions 2 and 4, horizontal and vertical have opposite meanings than in
directions 1 and 3.
The horizontal distance between the inside of the box line and the borders of the text
field is specified by <nexp4>:
l For ALIGN 1, 4, or 7, <nexp4> determines the distance between the inside of the left
side box line and the left-hand edge of the text field.
l For ALIGN 3, 6, or 9, <nexp4> determines the distance between the inside of the
right side box line and the right-hand edge of the text field.
l For ALIGN 2, 5, or 8, <nexp4> is not necessary.
The line spacing and the vertical distance between the inside of the box line and the
borders of the text field is specified by <nexp5>:
l For ALIGN 1, 2, or 3, <nexp5> determines the distance between the inside of the bot-
tom box line and the bottom edge of the text field, as well as line spacing.
l For ALIGN 7, 8, or 9, <nexp5> determines the distance between the inside of the
right side box line and the right-hand edge of the text field, as well as line spacing.
l For ALIGN 4, 5, or 6, <nexp5> determines line spacing only.
The next illustration shows how alignment affects the location of multi-line text:

Fingerprint Command Reference 195

 If the text in <sexp1> is entered as a continuous string of characters without any
spaces, linefeeds, or carriage returns, the text wraps to the next line when there is no
room left for any more characters on a line.

196 Fingerprint Command Reference

 If any combination of a carriage return (CR = ASCII 13 decimal,) and a linefeed (LF =
ASCII 10 decimal) is encountered, the remaining text wraps once to the next line.
Space characters (ASCII 32 decimal) also initiate a line wrap. If there is more than one
space character, the wrapping is at the last space character that fits into the line in
question.
You can replace the default line delimiters (CR, LF, and CR/LF) with another line
delimiter specified in a string of up to 9 characters (<sexp2>). This delimiter is not
printed, even if it is a printable character. Each time the delimiter is encountered, the
text wraps to a new line.

Hyphenation Support
You can put "invisible" hyphen delimiters in the text string at suitable wrap-around
positions. The default delimiter is a hyphen sign (ASCII 45 decimal). You can use a
string of up to nine characters instead, but be careful so the string is not confused
with the text.
If a wrap-around is performed, the corresponding hyphen delimiter is printed as a
hyphen sign (ASCII 45 decimal) by default, whereas hyphen delimiters not used for
wrap-around will not be printed.
To print characters other than hyphens, you can specify a string of hyphen
replacement characters. It is possible to use a string of up to 9 characters, but the
shorter the string the less likely that a line will wrap outside the box.
If you have a text string with long words and have not inserted all necessary line
delimiters, a line-wrap may occur unexpectedly. You can optionally specify a hyphen
delimiter for this case as well. Default is no delimiter.
Specify the parameter <sexp3> in PRBOX using the following syntax:
<sexp3>=<sexp3a>[space<sexp3b>[space<sexp3c>]]
where:
<sexp3a> is a soft hyphen delimiter. If the text does not have enough room on one
line, the rest of the text is wrapped from the last space or from the position marked by
the soft hyphen delimiter.
Exception: Two adjacent soft hyphen delimiters revoke each other. Default is a normal
hyphen (-). Maximum length is 9 characters.
space is a string delimiter with the value CHR$(32).
<sexp3b> is one or more characters that are printed at the end of a line which has
been hyphenated according to a hyphen delimiter (see <sexp3a>). Default is a normal
hyphen (-). Maximum length is 9 characters, but fewer is preferred.
<sexp3c> is a string of hyphen extension characters, used on single words too long to
be printed on one line and have no hyphen delimiter specified. The hyphen extension
character is printed at the right end of the line and the remainder of the word is
printed on the next line. Default is no character. Maximum length is 9 characters.
If <sexp3> is not specified, the rules for hyphen delimiter and replacement are the
same as for printing hyphens in text. Two adjacent hyphens are printed as one.

Fingerprint Command Reference 197

Examples
This example draws a rectangle without any text:
10 PRPOS 50,50
20 PRBOX 200,400,5
30 PRINTFEED
RUN
This program illustrates a multi-line text field with line wrap, where "&S" is the soft
hyphen delimiter:
10 FONT "Univers",12
20 DIR 1
30 ALIGN 7
40 T$="Hyphen-ated words are divid-ed into sylla-bles.|||-- New Line, Special Cases
and EXTRAORDINARY long words."
50 PRPOS 100,300
60 PRBOX 300,640,1,T$,5,1,"|||","- -"
70 PRINTFEED
RUN

PRBUF
Purpose
Receives and prints bitmap image data using the PRBUF protocol.

Syntax
PRBUF<nexp1>[,<nexp2]<new line><image data>

Parameters
<nexp1>
Number of bytes of the image in PRBUF protocol.
<nexp2>
(optional) Timeout between characters in TICKS (0.01 sec). Default is ~12.7
sec/character.
<new line>
Any combination of CR, CR/LF, or LF.
<image data>
Image according to the PRBUF protocol.

Notes
PRBUF is useful for receiving and printing bitmap images from a source such as a
Windows print driver, since it is more effective and requires less memory than using a
STORE IMAGE...PRIMAGE sequence. The bitmap image is printed directly and is not
saved anywhere in printer memory after the image buffer has been cleared.

At PRBUF, the printer waits for image data to be received on the standard IN channel.

198 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Because PRBUF only works with binary transfers, XON/XOFF must be disabled.
Optionally, you can set a timeout between characters (default is 12.7 seconds). When
the number of bytes specified by PRBUF has been received, image data is processed
directly into the image buffer and printed immediately.

PRBUF does not work if <nexp1> bytes cannot be allocated. If memory is low, it is
possible to download the bitmap image in two or more blocks. Field settings
(alignment, clipping, direction, xor mode, inverse image, magnification, x-position,
and y-position) are handled by the current protocol, but only x- and y-positions, field
clipping, and xor mode are handled. Other attributes are ignored.

If PRPOS x,y, then the real print position is PRPOS x,y+1.

<new line> is not part of the statement, but any combination of carriage return (ASCII
13 decimal,) and/or linefeed (ASCII 10 decimal) is allowed without interfering with the
PRBUF protocol.

For more information on how to structure your image data, see PRBUF protocol.

Example
This example shows how the printer is instructed to receive and print 1,424 bytes of
image data according to the PRBUF protocol:
PRBUF 1424
<binary image data>

PRBUF Protocol
Purpose
This protocol is used to send print image data from an application to the printer
image buffer. The protocol consists of a two-byte header and a number of data bytes
in the RLL (Run Length Limited) format.

Header Syntax
The first byte is the @ symbol (Unicode 0x0040), which indicates the start of the
protocol header.
The second byte is a numeric value from 0 to 255:
l 0: Reserved (bitmap format)
l 1: Reserved (RLL image format)
l 2: RLL buffer format
l 3-255: Reserved

RLL Buffer Format

The RLL buffer format is optimized for use by Windows drivers, because image
processing is more efficient on the host PC rather than the printer.

Fingerprint Command Reference 199

 l Bytes 1 and 2 specify the pixel width (unsigned) of the data in big-endian format for
one line.
l Bytes 3 and 4 specify the pixel height (unsigned) of the buffer when it is expanded,
in big-endian format.
l The remaining bytes (5+) specify the bitmap in RLL format.

RLL Buffer Format Example

This shows a RLL buffer protocol header for a 515 × 212 pixel hexdump:
40 02 02 03 00 d4

RLL Format
The RLL format is good for black and white pixels, and compresses data in both
dimensions. It works well with one-dimensional barcodes, but grayscales grow in size
instead of shrinking. The format is symmetric, so all pixel runs begin and end with a
white pixel, and lines can be repeated whenever possible. This makes the format
possible to turn upside-down.
The overall RLL format uses these parameters:
<start><toggling pixel runs><stop>
The width of these parameters is equal to the total width of the RLL pattern. The
parameters can contain additional information.
start
<line repetitions> or <small white pixel run>
stop
<start> or <empty>
toggling pixel runs
<white and black pixel runs> or <black and white pixel runs> or <white pixel run> or
<empty>
white and black pixel run
<white pixel run><black pixel run> or <small white pixel run><black pixel run>
black and white pixel run
<black pixel run><white pixel run>
line repetitions
((-1)-(-128))*-1 number of equal lines
small white pixel run
0 through 127, the number of white pixels
black pixel run
0 through 255, the number of black pixels
white pixel run
0 through 255, the number of white pixels
empty
empty (used when the line fits in one pixel run)

200 Fingerprint Command Reference

 If there is no line repetition, line repeats are not necessary. If the pixel run is out of
range, it must be split into several runs.

RLL Format Examples

An eight-bit pattern:
**** 1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,0 Note the last 0, which ends the line with a white pixel
run
**** 0,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1 Begins with a white pixel run of 0 pixels
** ** 2,2,2,2,0 Stopped with a white pixel run of 0 pixels
** ** -2,0,2,2,2,2,-2 Line and pixel repetitions
** **
A black square, 800 dots per side:
-128,0,255,0,255,0,255,0,35,0,-128
-128,0,255,0,255,0,255,0,35,0,-128
-128,0,255,0,255,0,255,0,35,0,-128
-128,0,255,0,255,0,255,0,35,0,-128
-128,0,255,0,255,0,255,0,35,0,-128
-128,0,255,0,255,0,255,0,35,0,-128
-32,0,255,0,255,0,255,0,35,0,-32

Example
This example shows how the printer is instructed to receive and print 1,424 bytes of
image data according to the PRBUF protocol:
PRBUF 1424
<binary image data>

PRDIAGONAL
Purpose
This command creates a diagonal line. This command can be abbreviated as PD.

Syntax
PRDIAGONAL<nexp1>, <nexp2>, <nexp3>, <sexp1>

Parameters
<nexp1>
The width of the imaginary box that the diagonal line creates in dots. Only values
greater than 0 are accepted.
<nexp2>
The height of the imaginary box that the diagonal line creates in dots. Only values
greater than 0 are accepted.
<nexp3>
The thickness of the diagonal line in dots. Only values greater than 0 are accepted.

Fingerprint Command Reference 201

 <sexp1>
The orientation of the diagonal line. Enter "L" to specify a left leaning diagonal or "R"
to specify a right leaning diagonal.

Notes
The alignment for the diagonal line can be set using the ALIGN (AN) command.

The print direction of the diagonal line can be set using the DIR command.

Examples
This example prints a right leaning diagonal line:
DIR 1
AN 1
PP 100, 300
PD 330, 183, 10,"R"
PF

This example prints a left leaning diagonal line:

DIR 1
AN 1
PP 100, 300
PD 330, 183, 10,"L"
PF

202 Fingerprint Command Reference

PRELLIPSE
Purpose
Creates an ellipse object in the image buffer.

Syntax
PRELLIPSE <nexp1>,<nexp2>,<nexp3>

Parameters
<nexp1>
The height of the ellipse at its widest point, in dots. Minimum value is 1, maximum
value is 32767.
<nexp2>
The width of the ellipse at its widest point, in dots. Minimum value is 1, maximum
value is 32767.
<nexp3>
The line weight of the ellipse, in dots. Minimum value is 1, maximum value is 32767.

Notes
Fingerprint does not support inverting an ellipse object.

A filled ellipse, created by using a large line weight, will not be completely black.

Examples
This example prints an ellipse contained within a rectangle:
10 PRPOS 200,200
20 DIR 1
30 ALIGN 1
40 PRELLIPSE 70,100,20

Fingerprint Command Reference 203

 50 PRBOX 70,100,2
60 PRINTFEED
This example prints a circle:
10 PRPOS 200,200
20 DIR 1
30 ALIGN 1
40 PRELLIPSE 100,100,2
50 PRINTFEED

PRIMAGE
Purpose
Renders an image stored in the printer's memory to the label buffer. This command
can be abbreviated as PM.

Syntax
PRIMAGE<sexp>
or
PM<sexp>

Parameters
<sexp>
Full name of the desired image including its extension.

Notes
An image is positioned according to preceding PRPOS, DIR, and ALIGN statements
and can be magnified by means of MAG. For the best printout quality, create and
download a larger version of the image instead of magnifying a smaller one. All
images provided by Honeywell have an extension which indicates the intended image
direction:
l Extension .1 indicates print directions 1 and 3.
l Extension .2 indicates print directions 2 and 4.
Although Fingerprint does not require these extensions, Honeywell strongly
recommends that you follow the same convention when creating your own images so
that selecting the correct image is easier.
Fingerprint supports black and white (no grayscale) images in PNG, PCX, GIF, and
BMP formats.

Example
This example illustrates printing a label containing an image printed "upside down":
10 PRPOS 200,200
20 DIR 3

204 Fingerprint Command Reference

 30 ALIGN 5
40 PRIMAGE "GLOBE.1"
50 PRINTFEED
RUN

PRINT
Purpose
Prints data to the standard OUT channel.
This command can be abbreviated as ? (question mark).

Syntax
PRINT[<<nexp>|<sexp>>[<,|;><<nexp>|<sexp>>...][;]]
or
?[<<nexp>|<sexp>>[<,|;><<nexp>|<sexp>>...][;]]

Parameters
<<nexp>|<sexp>>
String or numeric expressions to be printed to the standard OUT channel.

Notes
If no expressions are specified after the PRINT statement, it yields a blank line. If one
or more expressions are listed, the expressions are processed and the resulting values
are presented on the standard OUT channel (such as the host screen).

Do not confuse PRINT with PRINTFEED.

Each line is divided into zones of 10 character positions each. These zones can be
used for positioning the values:
l A comma (,) between the expressions causes the next value to be printed at the
beginning of the next zone.
l A semicolon (;) between the expressions causes the next value to be printed imme-
diately after the last value.
l A plus sign (+) between two string expressions causes the next value to be printed
immediately after the last value. Plus signs cannot be used between numeric expres-
sions.
l If the list of expressions is terminated by a semicolon, the next PRINT statement is
added on the same line. Otherwise, a carriage return is performed at the end of the
line. If the printed line is wider than the screen, the software automatically wraps to
a new line and continues printing.
Printed numbers are always followed by a space character. Printed negative numbers
are preceded by a minus sign.

Fingerprint Command Reference 205

Example
10 LET X%=10
20 LET A$="A"
30 PRINT X%;X%+1,X%+5;X%-25
40 PRINT A$+A$;A$,A$
50 PRINT X%;
60 ? "PIECES"
RUN
This results in:
10 11 15 -15
AAA A
10 PIECES

PRINT KEY ON/OFF

Purpose
Enables or disables printing of a label by pressing the Print key.

Syntax
PRINT KEY ON|OFF

Default is PRINT KEY OFF.

Notes
In Immediate mode and Direct Protocol, the Print key can be enabled to issue printing
commands corresponding to PRINTFEED statements. This implies that each time
Print is pressed, one single label, ticket, tag, or portion of continuous stock is printed
and fed out.

PRINT KEY ON|OFF cannot be entered in Programming mode (use KEY ON and ON
KEY GOSUB statements instead).

Example
This example shows how the Print key is enabled and a label is printed in Direct
Protocol:
INPUT ON
PRINT KEY ON
PP 100,100
FT "Univers"
PT "TEST LABEL"
[Press the Print key]
INPUT OFF

206 Fingerprint Command Reference

PRINT#
Purpose
Prints data to a specified device or sequential file opened using the OPEN command,
or controls the cursor in the front panel screen.

Syntax 1
Prints data to a device or file:
PRINT#<nexp1>[,<<nexp2>|<sexp1>[;]

Parameters 1
<nexp1>
Number assigned to the file or device when it was opened.
<<nexp2-n>|<sexp1-n>>
String or numeric expressions to be printed to the specified file or device.
[;]
If the line is appended by a semicolon, there is no carriage return appended to the
line.
An alternate method to print on two lines in one statement is to send all of the data to
the display in a singe PRINT# statement. Characters 1 through 16 display on the
upper line, and characters 18 through 33 display on the lower line. Character 17 is
ignored. The method also applies to strings that are not two full lines but still have
characters covering more than the first line. You can also include a line break
character in the text string using CHR$(10).

Syntax 2
Controls the cursor on the screen:
PRINT#, CHR$(155) + "(<sexp1>|<sexp2>|<sexp3>|<sexp4>|<sexp5>)";

Parameters 2
<sexp1>
Clears the front panel screen:
0J: From the active position to the end of the line (default)
1J: From the start of the line to the active position, inclusive
2J: Completely
<sexp2>
Selects the cursor type:
4p: Underscore
5p: Blinking block (default)
<sexp3>
Enables or disables the cursor:

Fingerprint Command Reference 207

 2p: Enables cursor
3p: Disables cursor (default)
<sexp4>
Sets the absolute cursor position. Specified as <<line>>;<position>H>, where:
line: 1 for the upper line on the screen, or 2 for the lower line
position: Horizontal position in the line. Range is 1 to 16.
<sexp5>
Moves the cursor relative to its present location. Specified as <distance><direction>,
where:
distance: Number of steps to move from current position. Default is 1.
direction: A - up, B - down, C - Right, D - left.
Movement must not place the cursor outside the front panel screen or the command
is ignored.

Notes
Expressions can be separated by commas or semicolons according to the same rules
for PRINT. The expressions must be separated properly so they can be read back when
needed, or be presented correctly on the front panel screen.

PRINT# can only be used to print to sequential files, not to random files. When
sending data to the printer screen ("console:"), PRINT# works the same way as PRINT
does on the standard OUT channel. For example, the screen can be cleared by
sending PRINT#<nexp> twice (see line 20 in the example below).

Examples of Printing to the Screen

The printer screen can show two lines of 16 characters each. Before sending any text,
you must open the device (line 10) and clear both lines on the screen (line 20). Note
the trailing semicolon on line 40:
10 OPEN "console:" FOR OUTPUT AS #1
20 PRINT# 1:PRINT# 1
30 PRINT# 1,"OUT OF LABELS"
40 PRINT# 1,"PLEASE RELOAD!";
50 CLOSE# 1
RUN
Since the last line was appended by a semicolon, there is no carriage return and the
text appears in the front panel screen as:
OUT OF LABELS
PLEASE RELOAD!
An alternate method is to send all the data to the screen in a single PRINT#
statement. Characters 1 through 16 are displayed on the upper line and characters 17
through 33 appear on the lower line, although character 17 is ignored.
The double-headed arrows in line 30 represent space characters. Note the trailing
semicolon in line 30.
10 OPEN "console:" FOR OUTPUT AS 1
20 PRINT# 1: PRINT# 1

208 Fingerprint Command Reference

 30 PRINT# 1,"OUTnOFnLABELSnnnnPLEASEnRELOAD!";
40 CLOSE# 1
RUN

Examples of Controlling the Cursor

This example clears all text from the screen:
10 OPEN "console:" FOR OUTPUT AS #1
20 PRINT#1, CHR$(155) + "2J";
This example selects the underscore-type cursor:
10 OPEN "console:" FOR OUTPUT AS 1
20 PRINT#1, CHR$(155) + "4p";
This example enables the cursor:
10 OPEN "console:" FOR OUTPUT AS 1
20 PRINT#1, CHR$(155) + "2p";
This example sets the cursor in lower line, position 16:
10 OPEN "console:" FOR OUTPUT AS 1
20 PRINT#1, CHR$(155) + "2;16H";
This example moves the cursor from the first position in the upper line to the last
position in the lower line:
10 OPEN "console" FOR OUTPUT AS 1
20 PRINT#1, CHR$(155) + "1B"
30 PRINT#1, CHR$(155) + "15C";

PRINTFEED
Purpose
Prints and feeds out one or a specified number of labels, tickets, tags, or portions of
strip, depending on the printer setup.
This command can be abbreviated as PF.

Syntax
PRINTFEED[<nexp1>] | [-1,<nexp2>]
or
PF[<nexp1>] | [-1,<nexp2>]

Parameters
<nexp1>
Specifies number of copies to be printed.

Fingerprint Command Reference 209

 <nexp2>
Specifies that <nexp2> number of identical copies of the last printed label should be
reprinted. This function cannot be used with Direct Protocol.

Notes
Each time a PRINTFEED is executed without an appending value, one new label,
ticket, tag, or portion of continuous stock is printed.

Optionally, PRINTFEED can be appended by a numeric expression specifying the

number of copies to print. In Direct Protocol, possible counter, time, and date values
are updated between copies printed using a predefined layout. Do not include any
PRINTFEED statements in layouts in Direct Protocol.

If the number of copies is > 1, and LTS& and CUT are disabled, the BATCH optimizing
strategy is automatically enabled, corresponding to an OPTIMIZE BATCH ON
statement. Otherwise, BATCH optimizing strategy is automatically disabled.

It is also possible to reprint a specified number of copies of the last printed label, for
example after an out-of-media condition (also see PRSTAT). Executing a PRINTFEED
resets these statements to their default values:

ALIGN BARRATIO INVIMAGE

BARFONT MAG BARFONT ON/OFF
BARSET PRPOS BARHEIGHT
DIR XORMODE ON BARMAG
FONT FONTD

Fields defined by statements executed before the PRINTFEED are not affected. Note
that, when using PRINTFEED in a loop, all formatting parameters are reset to default
each time the PRINTFEED is executed, and must therefore be included inside the
loop.
The length of media to be fed out at execution of a PRINTFEED statement is
determined by the choice of media type in the printer setup (label stock with gaps,
tickets with gaps, fixed length strip, or variable length strip) and globally by the start
and stop adjustment setup (positive or negative). The length of media to be fed out
can be further modified by an additional positive or negative FORMFEED statement,
either before or after the PRINTFEED.

Example 1
This example prints a single label with one line of text:
10 FONT "Univers"
20 PRTXT "Hello!"
30 PRINTFEED
RUN

Example 2
This example prints five identical labels with one line of text:

210 Fingerprint Command Reference

 10 FONT "Univers"
20 PRTXT "Hello!"
30 PRINTFEED 5
RUN

Example 3
This example prints five labels using a FOR...NEXT loop. Note that formatting
parameters are placed inside the loop:
10 FOR A%=1 TO 5
20 FONT "Univers"
30 PRPOS 200, 100
40 DIR 3
50 ALIGN 5
60 PRTXT "Hello!"
70 PRINTFEED
80 NEXT A%
RUN

Example 4
This example prints five labels in Direct Protocol, illustrating how the TICKS value is
updated between labels (provided a predefined layout is used):
INPUT ON
FORMAT INPUT "#","@","&"
LAYOUT INPUT "tmp:LABEL1"
FT "Univers"
PP 100,100
PT TICKS
PP 100,200
PT VAR1$
LAYOUT END
LAYOUT RUN "tmp:LABEL1"
#See how time flies&@
PF 5
INPUT OFF

PRINTONE
Purpose
Prints characters (specified by their ASCII values) to the standard OUT channel.

Syntax
PRINTONE<nexp>[<,|;><nexp>...][;]

Parameters
<nexp>
ASCII decimal value of a character to be printed to the standard OUT channel.

Fingerprint Command Reference 211

Notes
When certain characters cannot be produced by the host computer, they can be
substituted by the corresponding ASCII decimal values using PRINTONE. The
characters are printed (per the currently selected character set defined by NASC) to
the standard OUT channel (usually the host screen).

PRINTONE is similar to the PRINT statement and the use of commas and semicolons
follows the same rules.

Example
PRINTONE 80;82;73;67;69;58,36;52;57;46;57;53
This results in:
PRICE: $49.95

PRINTONE#
Purpose
Prints characters specified by ASCII values to a device or sequential file.

Syntax
PRINTONE#<nexp1>[,<nexp2>[<,|;><nexp3>...][;]]

Parameters
<nexp1>
Number assigned to the file or device when it is opened using the OPEN command.
<nexp2-n>
ASCII decimal value of the character to be printed to the specified file or device.

Notes
This statement is useful when the host cannot produce certain characters. The ASCII
values entered produce characters according to the currently selected character set.
The ASCII values can be separated by commas or semicolons according to the same
rules as for the PRINT# statement.

PRINTONE# can only be used to print to sequential files, not to random files. When
sending data to the printer display, PRINTONE# works in a way similar to PRINT#. The
display can be cleared by sending PRINT#<nexp> twice (see line 20 in the example
below).

Example
The printer display is able to show two lines of 16 characters each. Before sending any
text, the device must be OPENed and the display cleared. Note the trailing semicolon
sign on line 40.

212 Fingerprint Command Reference

 10 OPEN "console:" FOR OUTPUT AS #1
20 PRINT# 1:PRINT# 1
30 PRINTONE# 1,80;82;69;83;83
40 PRINTONE# 1,69;78;84;69;82;
50 CLOSE #1
RUN
Since the last line was appended by a semicolon, there is no carriage return. The text
appears on the printer display as:
PRESS
ENTER

PRLINE
Purpose
Creates a line. This command can be abbreviated as PL.

Syntax
PRLINE<nexp1>,<nexp2>
or
PL<nexp1>,<nexp2>

Parameters
<nexp1>
Length of the line in dots. Maximum is 6000.
<nexp2>
Line weight in dots. Maximum is 6000.

Notes
The line is drawn from the insertion point and away according to the nearest
preceding DIR and ALIGN statements (that is, the line runs in parallel with any text
printed in the selected direction).

A line can be ALIGNed left, right or center. The anchor points are situated at the
bottom of the line, which means that as the line weight increases, the line grows
upward in relation to the selected direction.

In the illustration below, all lines are aligned left. Lines may cross (see XORMODE
ON/OFF statement).

Fingerprint Command Reference 213

Example
This example draws a 2.5 cm (1 in) long and 10 dots thick line across the media in an
8 dots/mm printer:
10 PRPOS 50,100
20 PRLINE 200,10
30 PRINTFEED
RUN

PRPOS
Purpose
Specifies the insertion point for a line of text, a barcode, an image, a box, or a line.
This command can be abbreviated as PP.

Syntax
PRPOS<nexp1>,<nexp2>
or
PP<nexp1>,<nexp2>

214 Fingerprint Command Reference

Parameters
<nexp1>
X-coordinate (in number of dots from the origin).
<nexp2>
Y-coordinate (in number of dots from the origin).
Default for both is 0. Reset to default by executing a PRINTFEED.

Notes
When the printer is set up, a "print window" is created. This involves specifying the
location of the origin along the X-axis, setting the maximum print width along the X-
axis from the origin, and setting the maximum print length along the Y-axis from the
origin.

The X-coordinate goes across the media path and the Y-coordinate along the media
feed direction, as illustrated below. They are set in relation to the origin on the
printhead, not in relation to the media. Thus, the location where an object is actually
printed depends on the relationship between printhead and media at the moment
when the printing starts.

The insertion point must be selected so the field in question fits inside the print
window. A field that does not fit entirely inside the print window causes error 1003
("Field out of label") except when a CLIP ON statement is issued.
To find the present insertion point, use PRSTAT.

Fingerprint Command Reference 215

Example 1
This example prints a line of text:
10 FONT "Univers"
20 PRPOS 30,200
30 PRTXT "HELLO"
40 PRINTFEED
RUN

Example 2
Each text line is normally positioned separately by is own PRPOS statement. If no
position is given for a printable statement, it is printed immediately after the
preceding printable statement.
10 FONT "Univers"
20 PRPOS 30,200
30 PRTXT "SUMMER"
40 PRTXT "TIME"
50 PRINTFEED
RUN
This results in:
SUMMERTIME

Example 3
A program for fixed line-spacing of text may be composed this way (another way is to
use the extended PRBOX statement):
10 FONT "Univers"
20 X%=30:Y%=500
30 INPUT A$
40 PRPOS X%,Y%
50 PRTXT A$
60 Y%=Y%-50
70 IF Y%>=50 GOTO 30
80 PRINTFEED
90 END
RUN
Enter the text for each line after the question mark shown on the host screen. The Y-
coordinate is decremented by 50 dots for each new line until it reaches the value 50,
which means that ten lines are printed.

PRSTAT
Purpose
Returns the current printer status or the current position of the insertion point.

216 Fingerprint Command Reference

Syntax
PRSTAT[(<nexp>)]

Parameters
<nexp>
Numeric expression which returns different status indicators:
1: X-position for the insertion point at DIR 1&3.
2: Y-position for the insertion point at DIR 2&4.
3: X-position of the corner with the lowest coordinates of the last object.
4: Y-position of the corner with the lowest coordinates of the last object.
5: Width along the X-axis of the last object.
6: Height along the Y-axis of the last object.
7: Print job identifier
8: Print job state. See the Notes for more information.
9: Print job error code.
10: Remaining number of copies to be printed in a batch print job.

Notes
PRSTAT returns a numeric expression, which is the sum of the values given by the
following conditions at the moment when PRSTAT is executed:

Value Condition

0 OK
1 Printhead lifted
2 Label not removed (see note)
4 Label Stop Sensor (LSS) detects no label
8 Printer out of transfer ribbon (TTR) or ribbon
installed (DT)
16 Printhead voltage too high
32 Printer is feeding
64 front arm lifted
128 Printer out of media

PRSTAT always returns 0 in printers not fitted with a label taken sensor.
If two error conditions occur simultaneously (for example, if the printhead is lifted and
the printer is out of transfer ribbon), PRSTAT returns the sum of the two error values
(in this example, (1+8) = 9). Every combination of errors results in a unique sum. You
can use it to branch to a subroutine such as notifying the operator or interrupting the
program. The label stop sensor detects no label if a gap or black mark is in front of the
sensor, as well as when the printer is out of media.

Fingerprint Command Reference 217

 PRSTAT(1) and PRSTAT(2) return the current position of the insertion point relative to
either the X or the Y position, depending on the selected print direction. This is useful
for measuring the length of a text string or a barcode.
PRSTAT(3) to PRSTAT(6) returns the position and size of the last object regardless of
RENDER ON/OFF. Their values are not updated by the execution of a PRBUF
statement.
PRSTAT(7) to PRSTAT(10) detects if a print job has been interrupted, so steps can be
taken to reprint missing copies (see PRINTFEED).
PRSTAT (7) also returns a print job identifier that is automatically assigned to the
print job by the firmware.
PRSTAT (8) returns the state of the print job as a numeric expression, which is the
sum of the values given by the following conditions:

Value Condition

0 Print cycle not set up for printing, perhaps due to out-of-

ribbon
1 The previous print cycle never ended (timeout)
2 Print cycle has started
4 All lines successfully printed
8 Printing truncated (media shorter than print image)
16 Printhead strobing error or label length exceeded
32 Ribbon low

PRSTAT (8) = 6 or 22 indicates a successfully printed label (in the latter case error
"next label not found" may have been detected).
PRSTAT (9) returns the error code detected by the print engine during printfeed. It is
used together with PRSTAT(8) to determine the error cause when using OPTIMIZE
"BATCH" ON.
PRSTAT (10) returns the number of copies that remain to be printed in an interrupted
batch print job.

Example 1
This example shows how two error conditions are checked:
10 A% = PRSTAT
20 IF A% AND 1 THEN GOSUB 1000
30 IF A% AND 128 THEN GOSUB 1010
40 END
.....
1000 PRINT "Printhead is lifted":RETURN
1010 PRINT "Printer out of media":RETURN
RUN

218 Fingerprint Command Reference

Example 2
This example illustrates how you can check the length of text:
10 PRPOS 100,100: FONT "Univers"
20 PRTXT "ABCDEFGHIJKLM"
30 PRINT PRSTAT(1)
RUN
This results in:
380

PRTXT
Purpose
Provides input data for a text field.
This command can be abbreviated as PT.

Syntax
PRTXT<<nexp>|<sexp>>[;<<nexp>|<sexp>>...][;]
or
PT<<nexp>|<sexp>>[;<<nexp>|<sexp>>...][;]

Parameters
<<nexp>|<sexp>>
Specifies one line of text (maximum 300 characters).

Notes
A text field consists of one line of text. The text field must be defined by FONT or
FONTD and may be further defined and positioned by DIR, ALIGN, MAG, PRPOS,
INVIMAGE, or NORIMAGE (or their default values).

Fingerprint supports right-to-left and bidirectional text, as well as cursive glyphs,

character shaping, and connecting headstrokes. You must specify a valid font and
character set for your current language when printing complex scripts. For more
information, see Complex Scripts.

PRTXT supports inline text formatting, such as boldface and italicization. For more
information, see Inline Text Formatting.

Two or more expressions can be combined to form a text line. They must be separated
by semicolons (;) and are printed adjacent to each other. Plus signs can also be used
for the same purpose, but only between string expressions. A comma sign can be
used for a similar purpose, but the second expression starts at the next tabulating
zone. Each zone is 10 characters long.

Fingerprint Command Reference 219

 String constants must be enclosed by quotation marks, whereas numeric constants or
any kind of variables must not.

Example 1
This example prints a line of text:
10 FONT "Univers"
20 PRPOS 30,300
30 PRTXT "How do you do?"
40 PRINTFEED
RUN

Example 2
Several string constants and string variables can be combined into one line of text by
the use of plus signs or semicolons:
10 FONT "Univers"
20 PRPOS 30,300
30 PRTXT "SUN";"SHINE"
40 A$="MOON"
50 B$="LIGHT"
60 PRPOS 30,200
70 PRTXT A$+B$
80 PRINTFEED
RUN
This results in:
SUNSHINE
MOONLIGHT

Example 3
Numeric constants and numeric variables can be combined by the use of semicolons,
but plus signs cannot be used in connection with numeric expressions:
10 FONT "Univers"
20 PRPOS 30,300
30 PRTXT 123;456
40 A%=222
50 B%=555
60 PRPOS 30,200
70 PRTXT A%;B%
80 PRINTFEED
RUN
This results in:
123456
222555

Example 4
Numeric and string expressions can be mixed on the same line, for example:

220 Fingerprint Command Reference

 10 FONT "Univers"
20 PRPOS 30,300
30 A$="December"
40 B%=27
50 PRTXT A$;" ";B%;" ";"2007"
80 PRINTFEED
RUN
This results in:
December 27 2007

Example 5
Two program lines of text are printed on the same line if the first program line is
appended by a semicolon:
10 FONT "Univers"
20 PRPOS 30,300
30 PRTXT "HAPPY"+" ";
40 PRTXT "BIRTHDAY"
50 PRINTFEED
RUN
This results in:
HAPPY BIRTHDAY

PUT
Purpose
Writes a given record from the random buffer to a given random file.

Syntax
PUT[#]<nexp1>,<nexp2>

Parameters
#
(Optional) Indicates that whatever follows is a number.
<nexp1>
Number assigned to the file when it is opened using the OPEN command.
<nexp2>
Number of the record. Must be > 1.

Notes
Use LSET or RSET statements to place data in the random buffer before issuing the
PUT statement.

Fingerprint Command Reference 221

Example
10 OPEN "PHONELIST" AS #8 LEN=26
20 FIELD#8,8 AS F1$, 8 AS F2$, 10 AS F3$
30 SNAME$="SMITH"
40 CNAME$="JOHN"
50 PHONE$="12345630"
60 LSET F1$=SNAME$
70 LSET F2$=CNAME$
80 RSET F3$=PHONE$
90 PUT #8,1
100 CLOSE#8
RUN
SAVE "PROGRAM 1.PRG "
NEW
10 OPEN "PHONELIST" AS #8 LEN=26
20 FIELD#8,8 AS F1$, 8 AS F2$, 10 AS F3$
30 GET #8,1
40 PRINT F1$,F2$,F3$
RUN
This results in:

SMITH...JOHN......12345630

RANDOM
Purpose
Generates a random integer within a specified interval.

Syntax
RANDOM(<nexp1>,<nexp2>)

Parameters
<nexp1>
First integer in the interval. Use positive integers only. Must not be 0 or equal to
<nexp2>.
<nexp2>
Last integer in the interval.

Notes
The randomly generated integer will be:
l equal to or greater than <nexp1>.
l equal to or less than <nexp2>.

222 Fingerprint Command Reference

Example
This example produces ten random integers between 1 and 100:
10 FOR I%=1 TO 10
20 A% = RANDOM (1,100)
30 PRINT A%
40 NEXT I%
RUN
This results in:
31
45
82
1
13
16
41
77
20
70

RANDOMIZE
Purpose
Reseeds the random number generator, optionally with a specified value.

Syntax
RANDOMIZE[<nexp>]

Parameters
<nexp>
Integer (0 to 99999999) with which the random number generator will be reseeded.

Notes
If no value is specified, a message appears asking you to enter a value between 0 and
99,999,999.

Example 1
In this example, a prompt appears, asking you to specify a value to reseed the
generator:
10 RANDOMIZE
20 A%=RANDOM (1,100)
30 PRINT A%
RUN
Random Number Seed (0 to 99999999) ?
Enter 555

Fingerprint Command Reference 223

 This results in:
36

Example 2
In this example, the reseeding integer is specified, so there is no prompt:
10 RANDOMIZE 556
20 A%=RANDOM(1,100)
30 PRINT A%
RUN
This results in:
68

Example 3
A higher degree of randomization is obtained when the random integer generator is
reseeded with another random integer, in this example provided by a TICKS function:
10 A%=TICKS
20 RANDOMIZE A%
30 B%=RANDOM(1,100)
40 PRINT B%
RUN
This results in:
42

READY
Purpose
Orders a ready signal, for example XON, CTS/RTS or PE, to be transmitted from the
printer on the specified communication channel.

Syntax
READY[<nexp>]

Parameters
<nexp>
Specifies a communication channel:
1: "uart1:"
2: "uart2:"
3: "uart3:"
4: "centronics:"
6: "usb1:" (Supported when virtual COM port is enabled)
8: "uart4:"
9: "uart5:"

224 Fingerprint Command Reference

Notes
The selected communication protocol usually contains a "ready" signal, telling the
host computer that the printer is ready to receive more data.

READY allows you to order a ready signal to be transmitted on the specified

communication channel. If no channel is specified, the signal will be transmitted on
the standard OUT channel (see SETSTDIO statement).

The READY signal is used to revoke a previously transmitted BUSY signal. However,
the printer may still be unable to receive more data due to other reasons such as a full
receive buffer.

For the "centronics:" communication channel, BUSY/READY controls the PE (paper

end) signal on pin 12 according to an error-trapping routine (READY = PE low).

Example
This example allows the printer to receive more data on "uart2:" after the process of
printing a label is completed.
10 FONT "Univers"
20 PRTEXT "HELLO!"
30 BUSY2
40 PRINTFEED
50 READY2
RUN
Running this example may require an optional interface board.

REBOOT
Purpose
Restarts the printer.

Syntax
REBOOT

Notes
This statement has exactly the same effect as cycling power to the printer.

REDIRECT OUT
Purpose
Redirects the output data to a created file.

Syntax
REDIRECT OUT[<sexp>]

Fingerprint Command Reference 225

Parameters
<sexp>
(Optional) Name of the file to be created and where the output will be stored.

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

Normally the output data is transmitted on the standard output channel (in most
cases, the host screen). However, by means of a REDIRECT OUT <sexp> statement, a
file can be created to which the output will be redirected. That implies that no data is
echoed back to the host. Normal operation, with the output being transmitted on the
standard output channel again, is resumed when a REDIRECT OUT statement without
any appending file name is executed.

Example
In this example, a file ("LIST.DAT") is created to which the names of the files in the
printer permanent memory are redirected. The redirection is then terminated (line No.
30) and the file for input is opened using the OPEN command.
10 REDIRECT OUT "LIST.DAT"
20 FILES "/c"
30 REDIRECT OUT
40 OPEN "LIST.DAT" FOR INPUT AS #1
.....
.....
.....

REM
Purpose
Adds headlines and comments to the program without including them in the
execution.
This command can be abbreviated as ' (single quote).

Syntax
REM<remark>
or
'<remark>

Parameters
<remark>
String of text inserted in the program as a comment (maximum of 32,767 characters
per line).

226 Fingerprint Command Reference

Notes
REM may be entered on a program line of its own or inserted at the end of a line with
another command. In the latter case, REM must be preceded by a colon (":REM").

A shorthand form for REM is an apostrophe (ASCII 39 decimal). It is possible to

branch to a line of REM statement. Execution continues at the first executable line
after the REM line. Use REM statements carefully, because they slow down execution
and transfer of data and also take up valuable memory space.

Example
This example includes both types of REM statements:
10 'Label format No. 1
20 FONT "Univers"
30 PRPOS 30,100
40 DIR 1 :REM Print across web
50 ALIGN 4 :REM Aligned left/baseline
60 MAG 2,2 :'Double height and width
70 PRTXT "HELLO"
80 PRINTFEED
RUN

REMOVE IMAGE
Purpose
Removes a specified image from the printer memory. Only removes images
downloaded by means of a STORE statement.

Syntax
REMOVE IMAGE <sexp>

Parameters
<sexp>
Full name, including extensions, of the image to be removed.

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

Use the REMOVE IMAGE command to delete unneeded images from the printer
memory to save valuable space.

There is a difference between images and image files. Image files downloaded using
other methods (such as a TRANSFER KERMIT statement) should be removed using a
KILL statement.

REMOVE IMAGE cannot be undone, so use this statement carefully.

Fingerprint Command Reference 227

Example
10 REMOVE IMAGE "LOGOTYPE.1"
RUN

RENDER ON/OFF
Purpose
Enables or disables the rendering of text, barcode, image, box, and line fields.

Syntax
RENDER ON|OFF

Parameters
ON (default) enables rendering and OFF disables rendering.

Notes
Use RENDER OFF with PRSTAT to get information regarding size and position of a
field without actually rendering it; the field is not printed when the program is
executed.
When rendering is disabled:
l PRTXT, PRBAR, PRIMAGE, PRLINE, and PRBOX statements give no result when a
PRINTFEED statement is executed.
l statements other than PRPOS do not update the insertion point.
l field numbers (see FIELDNO) are not updated.
l statements such as CLIP ON/OFF, XORMODE ON/OFF, or BARSET retain their
usual meanings.
PRBUF renders a field regardless of RENDER ON/OFF.
RENDER ON enables field rendering after a RENDER OFF statement.

Example
This example retrieves information on the size of a text field which was not rendered.
Note that the actual result may vary depending on font, font size, and printer type.
10 RENDER OFF
20 PRTXT "Render off"
30 PRINT "Width:",PRSTAT(5),"Height:",
PRSTAT(6)
40 RENDER ON
50 PRINTFEED
RUN
This results in:

228 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Width: 153 Height: 46
No field to print in line 50
Ok

RENUM
Purpose
Renumbers the lines of the program currently residing in the printer working memory.

Syntax
RENUM[<ncon1>][,[<ncon2>][,<ncon3>]]

Parameters
<ncon1>
First line number of the new sequence. Default is 10.
<ncon2>
Line in the current program at which renumbering is to start. Default is 1.
<ncon3>
Desired increment between line numbers in the new sequence. Default is 10.

Notes
Use RENUM to create space for more program lines when expanding an existing
program, and for renumbering programs written without line numbers (for example,
after an unnumbered programs is LISTed, LOADed, or MERGEd). Line references
following GOTO statements are renumbered accordingly. Use a LIST statement to
print the new numbers on the screen.

Example
This example renumbers a program:
10 FONT "Univers"
20 PRPOS 30,100
30 PRTXT "HELLO"
40 A%=A%+1
50 PRINTFEED
60 IF A%<3 GOTO 40
70 END
RENUM 100,20,50
LIST
This results in:
10 FONT "Univers"
100 PRPOS 30,100
150 PRTXT "HELLO"
200 A%=A%+1
250 PRINTFEED

Fingerprint Command Reference 229

 300 IF A%<3 GOTO 200
350 END
Note that the line number in the GOTO statement on line 300 has changed. Line 10 is
not renumbered, since line 20 was specified as the starting point. The new increment
is 50.

REPRINT ON/OFF
Purpose
Enables or disables the reprinting of a label in Direct Protocol.

Syntax
REPRINT ON|OFF

Parameters
ON (default) enables reprinting and OFF disables reprinting.

Notes
REPRINT OFF also affects and overrides the behavior of the PRINT KEY ON
statement. If REPRINT OFF is entered before PRINT KEY ON, no error message is
shown, but PRINT KEY is set to ON and an empty label is printed when the Print key is
pressed.

If REPRINT is set to OFF, there is no way to reprint an old print job. If a PRINTFEED
statement is sent to the printer after a print job has been completed, a blank label is
fed out and an error 1006 ("No field to print") occurs. However, the REPRINT OFF
statement does not clear the print buffer, which only occurs after a PRINTFEED
statement has been executed.

Leaving and re-entering Direct Protocol does not reset the REPRINT status.
Restarting the printer resets the REPRINT status to its default value (ON). A REPRINT
OFF statement prevents automatic reprinting after the error has been cleared for the
following errors:
l 1005: "Out of paper"
l 1022: "Head lifted"
l 1031: "Next label not found"
l 1058: "Transfer ribbon is installed"
If REPRINT is set to OFF, an "Out of transfer ribbon" error does not cause the
"Continue-Reprint" message to be shown on the printer's screen.

Example 1
This example disables reprinting:
INPUT ON 'Enter Direct Protocol

230 Fingerprint Command Reference

 REPRINT OFF 'Disable reprinting

Example 2
This example shows what happens when the first and second PRINTFEED statements
generate a printed label. After the second PRINTFEED, the print buffer is cleared and
a "No field to print" error occurs.
INPUT ON 'Enter Direct Protocol
PRTXT "PRINT1" 'Print the text "Print1"
PRINTFEED 'Yields a print label
REPRINT OFF 'Disables reprinting
PRINTFEED 'Yields a printed label and clears the print buffer
PRINTFEED 'Yields a blank label and generates an error

RESUME
Purpose
Resumes program execution after an error-handling subroutine has been executed.

Syntax
RESUME[(<ncon>|<line label>|<NEXT>|<0>)|<HTTP>]

Parameters
<ncon>|<line label>
Number or label of the line to which the program should return.

Notes
RESUME is used in connection with ON ERROR GOTO and ON HTTP GOTO.
There are five ways of using RESUME:
l RESUME or RESUME 0: Execution is resumed at the statement where the error
occurred.
l RESUME NEXT: Execution is resumed at the statement immediately following the
one that caused the error.
l RESUME <ncon>: Execution is resumed at the specified line.
l RESUME <line label>: Execution is resumed at the specified line label.
l RESUME <HTTP>: Execution is resumed at the point where it was branched by an
ON HTTP GOTO statement. STDIN and STDOUT are restored to their original values.

Examples
This short program is the basis for two examples of alternative subroutines:

Fingerprint Command Reference 231

 10 ON ERROR GOTO 1000
20 FONT "Univers"
30 PRPOS 100,100
40 PRTXT "HELLO"
50 PRPOS 100, 300
60 PRIMAGE "GLOBE.1"
70 PRINTFEED
80 END

Alternate Subroutine 1
A font is selected automatically and execution resumes from the line after the error
occurred. If another error than the specified error condition occurs, the execution is
terminated.
1000 IF ERR=15 THEN FONT "Univers":RESUME NEXT
1010 RESUME 80

Alternate Subroutine 2
An error message is printed and the execution goes on from the line following the
error.
1000 IF ERR=15 THEN PRINT "Font not found"
1010 RESUME NEXT

RETURN
Purpose
Returns to the main program after having branched to a subroutine due to a GOSUB
statement.

Syntax
RETURN[<ncon>|<line label>]

Parameters
<ncon>|<line label>
Number or label of a line in the main program to return to.

Notes
When RETURN is encountered during the execution of a subroutine, the execution
returns to the main program. Execution continues from the statement immediately
following the most recently executed GOSUB or from an optionally specified line.

If a RETURN statement is encountered without a GOSUB statement having been

previously executed, error 28 ("Return without Gosub") occurs.

Example
10 PRINT "This is the main program"
20 GOSUB 1000

232 Fingerprint Command Reference

 30 PRINT "You’re back in the main program"
40 END
1000 PRINT "This is subroutine 1"
1010 GOSUB 2000
1020 PRINT "You’re back in subroutine 1"
1030 RETURN
2000 PRINT "This is subroutine 2"
2010 GOSUB 3000
2020 PRINT "You’re back in subroutine 2"
2030 RETURN
3000 PRINT "This is subroutine 3"
3010 PRINT "You’re leaving subroutine 3"
3020 RETURN
RUN
This results in:
This is the main program
This is subroutine 1
This is subroutine 2
This is subroutine 3
You’re leaving subroutine 3
You’re back in subroutine 2
You’re back in subroutine 1
You’re back in the main program

REWINDCONTROL
Purpose
Controls the internal rewind motor in PM-series printers.
This command is applicable only for the PM23c, PM43, and PM43c printers.

Syntax
REWINDCONTROL <nexp>

Parameters
<nexp>
Controls the rewind motor as follows:
l Positive values specify how long the internal rewinder pulls the liner before the
paper feed motor starts. Maximum value is 5000 dots.
l Negative values specify the distance (in dots) the paper is fed before the internal
rewind motor starts pulling liner. A value of -1 turns the rewind motor off. Maximum
value is label length.

Fingerprint Command Reference 233

Notes
PM-series printers can have two separate motors, one for feeding paper and one for
rewinding liner. REWINDCONTROL allows for control of the internal rewind motor.

A positive value stretches the liner before printing to ensure better label dispensing.
However, a positive value might cause the stepper motor to stall for certain liner
surfaces. In such cases, contact your local support organization.

A negative value allows the label to be rewound with the liner using the self-strip
mode. A value of -1 turns the internal rewind motor off, which makes for more silent
operation when the printer runs without self-strip. This command cannot be used
when REWINDVOID is enabled.

Examples
REWINDCONTROL 200
REWINDCONTROL -100

REWINDVOID
Purpose
Rewinds VOID labels with the liner in RFID-enabled PM-series printers.
This command is applicable only for the PM23c, PM43, and PM43c printers.

Syntax
REWINDVOID OFF|ON[<nexp>]

Parameters
<nexp>
Specifies the distance (in dots) the paper is fed before the internal rewind motor starts
pulling liner. Default is 100. Maximum value is label length.

Notes
PM-series printers can have two separate motors, one for feeding paper and one for
rewinding liner. This function causes a VOID tag/label to be rewound with the liner
paper when using the printer in self-strip mode, preventing a label being from being
dispensed (such as to an applicator). The value for <nexp> must be tested for each
specific type of media and label length.

Example
REWINDVOID ON 200

234 Fingerprint Command Reference

RIGHT$
Purpose
Returns a specified number of characters from a given string, starting from the end
(extreme right end) of the string.

Syntax
RIGHT$(<sexp>,<nexp>)

Parameters
<sexp>
String from which the characters will be returned.

<nexp>
Specifies the number of characters to be returned.

Notes
RIGHT$ is the complementary function for LEFT$. If the number of characters to be
returned is greater than the number of characters in the string, then the entire string
is returned. If the number of characters is set to zero, a null string is returned.

Example 1
PRINT RIGHT$("THERMAL_PRINTER",7)
This results in:
PRINTER

Example 2
10 A$="THERMAL_PRINTER":B$ = "LABEL"
20 PRINT RIGHT$(B$,5);RIGHT$(A$,8);"S"
RUN
This results in:
LABEL_PRINTERS

RSET
Purpose
Places data right-justified into a field in a random file buffer.

Syntax
RSET<svar>=<sexp>

Fingerprint Command Reference 235

Parameters
<svar>
String variable assigned to the field by a FIELD statement.
<sexp>
Holds the input data.

Notes
After OPENing a file and formatting it using a FIELD statement, you can enter data
into the random file buffer using the RSET and LSET statements. The input data can
only be stored in the buffer as string expressions. Numeric expressions must be
converted to strings by the STR$ function before an LSET or RSET statement is
executed.

If the length of the input data is less than the field, the data is right-justified and the
remaining number of bytes are printed as space characters.

If the length of the input data exceeds the length of the field, the input data is
truncated on the left side.

Example
10 OPEN "PHONELIST" AS #8 LEN=26
20 FIELD#8,8 AS F1$, 8 AS F2$, 10 AS F3$
30 SNAME$="SMITH"
40 CNAME$="JOHN"
50 PHONE$="12345630"
60 LSET F1$=SNAME$
70 LSET F2$=CNAME$
80 RSET F3$=PHONE$
90 PUT #8,1
100 CLOSE#8
RUN
SAVE "PROGRAM 1.PRG "
NEW
10 OPEN "PHONELIST" AS #8 LEN=26
20 FIELD#8,8 AS F1$, 8 AS F2$, 10 AS F3$
30 GET #8,1
40 PRINT F1$,F2$,F3$
RUN
This results in:
SMITH...JOHN......12345630

RUN
Purpose
Starts the execution of a program.

236 Fingerprint Command Reference

Syntax
RUN[<<scon>|<ncon>>]

Parameters
<scon>
(Optional) Specifies an existing program to run.
<ncon>
(Optional) Specifies the number of a line in the current program where the execution
will start.

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

RUN starts the execution of the program currently residing in the printer working
memory, or of a specified program residing elsewhere. The execution begins at the
line with the lowest number, or from a specified line in the current program.

If the program is stored somewhere besides the current directory (see CHDIR
statement) and has not been LOADed, its designation must be preceded by a
reference to that device (such as "/c", "tmp:").

Never use RUN on a numbered line, or in a line without a number in Programming

Mode, or error 40 ("Run statement in program") occurs.

A RUN statement executed in Direct Protocol makes the printer switch to Immediate
Mode, and has the same effect as an INPUT OFF statement.

Examples
To execute the current program from its first line:
RUN
To execute the current program starting from line 40:
RUN 40
To execute the program "TEST.PRG" from its first line:
RUN "TEST"
To execute the program "TEST.PRG" from its first line.
RUN "TEST.PRG"
To execute the program "FILELIST.PRG", which is stored in temporary memory, from
its first line:
RUN "/tmp/FILELIST.PRG"
To list all of the fonts and aliases installed on the printer:
RUN "ls -l /printer/fonts"

Fingerprint Command Reference 237

SAVE
Purpose
Saves a file to the specified location.

Syntax
SAVE<scon>[,P|L]

Parameters
<scon>
Name of the file. To save the file to somewhere other than the current directory, start
this string with the desired directory. Maximum of 30 characters including extension,
or 26 characters without an extension.
P
(Optional) Protects the file.
L
(Optional) Saves the file without line numbers.

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

When a file is saved, its file name can be a maximum of 30 characters including an
extension. By default, the program automatically appends the name with the
extension .PRG and converts all lowercase characters to uppercase. The name must
not contain any quotation marks (" ").

If you start the file name with a period character (.), it is not removed at a soft
formatting operation (see FORMAT). Such a file is also listed differently (see FILES).

Files can only be saved in the printer permanent memory ("/c"), its temporary memory
("tmp:"), or to a USB drive ("usb:"). If a file with the selected name already exists in the
selected directory, that file is deleted and replaced by the new file without warning.
You can continue to work with a file after saving it until a NEW, LOAD, KILL, or you
run the REBOOT command

A protected file (SAVE <filename>,P) is encrypted at saving and cannot be listed after
it is loaded. Program lines cannot be removed, changed, or added. Once a file has
been protected, it cannot be made unprotected again. Therefore, you should save an
unprotected copy, should a programming error be detected later on. If you are going
to use an electronic key to prevent unauthorized access to a file, you should protect it.

A saved program can be merged with the program currently residing in the printer
working memory. To prevent automatically assigned line numbers from interfering
with the line numbers in the current program, you can choose to save the program
without line numbers (SAVE <filename>,L). See MERGE instruction.

238 Fingerprint Command Reference

Example 1
SAVE "Label14"
saves the file as "LABEL 14.PRG" in current directory.

Example 2
SAVE "/c/Label14",P
saves and protects the file "LABEL14.PRG" in the permanent memory.

Example 3
SAVE "d:Label14",L
saves "LABEL14.PRG" without line numbers on a USB storage device.

SET FAULTY DOT

Purpose
Marks one or several dots on the printhead as faulty, or marks all faulty dots as
correct.

Syntax
SET FAULTY DOT<nexp1>[,<nexpn>...]

Parameters
<nexp1>
Number of the dot to be marked as faulty. Successive executions add more faulty
dots. <nexp1> = -1 marks all dots as correct (default).

Notes
SET FAULTY DOT is closely related to HEAD and BARADJUST. You can check the
printhead for possible faulty dots by means of HEAD, and mark them as faulty using
SET FAULTY DOT. Use BARADJUST to automatically reposition horizontal barcodes
sideways to place the faulty dots between the printed bars, preserving the readability.

Once a dot has been marked faulty by a SET FAULTY DOT statement, it remains
marked as faulty until all dots are marked as correct by a SET FAULTY DOT -1
statement.

The HEAD function makes it possible to mark all faulty dots using a single command,
instead of specifying each faulty dot using SET FAULTY DOT.

Example
This example illustrates how a barcode is repositioned by means of BARADJUST when
a number of dots are marked as faulty by a SET FAULTY DOTS statement. Type RUN

Fingerprint Command Reference 239

 and send various numbers of faulty dots from the host a few times to see how the
barcode moves sideways across the label.
10 INPUT "No. of faulty dots"; A%
20 FOR B% = 1 TO A%
30 C% = C% + 1
40 SET FAULTY DOT C%
50 NEXT
60 D% = A%+2
70 BARADJUST D%, D%
80 PRPOS 0, 30
90 BARTYPE "CODE39"
100 PRBAR "ABC"
110 SET FAULTY DOT -1
120 PRINTFEED
RUN

SETASSOC
Purpose
Sets a value for a tuple in a string association.

Syntax
SETASSOC <sexp1>, <sexp2>, <sexp3>

Parameters
<sexp1>
Name of the association (case-sensitive).
<sexp2>
Name of the tuple.
<sexp3>
Value of the tuple.

Notes
An association is an array of tuples, where each tuple consists of a name and a value.

Example
This example shows how a string, including three string names associated with three
start values, is defined and one of them (time) is changed:
10 QUERYSTRING$="time=UNKNOWN&label=321&desc=DEF"
20 MAKEASSOC "QARRAY",QUERYSTRING$,"HTTP"
30 QTIME$=GETASSOC$("QARRAY","time")
40 QLABELS%=VAL(GETASSOC$("QARRAY","label"))
50 QDESC$=GETASSOC$("QARRAY","desc")
60 PRINT"time=";QTIME$,"LABEL=";QLABELS%,
"DESCRIPTION=";QDESC$
70 SETASSOC "QARRAY","time",time$

240 Fingerprint Command Reference

 80 PRINT "time=";GETASSOC$("QARRAY","time")
RUN
This results in:
time=UNKNOWN LABEL=321 DESCRIPTION=DEF
time=153355

SETPFSVAR
Purpose
Registers variables to be saved at power failure.

Syntax
SETPFSVAR<sexp>[,<nexp>]

Parameters
<sexp>
Name of a numeric or string variable (uppercase characters only).
<nexp>
Size in bytes of a string variable. Maximum is 230.

Notes
When a program is loaded, it is copied to and executed in the printer temporary
memory ("tmp:"). Should an unexpected power failure occur, the printer tries to save
as much data as possible in the short time available before all power is lost. To
minimize the risk of losing important variable data at a power failure, you can register
numeric and string variables to be saved. There are 2176 bytes (including overhead)
available for this purpose.

However, should the power failure occur while the printer is printing, there will be no
power left to save the current variables.

When you register a string variable, you must also specify its size in bytes. The
variable name is limited to a length of 20 characters.

Related instructions are GETPFSVAR, DELETEPFSVAR, and LISTPFSVAR.

Example 1
Example with string variable:
100 IF QA$="" THEN QA$="Hello":QA%=LEN(QA$)
110 SETPFSVAR "QA$",QA%

Example 2
Example with numeric variable:
200 SETPFSVAR "QCPS%"

Fingerprint Command Reference 241

SETSTDIO
Purpose
Selects standard IN and OUT communication channel.

Syntax
SETSTDIO<nexp1>[,<nexp2>]

Parameters
<nexp1>
Desired input/output channel:
100: Auto-hunting enabled (default)
0: "console:"
1: "uart1:"
2: "uart2:"
3: "uart3:"
4: "centronics:"
5: "net1:"
6: "usb1:"
7: "uart4:"
8: "uart5:"
9: "usbhost:"
10: "bluetooth:"
11: "ftp1:"
12: "http1:"
13: "lpr1:"
14 - 19: Reserved for future use
20 - 28: NET2 - NET10
<nexp2>
(Optional) Specifies a different output channel:
0: "console:"
1: "uart1:"
2: "uart2:"
3: "uart3:"
5: "net1:"
6: "usb1:"
7: "uart4:"
8: "uart5:"
9: "usbhost:"

Notes
The printer is controlled from its host via a communication channel. By default, auto-
hunting is selected, meaning that all available channels are continuously scanned for
input. When data is received on a given channel, that channel is designated as the
standard input/output channel. If no data is received on the present standard input
channel within a 2-second timeout period, the firmware scans all other existing
channels (except "console:") looking for input data. The channel where input data is

242 Fingerprint Command Reference

 first found is then designated the new STDIN/STDOUT channel. The same procedure
is repeated infinitely as long as auto-hunting is enabled.
These restrictions apply to auto-hunting:
l If "centronics:" is used as input channel and auto-hunting is enabled, "uart1:" is
selected standard out channel.
l Auto-hunting does not work with "console:".
l Auto-hunting does not work with COMSET, INKEY$, INPUT$, or LINE INPUT.
l When using auto-hunting in the programming mode, the detected port stays as
STDIO until the program breaks.
It is also possible to specify a certain channel as the permanent STDIN and/or
STDOUT channel. If only one channel is specified, it serves as both the standard input
and standard output channel. Alternatively, a different channel can be selected for the
standard output channel.
For programming, Honeywell recommends using "uart1:" for both the standard input
and standard output channels. If another channel is selected, use the same serial
channel for both input and output. The "centronics:" channel can only be used for
input to the printer and is not suited for programming.

Example 1
This example selects the "uart2:" communication channel as the standard input and
output channel:
10 SETSTDIO 2
....
....

Example 2
This example enables auto-hunting for input and "uart1:" for output:
10 SETSTDIO 100,1
....
....

SETUP
Purpose
Enters Setup Mode, or changes the printer setup parameters, including network and
communications settings and media handling. Supported settings and parameters
depend on your printer and installed options.
There are specific SETUP commands for network settings, including Ethernet, 802.11
wireless, and Bluetooth. For more information, see SETUP Command Information for
Network Parameters.
Many legacy SETUP command paths, such as "PRINT DEFS,HEAD RESIST", are no
longer supported in Fingerprint. Honeywell recommends that you use current

Fingerprint Command Reference 243

 command paths instead. For more information on the setup parameters supported by
your printer, see your printer user manual.

Syntax 1
SETUP

Parameters 1
None. Places the printer in Setup Mode.

Syntax 2
SETUP<sexp>

Parameters 2
<sexp>
Name of an existing setup file that is used to change the entire current printer setup,
or a string used to change a single parameter in the current printer setup.

Syntax 3
SETUP <sexp1>,<sexp2>

Parameters 3
<sexp1>
Name of a setup section (see the printer user manual).
<sexp2>
Name of a file that will be used to change the specified setup section.

Syntax 4
SETUP <sexp1>,<sexp2>,<sexp3>

Parameters 4
<sexp1>
Name of a setup section (see the printer user manual). Not implemented for "prt".
<sexp2>
Name of the setup object (see the printer user manual).
<sexp3>
Specifies the new value (see the printer user manual).

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

To retrieve current Setup settings, use SETUP GET or SETUP WRITE.

244 Fingerprint Command Reference

 A setup file may contain new values for one or several setup parameters, whereas a
setup string only can change a single parameter. Creating a setup file requires several
operations. Setup strings can be created in a single operation, making them suitable
for use with Direct Protocol.

By default, setup parameters are saved as a file in the printer permanent memory.
However, you can use SYSVAR (35) to prevent changes from being saved. See SYSVAR
for more information.

When a SETUP<sexp> statement is encountered during program execution, the setup

is changed accordingly and program execution is resumed. Note that some printing
instructions (ALIGN, DIR, FONT, and PRPOS) may be changed when test labels are
printed.

Below is an example of a Setup file. Note that Setup files or setup strings have a
special syntax for each parameter that must be followed exactly:
l Variable numeric input data is indicated by "n"–"nnnnn", string data by "sssss", and
alternative data by bold characters separated by vertical bars (|).
NETWORK,IP SELECTION,DHCP
NETWORK,IP ADDRESS,0.0.0.0
NETWORK,NETMASK,0.0.0.0
NETWORK,DEFAULT ROUTER,0.0.0.0
NETWORK,DHCP RESPONSE,Broadcast
NETWORK,IPV6 SELECTION,Automatic
NETWORK,IPV6 ADDRESS,2001:db8:0:1::1/64
MEDIA,MEDIA TYPE,LABEL (W GAPS)
MEDIA,PAPER TYPE,TRANSFER
MEDIA,MEDIA SIZE,WIDTH,840
MEDIA,MEDIA SIZE,LENGTH,1200
MEDIA,MEDIA SIZE,XSTART,24
PRINT DEFS,CLIP DEFAULT,Off
MEDIA,TESTFEED MODE,FAST
MEDIA,LEN (SLOW MODE),0
MEDIA,CONTRAST,+0%
COM,USB KEYBOARD,U.S./U.K.
PRINT DEFS,CMD LANGUAGE,Fingerprint
TRANSFER,RIBBON SENSOR,LOW DIAMETER,0
NETWORK,NAMESERVER,10.10.1.155
NET-COM,NET1,NEW LINE

Fingerprint Command Reference 245

Example 1
This example enables a key for branching to Setup Mode:
10 ON KEY(18) GOSUB 1000
20 KEY(18)ON
.....
1000 SETUP
1010 RETURN

Example 2
This example shows how a new file is opened for output and each parameter in the
setup is changed by means of PRINT# statements. Then the file is closed. Any lines,
except the first and the last line in the example, can be omitted. Finally, the printer
setup is changed using this file.
10 OPEN "/tmp/SETUP.SYS" FOR OUTPUT AS #1
20 PRINT#1,"SER-COM,UART1,BAUDRATE,19200"
30 PRINT#1,"SER-COM,UART1,CHAR LENGTH,7"
40 PRINT#1,"SER-COM,UART1,PARITY,EVEN"
50 PRINT#1,"SER-COM,UART1,STOPBITS,2"
60 PRINT#1,"SER-COM,UART1,FLOWCONTROL,RTS/CTS,ENABLE"
70 PRINT#1,"SER-COM,UART1,FLOWCONTROL,ENQ/ACK,ENABLE"
80 PRINT#1,"SER-COM,UART1,FLOWCONTROL,XON/XOFF,DATA FROM
HOST,ENABLE"
90 PRINT#1,"SER-COM,UART1,FLOWCONTROL,XON/XOFF,DATA TO HOST,ENABLE"
100 PRINT#1,"SER-COM,UART1,NEW LINE,CR"
110 PRINT#1,"FEEDADJ,STARTADJ,-135"
120 PRINT#1,"FEEDADJ,STOPADJ,-36"
130 PRINT#1,"MEDIA,MEDIA SIZE,XSTART,50"
140 PRINT#1,"MEDIA,MEDIA SIZE,WIDTH,1000"
150 PRINT#1,"MEDIA,MEDIA SIZE,LENGTH,2000"
160 PRINT#1,"MEDIA,MEDIA TYPE,LABEL (w GAPS)"
170 PRINT#1,"MEDIA,PAPER TYPE,TRANSFER"
180 PRINT#1,"MEDIA,CONTRAST,-4%"
190 PRINT#1,"PRINT DEFS,PRINT SPEED,200"
200 CLOSE
210 SETUP "/tmp/SETUP.SYS"

Example 3
This example shows how a setup parameter is changed in the Immediate mode (or
Direct Protocol) using a setup string.
SETUP"MEDIA,MEDIA TYPE,VAR LENGTH STRIP" .
This method can also be used in Programming Mode, as in this example:
10 SETUP"MEDIA,MEDIA TYPE,VAR LENGTH STRIP"

246 Fingerprint Command Reference

SETUP GET
Purpose
Gets the current setting for a single setup object.

Syntax
SETUP GET<sexp1>,<sexp2>,<sexp3>

Parameter
<sexp1>
Specifies the setup section.
<sexp2>
Specifies the setup object.
<sexp3>
Stores the result.

Notes
Refer to the printer user's guide for a list of setup sections and objects.

Example 1
SETUP GET "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Association",A$
?A$
Ok
Open/WEP
Ok

Example 2
SETUP GET "Communications,Serial,COM1,Baud Rate",A$
?A$
Ok
115200
Ok

Example 3
SETUP GET "prt","MEDIA,MEDIA TYPE", B$
?B$
Ok
LABEL (W GAPS)

Fingerprint Command Reference 247

SETUP KEY
Purpose
Enables or disables access to Setup mode from the printer keypad.

Syntax
SETUP KEY ON|OFF

Parameters
ON enables entering Setup mode through the keypad, and OFF disables entering
Setup mode through the keypad.

Notes
You can prevent operators or non-authorized personnel from changing printer
settings from the printer keypad. SETUP KEY OFF allows the administrator to disable
the SETUP key on the printer keypad, effectively preventing changes to the printer
setup. SETUP KEY ON enables the SETUP key and access to the setup mode.

Setup mode can always be entered via a SETUP command.

SETUP WRITE
Purpose
Creates a file containing the current printer setup, or returns the setup file on a
specified communication channel.

Syntax
SETUP WRITE ["<sexp1>",]<sexp2>

Parameters
<sexp1>
(Optional) specifies the setup section.
<sexp2>
Name of a file or device to which the current printer setup is written.

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

SETUP WRITE is useful when you want to return to the current printer setup at a later
time. You can make a copy of the current setup using SETUP WRITE<filename>,
change the setup using a SETUP <filename> statement, and return to the original
setup when needed by issuing a new SETUP<filename> statement containing the

248 Fingerprint Command Reference

 name of the copy you created.

Honeywell recommends that you create the file in the temporary memory ("tmp:"), as
in SETUP WRITE "tmp:OLDSETUP". Once the file has been created in "tmp:", the file
can be copied to the permanent memory ("/c") so it is not lost at power off.

When SETUP WRITE file is used to change the setup, the present TESTFEED
adjustment is not affected.

Example 1
SETUP WRITE returns the printer setup in this example:
SETUP WRITE "Communications","net1:
This results in:
Communications,Ethernet,IPv4,IP Assignment Method,DHCP
Communications,Ethernet,IPv4,IP Address,0.0.0.0
Communications,Ethernet,IPv4,Subnet Mask,0.0.0.0
Communications,Ethernet,IPv4,Default Router,0.0.0.0
Communications,Ethernet,IPv4,DHCP Response,Broadcast
Communications,Ethernet,IPv6,IP Assignment Method,Automatic
Communications,Ethernet,IPv6,IP Address,2001:db8:0:1::1/64
Communications,Wireless 802.11,General,Network Name (SSID),INTERMEC
Communications,Wireless 802.11,General,Network Type,Infrastructure
Communications,Wireless 802.11,General,Roaming,Off
Communications,Wireless 802.11,General,Power Mode,Constant Awake
Communications,Wireless 802.11,General,Channel,1
Communications,Wireless 802.11,General,Hidden SSID,Disable
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Security Type,None
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Association,Open/WEP
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Pre-Shared Key
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Network Key Index,1
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Network Key 1
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Network Key 2
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Network Key 3
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Network Key 4
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,User Name
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Password

Fingerprint Command Reference 249

 Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Anonymous Name
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Inner Authentication,MSCHAPv2
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,CA Certificate,intermec.pem
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Client Certificate
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Client Key
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Server Common Name 1
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Server Common Name 2
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Validate Certificate,No
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,PAC,eap-fast.pac
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Acquire PAC,On
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Fast Roaming (CCKM),Disable
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Mixed Mode (Group=TKIP),Disable
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Network,IPv4,IP Assignment Method,DHCP
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Network,IPv4,IP Address,0.0.0.0
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Network,IPv4,Subnet Mask,0.0.0.0
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Network,IPv4,Default Router,0.0.0.0
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Network,IPv4,DHCP Response,Broadcast
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Network,IPv6,IP Assignment Method,Automatic
Communications,Wireless 802.11,Network,IPv6,IP
Address,::Communications,Bluetooth,Security,Disable
Communications,Bluetooth,Device Name,PC43-0000000411
Communications,Bluetooth,Discover,Enable
Communications,Bluetooth,Passkey,Communications,Bluetooth,Reserve,Disable

Example 2
In this example, the current setup is saved in the printer temporary memory under the
name "SETUP1.SYS". Then the start adjustment is changed to "200" by the creation of
a new setup file named "SETUP2. SYS." Finally, the created setup file is used to
change the printer setup.
10 SETUP WRITE "tmp:SETUP1.SYS"
20 OPEN "tmp:SETUP2.SYS" FOR OUTPUT AS #1
30 PRINT#1,"FEEDADJ,STARTADJ,200"
40 CLOSE
50 SETUP "tmp:SETUP2.SYS"

250 Fingerprint Command Reference

SGN
Purpose
Returns the sign (positive, zero, or negative) of a specified numeric expression.

Syntax
SGN(<nexp>)

Parameters
<nexp>
Numeric expression from which the sign will be returned.

Notes
The sign is returned as:
SGN(<nexp>) = -1 Negative
SGN(<nexp>) = 0 Zero
SGN(<nexp>) = 1 Positive

Example 1
Positive numeric expression:
10 A%=(5+5)
20 PRINT SGN(A%)
RUN
This results in:
1

Example 2
Negative numeric expression:
10 A%=(5-10)
20 PRINT SGN(A%)
RUN
This results in:
-1

Example 3
Zero numeric expression:
10 A%=(5-5)
20 PRINT SGN(A%)
RUN
This results in:

Fingerprint Command Reference 251

 0

SORT
Purpose
Sorts a one-dimensional array.

Syntax
SORT<nvar>|<svar>,<nexp1>,<nexp2>,<nexp3>

Parameters
<nvar>|<svar>
Numeric (nvar) or string (svar) array to be sorted.
<nexp1>
Index of the first element to be sorted.
<nexp2>
Index of the last element to be sorted.
<nexp3>
For a string array, this value specifies how the array is sorted:
> 0: Ascending sorting
< 0: Descending sorting
= 0: Illegal value

Notes
A numeric or string array can be sorted, in its entirety or within a specified range of
elements, in ASCII value order.

<nexp3> is used differently for numeric and string arrays. The sign always specifies
ascending or descending order. For numeric arrays, the value is of no consequence,
but for string arrays, the value specifies in which character position the elements will
be sorted. <nexp3> = 0 results in error 41 ("Parameter out of range").

Example
In this example, one numeric and one string array are sorted in descending order. The
string array is sorted in ascending order according to the third character position in
each string:
10 ARRAY% (0) = 1001
20 ARRAY% (1) = 1002
30 ARRAY% (2) = 1003
40 ARRAY% (3) = 1004
50 ARRAY$ (0) = "ALPHA"
60 ARRAY$ (1) = "BETA"
70 ARRAY$ (2) = "GAMMA"
80 ARRAY$ (3) = "DELTA"
90 SORT ARRAY%,0,3,-1
100 SORT ARRAY$,0,3,3

252 Fingerprint Command Reference

 110 FOR I% = 0 TO 3
120 PRINT ARRAY% (I%), ARRAY$ (I%)
130 NEXT
RUN
This results in:
1004 DELTA
1003 GAMMA
1002 ALPHA
1001 BETA

SOUND
Purpose
Makes the printer buzzer produce a sound with a specified frequency and duration.

Syntax
SOUND<nexp1>,<nexp2>

Parameters
<nexp1>
Frequency of the sound in Hz (maximum value 9999, a higher value will be ignored
and give no sound).
<nexp2>
Duration of the sound in periods of 0.020 seconds each (no maximum limit).

Notes
SOUND allows you to include significant sound signals in your programs. For
example, a sound signal can notify the operator that various errors have occurred.
A sound with approximately the specified frequency is produced for the specified
duration. If the program encounters a new SOUND statement, it is not executed until
the previous sound reaches the specified duration.
The SOUND statement even allows you to make melodies, although the musical
quality may be somewhat limited. For more information on setting specific musical
pitches, see KEY BEEP.

Example
The tune "Colonel Bogey" starts like this:
10 SOUND 392,10
20 SOUND 330,15
30 SOUND 330,10
40 SOUND 349,10
50 SOUND 392,10
60 SOUND 659,18

Fingerprint Command Reference 253

 70 SOUND 659,18
80 SOUND 523,25

SPACE$
Purpose
Returns a specified number of space characters.

Syntax
SPACE$(<nexp>)

Parameters
<nexp>
Number of space characters to return.

Notes
SPACE is useful for complex formatting, such as in a table.

Example
This example prints two left-justified columns on the screen:
10 FOR Q%=1 TO 6
20 VERBOFF:INPUT "",A$
30 VERBON:PRINT A$;
40 VERBOFF:INPUT "",B$
50 VERBON
60 C$=SPACE$(25-LEN(A$))
70 PRINT C$+B$
80 NEXT Q%
90 END
RUN
Entering these strings:
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December

results in:

254 Fingerprint Command Reference

 January February
March April
May June
July August
September October
November December

SPLIT
Purpose
Splits a string into an array according to the position of a specified separator
character and returns the number of elements in the array.

Syntax
SPLIT(<sexp1>,<sexp2>,<nexp>)

Parameters
<sexp1>
String to be split.
<sexp2>
String array in which the parts of the split string should be put.
<nexp>
Specifies the ASCII value for the separator.

Notes
The string is divided by a specified separating character which may found an infinite
number of times in the string. Each part of the string becomes an element in the
string array, but the separator character itself is not included in the array.
If the resulting array has more than four elements, you must first use a DIM
statement to set the array size. If you do not, error 57 ("Subscript out of range")
occurs.

Note that SPLIT does not return the number of elements in the array if the last
substring is empty, as seen in Example 2 below.

Example 1
In this example a string is divided into five parts by the separator character # (ASCII
35 decimal). The result is an array of five elements numbered 0 to 4 as specified by
DIM. Finally, the number of elements is also printed on the screen.
10 A$="ONE#TWO#THREE#FOUR#FIVE"
20 B$="ARRAY$"

Fingerprint Command Reference 255

 30 DIM ARRAY$(4)
40 C%=SPLIT(A$,B$,35)
50 PRINT ARRAY$(0)
60 PRINT ARRAY$(1)
70 PRINT ARRAY$(2)
80 PRINT ARRAY$(3)
90 PRINT ARRAY$(4)
100 PRINT C%
RUN
This results in:
ONE
TWO
THREE
FOUR
FIVE
5

Example 2
10 A$="A#B#C#D" : GOSUB ZSUB
20 A$="A#B#C" : GOSUB ZSUB
30 END
40 ZSUB:
50 DIM ARRAY$(3): REM Maximum numbers of substrings
60 C% = SPLIT(A$,"ARRAY$",35)
70 IF RIGHT$(A$,1)= CHR$(35) THEN
80 ARRAY$(C%)= " ": C%=C%+1: REM Insert empty array entry.
90 END IF
100 FOR I%=0 to C%: PRINT ARRAY$(I%): NEXT: PRINT C%; "total member count"
110 RETURN

STOP
Purpose
Terminates program execution and returns the printer to Immediate Mode.

Syntax
STOP

Notes
When a STOP statement is encountered, the following message is returned to the
Debug STDOUT channel (default is "uart1:"):
Break in line <line number>
You can resume execution where it was stopped by means of a CONT statement, or at
a specified program line using a GOTO statement in the Immediate Mode.

256 Fingerprint Command Reference

 STOP is usually used in conjunction with CONT for debugging. When execution is
stopped, you can examine or change the values of variables using direct mode
statements. You may then use CONT to resume execution.
CONT is invalid if the program has been edited during the break.
Related instructions are CONT and DBSTDIO.

Example
10 A%=100
20 B%=50
30 IF A%=B% THEN GOTO QQQ ELSE STOP
40 GOTO 30
50 QQQ:PRINT "Equal"
Ok
RUN
Break in line 30
Ok
PRINT A%
100
Ok
PRINT B%
50
Ok
B%=100
OK
CONT
Equal
Ok

STORE IMAGE
Purpose
Sets up parameters for storing an image in the printer memory.

Syntax
STORE IMAGE [RLL][KILL]<sexp1>,<nexp1>,<nexp2>,[<nexp3>],<sexp2>

Parameters
[RLL]
(Optional) Indicates RLL compression.
[KILL]
(Optional) Erases the image from the temporary memory at startup (recommended).
<sexp1>
Name of the image. Maximum 30 characters including extension.
<nexp1>
Width of the image in bits (= dots).

Fingerprint Command Reference 257

 <nexp2>
Height of the image in bits (= dots).
[<nexp3>]
Size of the image in bytes (RLL only).
<sexp2>
Name of the protocol:
"INTELHEX"
"UBI00"
"UBI01"
"UBI02"
"UBI03"
"UBI10"

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.

The name of the protocol must be entered in one sequence (for example,
"INTELHEX"). Upper or lower case letters can be used.

STORE IMAGE RLL is used when the image to be received is compressed into RLL
format. In this case the size of the image must be included in the list of parameters
(<nexp3>).

STORE IMAGE KILL implies that the image will be stored in the printer temporary
memory, which is erased at power off or REBOOT. Honeywell strongly recommends
this option to improve performance.

To store the image permanently, copy it from the temporary memory to the permanent
memory after the download is completed.

A STORE IMAGE statement must precede any STORE INPUT statement.

Example
This example shows how an Intelhex file is received via the standard input channel
and stored in the printer temporary memory:
10 STORE OFF
20 INPUT "Name:", N$
30 INPUT "Width:", W%
40 INPUT "Height:", H%
50 INPUT "Protocol:", P$
60 STORE IMAGE N$, W%, H%, P$
70 INPUT "", F$
80 STORE F$
90 IF MID$(F$,8,2)<>"01" THEN GOTO 70
100 STORE OFF

258 Fingerprint Command Reference

STORE INPUT
Purpose
Receives and stores protocol frames of image data in the printer memory.

Syntax
STORE INPUT<nexp1>[,<nexp2>]

Parameters
<nexp1>
Timeout in ticks (0.01 sec) before the next character is received.
<nexp2>
(Optional) Number assigned to a device when it is opened for INPUT using the OPEN
command. Default is the standard IN channel.

Notes
STORE INPUT receives and stores a protocol frame of image data as specified by
preceding INPUT and STORE IMAGE statements, and also performs an end frame
check.
STORE INPUT works differently for various types of protocol:
l INTELHEX: Receives and stores frames until timeout or end frame is received.
l UBI00-03: Receives and stores frames until timeout or required number of bytes
are received.
l UBI10: Receives and stores frames until timeout or end frame is received.

Example 1
This example shows how an Intelhex file is stored using the STORE IMAGE statement.
The number of input parameters may vary depending on the type of protocol (see
STORE INPUT statement).
10 STORE OFF
20 INPUT "Name:", N$
30 INPUT "Width:", W%
40 INPUT "Height:", H%
50 INPUT "Protocol:", P$
60 STORE IMAGE N$, W%, H%, P$
70 STORE INPUT 100
80 STORE OFF

Example 2
To receive the input from another channel than standard IN channel, the device must
be opened for INPUT using the OPEN command and a reference must be included in
the STORE INPUT statement.

Fingerprint Command Reference 259

 10 STORE OFF
20 OPEN "uart2:" FOR INPUT AS #9
30 INPUT "Name:", N$
40 INPUT "Width:", W%
50 INPUT "Height:", H%
60 INPUT "Protocol:", P$
70 STORE IMAGE N$, W%, H%, P$
80 STORE INPUT 100,9
90 CLOSE #9
100 STORE OFF

STORE OFF
Purpose
Terminates the storing of an image and resets the storing parameters.

Syntax
STORE OFF

Notes
After storing all protocol frames of an image, storing must be terminated by STORE
OFF. To store another image, you must issue a STORE OFF statement before the
parameters for the new image can be set up using a new STORE IMAGE statement.

Honeywell recommends that you always start an image storing procedure by issuing a
STORE OFF statement to clear the parameters of any existing STORE IMAGE
statement.

Example
This example shows how an Intelhex file is received via the standard IN channel and
stored in printer memory:
10 STORE OFF
20 INPUT "Name:", N$
30 INPUT "Width:", W%
40 INPUT "Height:", H%
50 INPUT "Protocol:", P$
60 STORE IMAGE N$, W%, H%, P$
70 STORE INPUT 100
80 STORE OFF

STR$
Purpose
Returns the string representation of a numeric expression.

260 Fingerprint Command Reference

Syntax
STR$(<nexp>)

Parameters
<nexp>
Numeric expression from which the string representation is returned.

Notes
This is the complementary function for the VAL function.

Example
In this example, the value of the numeric variable A% is converted to string
representation and assigned to the string variable A$:
10 A%=123
20 A$=STR$(A%)
30 PRINT A%+A%
40 PRINT A$+A$
RUN
This results in:
246
123123

STRING$
Purpose
Repeatedly returns the character of a specified ASCII value, or the first character in a
specified string.

Syntax
STRING$(<nexp1>,<nexp2>|<sexp>)

Parameters
<nexp1>
Number of times the specified character should be repeated.
<nexp2>
ASCII decimal code of the character to be repeated.
<sexp>
String expression from which the first character will be repeated.

Fingerprint Command Reference 261

Notes
The character to be repeated is specified either by its ASCII decimal code according to
the selected character set, or as the first character in a specified string expression.

Example
This example shows both ways of using STRING$. The asterisk character (*) is ASCII
42 decimal:
10 A$="*INTERMEC*"
20 LEADING$ = STRING$(10,42)
30 TRAILING$ = STRING$(10,A$)
40 PRINT LEADING$; A$; TRAILING$
RUN
This results in:
***********INTERMEC***********

SYSHEALTH
Purpose
Sets or retrieves the system health and controls the Ready-to-Work indicator on the
printer front panel.

Syntax 1
SYSHEALTH=<nexp1>

Parameters 1
<nexp1>
Sets the application view of the system health and controls the Ready-to-Work
indicator:
1: Indicator off
2: Indicator blinking
3: Indicator on (default)

Syntax 2
<nvar1>=SYSHEALTH

Parameters 2
<nvar1>
Returns the current system health status as shown by the Ready-to-Work indicator:
1: Indicator off
2: Indicator blinking
3: Indicator on

262 Fingerprint Command Reference

Notes
The readiness of the printer, individually or as a part of a solution, is indicated by the
blue Ready-to-Work indicator.
If the indicator blinks or is switched off, the printer is not ready. In case of several
errors or similar conditions occurring simultaneously, only the most significant error
is displayed. Once this error has been cleared, the next remaining error is displayed.
Provided the printer is connected to a network, all conditions that prevent printing are
reported to SmartSystems.
The SYSHEALTH variable adds more functionality to the Ready-to-Work indicator
than is offered by the printer. However, it does not override the standard indicator
handling. The worst case is always reported regardless if it is a system error or an
application error.

Example
This example shows how the Ready-to-Work indicator can be made to show a
"Connection refused" condition:
10 ON ERROR GOTO 1000
50 TRANSFER NET
"ftp://wrong.server.com/file","c/myfile"
60 PRINT "XXX"
100 END
1000 IF ERR=1833 THEN SYSHEALTH=2 ELSE SYSHEALTH=3
1010 RETURN
You can find out the health of the system this way:
A%=SYSHEALTH
PRINT A%

SYSHEALTH$
Purpose
Returns the error causing the current system health status.

Syntax
<svar>=SYSHEALTH$

Parameters
<svar>
Returns the error causing the current status, such as "Head lifted."

Notes
If SYSHEALTH = 3, SYSHEALTH$ returns "Operational."

Fingerprint Command Reference 263

Example
A$=SYSHEALTH$
PRINT A$
This results in:
Out of paper

SYSVAR
Purpose
System array for reading or setting system variables.
Settings in SYSVAR are reset to default values after you restart your printer.

Syntax
SYSVAR(<nexp>)

Parameters
<nexp>
Reference number of the system variable as described in the next table.

No. Description

0-13 Reserved, obsolete or not implemented.

14 Reads number of errors detected since last power up.
15 Reads number of errors detected since last executed SYSVAR(15).
16 Reads the number of bytes received after the execution of a STORE INPUT
statement. Reset by the execution of a STORE IMAGE statement.
17 Reads the number of frames received after the execution of a STORE INPUT
statement. Reset by the execution of a STORE IMAGE statement.

264 Fingerprint Command Reference

 No. Description

18 Read or Set verbosity level. In the Immediate and Programming Modes, all
levels are enabled by default. In the Direct Protocol, all levels are disabled by
default.

Different verbosity levels can be selected:

-1: All levels enabled (= VERBON)

0: No verbosity (= VERBOFF)

1: Echo received characters

2: "Ok" after correct command lines

4: Echo input characters from communication port

8: Error after failed lines

The levels can be combined, so for example SYSVAR(18)=3 means both "Echo
received characters" and "Ok after correct command line." The presently
selected verbosity level can also be read and is returned as a numeric value,
for example by PRINT SYSVAR(18).
19 Read or Set type of error message. Four types of error messages can be selec-
ted:

1: <string> in line <line> (default) for example "Invalid font in line 10"

2: Error <number> in line <line>: <string>, for example "Error 19 in line 10:
Invalid font"

3: E<number>, for example "E19"

4: Error <number> in line <line>, for example "Error 19 in line 10"

The presently selected type of error message can also be read and is returned
as a numeric value (1-4), for example by PRINT SYSVAR(19).
20 Read if the printer is set up for direct thermal printing or thermal transfer
printing, which is decided by your choice of paper type in the printer setup.

The printer returns:

0: Direct thermal printing

1: Thermal transfer printing

21 Read the printhead density, expressed as number of dots per millimeter.
22 Read number of printhead dots.

Fingerprint Command Reference 265

 No. Description

23 Read status of transfer ribbon sensor in thermal transfer printers.

The printer returns:

0: No ribbon detected

1: Ribbon detected
24 Returns whether the printer has been restarted since the last time SYSVAR
(24) was used.

This system variable is important when using the Direct Protocol. At power up,
all data not saved as programs, files, fonts or images is deleted, and most
instructions will be reset to their respective default values. SYSVAR(24) allows
the host to poll the printer to see if a power up has occurred, for example
because of a power failure and, if so, download new data and new
instructions.

The printer returns:

0: No power up since last SYSVAR(24)

1: Power up has occurred since last SYSVAR(24)

25 Obsolete
26 Read the status of the ribbon low sensor, assuming that the printer is fitted
with a thermal transfer mechanism. In Setup mode (Media/Paper Type/Trans-
fer/Low Diameter), you can specify a diameter in mm of the ribbon supply
roll, when SYSVAR(26) will switch from 0 to 1.

The printer returns:

0: Ribbon not low

1: Ribbon low

By default, the Low Diameter is set to 0, which disables the ribbon low
function. However, if the Low Diameter is set to a higher value than 0 and
SYSVAR(26) returns 1, the error condition 1083 "Ribbon Low" occurs at every
tenth PRINTFEED operation. Further actions must be taken care of by the
running Fingerprint program.
27 Set condition for label reprinting at out-of-ribbon error.

When printing a batch of labels using thermal transfer printing (OPTIMIZE

"BATCH" ON or PRINTFEED<n>), a label is deemed erroneous and thus
eligible for reprinting if the ribbon has been empty for a distance longer than
specified in dots by SYSVAR(27). Default is 0. Non-negative integers only.

266 Fingerprint Command Reference

 No. Description

28 Set or read media feed data erase at printhead lift.

Fingerprint keeps track of media between the label stop sensor and the dot
line of the printhead. If the printhead is lifted, there is a large risk that the
media is moved, so media feed will not work correctly before those labels have
been fed out. This parameter allows you to decide or read whether these data
should be cleared or not when the printhead is lifted.

0: Media feed data are not cleared at head lift

1: Media feed data are cleared at head lift (default)

2: Media feed data are cleared at head lift and the firmware looks for the first
gap or mark and adjusts the media feed using the same data as before the
head was lifted.
29 Read DSR (Data Send Ready)condition on "uart2:" The printer returns:

0: No

1: Yes
30 Read DSR (Data Send Ready) condition on "uart3:" The printer returns:

0: No

1: Yes
31 Read last sent ACK, NAK, or CAN character in the MUSE protocol.

This parameter allows you to read the last control character sent from the
MUSE protocol (special applications). The printer returns one of the following
alternatives: NUL, ACK, NAK, CAN.
32 Returns the length of media feed past the printhead.

Resolution: 10 meters.
33 Read DSR (Data Send Ready) condition on "uart1:".

Fingerprint Command Reference 267

 No. Description

34 Read or Set positioning mode for TrueType characters

This parameter allows you to select one of three modes for the positioning of
TrueType characters and also to read for which mode the printer is set. The
modes are:

0: Standard mode (default).

1: Compatible mode. This mode is compatible with Fingerprint 7.xx earlier

than version 7.2.

2: Adjusted mode.
35 This parameter allows you to decide whether a change in the printer setup is
to be saved as a file (which is effective after you restart the printer) or not be
saved (volatile). You can also read for which alternative the printer is set. Note
that the SYSVAR (35) setting at the moment when the new setup is entered
decides whether it will be saved or not.

The alternatives are:

0: Setup saved to file (Default).

1: Setup not saved to file.

36 Print changes of program modes.

This parameter is used with the Fingerprint debugger and controls whether
changes of program modes should be printed to the Debug Standard Out
port (see DBSTDIO). The options are:

0: Disable printout (default)

1: Enable printout
37 Set minimum gap length.

The media may have perforations or marks that are not intended to be
interpreted as gaps or black marks by the LSS. Using this SYSVAR parameter,
it is possible to make the LSS ignore gaps or marks that are shorter that a
specified value. (In this context, long and short are related to the media feed
direction.) The minimum gap length is specified in dots within a range of 1-
32. Default value is 1 mm (0.039 inches). Note that SYSVAR(37) affects
PRINTFEED and FORMFEED.
38 Obsolete and has no effect, even if it does not cause an error if used.

268 Fingerprint Command Reference

 No. Description

39 Enable/disable slack compensation. Forces start adjust.

Label slack compensation is a method of eliminating slack in the belts after

having fed the media back. At a negative FORMFEED, the printer will pull
back the media slightly more than specified by the FORMFEED statement
and then feed the media forward the same distance. If slack compensation is
enabled, and FORMFEED -100 is specified, the printer will pull back the
media for example -112 dots and then feed the media forward +12 dots to
take out the slack.

Performing a positive FORMFEED normally feeds out paper even if start

adjust is set to a negative value. Using narrow labels and liner rewinding may
cause the printout position to differ on the next printed label after a
FORMFEED. Forcing a start adjust when doing FORMFEED improves printout
precision in such cases.

The options are:

0: Disable slack compensation and disable force start adjust.

1: Enable slack compensation (default).

2: Force start adjust at FORMFEED.

3: Force start adjust at FORMFEED and enable slack compensation.

40 Not implemented.
41 "Next label not found" at predefined feed length.

The automatic detection of the error condition "Next label not found" (error
1031) by the label stop sensor can be overridden by specifying a fixed length
in dots. The length should preferably correspond to at least the distance
between the tops of two consecutive labels. During printing, error 1031
occurs if the media does not come loose from the core (media glued to core)
or if a label is missing on the liner. Especially useful for short labels (10–40
mm/0.4–1.5 inches long). Default value is 0.
42 Stop media feed in the middle of label gaps:

0: The media feed stops so the middle of a 3 mm (0.12 in) gap becomes
aligned with the tear bar when using labels (w gaps). This is the default
setting.

1: The media feed stops so the middle of the gap becomes aligned with the
tear bar, regardless of gap size.

Fingerprint Command Reference 269

 No. Description

43 Enable/disable file name conversion, meaning lowercase characters will be

converted to uppercase and the extension .PRG will be added if an extension
is missing:

0: File name conversion is enabled (default)

1: File name conversion is disabled.

44 Enable/disable filtering of NUL characters in background communication
(see COMBUF$):

0: Enables filtering (default)

1: Disables filtering
45 Returns the resolution of the printhead, expressed in dots per inch (dpi).
46 Read status of paper low sensor:

0: Indicates that the diameter of the media supply is larger than specified in
the Setup Mode.

1: Indicates that the detected diameter of the media supply roll is equal or
less than the diameter specified in Setup mode (Media/Paper/Low Diameter).
The error condition 1084 "Paper low" will occur. This error does not stop the
printing, but interrupts any program that does not handle it.
47 Enable/disable use of start adjust-stop adjust together with positive and/or
negative formfeeds:

0: Use of start adjust/stop adjust OR negative positive Formfeed values

(default).

1: Enable the use of start adjust/stop adjust values together with

negative/positive Formfeed values.

270 Fingerprint Command Reference

 No. Description

48 Enable/disable bidirectional direct protocol:

0: Disables use of direct commands (default)

1: Scans standard IN channel for direct commands. Can only be set in Direct
Protocol.

The supported immediate/bidirectional Direct Protocol commands are:

^s: Status request. The printer will respond with its current status in the form:

Response: cnt: <INT_CNT> left:<INT_LEFT> prstat:<INT_PRSTAT> pause:<INT_

PAUSE>
errno:<INT_ERRNO> recbuf:<INT_RECBUF>
Description:
<INT_CNT> is the total number of labels to be printed in the current print job.
<INT_LEFT> is the total number of lables left in the current print job.
<INT_PRSTAT> is the standard PRSTAT, except for LTS status, which has to be
enabled by the command LTS&ON to detect a remaining label.
<INT_PAUSE> is 1 if the current print job is paused either by console or by
command, 0 otherwise.
<INT_ERRNO> is the latest error code that has occurred in FP/DP.
<INT_RECBUF> is the remaining number of bytes in the receive buffer.

^q: Status query. Same action and response as ^s, but the command is not
added to the receive buffer.

^a: Abort current print job.

49 Set temporarily lower speed after negative start adjust.

This is used to avoid hard stretches at the beginning of a label with a full roll.
Specify the percentage of the negative start adjust value that should be fed
slower (70 mm/s). For example SYSVAR(49)=150 will cause the printer to run
slower for 150% of the negative start adjust value, before speeding up.
50 Set lower speed for given length after lowering printhead.

To avoid hard stretches after loading new media roll, this can lower the speed
(to 70 mm/s) for the specified length after lowering the printhead. The value
is given in dots. Default is 0.
51 Set the value in meters for SYSVAR(49) and SYSVAR(50) that will be in effect
after lowering the printhead.

Fingerprint Command Reference 271

 No. Description

53 Set or read the highest allowed outer diameter (in mm) of the ribbon supply.
Range is 40 to 1000 mm. Default is 83.

Note that a larger value causes out of ribbon detection to require a longer
feed.
54 Modified the DNS timeout value in increments of 30 seconds. Default is 5
(150 sec).
58 Enable/disable RFID retract for negative values. This is useful when going
beyond the printhead.
59 Show or hide the two line text window used in a Fingerprint program.
84 Set or read start character used with inline string formatting commands. The
character is specified with a decimal representation of the byte code (0-255)
desired. To disable the functionality (disabled by default), set the start char-
acter to -1. This variable is only active if SYSVAR(85) is set to a valid value.
85 Set or read stop character used with PRTXT/PRBOX inline formatting com-
mands. The character is specified with a decimal representation of the byte
code (0- 255) desired. To disable the functionality (disabled by default), set
the start character to -1. This variable is only active if SYSVAR(84) is set to a
valid value.
105 Set/Read label verification status
0 = Label verification not completed
1 = Label verification completed
106 Read label verification result
0 = Label verification pass
Non-Zero = Label verification failed, and error code is returned
107 Sets the cutter mode to do full or partial cut
0: Sets the cutter mode to full cut
1: Sets the cutter mode to partial cut

Example 1
Reading the value of a system variable, in this case the transfer ribbon sensor:
PRINT SYSVAR(23)

Example 2
Setting the value of a system variable. In this case verbosity is disabled:
SYSVAR(18)= 0

272 Fingerprint Command Reference

TAGFIELD
Purpose
Defines a field in the RFID tag memory area available for RFID operations.

Syntax
TAGFIELD[<sexp1>,]<sexp2>[,<nexp3>[,<nexp4>]]

Parameters
<sexp1>
(Optional) Name of the field to make available.
<sexp2>
Name of the segment to make available. Allowed values are described in the next
table.

Tag Type Values for <sexp2>

EPC Class 1 Version 1 "@ID": Tag identification segment for EPC

data. Default.
ISO 18000-6B or EPC UCode 1.19 "@ID": Tag identification segment (default)

"@DATA": Optional data segment

"@ALL": Tag's complete memory structure

EPC Class 1 Gen 2 "@RESERVED": Access and kill password seg-
ment.

"@EPC": EPC specific data (default)

"@TID": Tag identifier.

"@USER": User defined data.

<nexp3>
Field starting byte in the chosen segment. Default varies according to RFID tag
standard and segment in use. Must be an even number for Generation 2 RFID tags.

<nexp4>
Length of the field in bytes. Default varies according to the RFID tag standard and
EPCGlobal tag format in use. Must be an even number for Generation 2 RFID tags.

Notes
TAGFIELD specifies the field available for subsequent RFID commands, such as
TAGWRITE or TAGREAD. The memory structure of RFID depends on the tag type. Class
1 tags only allow the "@ID” segment, where EPC data is stored. ISO18000-6B or EPC

Fingerprint Command Reference 273

 UCode 1.19 tags contain two segments, "@ID" and "@DATA", as seen in the next
illustration:

Generation 2 (Gen 2) RFID tags have four segments, "@RESERVED", "@EPC", "@TID",
and "@USER".
The <nexp3> and <nexp4> parameters specify a subset of a segment as the currently
available field. It is possible to name the field to use with <sexp1>. This name may not
start with an @-character. A possible representation of tag segments can be seen in
the illustration.
The default values for <nexp1> and <nexp2> may be modified by a subsequent
TAGFORMAT command (see Chapter 6). Values for <nexp3> and <nexp4> do not
normally need to be set when writing EPC information, as these are automatically
adjusted for the EPC tag format specified. The only exception is ISO 18000-6B tags.
TAGFIELD resets TAGFORMAT to default. Related commands are TAGFORMAT,
TAGREAD and TAGWRITE.

Example
The fields A, B, and C in the illustration above are defined by:
A: TAGFIELD "@ID"
B: TAGFIELD "@DATA",0,8
C: TAGFIELD "C","@DATA",8,14
The field name "C" can then be reused:
C: TAGFIELD "C"

TAGFORMAT
Purpose
Specifies the format of the data to be read from or written to an RFID tag. For more
information, see Supported RFID Tag Formats.

Syntax
TAGFORMAT<sexp>

Parameters
<sexp>
Format of the data. Available formats are:
"ASCII" 8-bit ASCII string.
"HEX" (Default) Hexadecimal string. Values 0-9 and a-f allowed. Hex characters must

274 Fingerprint Command Reference

 be entered in pairs.
"NUM" Integer. Valid range is 0 to 2147483647. Always uses 4 bytes to represent
data, unless a smaller field has been defined, and the number fits in that field. Not
allowed for Class1 tags.
The following formats are supported by EPCglobal tags only:
"SGTIN-64" "Filter","Company Prefix","Item Reference","Serial Number"
"SGTIN-96" "Filter","Company Prefix","Item Reference","Serial Number"
"SSCC-64" "Filter","Company Prefix","Serial Reference"
"SSCC-96" "Filter","Company Prefix","Serial Reference"
"SGLN-64" "Filter","Company Prefix","Location Reference","Serial Number"
"SGLN-96" "Filter","Company Prefix","Location Reference","Serial Number"
"GRAI-64" "Filter","Company Prefix","Asset Type","Serial Number"
"GRAI-96" "Filter", "Company Prefix", "Asset Type", "Serial Number"
"GIAI-64" "Filter", "Company Prefix", "Individual Asset Reference"
"GIAI-96" "Filter", "Company Prefix", "Individual Asset Reference"
"GID-96" "General Manager Number", "Object Class", "Serial Number"
"USDOD-64" "Filter", "Government Managed Identifier","Serial Number"
"USDOD-96" "Filter", "Government Managed Identifier", "Serial Number"
"EPC-HEX64" Hex values for all bits on a 64-bit tag's memory area.
"EPC-HEX96" Hex values for all bits on a 96-bit tag's memory area.
"EPC-URN" Uniform Resource Name string. Standardized format for entry of EPC
identity.

Notes
The TAGFORMAT command specifies the format of the data to be read from or written
to a tag with a subsequent TAGREAD or TAGWRITE command. The format applies to
the field defined by the most recent TAGFIELD command.

TAGFORMAT is reset to default by a TAGFIELD command. Other related commands

are TAGREAD and TAGWRITE.

Example 1
10 FILTER$ = "3"
20 PREFIX$ = "0614141"
30 ITEM$ = "100734"
40 SERIAL$ = "2"
50 TAGFIELD "@EPC"
60 TAGFORMAT "SGTIN-96"
70 TAGWRITE FILTER$, PREFIX$, ITEM$, SERIAL$
80 TAGFIELD "@ID"
90 TAGFORMAT "EPC-URN"
100 TAGREAD MyURI$
110 PRINT MyURI$
RUN
This results in:
urn:epc:sgtin-96:3.0614141.100734.2

Fingerprint Command Reference 275

Example 2
10 TAGFIELD "@USER",10,4
20 TAGFORMAT "ASCII"
30 TAGWRITE "RFID"
40 TAGREAD A$
50 PRINT A$
RUN
This results in:
RFID

TAGPROTECT
Purpose
Protects tag data from being overwritten.

Syntax 1
(EPCglobal Class 1, ISO 18000-6B, and EPC UCode v1.19 Tags only)
TAGPROTECT<sexp1>

Parameters 1
<sexp1>
Specifies the tag protection level for a field or segment. Available options are:
"ON" = Tag is protected.
"OFF" = Tag remains unprotected.

Syntax 2 =

EPC Gen 2 tags only)

TAGPROTECT<sexp1>[,<sexp2>]

Parameters 2
<sexp1>
Specifies the tag protection level for a field or segment. Available options are:
"LOCK" = The field is locked and the data cannot be overwritten until the lock is
revoked.
"LOCKP" = The field is permanently locked.
"UNLOCK" = The field is unlocked and data stored within the field is not protected.
"UNLOCKP" = The field is permanently unlocked.
<sexp2>
Consists of a 4-byte access password stored in the "@RESERVED" segment on the tag.
Only the HEX format can be used for the password (see TAGFORMAT). Password is set
with TAGWRITE.

276 Fingerprint Command Reference

Notes
TAGPROTECT protects the most recently referenced tag from being overwritten by an
RFID operation. The protection is applied during the next TAGWRITE operation, since
TAGPROTECT does not align the tag over the antenna.

Related commands are TAGFIELD, TAGFORMAT and TAGWRITE.

Examples
Gen 1 example:
10 TAGFIELD "@ID"
20 TAGFORMAT "SSCC-64"
30 TAGPROTECT "ON"
40 TAGWRITE "1","12345","123456"
Gen 2 example (assumes that the access password "12345678" is stored in the
@RESERVED memory bank of the tag):
TAGFIELD "@EPC",4,12
TAGFORMAT "SGTIN-96"
TAGPROTECT "LOCK","12345678"
TAGWRITE "3","2747561","158310","74"

TAGREAD
Purpose
Reads an RFID tag field.

Syntax
TAGREAD<nvar>|<svar1>[,<svar2>,<svar3>,<svar4>]

Parameters
<nvar>
Numeric variable that stores the data. Only used with the "NUM" field in TAGFORMAT.
<svarN>
String variable that stores the data. The number of arguments depends on
TAGFORMAT.

Notes
TAGREAD reads the data from the field specified by the latest TAGFIELD command
into the variable <nvar> or variables <svarN>.

The format of the data is defined by the latest TAGFORMAT command. If you state a
numeric variable <nvar>, an error is returned unless the data is in the "NUM" format.

Related commands are TAGFIELD, TAGFORMAT and TAGWRITE.

Fingerprint Command Reference 277

Example 1
Using numeric variables:
10 TAGFIELD "@DATA",2,2
20 TAGFORMAT "NUM"
30 TAGWRITE 19562
40 TAGFIELD "@DATA",2,2
50 TAGFORMAT "NUM"
60 TAGREAD A%
RUN
This results in:
19562

Example 2
Reading a SGTIN-96 tag from a Gen 2 tag:
10 TAGFIELD "@EPC"
20 TAGFORMAT "SGTIN-96"
30 TAGREAD FILTER$, PREFIX$, ITEM$, SERIAL$
40 PRINT FILTER$, PREFIX$, ITEM$, SERIAL$
RUN
This results in:
3 0614141 100734 2

TAGWRITE
Purpose
Writes to an RFID tag field.

Syntax
TAGWRITE<nvar>|<svar1>[,<svar2>,<svar3>,<svar4>]

Parameters
<nvar>
Numeric variable to be written. Only used with the "NUM" field in TAGFORMAT.
<svarN>
String variable to be written. The number of arguments depends on TAGFORMAT.

Notes
TAGWRITE writes the data from <nvar> or <svar1> to the field specified by the latest
TAGFIELD command. The format of the data is specified by the latest TAGFORMAT
command. If the data written is shorter than the field, the field is padded with zeroes.

278 Fingerprint Command Reference

 The exception to this rule occurs in some EPC tag formats where the exact number of
digits must be entered, even if it means adding non-significant digits (for example,
writing 00234 instead of 234). If the data is too long to fit in the specified field, an
error is returned. For more information, see Supported RFID Tag Formats.
Related commands are FORMAT$, TAGFIELD, TAGFORMAT and TAGREAD.

Examples
Writing an SGTIN-96 to a Gen 2 tag:
10 TAGFIELD "@EPC"
20 TAGFORMAT "SGTIN-96"
30 TAGWRITE "3","0614141","100734","2"
Two examples of writing the same SSCC-64 info to an ISO18000-6B tag:
10 TAGFIELD "@DATA",10,8
20 TAGFORMAT "SSCC-64"
30 TAGWRITE "1","12345","123456"
10 TAGFIELD "@DATA",10,8
20 TAGFORMAT "EPC-URN"
30 TAGWRITE
"urn:epc:tag:sscc-64:1.12345.123456"

TESTFEED
Purpose
Adjusts the label stop, ribbon end/low and paper low sensors, and RFID module while
running the media and ribbon feed mechanisms.

Syntax
TESTFEED[<nexp>]

Parameters
<nexp>
(Optional) Feed length in dots.

Notes
TESTFEED feeds <nexp> dots while calibrating the label stop/black mark sensor (LSS)
for the characteristics of the media loaded in the printer. The statement is needed to
detect media, gaps, black marks, and out-of-paper conditions, and should be done for
all media types.
In the setup, TESTFEED MODE can be set to SLOW, which might be necessary when
using media with pre-printed lines. This is done with a SETUP command or by placing
the printer in Setup Mode. When in SLOW mode, TESTFEED samples the media
length plus 10 mm. Alternately, the length sampled can be set using the MEDIA,LEN
(SLOW MODE) option, the minimum being the number of dots corresponding to 10
mm. This value is ignored when TESTFEED MODE is set to FAST.

Fingerprint Command Reference 279

 If an RFID module is installed, and RFID ON is set, TESTFEED attempts to identify the
RFID tag. This is always performed in SLOW mode.
If <nexp> is omitted, it is automatically set to 1.5 times the media length specified in
the setup. For the TESTFEED to be successful, at least one gap or black mark must
pass the LSS. Best results for "Ticket w Mark" are obtained with a <nexp> value of
1200 or any other reasonable number.
When a TESTFEED is executed, the ribbon end/low and paper low sensors are also
calibrated (if installed). However, this does not apply when the testfeed is ordered
using the testfeed option in Setup Mode.
In Immediate Mode, a TESTFEED is performed when the Shift and Feed keys are
pressed simultaneously.
Since TESTFEED is essential for a proper media load, some facility for issuing a
TESTFEED statement should be included in all custom-made label-printing programs
as seen in the example.

Example
This program performs a TESTFEED statement when the Shift and Feed keys are
pressed simultaneously on the printer keypad:
10 ON KEY (117) GOSUB QTESTFEED
20 KEY (117) ON
30 QLOOP:
40 GOTO QLOOP
.....
1000 QTESTFEED:
1010 TESTFEED
1020 RETURN

TICKS
Purpose
Returns the elapsed time since the last power up in the printer, expressed in number
of "TICKS" (1 TICK = 0.01 sec).

Syntax
TICKS

Notes
TICKS allows you to measure time more exactly than the TIME$ variable, which cannot
handle time units smaller than 1 second. The TICKS counter is reset to zero at power
up.

Example
10 A%=TICKS
20 PRINT A%
RUN

280 Fingerprint Command Reference

 This results in:
1081287
In this case, the time which has passed since the printer was started is 10812.87
seconds, or 3 hours 12.87 seconds.

TIME$
Purpose
Sets or returns the current time.

Syntax 1
Setting the time:
TIME$=<sexp>

Parameters 1
<sexp>
Sets the current time by a 6-digit number. By default, time is always entered and
returned as HHMMSS, where:
HH = Hours: Two digits (00-23)
MM = Minutes: Two digits (00-59)
SS = Seconds: Two digit (00-59)
Time is entered as a 24-hour cycle (for example, 8 P.M. is entered as "200000").

Syntax 2
Reading the time:
<svar>=TIME$[(<sexp>)]

Parameters 2
<svar>
Returns the current time according to the printer clock.
<sexp>
(Optional) Flag "F", indicating that the time will be returned according to the format
specified by FORMAT TIME$.

Notes
TIME$ works best if the printer has a real-time clock (RTC). The RTC keeps track of the
time even if the printer is restarted. Honeywell mobile printers do not have an RTC.
If no RTC is installed, the internal clock is used. After startup, an error occurs when
trying to read the date or time if the internal clock has been not been manually set
using either a DATE$ or TIME$ variable.

Fingerprint Command Reference 281

 If only the date is set, the internal clock starts at 00:00:00, and if only the time is set,
the internal clock starts at Jan 01 1980. After setting the internal clock, you can use
the DATE$ and TIME$ variables the same way as when an RTC is fitted, until a power
off or REBOOT causes the date and time values to be lost.
The format for how the printer returns time from a TIME$("F") variable can be changed
using a FORMAT TIME$ statement.

Example
This example sets and reads the time, then prints it on the host screen:
10 TIME$ = "154300"
20 FORMAT TIME$ "HH.MM"
30 PRINT "Time is "+TIME$("F")
RUN
This results in:
Time is 15.43

TIMEADD$
Purpose
Returns a new time after a number of seconds have been added to or subtracted from
the current time or from a specified time.

Syntax
TIMEADD$([<sexp1>,]<nexp>[,<sexp2>])

Parameters
<sexp1>
Any time given according to the TIME$ format, which a certain number of seconds
should be added to or subtracted from.
<nexp>
Number of seconds to be added to (or subtracted from) the current time, or (optional)
the time specified by <sexp1>.
<sexp2>
Optional flag "F", indicating that the time will be returned according to the format
specified by FORMAT TIME$.

Notes
This function works best if a real-time clock circuit (RTC) is fitted on the printer’s CPU
board. Honeywell mobile printers do not have an RTC.
The original time (<sexp1>) should always be entered according to the TIME$ format
(HHMMSS). Time is entered as a 24-hour cycle (for example, 8 P.M. is entered as
"200000").

282 Fingerprint Command Reference

 The number of seconds to be added or subtracted from the original time should be
specified as a positive or negative numeric expression respectively.
If no "F" flag is included in the TIMEADD$ function, the result is returned according to
the TIME$ format.
If the TIMEADD$ function includes an "F" flag, the result is returned in the format
specified by FORMAT TIME$.

Example 1
10 A%=30
20 B$=TIMEADD$ ("133050",A%)
30 PRINT B$
RUN
This results in:
133120

Example 2
10 TIME$="133050"
20 FORMAT TIME$ "hh.mm.ss pp"
30 A% = -40
40 PRINT TIMEADD$(A%,"F")
RUN
This results in:
01.30.10 pm

TIMEDIFF
Purpose
Returns the difference between two specified times in number of seconds.

Syntax
TIMEDIFF(<sexp1>,<sexp2>)

Parameters
<sexp1>
First point in time (time 1).
<sexp2>
Second point in time (time 2).

Notes
This variable works best if a real-time clock circuit (RTC) is fitted on the printer’s CPU
board. Honeywell mobile printers do not have an RTC.

Fingerprint Command Reference 283

 To get the result as a positive value, the two points of time should be entered with the
earlier moment (time 1) first and the later moment (time 2) last, as seen the first
example. If the later moment (time 2) is entered first, the resulting value is negative,
as seen in the second example.
Enter the time according to the standard TIME$ format HHMMSS. The resulting
difference in seconds is returned.

Example 1
PRINT TIMEDIFF ("133050","133120")
This results in:
30

Example 2
PRINT TIMEDIFF ("133120","133050")
This results in:
-30

TRANSFER KERMIT
Purpose
Transfers data files using the KERMIT communication protocol.

Syntax
TRANSFER K[ERMIT]<sexp1>[,<sexp2>]

Parameters
<sexp1>
Specifies the direction of the transmission by the expression "S" (= send) or "R" (=
receive).
<sexp2>
(Optional) Name of the file transmitted from the printer. Default is "KERMIT.FILE".

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.
Kermit is a protocol for serial binary transfer of a complete file, and is included in
HyperTerminal and other communication programs. For more information, consult
the application program documentation.
TRANSFER KERMIT can only handle a single file at a time. When transmitting files
from the printer to the host, carefully observe possible restrictions on the number of
characters in the file name that may be imposed by the host operating system.

284 Fingerprint Command Reference

 When receiving a file, you must start the transmission within 30 seconds of
completing the TRANSFER KERMIT "R" statement. The printer stores the file in the
current directory ("/c", "tmp:"). Files cannot be received into "/rom". If a file in the
current directory has the same name as the one to be transferred, the existing file will
be replaced by the new file.
Thus, you need to keep track of the files already stored in the current directory (see
FILES statement). Give the new file a name not already used by an existing file, unless
you want to replace the existing file. Downloaded fonts and images are auto-installed.

Example 1
This example sets up the printer to receive a file on the standard IN channel:
TRANSFER KERMIT "R"

Example 2
This example sends "FILE1.TXT" from the printer to the host on a channel other than
the standard OUT channel:
TRANSFER K "S","FILE1.TXT","uart2:","uart2:"

TRANSFER NET
Purpose
Transfers files to and from the printer using FTP.

Syntax
TRANSFER N[ET] <sexp1>,<sexp2>[,<sexp3>]

Parameters
<sexp1>
Source file. If the source is a local file, this file is sent from the printer to the
destination specified by <sexp2>. If the source is a URI, this file is fetched from the
server, sent to the printer, and stored at the location specified by <sexp2>.
<sexp2>
Destination of the file transfer.
<sexp3>
(Optional) An account secret.

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.
TRANSFER NET is not a complete FTP client. It only supports file transfer to and from
the printer in binary format. Only one file can be transferred per command. File
transfer between two local or two remote files is not supported.

Fingerprint Command Reference 285

 A local file is a path to an existing file (when sending from the printer) or to the file
that is created (when sending to the printer). If a local file already exists when sending
a file to the printer, the existing file is replaced if it is not write-protected. A read-
protected file is not sent. If the destination is a local directory, the sent file gets the
same name as the source file.
Enter a URI in the format:
ftp://[<user>:<password>@]<server>[:port]/<path>
Entries inside square brackets [...] are optional. The following default values are used:
l user: anonymous
l password: nopass@<ip address>
l port: 21
If the destination is a URI specifying a directory, the sent file gets the same name as
the source file.

Example
This example shows how the file README.uploads is fetched from the sunet ftp server
and stored as UPLOAD.TXT in the current directory. The default user, password and
port number are used.
TRANSFER NET "ftp://ftp.sunet.se/README.uploads",
"UPLOAD.TXT"

TRANSFER STATUS
Purpose
Checks the last TRANSFER KERMIT or TRANSFER ZMODEM operation.

Syntax
TRANSFER S[TATUS]<nvar>,<svar>

Parameters
<nvar>
Five-element, one-dimensional numeric array where the elements return:
0: Number of packets. (Kermit only)
1: Number of NAK’s. (Kermit only)
2: ASCII value of last status character. (Kermit only)
3: Last error. (Kermit and ZMODEM)
4: Block check type used. (Kermit only)
<svar>
Two-element ,one-dimensional string array where the elements return:
0: Type of protocol. ("KERMIT" or "ZMODEM")
1: Last file name received.

286 Fingerprint Command Reference

Notes
After a file transfer using the Kermit or ZMODEM protocol has been performed (using
TRANSFER KERMIT or TRANSFER ZMODEM), you can check how the transfer was
performed. Note that the numeric array requires the use of a DIM statement, since the
array contains more than four elements.

Example
10 TRANSFER KERMIT "R"
20 DIM A%(4)
30 TRANSFER STATUS A%, B$
40 PRINT A%(0), A%(1), A%(2), A%(3), A%(4)
50 PRINT B$(0), B$(1)
.....
.....

TRANSFER ZMODEM
Purpose
Transfers data files using the ZMODEM communication protocol. Only the standard
IN and OUT channels are supported.

Syntax
TRANSFER Z[MODEM]<sexp1>[,<sexp2>[,<sexp3>[,sexp4>]]]

Parameters
<sexp1>
Specifies the direction of the transmission by the expression "S" (= send) or "R" (=
receive).
<sexp2>
(Optional) Name of the file transmitted from the printer (default "ZMODEM.FILE").
<sexp3>
(Optional) Specifies the input device as "uart1:", "uart2:", "uart3:", "uart4:", or "uart5:".
Default is the standard IN channel.
<sexp4>
(Optional) Specifies the output device as "uart1:", "uart2:", "uart3:", "uart4:", or "uart5:".
Default is the standard OUT channel.

Notes
Directory names are case sensitive. You must first set SYSVAR (43) to 1 before
running this command in order for the printer to recognize the directory you specify.
ZMODEM is a protocol for serial transfer of a complete file. For more information on
the ZMODEM protocol, please refer to .www.omen.com. Related instructions are the
external commands RZ (receive data using the ZMODEM protocol) and SZ (send data
using the ZMODEM protocol).

Fingerprint Command Reference 287

 TRANSFER ZMODEM handles a single file at a time.
When transmitting files from the printer to the host, carefully observe possible
restrictions on the number of characters in the file name that may be imposed by the
operating system of the host. When receiving a file, you must start the transmission
within 30 seconds of completing the TRANSFER ZMODEM "R" statement. The printer
stores the file in the current directory. If a file in the current directory has the same
name as the one to be transferred, the existing file is replaced by the new file.
Thus, you need to keep track of the files already stored in the current directory (see
FILES statement). Before transfer, give the new file a name not already occupied by
an existing file, unless you want to replace the existing file. If you use TRANSFER
ZMODEM to download a font or image file, the font or image is automatically installed
after the download is completed. You do not need to restart your printer.

Example 1
This example sets up the printer to receive a file on the standard IN channel:
TRANSFER ZMODEM "R"

Example 2
This example sends the file "FILE1.TXT" from the printer to the host on the IN channel:
TRANSFER Z "S","FILE1.TXT"

TRANSFER$
Purpose
Executes a transfer from source to destination as specified by a TRANSFERSET
statement.

Syntax
TRANSFER$(<nexp>)

Parameters
<nexp>
Character timeout in ticks (10 ms).

Notes
TRANSFER$ executes the transfer from source to destination as specified by the
TRANSFERSET statement. It also checks the transfer and breaks it if no character has
been transmitted before the specified timeout has expired, or if any break character
(as specified by the break character string in the TRANSFERSET statement) is
encountered.
If the transmission was interrupted because a character in the break set was
encountered, that character is returned.

288 Fingerprint Command Reference

 If the transmission was interrupted because of a timeout error, an empty string is
returned.
If the transmission was interrupted because of the reception of a character on any
other communication channel than the source (as specified by TRANSFERSET
statement), an empty string is returned.

Example
In this example, the transfer is executed by the TRANSFER$ function in line 60, and
possible interruptions are indicated by a break character or empty string (" ") in the
string variable C$.
10 OPEN "LABEL1.PRG" FOR INPUT AS #1
20 OPEN "UART1:" FOR OUTPUT AS #2
30 A$=CHR$(13)
40 B$=CHR$(10)
50 TRANSFERSET #1, #2, A$+B$
60 C$=TRANSFER$(100)
.....
.....
.....

TRANSFERSET
Purpose
Enters setup for the TRANSFER$ function.

Syntax
TRANSFERSET[#]<nexp1>,[#]<nexp2>,<sexp>[,<nexp3>]

Parameters
#
(Optional) Number sign.
<nexp1>
Number of the source (the file or device opened for input using the OPEN command).
<nexp2>
Number of the destination file (the file or device opened using the OPEN command
for output or append).
<sexp>
A set of break characters
<nexp3>
(Optional) Enables or disables break on any other channel than the source:
<nexp> = 0, Break disabled
<nexp> ≠ 0, Break enabled
Default is the standard I/O with no break characters. Break on any other channel is
enabled.

Fingerprint Command Reference 289

Notes
This statement sets up the transfer of data from a file or device opened for input
using the OPEN command to another file or device opened for output or append. The
transfer is interrupted if any character in a string of break characters specified in this
statement is encountered (optionally on another specified channel). The actual
transfer is executed by means of a TRANSFER$ function that also returns the break
character that caused any possible interruption.

Example
In this example, the data transfer from a file in the current directory to an external
device connected to the communication port "uart1:" is interrupted as soon as a
carriage return or a line feed character is encountered in the file.
10 OPEN "LABEL1.PRG" FOR INPUT AS #1
20 OPEN "uart1:" FOR OUTPUT AS #2
30 A$=CHR$(13)
40 B$=CHR$(10)
50 TRANSFERSET #1, #2, A$+B$
60 C$=TRANSFER$(100)
.....
.....
.....

TRON/TROFF
Purpose
Enables or disables tracing of the program execution.

Syntax
TRON|TROFF where TRON enables tracing and TROFF disables tracing (default).

Notes
This statement is useful for debugging purposes. When tracing is enabled, each line
number of the program is displayed on the screen within parentheses as the
execution goes on.

Tracing is disabled when a TROFF statement is executed.

Example
10 PRINT "HELLO"
20 INPUT"Enter Text"; A$
30 PRINT A$
TRON
RUN
This results in:

290 Fingerprint Command Reference

 (10) HELLO
(20) Enter test? (Operator enters "WORLD")
(30) WORLD

VAL
Purpose
Returns the numeric representation of a string expression.

Syntax
VAL(<sexp>)

Parameters
<sexp>
String expression from which the numeric representation is returned.

Notes
VAL is the complementary function for STR$. VAL ignores space characters from the
argument string to determine the result.
If the first character in the string expression is anything else but a digit, a plus sign, or
a minus sign, the VAL function returns the value 0.

Example
In this example, the values of the string variables A$ and B$ are read and assigned to
the numeric variables A% and B%:
10 A$="123, MAIN STREET"
20 A%=VAL(A$)
30 B$="PHONE 123456"
40 B%=VAL(B$)
50 PRINT A$
60 PRINT A%
70 PRINT B$
80 PRINT B%
RUN
This results in:
123, MAIN STREET
123
PHONE 123456
0

Fingerprint Command Reference 291

VERBON/VERBOFF
Purpose
Specifies the verbosity level of the communication from the printer on the standard
OUT channel.

Syntax
VERBON|VERBOFF where VERBON enables all verbosity levels (default) and
VERBOFF disables all verbosity levels.

Notes
By default, when a character is received on the standard IN channel (see SETSTDIO
statement), the corresponding character is echoed back on the standard OUT
channel. As the serial channel "uart1:" is by default selected as the standard IN and
OUT channel, when you enter a character on the keyboard of the host the same
character appears on the screen after being transmitted to the printer and back.
When an instruction is successfully executed, "Ok" appears on the screen. Otherwise
an error message is returned. Since this requires two-way communication, verbosity
has no meaning when using the parallel "centronics:" communication protocol.
VERBON corresponds to SYSVAR(18) = -1.
Other verbosity levels can be selected using SYSVAR(18), and the type of error
message can be selected using SYSVAR (19).
Fingerprint is silent while VERBOFF is active, which means that no characters are
echoed, and no acknowledgements or error messages are sent. VERBOFF statements
do not affect question marks or prompts displayed as a result of an INPUT statement.
Instructions like DEVICES, FILES, FONTS, IMAGES, LIST, and PRINT also work
normally.
VERBOFF corresponds to SYSVAR(18) = 0.

Example
This example shows how VERBOFF suppresses the printing of INPUT data in lines 20
and 40 during the actual typing on the host, and VERBON allow printing of the
resulting string variables on the screen:
10 FOR Q%=1 TO 6
20 VERBOFF:INPUT "", A$
30 VERBON:PRINT A$;
40 VERBOFF:INPUT "", B$
50 VERBON
60 C$=SPACE$(25-LEN(A$))
70 PRINT C$+B$
80 NEXT Q%
90 END

292 Fingerprint Command Reference

VERIFIER RESULT
Purpose
Retrieve or print out a summary of the label verification results.

Syntax
VERIFIER RESULT [PRINT]

Note
This command will only print out information that is currently stored in the verifier
result database.

Example
A typical VERIFIER RESULT might be:
Verified: 104 labels
Failed: 3 labels
Failure Rate: 2.9%
Ok

VERSION$
Purpose
Returns the firmware version, printer family, or type of CPU board.

Syntax
VERSION$[(<nexp>)]

Parameters
<nexp>
(Optional) Type of information to be returned:
0: Version of firmware (default)
1: Printer family
2: Type of CPU board

Notes
The name of the firmware depends on whether or not the printer is running in
Immediate or Programming Mode, or in Direct Protocol.
The printer family is returned as one of the following:

Fingerprint Command Reference 293

 PM23c
PM43
PM43c
PC23d
PC43d
PC43t
The CPU board type is returned as a string of text such as "hardware version 4.0".

Example 1
PRINT VERSION$(0)
A typical response might be:
P10.03.006424

Example 2
PRINT VERSION$(1)
A typical response might be:
PM43

Example 3
PRINT VERSION$(2)
A typical response might be:
Platform version 1.0

WEEKDAY
Purpose
Returns the weekday of a specified date.

Syntax
WEEKDAY(<sexp>)

Parameters
<sexp>
Date in DATE$ format from which the weekday will be returned.
Note: This function returns the weekday as a numeric constant:
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday

294 Fingerprint Command Reference

 6: Saturday
7: Sunday

The date should be entered according to the syntax for the DATE$ variable that is in
the following order:

YY = Year: Last two digits (for example 2007 = 07)

MM = Month: Two digits (01-12)

DD = Day: Two digits (01-28|29|30|31)

For example, December 1, 2007 is entered as "071201". The built-in calendar corrects
incorrect values for the years 1980-2048 (for example, the incorrect date 031232 is
corrected to 040101).

Example
In this example the weekday for the current date is printed on the screen of the host
(another way is to use NAME WEEKDAY$ statement and WEEKDAY$ function):

10 B$=DATE$
20 A% = WEEKDAY (B$)
30 IF A% = 1 THEN PRINT "MONDAY"
40 IF A% = 2 THEN PRINT "TUESDAY"
50 IF A% = 3 THEN PRINT "WEDNESDAY"
60 IF A% = 4 THEN PRINT "THURSDAY"
70 IF A% = 5 THEN PRINT "FRIDAY"
80 IF A% = 6 THEN PRINT "SATURDAY"
90 IF A% = 7 THEN PRINT "SUNDAY"
RUN

This results in:

THURSDAY

WEEKDAY$
Purpose
Returns the name of the weekday from a specified date.

Syntax
WEEKDAY$(<sexp>)

Parameters
<sexp>
Date for which the name of the weekday is returned.

Fingerprint Command Reference 295

Notes
This function returns the name of the weekday from a list of names specified by a
NAME WEEKDAY$ statement or, if the name is missing, the full English name in
lowercase characters (for example, "friday").
The date should be entered according to the syntax for the DATE$ variable:
YY = Year: Last two digits (for example 2007 = 07)
MM = Month: Two digits (01-12)
DD = Day: Two digits (01-28|29|30|31)
For example, December 1, 2007 is entered as "071201". The built-in calendar corrects
incorrect values for the years 1980-2048 (for example, the incorrect date 031232 is
corrected to 040101).

Example
This example shows how to make the printer return the name of the weekday as a
three-letter English abbreviation in connection with a formatted date:
10 FORMAT DATE$ ", MM/DD/YY"
20 DATE$="071201"
30 NAME WEEKDAY$ 1, "Mon"
40 NAME WEEKDAY$ 2, "Tue"
50 NAME WEEKDAY$ 3, "Wed"
60 NAME WEEKDAY$ 4, "Thu"
70 NAME WEEKDAY$ 5, "Fri"
80 NAME WEEKDAY$ 6, "Sat"
90 NAME WEEKDAY$ 7, "Sun"
100 PRINT WEEKDAY$ (DATE$) + DATE$("F")
RUN
This results in:
MON, 12/01/07

WEEKNUMBER
Purpose
Returns the number of the week for a specified date.

Syntax
WEEKNUMBER(<sexp>[,<nexp])

Parameters
<sexp>
Date for which the week number will be returned. Range is 1 to 53.
<nexp>
Specifies the calculating function as described in the next table:

296 Fingerprint Command Reference

 <nexp> Week #1 starts on:

0 (default) Per ISO 8601 (European standard):

l Week #1 starts on the last Monday at or before the New Year, if
January 1 occurs on a Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, or Thursday
l Week #1 starts on the first Monday after the New Year, if January
1 occurs on a Friday, Saturday, or Sunday
1 Sunday in the first week with 7 days in the actual year.
2 January 1st, with each following week starting on a Sunday.
3 Monday in the first week with 7 days in the actual year.
4 January 1st, with each following week starting on a Monday.
5 Tuesday in the first week with 7 days in the actual year.
6 January 1st, with each following week starting on a Tuesday.
7 Wednesday in the first week with 7 days in the actual year.
8 January 1st, with each following week starting on a Wednesday.
9 Thursday in the first week with 7 days in the actual year.
10 January 1st, with each following week starting on a Thursday.
11 Friday in the first week with 7 days in the actual year.
12 January 1st, with each following week starting on a Friday.
13 Saturday in the first week with 7 days in the actual year.
14 January 1st, with each following week starting on a Saturday.

Notes
The date should be entered according to the syntax for the DATE$ variable that is in
the following order:
YY = Year: Last two digits (for example 2013 = 13)
MM = Month: Two digits (01-12)
DD = Day: Two digits (01-28|29|30|31)
For example, December 1, 2013 is entered as "131201". The built-in calendar corrects
incorrect values for the years 1980-2048 (for example, the incorrect date 031232 is
corrected to 040101).

Example
This example returns the week number of December 29, 2013 using calculating
function 2:
PRINT WEEKNUMBER ("131229",2)

Fingerprint Command Reference 297

 This results in:
53

WHILE...WEND
Purpose
Executes a series of statements in a loop, providing a given condition is true.

Syntax
WHILE <nexp>
<stmt>[...<stmt>]
WEND

Parameters
<nexp>
Numeric expression that is either TRUE (-1) or FALSE (0).
<stmt>
Statement, or a list of statements on separate lines, that are executed provided <nexp>
is TRUE.

Notes
If <nexp> is TRUE, all following statements are executed successively until a WEND
statement is encountered. The program execution then goes back to the WHILE
statement and repeats the process, provided <nexp> still is TRUE.
If <nexp> is FALSE, the execution resumes at the statement following the WEND
statement.
WHILE...WEND statements can be nested. Each WEND matches the most recent
WHILE statement.

Example
In this example, the WHILE...WEND loop is executed only if the character "Y" (ASCII 89
decimal) is entered on the host keyboard.

10 B%=0
20 WHILE B%<>89
30 INPUT "Want to exit? Press Y=Yes or N=No ",A$
40 B%=ASC(A$)
50 WEND
60 PRINT "The answer is Yes"
70 PRINT "You will exit the program"
80 END
RUN
This results in:

298 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Want to exit? Press Y=Yes or N=No N
Want to exit? Press Y=Yes or N=No Y
The answer is Yes
You will exit the program

XORMODE ON/OFF
Purpose
Enables or disables the xor/flip mode of Fingerprint in connection with graphical
operations.

Syntax
XORMODE ON|OFF

Notes
When XORMODE is set ON, dots are reversed (as opposed to set) by all graphical
operations except barcodes. For example, if two black lines cross, the intersection is
white. If XORMODE is OFF, the intersection is black.

Default is XORMODE OFF. XORMODE is automatically set to default when a

PRINTFEED statement is executed or a Fingerprint program has been successfully
run.

Example
The following program illustrates the difference between XORMODE ON and
XORMODE OFF. The two lines to the left are drawn with XORMODE disabled and the
lines to the right with XORMODE enabled.

10 XORMODE OFF
20 PRPOS 0,50
30 PRLINE 300,30
40 DIR 4
50 PRPOS 100,0
60 PRLINE 200,30
70 XORMODE ON
80 DIR 1
90 PRPOS 400,50
100 PRLINE 300,30
110 DIR 4
120 PRPOS 500,0
130 PRLINE 200,30
140 PRINTFEED
RUN

Fingerprint Command Reference 299

300 Fingerprint Command Reference
 CHAPTER
SETUP COMMAND
3 INFORMATION FOR NETWORK
PARAMETERS

802.11 wireless settings are supported only by printers with an 802.11 wireless radio
installed.
Bluetooth settings are supported only by printers with a Bluetooth radio installed. For
more information, see your printer user manual.
Click below to see SETUP command information for these network parameters:
l Wireless
l Bluetooth
l Ethernet
You must be logged in as itadmin to change network parameters.

802.11 Wireless Parameters

Use the SETUP commands to set and retrieve hardware, network, and security
settings for a wireless radio. You can also use SETUP GET to retrieve all parameters
within the section at once. To run these commands, you must first authenticate as
itadmin.
802.11 wireless settings are supported only by printers with an 802.11 wireless radio
installed.
The 802.11 wireless parameters consist of:
l 802.11 wireless radio parameters
l 802.11 wireless network parameters
l 802.11 wireless security parameters

802.11 Wireless Network Parameters

This topic describes how to use SETUP commands to set and retrieve network settings
for a wireless radio. You can also use SETUP GET to retrieve all parameters within the
section at once. In order to run these commands, you must first authenticate as
itadmin.
802.11 wireless settings are supported only by printers with an 802.11 wireless radio
installed.
802.11 wireless network parameters include:

Fingerprint Command Reference 301

 l (IPv4) IP Assignment Method - Specifies how the printer obtains its IPv4 IP address.
l (IPv4) IP Address - Specifies the unique IPv4 address assigned to the printer on a
TCP/IP network.
l Subnet Mask - Specifies the range of IP addresses in the subnet, or local network.
l Default Router - Specifies the IP address of a router used to send information to
devices outside the subnet.
l DHCP Response - Specifies whether the printer receives DHCP responses using
broadcast or unicast.
l (IPv6) IP Assignment Method - Specifies how the printer obtains its IPv6 IP address.
l (IPv6) IP Address - Specifies the unique IPv6 address assigned to the printer on a
TCP/IP network.

Set a Parameter
To set a parameter, send the SETUP command to the printer with this syntax:
SETUP "path,value"
Each parameter has a specific path you must use. The path, accepted values, and
default value are explained with each parameter.
Some parameters have a Legacy Path for backwards compatibility with Fingerprint
syntax from previous versions. If a parameter does not have a Legacy Path available,
you must use the Path instead.

Retrieve a Parameter
To retrieve a parameter, send a SETUP GET command with this syntax:
SETUP GET "path",variable
For more information about variables, see Fingerprint Variable Names.

(IPv4) IP Assignment Method

Syntax SETUP "path,value"
Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Network,IPv4,IP Assignment Method
Default DHCP
Value
Values DHCP: The printer receives all settings automatically from a DHCP server.

BOOTP: The printer receives all settings automatically from a BOOTP

server.

DHCP+BOOTP: The printer receives all settings automatically from the first
DHCP or BOOTP server it finds.

Manual: You must specify the IP address, subnet mask, default router, and
DNS server manually.

302 Fingerprint Command Reference

 This example sets the IPv4 IP assignment method to manual:
SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,IPv4,IP Assignment Method,Manual"

(IPv4) IP Address
Syntax SETUP "path,value"
Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Network,IPv4,IP Address
Default 0.0.0.0
Value
Value An IP address in the format a.b.c.d.

This example sets the IPv4 IP address to 10.10.1.105:

SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,IPv4,IP Address,10.10.1.105"

Subnet Mask
Syntax SETUP "path,value"
Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Network,IPv4,Subnet Mask
Default 0.0.0.0
Value
Value A subnet mask in the format a.b.c.d.

This example sets the subnet mask to 255.255.255.0:

SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Subnet Mask,255.255.255.0"

Default Router
Syntax SETUP "path,value"
Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Network,IPv4,Default Router
Default 0.0.0.0
Value
Value An IP address in the format a.b.c.d.

This example sets the default router to 10.10.1.1:

SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,IPv4,Default Router,10.10.1.1"

DHCP Response
Syntax SETUP "path,value"
Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Network,IPv4,DHCP Response

Fingerprint Command Reference 303

 Default Broadcast
Value
Values Broadcast

Unicast

This example sets the DHCP Response method to Unicast:

SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,IPv4,DHCP Response,Unicast"

(IPv6) IP Assignment Method

Syntax SETUP "path,value"
Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Network,IPv6,IP Assignment Method
Default Automatic
Value
Values Automatic: The printer receives all settings from the network automatically,
but you can change the DNSv6 server address.

Automatic+DHCP: The printer receives all settings from the network or a

DHCP server automatically, but you can change the DNSv6 server address.

DHCP: The printer receives all settings automatically from a DHCP server.

Manual: You must specify the IPv6 address. If the IPv6 network is not
active, the IPv6 address is set to 0 (::/128).

This example sets the IPv6 IP Assignment Method to DHCP:

SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,IPv6,IP Assignment Method,DHCP"

(IPv6) IP Address
Syntax SETUP "path,value"
Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Network,IPv6,IP Address
Default 2001:db8:0:1::1/64
Value
Value An IP address in the format a:b:c:d:e:f:g/h.

This example sets the IPv6 IP Address to fe80::202:b3ff:fe1e:8329/128:

SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,IPv6,IP
Address,fe80::202:b3ff:fe1e:8329/128"

802.11 Wireless Hardware Parameters

This topic describes how to use SETUP commands to set and retrieve hardware
settings for a wireless radio. You can also use SETUP GET to retrieve all parameters

304 Fingerprint Command Reference

 within the section at once. In order to run these commands, you must first
authenticate as itadmin.
802.11 wireless settings are supported only by printers with an 802.11 wireless radio
installed.
802.11 wireless radio parameters include:
l Network Name (SSID) - Specifies the name of the wireless network.
l Network Type - Specifies whether to use Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure as the 802.11 wire-
less radio behavior.
l Roaming - Specifies whether the printer should switch to access points with higher
signal strength.
l Power Mode - Specifies the power management settings for the 802.11 wireless
radio.
l Channel - Specifies the current wireless channel.
l Hidden SSID - Specifies whether the printer can search for hidden wireless net-
works.

Set a Parameter
To set a parameter, send the SETUP command to the printer with this syntax:
SETUP "path,value"
Each parameter has a specific path you must use. The path, accepted values, and
default value are explained with each parameter.
Some parameters have a Legacy Path for backwards compatibility with Fingerprint
syntax from previous versions. If a parameter does not have a Legacy Path available,
you must use the Path instead.

Retrieve a Parameter
To retrieve a parameter, send a SETUP GET command with this syntax:
SETUP GET "path",variable
For more information about variables, see Fingerprint Variable Names.

Network Name (SSID)

The Network Name (SSID) parameter indicates the name of a wireless network. All
access points and Honeywell devices must use the same network name. A network
name is case-sensitive.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,General,Network Name (SSID)
Default HONEYWELL
Value

Fingerprint Command Reference 305

 Value Valid SSIDs are from 1 to 32 characters long, and can include alpha-
numeric or hexadecimal values.

Each hexadecimal character in an SSID must include a percent symbol (%)

and two hex digits. Hex digits can be uppercase or lowercase. For example,
%0f or %0F.

This example sets the network name to "MyCompany":

SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,General, Network Name
(SSID),MyCompany"

Network Type
Syntax SETUP "path,value"
Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,General,Network Type
Default Infrastructure
Value
Values Ad Hoc

Infrastructure

Soft AP (Available on PM45 and RP series printers only. Replaces Ad

Hoc mode.)

This example sets the wireless network type to ad-hoc:

SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,General,Network Type,Ad Hoc"

Roaming
The Roaming parameter indicates if the printer should switch access points based on
received signal strength.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,General,Roaming
Default Value Off
Values Off

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

This example sets the printer to switch access points when signal strength is low:
SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,General,Roaming,Level 2"

306 Fingerprint Command Reference

Power Mode
Syntax SETUP "path,value"
Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,General,Power Mode
Default Constant Awake
Value
Values Constant Awake - Highest throughput, but uses the most power.

Fast Power Saving - Switches between Constant Awake and Power Saving
mode. Use Fast Power Saving when power consumption is a concern, but
you need more throughput than the default settings.

Power Saving - Lowest throughput, but uses the least amount of power.

This example sets the printer to use Power Saving mode:

SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,General,Power Mode,Power Saving"

Channel
The Channel parameter is read-only when Network Type is set to Infrastructure. To
change the Channel parameter, set the Network Type to Ad Hoc.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,General,Channel
Default Value 1
Value A valid channel number for your region.

This example sets the wireless network type to ad-hoc, and then sets the channel to 7:
SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,General,Network Type,Ad Hoc"
SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,General,Channel,7"

Hidden SSID
Syntax SETUP "path,value"
Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,General,Hidden SSID
Default Value Disable
Value Enable

Disable

This example sets the printer to look for hidden wireless networks:
SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,General,Hidden SSID,Enable"
Note: This option is enabled by default and removed from the configuration on PM45 and
RP series printers.

Fingerprint Command Reference 307

802.11 Wireless Security Parameters
This topic describes how to use SETUP commands to set and retrieve security settings
for a wireless radio. You can also use SETUP GET to retrieve all parameters within the
section at once. In order to run these commands, you must first authenticate as
itadmin.
802.11 wireless settings are supported only by printers with an 802.11 wireless radio
installed.
802.11 wireless security parameters include:
l Security Type - Specifies the encryption protocol used by your wireless network.
l Association - Specifies the security method used to get access to a wireless network.
l Pre-Shared Key - Specifies the password required for WPA or WPA2 encryption.
l Network Key N - These parameters specify the four keys required for WEP encryp-
tion.
l Network Key Index - Specifies the active key required for WEP encryption.
l User Name - Specifies a user name for use with EAP networks.
l Password - Specifies the password for use with EAP networks.
l Anonymous Name - Specifies the outer EAP user name used for authentication.
l Inner Authentication - Specifies the authentication method used for some EAP net-
works.
l CA Certificate - Specifies the name of the CA certificate used to verify server cer-
tificates.
l Client Certificate - Specifies the name of the client certificate used for authen-
tication.
l Client Key - Specifies the private key used for EAP-TLS encryption.
l Server Common Name 1 - Specifies the primary authentication server.
l Server Common Name 2 - Specifies the secondary authentication server.
l Validate Certificate - Specifies whether to check the identify of the authentication
server.
l PAC - Specifies the name of the Protected Access Credential used for EAP-FAST
authentication.
l Acquire PAC - Specifies whether to set the PAC automatically.
l Fast Roaming (CCKM) - Specifies whether the printer can move to a new access
point without authenticating again.

Set a Parameter
To set a parameter, send the SETUP command to the printer with this syntax:
SETUP "path,value"

308 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Each parameter has a specific path you must use. The path, accepted values, and
default value are explained with each parameter.
Some parameters have a Legacy Path for backwards compatibility with Fingerprint
syntax from previous versions. If a parameter does not have a Legacy Path available,
you must use the Path instead.

Retrieve a Parameter
To retrieve a parameter, send a SETUP GET command with this syntax:
SETUP GET "path",variable
For more information about variables, see Fingerprint Variable Names.

Security Type
Honeywell recommends that you use encryption on your wireless network.
Most security types require you to set other parameters. For example, if you choose
WEP (static), you must also set the Association, Network Key N, and Network Key
Index parameters.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Security Type
Default Value None
Values None

WEP (static)

Pre-shared key

PEAP

TLS

TTLS

LEAP

EAP-FAST

This example changes the security type to Pre-shared key:

SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Security Type,Pre-shared key"

Association
Syntax SETUP "path,value"
Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Association
Default Value Open/WEP

Fingerprint Command Reference 309

 Values Open/WEP

Shared/WEP

WPA/TKIP

WPA2/AES

This example changes the association to WPA2/AES:

SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Association,WPA2/AES"

Pre-Shared Key
Syntax SETUP "path,value"
Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Pre-Shared
Key
Default No default value
Value
Value A password from 8 to 64 characters.

If the password is exactly 64 characters long, it is

interpreted as a hexadecimal string which specifies the
256-bit key.

To clear the current password, set this parameter to an

empty string.

This example clears the current pre-shared key:

SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Pre-Shared Key,"

Network Key N
This parameter refers to four WEP key parameters: Network Key 1, Network Key 2,
Network Key 3, and Network Key 4.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Paths Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Network Key 1

Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Network Key 2

Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Network Key 3

Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Network Key 4

Default Value No default value
Value An alphanumeric password 5 characters long (WEP64)

An alphanumeric password 13 characters long (WEP128)

All WEP keys must be in hexadecimal format, and prefaced with 0x.

310 Fingerprint Command Reference

 This example sets Network Key 3 to "h3ll0" using the WEP64 format:
SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Network Key 3,0x68336c6c30"

Network Key Index

The values for this parameter correspond to the Network Key N WEP keys.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Network Key Index
Default Value 1
Values 1

This example sets Network Key 2 as the active WEP network key:
SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Network Key Index,2"

User Name
Honeywell recommends that you use a user name longer than eight (8) characters.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,User Name
Default Value Anonymous
Value A user name from 1 to 96 characters.

To clear the current user name, set this parameter to an empty

string.

This example clears the current user name:

SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,User Name,"

Password
Honeywell recommends that you use a password longer than eight (8) characters.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Password
Default Value Anonymous
Value A password from 1 to 96 characters.

To clear the current password, set this parameter to an empty

string.

Fingerprint Command Reference 311

 This example sets the password to "ex@mpl3pas$":
SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,User Name,ex@mpl3pas$"

Anonymous Name
Honeywell recommends that you use an anonymous name longer than eight (8)
characters.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Anonymous Name
Default Value (null)
Value A user name from 1 to 96 characters.

This example sets the anonymous name to "accounting":

SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Anonymous Name,accounting"

Inner Authentication
These authentication types are used only when the EAP type is EAP-FAST, PEAP, or
TTLS.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Inner Authentication
Default Value MSCHAPv2
Value PAP*

MSCHAPv2

EAP/MSCHAPv2

EAP/MD5

EAP/GTC

EAP/TLS

* The PAP authentication type can be used only with TTLS.

This example sets the inner authentication to EAP/MD5:
SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Inner Authentication,EAP/MD5"

CA Certificate
The CA certificate and the server certificate must be signed by the same CA.
This parameter is not used when the Security Type is set to LEAP.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,CA Certificate

312 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Default Value honeywell.pem
Value The name of a CA certificate stored on the printer.

To use the default certificate again, set this parameter to an

empty string.

This example sets the CA certificate to mycompany.pem:

SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,CA Certificate,mycompany.pem"

Client Certificate
This parameter is used only when the Security Type is set to EAP-TLS.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Client Certificate
Default Value No default value
Value The name of a client certificate stored on the printer. The max-
imum length of the filename is 128 characters.

To stop using a client certificate, set this parameter to an empty

string.

This example sets the client certificate to myserver.pem:

SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Client Certificate,myserver.pem"

Client Key
This parameter is used only when the Security Type is set to EAP-TLS.
You must use the certinstall.sh script to install your private key.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Client Key
Default Value No default value
Value The name of a private key file stored on the printer. The max-
imum length of the filename is 128 characters.

To stop using a private key, set this parameter to an empty

string.

This example sets the printer to stop using a private key file:
SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Client Key,"

Server Common Name 1

If this value is not set, your printer automatically attempts to use Server Common
Name 2. If both values are not set, your printer accepts any certificate name.

Fingerprint Command Reference 313

 Honeywell recommends that you use server common names longer than eight (8)
characters.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Server Common
Name 1
Default Value No default value
Value The certificate name for the primary authentication server. The
maximum length of the server name is 96 characters.

To remove the server common name, set this parameter to an

empty string.

This example sets the printer to use web1.example.com as the primary authentication
server certificate name:
SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Server Common Name
1,web1.example.com"
Note: Removed on PM45 and RP series printers.

Server Common Name 2

If this value is not set, your printer automatically attempts to use Server Common
Name 1. If both values are not set, your printer accepts any certificate name.
Honeywell recommends that you use server common names longer than eight (8)
characters.
This parameter is not used when the Security Type is set to LEAP.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Server Common
Name 2
Default Value No default value
Value The certificate name for the secondary authentication server.
The maximum length of the server name is 96 characters.

To remove the server common name, set this parameter to an

empty string.

This example sets the printer to use web2.example.com as the secondary

authentication server certificate name:
SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Server Common Name
2,web2.example.com"
Note: Removed on PM45 and RP series printers.

314 Fingerprint Command Reference

Validate Certificate
Honeywell recommends that you change this parameter to Yes if you use an
authentication server on your wireless network. You must install and use a valid CA
certificate to use this feature.
If your printer has a real-time clock, this clock is used to check certificate validity.
This setting is used when the Security Type is set to EAP-TTLS, PEAP, or TLS. This
setting is not used when the Security Type is set to LEAP.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Validate Certificate
Default Value No
Values Yes

No

This example sets your printer to check the validity of the authentication server CA
certificate:
SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Validate Certificate,Yes"

PAC
A PAC file is used only when Acquire PAC is set to On.
This parameter is used only for EAP-FAST authentication, when the first
authentication attempt fails.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,PAC
Default Value eap-fast.pac
Value The name of the PAC (Protected Access Credential) file to use.

Acquire PAC
This parameter is used only for EAP-FAST authentication, when the first
authentication attempt fails.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Acquire PAC
Default On
Value
Values On

Off

This example turns off automatic PAC provisioning:

Fingerprint Command Reference 315

 SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Acquire PAC,Off"

Fast Roaming (CCKM)

The Fast Roaming feature only operates on wireless networks that use the LEAP
security type.

Syntax SETUP "path,value"

Path Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Fast Roaming (CCKM)
Default Value Disable
Values Enable

Disable

This example turns on Fast Roaming:

SETUP "Communications,Wireless 802.11,Security,Fast Roaming (CCKM),Enable"
Note: Removed on PM45 and RP series printers.

Bluetooth Parameters for SETUP

Use the SETUP command to set and retrieve network settings for a Bluetooth radio.
You can also use SETUP GET to retrieve all parameters within the section at once. In
order to run these commands, you must first authenticate as itadmin.
Bluetooth parameters you can set include:
l Security - Specifies the level of security to use when pairing a Bluetooth device with
the printer.
l Power Saving Mode - Specifies the power management settings to use for the
Bluetooth radio.
l Device Name - Specifies the name for your printer on the Bluetooth network.
l Discover - Specifies whether other Bluetooth devices can detect the printer.
l Passkey - Specifies the password used when pairing with a Bluetooth device.
l Reserve - Specifies whether the printer can connect to more than one Bluetooth
device.

Set a Parameter
To set a parameter, send the SETUP command to the printer with this syntax:
SETUP "path,value"
Each parameter has a specific path you must use. The path, accepted values, and
default value are explained with each parameter.

316 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Some parameters have a Legacy Path for backwards compatibility with Fingerprint
syntax from previous versions. If a parameter does not have a Legacy Path available,
you must use the Path instead.

Retrieve a Parameter
To retrieve a parameter, send a SETUP GET command with this syntax:
SETUP GET "path",variable
For more information about variables, see Fingerprint Variable Names.

Security
Path Communications,Bluetooth,Security
Default Disable
Value
Values Disable - Any device can pair with the printer.

Authentication - Require a password to pair with the printer.

Auth+Encrypt - Require a password to pair with the printer, and encrypt

network traffic.
Note: Auth+Encryption is enabled by default and removed on PM45 and
RP series printers.

This example sets the Bluetooth security method to Authentication:

SETUP "Communications,Bluetooth,Security,Authentication"

Power Saving Mode

Enabling power saving reduces data throughput.
This parameter is not supported for PM43 or PM43c printers.

Path Communications,Bluetooth,Power Saving Mode

Default Value Disable
Values Disable

Enable

This example enables power saving for the Bluetooth radio:

SETUP "Communications,Bluetooth,Power Saving Mode,Enable"

Device Name
Path Communications,Bluetooth,Device Name

Fingerprint Command Reference 317

 Default (device model number + serial number)
Value
Value The name of your printer on the Bluetooth network. The maximum name
length is 16 characters.

This example sets the device name to "PM43_5A":

SETUP "Communications,Bluetooth,Device Name,PM43_5A"

Discover
Path Communications,Bluetooth,Discover
Default Value Enable
Values Disable

Enable

This example prevents other Bluetooth devices from finding the printer:
SETUP "Communications,Bluetooth,Discover,Disable"

Passkey
Changing this parameter removes all paired devices from the Bluetooth network.
If a password has been set, retrieving this parameter with SETUP GET results in "****".

Path Communications,Bluetooth,Passkey
Default 1234
Value
Value A case-sensitive password used to pair the printer with a Bluetooth device.
The maximum password length is 16 characters.

This example sets the password to 46837632:

SETUP "Communications,Bluetooth,Passkey,46837632"

Reserve
After you enable this parameter and one device pairs successfully, additional pairing
attempts from other Bluetooth devices are ignored.

Path Communications,Bluetooth,Reserve
Default Value Disable
Values Enable

Disable

318 Fingerprint Command Reference

 This example prevents pairing attempts from other Bluetooth devices after the first
successful pairing:
SETUP "Communications,Bluetooth,Reserve,Enable"

Ethernet Network Parameters

Use the SETUP command to set and retrieve network settings for a wired network
card. You can also use SETUP GET to retrieve all parameters within the section at
once. In order to run these commands, you must first authenticate as itadmin.
Ethernet network parameters you can set include:
l (IPv4) IP Assignment Method - Specifies how the printer obtains its IPv4 IP address.
l (IPv4) IP Address - Specifies the unique IPv4 address assigned to the printer on a
TCP/IP network.
l Subnet Mask - Specifies the range of IP addresses in the subnet, or local network.
l Default Router - Specifies the IP address of a router used to send information to
devices outside the subnet.
l DHCP Response - Specifies whether the printer receives DHCP responses using
broadcast or unicast.
l (IPv6) IP Assignment Method - Specifies how the printer obtains its IPv6 IP address.
l (IPv6) IP Address - Specifies the unique IPv6 address assigned to the printer on a
TCP/IP network.

Set a Parameter
To set a parameter, send the SETUP command to the printer with this syntax:
SETUP "path,value"
Each parameter has a specific path you must use. The path, accepted values, and
default value are explained with each parameter.
Some parameters have a Legacy Path for backwards compatibility with Fingerprint
syntax from previous versions. If a parameter does not have a Legacy Path available,
you must use the Path instead.

Retrieve a Parameter
To retrieve a parameter, send a SETUP GET command with this syntax:
SETUP GET "path",variable
For more information about variables, see Fingerprint Variable Names.

(IPv4) IP Assignment Method

Path Communications,Ethernet,IPv4,IP Assignment Method

Fingerprint Command Reference 319

 Legacy NETWORK,IPnSELECTION
Path
Default DHCP
Value
Values DHCP: The printer receives all settings automatically from a DHCP server.

BOOTP: The printer receives all settings automatically from a BOOTP

server.

DHCP+BOOTP: The printer receives all settings automatically from the first
DHCP or BOOTP server it finds.

Manual: You must specify the IP address, subnet mask, default router, and
DNS server manually.

This example sets the IPv4 IP assignment method to manual:

SETUP "Communications,Ethernet,IPv4,IP Assignment Method,Manual"

(IPv4) IP Address
Path Communications,Ethernet,IPv4,IP Address
Legacy Path NETWORK,IPnADDRESS
Default Value 0.0.0.0
Value An IP address in the format a.b.c.d.

This example sets the IPv4 IP address to 10.10.1.105:

SETUP "Communications,Ethernet,IPv4,IP Address,10.10.1.105"

Subnet Mask
Path Communications,Ethernet,IPv4,Subnet Mask
Legacy Path NETWORK,NETMASK
Default Value 0.0.0.0
Value A subnet mask in the format a.b.c.d.

This example sets the subnet mask to 255.255.255.0:

SETUP "Communications,Ethernet,IPv4,Subnet Mask,255.255.255.0"

Default Router
Path Communications,Ethernet,IPv4,Default Router
Legacy Path NETWORK,DEFAULT ROUTER
Default Value 0.0.0.0

320 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Value An IP address in the format a.b.c.d.

This example sets the default router to 10.10.1.1:

SETUP "Communications,Ethernet,IPv4,Default Router,10.10.1.1"

DHCP Response
Path Communications,Ethernet,IPv4,DHCP Response
Legacy Path NETWORK,DHCP RESPONSE
Default Value Broadcast
Values Broadcast

Unicast

This example sets the DHCP Response method to Unicast:

SETUP "Communications,Ethernet,IPv4,DHCP Response,Unicast"

(IPv6) IP Assignment Method

When this parameter is set to Automatic, PM23c, PM43 and PM43c printers use a
Link Local Address until they receive a router prefix from an IPv6 router.

Path Communications,Ethernet,IPv6,IP Assignment Method

Legacy NETWORK,IPV6 SELECTION
Path
Default Automatic
Value
Values Automatic: The printer receives all settings from the network automatically,
but you can change the DNSv6 server address.

Automatic+DHCP: The printer receives all settings from the network or a

DHCP server automatically, but you can change the DNSv6 server address.

DHCP: The printer receives all settings automatically from a DHCP server.

Manual: You must specify the IPv6 address. If the IPv6 network is not
active, the IPv6 address is set to 0 (::/128).

This example sets the IPv6 IP Assignment Method to DHCP:

SETUP "Communications,Ethernet,IPv6,IP Assignment Method,DHCP"

(IPv6) IP Address
Path Communications,Ethernet,IPv6,IP Address

Fingerprint Command Reference 321

 Legacy NETWORK,IPV6 ADDRESS
Path
Default 2001:db8:0:1::1/64
Value
Link Local Address (PM43 and PM43c)
Value An IP address in the format a1:a2:a3:a4:a5:a6:a7:a8/p (where p is the
router prefix).

An IP address in the format a1:a2:a3:a4::a5/64.

This example sets the IPv6 IP Address to fe80::202:b3ff:fe1e:8329/128:

SETUP "Communications,Ethernet,IPv6,IP Address,fe80::202:b3ff:fe1e:8329/128"

322 Fingerprint Command Reference

 CHAPTER
SUPPORTED BARCODE
4 INFORMATION

Supported Symbologies
List of symbologies supported by Fingerprint, with links to specific barcode parameter
and settings information.
About AddOn Codes
Describes how to configure add-on barcodes for the EAN and UPC symbologies by
using the PRBAR command.
About Composite Barcodes
Describes how to print composite barcodes. Includes links to specific composite
barcode parameter and settings information.

Supported Symbologies
Fingerprint supports the following barcode symbologies. For parameter ranges and
settings, click the name of the symbology below.

Symbology BARTYPE Name

Aztec AZTEC
Code 39 CODE39
Code 39 full ASCII CODE39A
Code 39 with checksum CODE39C
Code 128 CODE128
Code 128 subset A CODE128A
Code 128 subset B CODE128B
Code 128 subset C CODE128C
Data Matrix DATAMATRIX
Dotcode DOTCODE
EAN-8 EAN8
EAN-8 Composite with CC-A or CC-B EAN8_CC
EAN-13 EAN13
EAN-13 Composite with CC-A or CC-B EAN13_CC

Fingerprint Command Reference 323

 Symbology BARTYPE Name

EAN 128 EAN128

EAN 128 subset A EAN128A
EAN 128 subset B EAN128B
EAN 128 subset C EAN128C
EAN.UCC 128 Composite with CC-A or CC-B EAN128_CCCAB
EAN.UCC 128 Composite with CC-C EAN128_CCC
Gridmatrix GRIDMATRIX
Hanxin HANXINCODE
HIBC39 HIBC39
HIBC128 HIBC128
Interleaved 2 of 5 INT2OF5
Interleaved 2 of 5 Symbology Information INT2OF5C
ISBT 128 ISBT128
MaxiCode MAXICODE
MicroPDF417 MICROPDF417
PDF 417 PDF417
QR Code QRCODE
RSS-14 RSS14
RSS-14 Composite RSS14
RSS-14 Truncated RSS14T
RSS-14 Truncated Composite RSS14T
RSS-14 Stacked RSS14S
RSS-14 Stacked Composite RSS14S
RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional RSS14SO
RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional Composite RSS14SO
RSS-14 Limited RSS14L
RSS-14 Limited Composite RSS14L
RSS-14 Expanded RSS14E
RSS-14 Expanded Composite RSS14E
RSS-14 Expanded Stacked RSS14ES

324 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Symbology BARTYPE Name

RSS-14 Expanded Stacked Composite RSS14ES

UPC-A UPCA
UPC-A Composite with CC-A or CC-B UPCA_CC
UPC-E UPCE
UPC-E Composite with CC-A or CC-B UPCE_CC
USPS intelligent mail USPS4CB

Additional Symbology Support

Fingerprint also supports these symbologies:

Symbology BARTYPE Name

Codabar CODABAR
Code 11 CODE11
Code 16K CODE16K
Code 49 CODE49
Code 93 CODE93
DUN-14/16 DUN
Five-Character Supplemental Code ADDON5
Industrial 2 of 5 C2OF5IND
Industrial 2 of 5 with checksum C2OF5INDC
Interleaved 2 of 5 A INT2OF5A
Matrix 2 of 5 C2OF5MAT
MSI (modified Plessey) MSI
Planet PLANET
Plessey PLESSEY
Postnet POSTNET
Straight 2 of 5 C2OF5
Two-Character Supplemental Code ADDON2
UCC-128 Serial Shipping Container Code UCC128
UPC-5 digits Add-On Code SCCADDON
UPC-D1 UPCD1

Fingerprint Command Reference 325

 Symbology BARTYPE Name

UPC-D2 UPCD2
UPC-D3 UPCD3
UPC-D4 UPCD4
UPC-D5 UPCD5
UPC Shipping Container Code UPCSCC

Aztec Symbology Information

The tables below include parameter information for the Aztec symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "AZTEC"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG < 128. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Not applicable.
BARFONT Not applicable.

BARSET Parameters
The next table lists parameter ranges and settings for use with the BARSET command.

Parameter Description Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode "AZTEC"

type.
<nexp1-7> Not applic-
able.

326 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Parameter Description Ranges and Settings

<nexp8> Error cor- 0 (default): 23%+3 codewords. Dynamic symbol size with
rection or fixed error correction.
fixed sym-
1-99: Static error correction level (in percent). Dynamic
bol.
symbol size.

101-104: Compact Format symbol, 1 to 4 layers (+100).

Error correction level depends on spare bits in chosen
symbol size. Static symbol size.

201-232: Full Range symbol, 1-32 layers (+200). Error

correction level depends on spare bits in chosen symbol
size. Static symbol size.
300: Simple Aztec rune.
<nexp9> Menu sym- 0 (default): No menu symbol.
bol.
1: Menu symbol.
<nexp10> Symbol 1 (default): Symbol append OFF.
append.
2-26: Append # of symbols. ID field used if present.
<nexp11> Enables or 0 (default): ECI support disabled.
disables ECI
1: ECI support enabled.
support.

PRBAR Parameters
The next table lists parameter ranges and settings for use with the PRBAR command
(with Symbol Append ON).

Ranges
Parameter and Set- Notes
tings

Number of 0 to 24
characters
Input char- 0x00-0xFF Most efficient if all uppercase characters (ASCII 0x41-
acters 0x5a). Do not use space character (ASCII(0x20)).
0x20 not
allowed.

Remarks
When Aztec is selected and ECI support is enabled (<nexp11> = 1), the strings
"\<nnnnnn>" and "\\" are interpreted as follows:

Fingerprint Command Reference 327

 l \<nnnnnn> : The backslash indicates that the character set should be changed, and
nnnnnn is the number of the chosen character set. The string is decoded as an ECI
character followed by one to three digit numbers in the barcode. All ECI characters
are printed in ASCII encodation, meaning that this string itself can be encoded in
any mode. The algorithm switches to ASCII mode to encode the ECI characters, then
encodes the other characters in the most efficient modes.
l \\: Two backslashes are decoded as a single backslash character ("\") in the bar-
code. All double backslashes are printed in the most efficient modes as specified
and are decoded the same way when ECI support is not enabled.
Error 1112 (ECI syntax error) occurs if ECI mode is enabled and the PRBAR input
string is invalid.

Code 39 Symbology Information

The table below includes parameter information for the Code 39 symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "CODE39", "CODE39A", or "CODE39C"

BARRATIO 2:1-3:1. Default is 3:1.
BARMAG If the narrow element is less than 4 dots wide, then the ratio must be
larger than 2.25:1 (9:4). Otherwise, no restrictions. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT No restrictions. Default is 100.
BARFONT No restrictions.

Input Data
Ranges and
Parameter Notes
Settings

Number of CODE39:
characters Unlimited

CODE39A: 195

CODE39C: 199
Check digit CODE39: None

CODE39A: None

CODE39C:
1 digit
Digits 0 to 9.

328 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Ranges and
Parameter Notes
Settings

Uppercase A to Z. No national characters.

letters
Lowercase Not supported.
letters
Punctuation - . space $ / + %
marks
Start * Added automatically. Never shown in the human-
character readable interpretation and not transmitted as part
of decoded data.
Stop * Added automatically. Never shown in the human-
character readable interpretation and not transmitted as part
of decoded data.

Remarks
Code39A allows for the entire ASCII set to be encoded (128 characters). Code39C
allows characters that are not in the input set to be sent into the symbol without error.
These characters are not printed.

Code 128 Symbology Information

The table below includes parameter information for the Code 128 symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "CODE128", "CODE128A", "CODE128B", "CODE128C"

BARRATIO Fixed. BARRATIO statement ignored.
BARMAG = 2 (default).
BARHEIGHT No restrictions. Default is 100.
BARFONT No restrictions.

BARSET Parameters
The next table includes parameter information for use with the BARSET command.

BARSET Description Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "CODE128", "CODE128A", "CODE128B",

"CODE128C"

Fingerprint Command Reference 329

 BARSET Description Ranges and Settings

<nexp1- Not applicable.

2>
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. <128. Default is 2.
<nexp4> Barheight. No restriction. Default is 100.
<nexp5> Not applicable.
<nexp6> Character exclusion in barcode. 0: Disables parentheses and spaces in
Does not affect human readable. the barcode data.

Non-zero: Barcode and human readable

field will include exactly the same data.
<nexp7- Not applicable.
10>

Input Data
Ranges and
Parameter Notes
Settings

Number of Unlimited.
characters
Check digit One. Added automatically. Never shown in the human-readable
interpretation and not transmitted as part of encoded
data.
Input char- ASCII 0 to According to Roman 8 character set.
acters 127.
Functional FNC1 (ASCII See Note 1.
characters 128
decimal.)

FNC2 (ASCII
129
decimal.)

FNC3 (ASCII
130
decimal)

FNC4 (ASCII
131
decimal)

330 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Ranges and
Parameter Notes
Settings

Start char- See Note 2.

acters
Code char- See Notes 1
acters and 2.
Shift char- See Notes 1
acters & 2.
Stop char- Always. Added automatically.
acters

Note 1
Function characters FNC1-4, code characters, and shift characters require either an
8-bit communication protocol (remapping to an ASCII value between 0-127 decimal)
or the use of a CHR$ function.
FNC2-4 are not allowed in Subset C.

Note 2
Code 128 has automatic selection of start character and character subset (that is,
selects optimal start character and handles shift and changes of subset depending on
the content of the input data).

Remarks
Code 128A, Code 128B, and Code 128C select subsets A, B, and C respectively. The
last character in the barcode name signifies both the start character and the chosen
subset.
The selected subset can be changed anywhere in the input string, either for a single
character using a Shift character (not for Subset C), or for the remainder of the input
string using a Code character (all subsets).
The Shift and Code characters consist of a combination of two characters:
l Two left-pointing double angle quotation marks («) specify a Shift character. Shift
character: «« (« = ASCII 171 decimal).
l One left-pointing double angle quotation mark («) specifies a Code character. It
should be followed by an uppercase letter that specifies the subset: Code character:
« + A|B|C (« = ASCII 171 decimal).

DataMatrix Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter ranges and settings for the DataMatrix symbology.

Fingerprint Command Reference 331

 Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "DATAMATRIX"
BARRATIO Fixed. Values will be interpreted as BARMAG.
BARMAG <128. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Not applicable.
BARFONT Set to ON to print the human readable. If ECI support is disabled, the
human readable is printed as is.

If ECI support is enabled, the human readable is printed without the

ECI-related characters. For example, a barcode string of
"\000009abc\\123" is printed as "abc\123".

BARSET Data
The next table includes parameters for use with the BARSET command.

Parameter Instruction Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "DATAMATRIX"

<nexp1-2> Not applicable.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. < 128. Default is 2.
<nexp4> Not applicable.
<nexp5> Barcode shape. 0: Square (default)

1: Rectangular
<nexp6> Barcode size. See the next section.
<nexp7-10> Not applicable.
<nexp11> Enables or disables ECI support. 0: Disables ECI support.

1: Enables ECI support.

Barcode size (<nexp6>)

By default, the number of characters determines the size of the symbol. For example,
the data "123456" generates a 10 row × 10 column DataMatrix symbol, and 72 digits
generates a 24 row × 24 column DataMatrix symbol. Fewer characters can be used for
all symbols (10 × 10, 12 × 12, and so on up to 144 × 144) if the data includes non-
numeric characters.
If the number of characters in the barcode exceeds the size you specify, the error "Too
many characters in barcode" appears. Specify a larger size for the barcode.
If you specify an invalid value for <nexp6>, such as 10 for a rectangular barcode,
Fingerprint uses the default value.
Sizes for square barcodes:

332 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Value Dimensions

0 Default
1 10 × 10
2 12 × 12
3 14 × 14
4 16 × 16
5 18 × 18
6 20 × 20
7 22 × 22
8 24 × 24
9 26 × 26
10 32 × 32
11 36 × 36
12 40 × 40
13 44 × 44
14 48 × 48
15 52 × 52
16 64 × 64
17 72 × 72
18 80 × 80
19 88 × 88
20 96 × 96
21 104 × 104
22 120 × 120
23 132 × 132
24 144 × 144

Sizes for rectangular barcodes:

Value Dimensions

0 Default
1 8 x 18
2 8 x 32

Fingerprint Command Reference 333

 Value Dimensions

3 12 x 26
4 12 x 36
5 16 x 36
6 16 x 48

Input Data
Parameter Ranges and Settings Notes

Number of characters 2,335 ASCII characters.

Check digit Yes. Added automatically.
Input characters ASCII 0-255 decimal.

l ECC 200 type is used for this DataMatrix symbol. ECC 200 data may be encoded
using any of the encodation schemes ASCII, C40, Text, X12, EDIFACT or Base 256.
ASCII encodation is the default scheme. All other encodation schemes are invoked
from ASCII encodation and return to this scheme.
l If you are encoding a function code using ASCII characters, make sure to include
the function code before the encoded numerical data. For example, to encode "Func-
tion Code 1 followed by "240123456789" in a barcode, enter "CHR$(26) +
"1"+"240123456789".

Remarks
When DataMatrix is selected and ECI support is enabled (<nexp11> = 1), the strings
"\<nnnnnn>" and "\\" are interpreted as follows:
l \<nnnnnn> : The backslash indicates that the character set should be changed, and
nnnnnn is the number of the chosen character set. The string is decoded as an ECI
character followed by one to three digit numbers in the barcode. All ECI characters
are printed in ASCII encodation, meaning that this string itself can be encoded in
any mode. The algorithm switches to ASCII mode to encode the ECI characters, then
encodes the other characters in the most efficient modes.
l \\ : Two backslashes are decoded as a single backslash character ("\") in the bar-
code. All double backslashes are printed in the most efficient modes as specified
and are decoded the same way when ECI support is not enabled.
Error 1112 (ECI syntax error) occurs if ECI mode is enabled and the PRBAR input
string is invalid.

Dotcode Symbology Information

The table below includes parameter information for the Dotcode symbology.

334 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "DOTCODE"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG 1-127. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Not applicable.
BARFONT Default is OFF.

BARSET Parameters
The next table lists parameter ranges and settings for use with the BARSET command.

Parameter Description Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "DOTCODE"

<nexp1-2> Not applicable.
<nexp3> Dot magnification 1 to 127. Default is 2.
factor
<nexp4> Not applicable.
<nexp5> Aspect height ratio. 1 to 10. Default is 2. Barcode generator internally
remaps 1 to 2.
<nexp6> Aspect width ratio. 1 to 10. Default is 3.
<nexp7> Barcode height in ele- 5 to 127. Ignored by default.
ments.
<nexp8> Barcode width in ele- 5 to 127. Ignored by default.
ments.
<nexp9> Reflectance reversal. 0 (default): Dark dot on light background

1: Light dot on dark background

<nexp10- Not applicable.
11>

EAN-8 Symbology Information

The table below includes parameter ranges and settings for the EAN-8 symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "EAN8"
BARRATIO Fixed ratio. BARRATIO statement ignored.

Fingerprint Command Reference 335

 Command Ranges and Settings

BARMAG Maximum 8. Default is 2.

BARHEIGHT No restrictions. Default is 100.
BARFONT Font selection not possible. Font for human-readable interpretation is
set automatically according to the specification on a BARFONT ON
command.

Input Data
Parameter Ranges and Settings Notes

Number of characters 7
Check digit One. Added automatically.
Digits 0 to 9.
Uppercase letters None.
Lowercase letters None.
Punctuation marks None.
Start character None.
Stop character None.

To learn more about using the PRBAR statement to generate an add-on barcode, see
About AddOn Codes.

EAN-13 Symbology Information

The table below includes parameter ranges and settings for the EAN-13 symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "EAN13"
BARRATIO Fixed ratio. BARRATIO statement ignored.
BARMAG Maximum 8. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT No restrictions. Default is 100.
BARFONT Font selection not possible. Font for human-readable interpretation is
set automatically according to the specification on a BARFONT ON
command.

336 Fingerprint Command Reference

Input Data
Parameter Ranges and Settings Notes

Number of characters 12
Check digit One Added automatically.
Digits 0 to 9
Uppercase letters None.
Lowercase letters None.
Punctuation marks None.
Start character None.
Stop character None.

To learn more about using the PRBAR statement to generate an add-on barcode, see
About AddOn Codes.

EAN-128 Symbology Information

The table below includes parameter ranges and settings for use with the EAN-128
symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "EAN128", "EAN128A", "EAN128B", "EAN128C"

BARRATIO Fixed ratio. BARRATIO statement ignored.
BARMAG = 2 (default).
BARHEIGHT No restrictions. Default is 100.
BARFONT No restrictions.

BARSET Data
The next table includes parameter ranges and settings for use with the BARSET
command.

BARSET Description Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "EAN128", "EAN128A", "EAN128B",

"EAN128C"
<nexp1- Not applicable.
2>
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. <128. Default is 2.
<nexp4> Barheight.

Fingerprint Command Reference 337

 BARSET Description Ranges and Settings

<nexp5> Not applicable.

<nexp6> Character exclusion in barcode. 0: Disables parentheses and spaces in
Does not affect human readable. the barcode data.

Non-zero: Barcode and human readable

field will include exactly the same data.
<nexp7- Not applicable.
10>

Input Data
The next table includes input data parameters for EAN-128.

Ranges and
Parameter Notes
Settings

Number of Unlimited.
characters
Check digit Trailing sym- Added automatically. Never shown in the human-read-
bol check char- able interpretation and not transmitted as part of
acter. encoded data.
Input char- ASCII 0-127. According to Roman 8 character set.
acters
Start char- See Note 2.
acters
Code char- See Notes 1 &
acters 2.
Shift char- See Notes 1 &
acters 2.
Stop char- Always. Added automatically.
acters:

Note 1
Code characters and shift characters require either an 8-bit communication protocol,
remapping to an ASCII value between 0-127 decimal, or the use of a CHR$ function.

Note 2
EAN 128 automatically selects the optimal start character, and handles shift and
changes of the character subset depending on input data content.

338 Fingerprint Command Reference

Remarks
To learn more about using the PRBAR statement to generate an add-on barcode, see
About AddOn Codes.
EAN 128A, EAN 128B, and EAN 128C select subsets A, B, and C respectively. The last
character in the barcode name signifies both the start character and the chosen
subset.
The selected subset can be changed anywhere in the input string, either for a single
character using a Shift character (not for Subset C), or for the remainder of the input
string using a Code character (all subsets).
The Shift and Code characters consist of a combination of two characters:
l Two left-pointing double angle quotation marks («) specify a Shift character. Shift
character: «« (« = ASCII 171 decimal)
l One left-pointing double angle quotation mark («) specifies a Code character. It
should be followed by an uppercase letter that specifies the subset. Code character:
« + A|B|C (« = ASCII 171 decimal).

Gridmatrix Symbology Information

The table below includes parameter information for the Gridmatrix symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "GRIDMATRIX"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG 1-127. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Not applicable.
BARFONT Default is OFF.

BARSET Parameters
The next table lists parameter ranges and settings for use with the BARSET command.

Parameter Description Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "GRIDMATRIX"

<nexp1-2> Not applicable.
<nexp3> Dot magnification factor 1 to 127. Default is 2.
<nexp4> Not applicable.
<nexp5> User-selectable ECI 1 to 5. Default is 1.

Fingerprint Command Reference 339

 Parameter Description Ranges and Settings

<nexp6> Enable or disable ECI support 0: disabled (default)

1: enabled
<nexp7-11> Not applicable.

HANXIN Symbology Information

The table below includes parameter information for the HANXIN symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "HANXINCODE"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG 1-30. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Not applicable.
BARFONT Default is OFF.

BARSET Parameters
The next table lists parameter ranges and settings for use with the BARSET command.

Parameter Description Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. HANXINCODE

<nexp1> Not used Not used
<nexp2> Not used Not used
<nexp3> Version number 1-30, Default = 2
<nexp4> Not used Not used
<nexp5> Error correction 1-4, Default=2
<nexp6> Dot element magnification factor 1-6, Default = 2
<nexp7> Mask pattern selection 0-3, Default =1

Remarks
A secondary format data structure requires a link character which is the checksum of
the primary format data structure. Therefore, a secondary data structure is only
applicable after a primary format data structure. Otherwise an uninitialized link
character is used.

HIBC Symbology Information

The table below includes parameter information for the HIBC symbology.

340 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "HIBC39" or "HIBC128"

BARRATIO 2:1, 3:1, 7:3, or 5:2.
Default is 3:1.
BARMAG 1-127. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT 1-500. Default is 100.
BARFONT Not applicable.

BARSET Parameters
The next table lists parameter ranges and settings for use with the BARSET command.

Parameter Description Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "HIBC39" or "HIBC128"

<nexp1> Ratio of large bar See "Ranges and Settings" for BARRATIO,
(Not applicable for above.
HIBC128)
<nexp2> Ratio of small bar See "Ranges and Settings" for BARRATIO,
(Not applicable for above.
HIBC128)
<nexp3> Bar magnification 1 to 127. Default is 2.
<nexp4> Bar height 1 to 500. Default is 100.
<nexp5> Data structure 0: Primary Format (default)

1: Supplier Alternative Format

2: Secondary Format

3: Provider Primary Format

4: Provider Secondary Format

<nexp6> Start and stop characters 0: No extra characters printed.

1: Print the start and stop characters.

(default)
<nexp7-11> Not applicable.

Remarks
A secondary format data structure requires a link character which is the checksum of
the primary format data structure. Therefore, a secondary data structure is only
applicable after a primary format data structure. Otherwise an uninitialized link
character is used.

Fingerprint Command Reference 341

Interleaved 2 of 5 Symbology Information
The next table includes parameter settings for the Interleaved 2 of 5 symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "INT2OF5"
BARRATIO 2:1-3:1/ Default: 3:1
BARMAG No restrictions. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT No restrictions. Default is 100.
BARFONT No restrictions.

Input Data
Parameter Ranges and Settings Notes

Number of characters Maximum of 195.

Check digit None.
Digits 0 to 9.
Uppercase letters None.
Lowercase letters None.
Punctuation marks None
Start character Yes. Added automatically.
Stop character Yes. Added automatically.

Interleaved 2 of 5c Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter settings for the Interleaved 2 of 5 symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "INT2OF5c"
BARRATIO 2:1-3:1/ Default: 3:1
BARMAG No restrictions. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT No restrictions. Default is 100.
BARFONT No restrictions.

342 Fingerprint Command Reference

Input Data
Parameter Ranges and Settings Notes

Number of characters Maximum of 195.

Check digit 1-digit. Added automatically.
Digits 0 to 9.
Uppercase letters None.
Lowercase letters None.
Punctuation marks None.
Start character Yes. Added automatically.
Stop character Yes. Added automatically.

ISBT 128 Symbology Information

The table below includes parameter information for the ISBT 128 symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "ISBT128"
BARRATIO Fixed. BARRATIO statement ignored.
BARMAG = 2 (default).
BARHEIGHT No restrictions. Default is 100.
BARFONT No restrictions.

BARSET Parameters
The next table includes parameter information for use with the BARSET command.

BARSET Description Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "ISBT128"

<nexp1- Not applicable.
2>
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. <128. Default is 2.
<nexp4> Barheight. No restriction. Default is 100.

Fingerprint Command Reference 343

 BARSET Description Ranges and Settings

<nexp5> Flag character. 0: Do not print.

1: (Default) Print flag character. Rotate 90

degrees clockwise, data from host. Calculate and
print flag character if between 01 and 59. For type
3, do not print if between 60 and 96.
<nexp7> Human-readable text 0: No scaling.
scaling.
2: (Default) Increase font size by 2 between pipe
(|) characters (serial number).

N: Increase font size by N points between pipe (|)

characters (serial number).
<nexp8> Keyboard entry check 0: Disabled, not printed.
character. Not part of
1: (Default) Calculated and printed. Enabled for
barcode data.
all data structures.
<nexp9> Processing of spaces 0: Barcode will not contain space or pipe (|) char-
and vertical bar in the acters. Space characters are printed in the
barcode data. human-readable text. Pipe characters are
removed.

Non-zero: Print all data in the input string except

pipe characters.

Input Data
Parameter Ranges and Settings Notes

Number of char- Unlimited.

acters
Check digit One. Added automatically.
Input characters ASCII 0 to 127. According to Roman 8 character
set.

344 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Parameter Ranges and Settings Notes

Functional char- FNC1 (ASCII 128 See Note 3.

acters decimal)

FNC2 (ASCII 129

decimal)

FNC3 (ASCII 130

decimal)

FNC4 (ASCII 131

decimal)
Start characters See Note 4.
Code characters See Notes 3 and 4.
Shift characters See Notes 3 and 4.
Stop characters Always. Added automatically.

Note 1
Flag character printing only applies to Donation Identification Number data structure.

Note 2
If the flag character value is set between 60 and 96, the printer considers it as type 3
and calculates the new value by adding 60 to the check character value automatically.

Note 3
Function characters FNC1-4, code characters, and shift characters require either an
8-bit communication protocol, remapping to an ASCII value between 0-127 decimal,
or the use of an CHR$ function.
FNC2-4 are not allowed in Subset C.

Note 4
Code 128 has automatic selection of start character and character subset (that is,
selects optimal start character and handles shift and changes of subset depending on
the content of the input data).

Remarks
Code 128B is used as the basis for ISBT 128.
Code 128A, Code 128B, and Code 128C select subsets A, B, and C respectively. The
last character in the barcode name signifies both the start character and the chosen
subset.
The selected subset can be changed anywhere in the input string, either for a single
character using a Shift character (not for Subset C), or for the remainder of the input
string using a Code character (all subsets).

Fingerprint Command Reference 345

 The Shift and Code characters consist of a combination of two characters:
l Two left-pointing double angle quotation marks («) specify a Shift character. Shift
character: «« (« = ASCII 171 decimal).
l One left-pointing double angle quotation mark («) specifies a Code character. It
should be followed by an uppercase letter that specifies the subset: Code character:
« + A|B|C (« = ASCII 171 decimal).

DataMatrix Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter ranges and settings for the DataMatrix symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "DATAMATRIX"
BARRATIO Fixed. Values will be interpreted as BARMAG.
BARMAG <128. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Not applicable.
BARFONT Set to ON to print the human readable. If ECI support is disabled, the
human readable is printed as is.

If ECI support is enabled, the human readable is printed without the

ECI-related characters. For example, a barcode string of
"\000009abc\\123" is printed as "abc\123".

BARSET Data
The next table includes parameters for use with the BARSET command.

Parameter Instruction Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "DATAMATRIX"

<nexp1-2> Not applicable.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. < 128. Default is 2.
<nexp4> Not applicable.
<nexp5> Barcode shape. 0: Square (default)

1: Rectangular
<nexp6> Barcode size. See the next section.
<nexp7-10> Not applicable.
<nexp11> Enables or disables ECI support. 0: Disables ECI support.

1: Enables ECI support.

346 Fingerprint Command Reference

Barcode size (<nexp6>)
By default, the number of characters determines the size of the symbol. For example,
the data "123456" generates a 10 row × 10 column DataMatrix symbol, and 72 digits
generates a 24 row × 24 column DataMatrix symbol. Fewer characters can be used for
all symbols (10 × 10, 12 × 12, and so on up to 144 × 144) if the data includes non-
numeric characters.
If the number of characters in the barcode exceeds the size you specify, the error "Too
many characters in barcode" appears. Specify a larger size for the barcode.
If you specify an invalid value for <nexp6>, such as 10 for a rectangular barcode,
Fingerprint uses the default value.
Sizes for square barcodes:

Value Dimensions

0 Default
1 10 × 10
2 12 × 12
3 14 × 14
4 16 × 16
5 18 × 18
6 20 × 20
7 22 × 22
8 24 × 24
9 26 × 26
10 32 × 32
11 36 × 36
12 40 × 40
13 44 × 44
14 48 × 48
15 52 × 52
16 64 × 64
17 72 × 72
18 80 × 80
19 88 × 88
20 96 × 96

Fingerprint Command Reference 347

 Value Dimensions

21 104 × 104
22 120 × 120
23 132 × 132
24 144 × 144

Sizes for rectangular barcodes:

Value Dimensions

0 Default
1 8 x 18
2 8 x 32
3 12 x 26
4 12 x 36
5 16 x 36
6 16 x 48

Input Data
Parameter Ranges and Settings Notes

Number of characters 2,335 ASCII characters.

Check digit Yes. Added automatically.
Input characters ASCII 0-255 decimal.

l ECC 200 type is used for this DataMatrix symbol. ECC 200 data may be encoded
using any of the encodation schemes ASCII, C40, Text, X12, EDIFACT or Base 256.
ASCII encodation is the default scheme. All other encodation schemes are invoked
from ASCII encodation and return to this scheme.
l If you are encoding a function code using ASCII characters, make sure to include
the function code before the encoded numerical data. For example, to encode "Func-
tion Code 1 followed by "240123456789" in a barcode, enter "CHR$(26) +
"1"+"240123456789".

Remarks
When DataMatrix is selected and ECI support is enabled (<nexp11> = 1), the strings
"\<nnnnnn>" and "\\" are interpreted as follows:
l \<nnnnnn> : The backslash indicates that the character set should be changed, and
nnnnnn is the number of the chosen character set. The string is decoded as an ECI

348 Fingerprint Command Reference

 character followed by one to three digit numbers in the barcode. All ECI characters
are printed in ASCII encodation, meaning that this string itself can be encoded in
any mode. The algorithm switches to ASCII mode to encode the ECI characters, then
encodes the other characters in the most efficient modes.
l \\ : Two backslashes are decoded as a single backslash character ("\") in the bar-
code. All double backslashes are printed in the most efficient modes as specified
and are decoded the same way when ECI support is not enabled.
Error 1112 (ECI syntax error) occurs if ECI mode is enabled and the PRBAR input
string is invalid.

MaxiCode Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter settings for the MaxiCode symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "MAXICODE"
BARRATIO Not applicable. Input ignored.
BARMAG Not applicable. Input ignored.
BARHEIGHT Not applicable. Input ignored.
BARFONT Not applicable. Input ignored.

Remarks
MaxiCode requires 8 fields of data separated by an LF character (entered as
CHR$(10)).
l Maximum number of characters: 84 (Modes 2 and 3) or 138 (Mode 4).
l Check character is automatic (Reed-Solomon algorithm).
l Data type: ASCII 0 to 255.
For all modes, each field must be present in final in data string and must contain
valid data as described in the next table.

Data Type and

Field Mode Notes
Range

1 2, 3 Mode 2 - 5 numeric
characters.
Mode 3 - 6 alpha-
numeric characters.
2 2 4 numeric char-
acters [0-9999].

Fingerprint Command Reference 349

 Data Type and
Field Mode Notes
Range

3 2, 3 3 numeric char- Country code.

acters [0-999].
4 2, 3 3 numeric char- Service class.
acters [0-999].
5 2, 3, 4 User-defined mes-
sage.
6 1 numeric character Mode selector.
[2|3|4].
7 1 numeric character Position in structured append. See the next sec-
[1-8]. tion, "About Structured Append Mode."
8 1 numeric character. Total number of symbols in structure.

About Structured Append Mode

F8 in structured append is the trigger for structured append mode:
l If F8 >1, the two first codewords in secondary message will be a pad followed by pos-
ition codeword. F8 has higher precedence than F7.
l If F7 >1 when F8 = 1, the two first codewords do not signal structured append.
l If F8 >1, F7 may be >F8 without error and structured append codeword will signal
given values.

Primary and Secondary Message Data Elements

The primary and secondary message data elements are described in the next tables.
All primary message data elements are required for Mode 2 (structured data message
for U.S. destinations) and Mode 3 (structured data message for international
destinations).
Primary Message Data Elements

Element Mode and Length Sample

Zip code + 4-digit extension Mode 2 (Numeric): 9 152392802

Mode 3 (Alphanumeric): 6 B1050
Country code Mode 2 (Numeric): 3 840
Mode 3 (Numeric): 3
Service class Mode 2( Numeric): 3 001
Mode 3 (Numeric): 3

Secondary Message Data Elements

350 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Element Mode and Length Sample

Secondary mes- Mode 2 (Alphanumeric): 84 This is the secondary mes-

sage Mode 3 (Alphanumeric): 84 sage.
Mode 4 (Standard symbol):
138
Header (optional) Mode 2 (Numeric): 9 [)RS01GS97
Mode 3 (Numeric): 9

Example
This example creates a MaxiCode symbol based on the following information:

Zip Code: 84170

Zip Code Extension: 1280
Country Code: 840
Class of Service: 001
Message Header: [)><RS>01
Year: 07
Tracking Number: 1Z12345675
SCAC: UPSN
UPS Shipper Number: 12345E
Julian Day of Pickup 089
Shipment ID: 1324567
Package: 1/1
Weight: 10.1
Address Validation: Y
Ship to Street 1 Main ST
Ship to City: PITTSBURGH
Ship to State: PA

The syntax for this information is:

10 PRPOS 100,100
20 DIR 1
30 ALIGN 1
40 a$="84170"+CHR$(10)+"1280"+CHR$(10)+"840"+
CHR$(10)+"001"+CHR$(10)+"[)>"+CHR$(30)+

"01"+CHR$(29)+"07"+"1Z12345675"+CHR$(29)+"UPSN"+CHR$(29)+"12345E"+CH
R$(29)+"089"

Fingerprint Command Reference 351

 +CHR$(29)+"1234567"+CHR$(29)+"1/1"+CHR$(29)+"10.1"+CHR$(29)+"Y"+CHR$
(29)+"1 MAIN ST"
50 b$=
CHR$(29)+"PITTSBURGH"+CHR$(29)+"PA"+CHR$(29)+CHR$(30)+CHR$(4)+CHR$(1
0)+"2"+CHR$(10)+"1"+CHR$(10)+"1"
60 BARTYPE "MAXICODE"
70 PRBAR a$;b$
80 PRINTFEED
RUN

MicroPDF417 Symbology Information

MicroPDF417 is a multi-row symbology based on PDF417. A limited set of symbol
sizes is available where each size has a fixed level of error correction. Up to 250
alphanumeric characters or 366 numeric digits can be encoded in a symbol.
Enhanced applications such as Extended Channel Interpretation (ECI), structured
append, reader initialization, Code 128 emulation, and macro characters are not
supported.

BARSET Data
The next table includes parameter ranges and settings to use with the BARSET
command.

Parameter Instruction Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "MICROPDF417"

<nexp1-2> Not applicable.
<nexp3> Element width in dots. 1 to 21. Default is 2.
<nexp4> Element height in dots. 1 to 127. Default is 100.
<nexp5-7> Not applicable.
<nexp8> Number of rows. 0, 4 to 44. Default is 0 (=automatic).
<nexp9> Number of columns. 0 to 4. Default is 0 (=automatic).
<nexp10> Not applicable.

Setting the Number of Rows and Columns

The symbol size is defined by specifying the number of rows and columns. Not all
combinations of rows and columns are allowed. The next table illustrates the valid
combinations.

Total Columns Valid Number of Rows for Total Columns

1 11 14 17 20 24 28 - - - - -

352 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Total Columns Valid Number of Rows for Total Columns

2 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 - - - -
3 6 8 10 12 15 20 26 32 38 44 -
4 4 6 8 10 12 15 20 26 32 38 44

If the number of rows is set to a value that does not match the valid values for the
given number of columns, the printer automatically chooses a larger number from the
list of valid values.

Automatic Selection
The number of columns and rows can be set automatically by the printer. If the
number of columns is set to 0, the printer sets the number of columns and rows
automatically, regardless of the number of rows specified. The printer tries to fit the
given data into a symbol with as few columns as possible. If the number of columns is
non-zero and the number of rows is set to 0, the printer automatically sets the
number of rows to the lowest number required to encode the given data.

Examples
This example shows how a MicroPDF417 barcode is specified using the BARTYPE and
BARSET statements.
Bar width: 2 dots
Bar height: 8 dots
Number of rows: 26
Number of columns: 3
BARTYPE "MICROPDF417"
BARSET #4,2,8,1,1,1,26,3
The bar width and bar height can also be set using BARMAG and BARHEIGHT
respectively.
The number of columns and rows are set using the BARSET statement. Parameters
number 9 and 10 are the number of rows and columns respectively. Examples A and
B below set the number of rows to 12 and the number of columns to 3. The type of
barcode is set to MicroPDF417. Not all parameters of the BARSET command are
applicable to the MicroPDF417 implementation. The parameters ignored by the
implementation (large bar ratio, small bar ratio, security level, aspect height, and
aspect width) are set to '1' in example B.
Example A (Direct Protocol):
BARTYPE "MICROPDF417"
BARSET #9, 12
BARSET #10, 3
Example B (Direct Protocol)
BARSET "MICROPDF417",1,1,2,8,1,1,1,12,3

Fingerprint Command Reference 353

 The example code below prints a small MicroPDF417 barcode containing the string
"MicroPDF417." The number of rows and columns is set by the printer based on the
input string since the number of columns is set to 0.

10 BARSET "MICROPDF417",1,1,4,8,1,1,1,0,0
20 PRPOS 50, 50
30 PRBAR "MICROPDF417"
40 PRINTFEED

PDF417 Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter information for the PDF417 symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "PDF417"
BARRATIO Fixed. Values are interpreted as BARMAG.
BARMAG 2 (default) to 128.
BARHEIGHT No restrictions. Default is 100.
BARFONT Not applicable.

BARSET Data
The next table includes PDF417 parameter ranges and settings for use with the
BARSET command.

Parameter Description Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "PDF417"

<nexp1> Light bar ratio. No restrictions. Default is 3.
<nexp2> Narrow bar ratio. No restrictions. Default is 1.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. < 128. Default is 2.
<nexp4> Barheight. < 500. Default is 100.
<nexp5> Security level. 1-5. Default is 2.
<nexp6> Aspect height ratio. No restrictions. Default is 3.
<nexp7> Aspect width ratio. No restrictions. Default is 1.
<nexp8> Number of rows. 0, and 3-90. Default is 0.
<nexp9> Number of columns. 0-30. Default is 0.
<nexp10> Truncate. 0 or not equal to 0. The default 0 prints a nor-
mal symbol.

354 Fingerprint Command Reference

Input Data
Parameter Ranges or Settings Notes

Number of characters 1,800 ASCII characters or 2,700 digits.

Check digit Yes. Added automatically.
Input characters ASCII 0-255 decimal.

Example
This example shows PDF417 in GM label as per ANSI B-14, with the following data:

Parameter Data or Setting Description

Data Identifier/Separator Data Field Name

[)>{RS} Message Header
06{GS} Format Header
P 12345678 Part Number
{GS} Group Separator
Q 160 Quantity
{GS}
1J UN123456789A2B4C6D8E License Plate
{GS}
20L LA6-987 Material Handling Code
{GS}
21L S4321ZES Plant/Dock Code
{GS}
K GM1234 PO Number
{GS}
15K G1155 Kanban Number
{GS}
B KLT3214 Container Type
{GS}
7Q 10GT Gross Weight
{RS} Record Separator
{EOT} Message Trailer

The syntax is as follows:

Fingerprint Command Reference 355

 10 PRPOS 16,1180
20 DIR 4
30 ALIGN 9
40 BARSET "PDF417",1,1,2,6,5,1,2,0,5,0
50 PRBAR "
[)>"+CHR$(30)+"06"+CHR$(29)+"P12345678"+CHR$(29)+"Q160"+CHR$(29)+
"1JUN123456789A2B4C6D8E"+CHR$(29)+"20LA6-987" +CHR$(29)+"21L54321
ZES"

+CHR$(29)+"KGM1234"+CHR$(29)+"15KG1155"+CHR$(29)+"BKLT3214"+CHR$(29)
+"7Q10GT"+CHR$(30)+CHR$(4)
60 PRINTFEED
RUN

QR Code Symbology Information

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "QRCODE"
BARRATIO To be defined.
BARMAG 1-30.
BARHEIGHT Not applicable.
BARFONT To be defined.

BARSET Parameters
The next table includes QR Code ranges and settings for use with the BARSET
command.

BARSET Description Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "QRCODE"

<nexp1-2> Not applicable.
<nexp3> Element size in dots. 1 to 27. Default is 2.
<nexp4> QR Code model. 1 (default) or 2 (recommended)
<nexp5> Security level. 1: L
2: M (default)
3: Q
4: H
<nexp6> Mask pattern selection. Not currently supported. Reserved.
<nexp7-10> Not applicable.

356 Fingerprint Command Reference

Input Data Capacity
8-bit
Security Correction
Numeric Alphanumeric Byte Kanji
Level Level
Data

L 7% Model 1: 707 486 299

1176
4296 2953 1817
Model 2:
7089
M 15% Model 1: 531 365 225
877
3391 2331 1435
Model 2:
5596
Q 25% Model 1: 447 307 189
738
2420 1663 1024
Model 2:
3993
H 30% Model 1: 302 207 127
498
1842 1273 784
Model 2:
3057

The unit is number of characters. Mixed mode is supported for all combinations
except or combinations containing both 8-bit byte and Kanji data. The type of data is
set automatically by the implementation based on the input characters.

Example
This example shows how BARSET is used in two different ways to create a QR Code
Model 2 barcode with element size 4 and security code M:
BARSET "QRCODE",1,1,4,2,2
or
BARSET #4,"QRCODE",4,201,2

RSS-14 Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter information for the RSS-14 symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "RSS14"

Fingerprint Command Reference 357

 Command Ranges and Settings

BARRATIO Not applicable.

BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100. See the
Remarks for more information.
BARFONT Not applicable.

BARSET Data
The next table includes RSS-14 ranges and settings for use with the BARSET
command.

Parameter Description Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "RSS14"

<nexp1> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp2> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.
<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.
<nexp5> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp6> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp7> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp8-10> Not applicable.

Input Data
Ranges
Parameter and Set- Notes
tings

Number of 13 digits. If less than 13 digits are entered, leading zeroes are auto-
characters matically added so the string is 13 digits long.

Remarks
There are restrictions in the standard for the minimum size for each RSS barcode,
even if it is possible to print an RSS barcode in any height. The height should relate to
the magnification. For RSS-14, the width is 96X and the minimum height is 33X,
where X is the width of the most narrow element as specified by BARMAG or
BARSET<nexp3>.

358 Fingerprint Command Reference

 For RSS used in composite barcodes, see the information for that RSS Composite
symbology.

RSS-14 Expanded Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter settings for the RSS-14 Expanded symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "RSS14E"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100.
BARFONT No restrictions.

BARSET Data
The next table includes RSS-14 Expanded ranges and settings for use with the
BARSET command.

BARSET Description Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "RSS14L"

<nexp1> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp2> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.
<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.
<nexp5> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp6> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp7> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp8-10> Not applicable.

Input Data
Parameter Ranges and Settings Notes

Number of char- Max. 71 numeric or 41 alphanumeric Allowed characters:

acters characters.
0-9, A-Z, a-z

!"%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?
_ space

FNC1 [CHR$(128)]

Fingerprint Command Reference 359

Remarks
Use RSS-14 Expanded for intelligent encoding of the input data. RSS-14E barcodes
can be created with different encoding methods and compressed data fields. To
understand how to create intelligent barcodes with RSS-14E, see the most current
AIM specification.

RSS-14 Expanded Stacked Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter information for the RSS-14 Expanded Stacked
symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "RSS14ES"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100. See the
Remarks for more information.
BARFONT No restrictions.

BARSET Data
The next table includes RSS-14 Expanded Stacked ranges and settings for use with
the BARSET command.

BARSET Description Notes

<sexp> Barcode type. "RSS14ES"

<nexp1> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp2> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.
<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.
<nexp5> Segments per row. 2-22 (default 2). Multiples of 2 only.
<nexp6> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp7> Height of a separator The height for the pattern rows between the linear
row. rows. If too low a height is entered, the height will
be changed to the smallest legal height for the
selected magnification. Minimum 1X, maximum
2X.
<nexp8- Not applicable.
10>

360 Fingerprint Command Reference

Input Data
Barcodes in RSS-14 Expanded Stacked can be a maximum of 71 numeric or 41
alphanumeric characters long. Allowable characters include:
0-9
A-Z
a-z
Other characters: ! " % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? _ space FNC1 [CHR$(128)]

Remarks
There are restrictions in the standard for the minimum size for each RSS barcode,
even if it is possible to print an RSS barcode in any height. The height should relate to
the magnification. RSS Stacked differs because the barcode rows do not have the
same height. BARHEIGHT or BARSET<nexp4> specifies the height of the lower row
and height of the upper row is automatically calculated from the height of the lower
row.
For RSS-14ES, the width depends on input. The minimum height is 34X per row +
3*1X per separator, where X is the width of the most narrow element as specified by
BARMAG or BARSET<nexp3>.
RSS-14ES can be used for intelligent encoding of the input data. RSS-14ES barcodes
can be created with different encoding methods and compressed data fields. To
understand how to create intelligent barcodes with RSS-14ES, see the most current
AIM specification.

Example
This example is of RSS-14 Expanded Stacked for a variable weight item (0.001
kilogram increments) and with recommended minimum height selected:

Description Value

Start parameter #4
Most narrow element width in 2
dots
Height in dots 68
Segments per row 4
Place holder <nexp6> 1
Separator pattern row height 2

Fingerprint Command Reference 361

 Description Value

Data 01900123456789003103001750|9876543210

where:

01 is the Application Identifier (AI).

900123456780 is the AI 01 item ID.

0 is used as a placeholder.

3103 is the Application Identifier (AI).

001750 is the AI3103 variable weight element

string.

9876543210 is the 2D data string,

BARTYPE "RSS14ES"
BARSET #4,2,68,4,1,2
PRBAR "01900123456789003103001750"

RSS-14 Limited Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter information for the RSS-14 Limited symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "RSS14L"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100. See the
Remarks for more information.
BARFONT No restrictions.

BARSET Data
The next table includes RSS-14 Limited ranges and settings for use with the BARSET
command.

BARSET Description Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "RSS14L"

<nexp1-2> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.

362 Fingerprint Command Reference

 BARSET Description Ranges and Settings

<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.

<nexp5-7> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp8-10> Not applicable.

Input Data
Ranges
Parameter and Set- Notes
tings

Number of 13 digits. If less than 13 digits are entered, leading zeroes are auto-
characters matically added so the string is 13 digits long.

Remarks
There are restrictions in the standard for the minimum size for each RSS barcode,
even if it is possible to print an RSS barcode in any height. The height should relate to
the magnification. RSS Stacked differs because the barcode rows do not have the
same height. BARHEIGHT or BARSET<nexp4> specifies the height of the lower row,
and the height of the upper row is automatically calculated from the height of the
lower row.
For RSS-14L, the width is 71X and the minimum height is 10X, where X is the width of
the most narrow element as specified by BARMAG or BARSET<nexp3>.

RSS-14 Stacked Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter settings for the RSS-14 Stacked symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "RSS14S"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100. See the
Remarks for more information.
BARFONT No restrictions.

BARSET Data
The next table includes RSS-14 Stacked ranges and settings for use with the BARSET
command.

Fingerprint Command Reference 363

 Parameter Description Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "RSS14S"

<nexp1-2> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.
<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.
<nexp5-6> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp7> Placeholder.
<nexp8-10> Not applicable.

Input Data
Ranges
Parameter and Set- Notes
tings

Number of 13 digits. If less than 13 digits are entered, leading zeroes are added
characters automatically so the string is 13 digits long.

Remarks
There are restrictions in the standard for the minimum size for each RSS barcode,
even if it is possible to print an RSS barcode in any height. The height should relate to
the magnification. RSS Stacked differs, because the barcode rows do not have the
same height. BARHEIGHT or BARSET<nexp4> specifies the height of the lower row
and height of the upper row is automatically calculated from the height of the lower
row.
For RSS-14S, the width is 50X and the minimum height is 13X (upper 5X + lower 7X +
separator 1X minimum.), where X is the width of the most narrow element as specified
by BARMAG or BARSET<nexp3>.

Example
This example creates an RSS14S barcode with the following characteristics and with
recommended minimum height selected:
Place holder (nexp1): 1
Place holder (nexp2): 1
Most narrow element width in dots: 3
Height in dots: 21
Place holder (nexp5): 1
Place holder (nexp6): 1
Separator pattern row height: 4
Data: 1234567890123
BARSET "RSS14S",1,1,3,21,1,1,4
PRBAR "1234567890123"

364 Fingerprint Command Reference

RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional Symbology Information
The next table includes parameter settings for the RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional
symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "RSS14SO"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100. See the
Remarks for more information.
BARFONT No restrictions.

BARSET Data
The next table includes RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional parameters and settings for
use with the BARSET command.

BARSET Description Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "RSS14S0"

<nexp1> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp2> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.
<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.
<nexp5> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp6> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp7> Placeholder.
<nexp8-10> Not applicable.

Input Data
Ranges
Parameter and Set- Notes
tings

Number of 13 digits. If less than 13 digits are entered, leading zeroes are added
characters automatically so the string is 13 digits long.

Fingerprint Command Reference 365

Remarks
There are restrictions in the standard for the minimum size for each RSS barcode,
even if it is possible to print an RSS barcode in any height. The height should relate to
the magnification. RSS Stacked differs, because the barcode rows do not have the
same height. BARHEIGHT or BARSET<nexp4> specifies the height of the lower row
and height of the upper row is automatically calculated from the height of the lower
row.
For RSS-14SO, the width is 50X and the minimum height is 69X (upper 33X + lower
33X + separator 3*1X minimum.).

RSS-14 Truncated Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter settings for the RSS-14 Truncated symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "RSS14T"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100. See Remarks
for more information.
BARFONT No restriction.

BARSET Data
The next table includes parameter ranges and settings for use with the BARSET
command.

Parameter Description Range and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "RSS14T"

<nexp1> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp2> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.
<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.
<nexp5> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp6> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp7> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp8-10> Not applicable.

366 Fingerprint Command Reference

Input Data
Ranges
Parameter and Set- Notes
tings

Number of 13 digits. If less than 13 digits are entered, leading zeroes will auto-
characters matically be added so the string will be 13 digits long.

Remarks
There are restrictions in the standard for the minimum size for each RSS barcode,
even if it is possible to print an RSS barcode in any height. The height should relate to
the magnification. RSS Stacked differs because the barcode rows do not have the
same height. BARHEIGHT or BARSET<nexp4> specifies the height of the lower row,
and the height of the upper row is automatically calculated from the height of the
lower row.
For RSS-14 Truncated, the width is 96X and the minimum height is 13X, where X is
the width of the most narrow element as specified by BARMAG or BARSET<nexp3>.

UPC-A Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter information for the UPC-A symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "UPCA"
BARRATIO Fixed ratio. BARRATIO statement ignored.
BARMAG Maximum 8. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT No restrictions. Default is 100.
BARFONT Barfont generated automatically. BARFONT statement ignored.
BARFONT ON/OFF work.

Input Data
Parameter Ranges and Settings Notes

Number of characters 11
Check digit One Added automatically.
Digits 0 to 9.
Uppercase letters None.
Lowercase letters None.
Punctuation marks None.
Start character None.

Fingerprint Command Reference 367

 Parameter Ranges and Settings Notes

Stop character None.

To learn more about using the PRBAR statement to generate an add-on barcode, see
About AddOn Codes.

UPC-E Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter information for the UPC-E symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "UPCE"
BARRATIO Fixed ratio. BARRATIO statement ignored.
BARMAG Maximum 8. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT No restriction. Default is 100.
BARFONT Barfont generated automatically. BARFONT statement ignored.
BARFONT ON/OFF work.

Input Data
Parameters Ranges and Settings Notes

Number of characters 6
Check digit 1 Added automatically.
Digits 0 to 9.
Uppercase letters None.
Lowercase letters None.
Punctuation marks None.
Start character None.
Stop character None.

To learn more about using the PRBAR statement to generate an add-on barcode, see
About AddOn Codes.

USPS 4-State
The table below includes parameter information for the USPS intelligent mail barcode
symbology.

368 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "USPS4CB"
BARRATIO Fixed. Input ignored.
BARMAG Fixed. Input ignored.
BARHEIGHT Fixed. Input ignored.
BARFONT No restrictions.

BARSET Parameters
The next table includes parameter information for use with the BARSET command.

BARSET Description Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. No default.

<nexp1-11> Not applicable.

Input Data
Parameter Ranges and Settings Notes

Number of characters 20, 25, 29, or 31

Input characters Numeric.

About Composite Barcodes

An EAN.UCC Composite symbol consists of a linear component, an adjacent 2D
Composite Component, a separator pattern, and an optional human readable section.

The Composite symbol always includes a linear component so that the primary
identification is readable by all scanning technologies. 2D imagers can use the linear
component as a finder pattern for the adjacent 2D Composite Component.
EAN.UCC Composite Symbology is dependent on several other symbologies. Some
minor adjustment of implementation of PDF417 and MicroPDF417, nine new
symbologies and a logical way of combining nine linear and three 2D symbologies in
different composite combinations have been implemented.

Fingerprint Command Reference 369

 l Learn more about the linear components
l Learn more about the 2D composite components

About the Human Readable Section

For all combinations of the EAN.UCC Composite symbology, the human readable
section is an optional presentation of the information in either or both barcodes. The
linear human readable section is presented below the linear component, within the
same rules as for the single barcode. The human readable for the 2D composite
component part is presented under the human readable for the linear barcode.
EAN/UPC barcodes have fixed fonts for the human readable barcode interpretation.

Supported Component Combinations

Based upon the width of the linear component, a choice of "best fit" 2D Composite
Component is specified. The table below lists all of the permissible combinations.

Linear Component CC-A/CC-B CC-C Number of columns

UPC-A & EAN-13 Yes/Yes No 4

EAN-8 Yes/Yes No 3
UPC-E Yes/Yes No 2
UCC/EAN-128 Yes/Yes Yes 4|variable width (1-30)
RSS-14 Yes/Yes No 4
RSS-14 Stacked Yes/Yes No 2
RSS-14 Stacked omnidirectional Yes/Yes No 2
RSS Limited Yes/Yes No 3
RSS Expanded Yes/Yes No 4
RSS Expanded Stacked Yes/Yes No 4

About the 2D Composite Components

The 2D Composite Component, abbreviated as CC, encodes supplementary data, such
as a batch number or expiration date. The CC is chosen based on the selected linear
component and on the amount of complementary data to be encoded. The choice of
linear symbol determines the name of the composite symbol, such as EAN-13
Composite symbol or UCC/EAN-128 Composite symbol.
There are three types:
l CC-A, a variant of MicroPDF417, designed for efficient encoding of supplemental
application identifier data.
l CC-B, a MicroPDF417 symbol with codeword 920 in the first data codeword pos-
ition as a linkage flag denoting EAN.UCC Composite Symbology data compaction.

370 Fingerprint Command Reference

 l CC-C, a PDF417 symbol with a codeword 920 in the first data codeword position as
a linkage flag denoting EAN.UCC Composite Symbology data compaction.
These types are described in the next section.

About the CC-A, CC-B, and CC-C Composite Symbols

The CC-A, CC-B and CC-C composite symbols are almost the same barcode as
PDF417 and MicroPDF417.

CC-A
The CC-A component is a variant of MicroPDF417, and the smallest of the 2D
composite components. CC-A can encode up to 56 digits and has 3 to 12 rows and 2
to 4 columns.

CC-B
The CC-B component is a variant of MicroPDF417 symbol uniquely identified by the
codeword "920" as the first code word in the symbol. Encoding systems select CC-B
when the data to be encoded exceeds the capacity for CC-A. CC-B can encode up to
338 digits and has from 10 to 44 rows and 2 to 4 columns.

CC-C
The CC-C component is the same as a PDF417 barcode except for the following:
l CC-C has the code word "920" in the second symbol character position (immediately
following the Symbol Length Descriptor).
l High-level data encodation: after the first data codeword (920), the second data
codeword is a latch to Byte Compaction mode.
l Structured append is not used.
l Reader initialization: code word 921 does not appear in CC-C.
l No quiet zones are required above and under the barcode.
l Reference decode algorithm: an incorrect composite 2D barcode.
l Error correction: CC-C meets or exceeds the minimum error correction level recom-
mended for PDF417.
l Symbology identifiers: special for CC-C.

About the CC Escape Mechanism

After the first Byte mode codeword 901 or 924 in the 2D Composite component, if
another codeword greater than 899 occurs, the composite "symbol" is logically
terminated at that point. The remaining codewords are encoded or decoded according
to special rules.

Example
This example corresponds to the illustration in About Composite Barcodes:

BARFONT ON
BARSET "EAN128_CCC",1,1,5,100,0,0,0,0,0,1
PRBAR "(01)93812345678901|(10)ABCD123456(410)389

Fingerprint Command Reference 371

 8765432108"
PRINTFEED

About the Linear Components

The linear barcode component encodes the item’s primary identification in one of the
following barcode types:
l UCC/EAN-128
l EAN/UPC: 8 or 13
l UPC-A or E
l Any RSS-family symbology that includes a separator character in between the data
for the linear component and the 2D component of the input string.
For more information on linear components described by symbology, see the next
section.

Linear Components by Symbology

UPC-A
There is no linkage flag in the UPC-A symbol to indicate the presence of an associated
2D Composite Component. UPC-A linear component may only be linked to four-
column CC-A or CC-B components.

EAN-13
There is no linkage flag in the EAN-13 symbol to indicate the presence of an
associated 2D Composite Component. EAN-13 linear component may only be linked
to four-column CC-A or CC-B components.

EAN-8
There is no linkage flag in the EAN-8 symbol to indicate the presence of an associated
2D Composite Component. EAN-8 linear component may only be linked to three-
column CC-A or CC-B components.

UPC-E
There is no linkage flag in the UPC-E symbol to indicate the presence of an
associated 2D Composite Component. UPC-E linear component may only be linked to
two-column CC-A or CC-B components.

UCC/EAN-128
UCC/EAN-128 is a Code 128 with a FNC1 character in the first position after the start
character. When UCC/EAN-128 is the linear component of an EAN.UCC Composite
Symbol, the barcode has a Code Set character as a linkage flag in the last symbol
character position before the check character. The printer will add the linkage flag
automatically.

372 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Link Flag Character

Active Code Set CC-A or CC-B CC-C

A CODE B CODE C
B CODE C CODE A
C CODE A CODE B

UCC/EAN-128 Composite Symbol may be combined with any of the 2D barcode

components created for the EAN.UCC Composite Symbology. The choice between
using CC-A/B or CC-C is made by the user. This table describes how an UCC/EAN-
128 Composite symbol is built.

Parameter Notes

Start char- Added by the printer.

acter
FNC1 Added by the printer.
Data Data is added by the user.
If it is necessary to change Code Set the printers add Code- or Shift-
characters to change the subset.
Link flag Added by the printer.
character
Check digit Calculated and added by the printer.
Stop char- Added by the printer.
acter

It is possible to choose to filter out spaces, parentheses, and carriage returns for the
barcode data and display them in the human readable field. Carriage returns make it
possible to display the human readable field in multiple rows.
l UCC/EAN-128 With a 2D Composite Component (CC-A or CC-B): The length of the
data determines if a CC-A or a CC-B is used. Only a 4-column wide CC-A or a CC-B
is used.
l UCC/EAN-128 With a 2D Composite Component (CC-C): The number of columns of
the CC-C is selectable by the user. The separator pattern is a complement of the lin-
ear symbol. The patterns above the UCC/EAN-128 component’s quiet zones are
light. The 2D barcode is placed above the separator pattern on the following pos-
ition: The first interior space module of the CC-C component is aligned with the
second module of the linear components star character.

RSS
When RSS symbols are used as a Composite Component, the encoded value includes
a linkage flag indicating the presence of an adjacent 2D Composite Component.

Fingerprint Command Reference 373

RSS-14
RSS-14 linear component may only be linked to four-column CC-A or CC-B
components.

RSS-14 Truncated
RSS-14 Truncated linear component may only be linked to four-column CC-A or CC-B
components.

RSS-14 Stacked
RSS-14 Stacked linear component may only be linked to two-column CCA or CC-B
components.

RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional

RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional linear component may only be linked to two-column
CC-A or CC-B components.

RSS Limited
RSS-14 Limited linear component may only be linked to three-column CC-A or CC-B
components.

RSS Expanded
RSS-14 Expanded linear component may only be linked to four-column CC-A or CC-B
components.

RSS Expanded Stacked

RSS-14 Expanded Stacked linear component may only be linked to four-column CC-A
or CC-B components. If linked to a 2D Composite Component, the top row of the
linear component must contain at least four symbol characters.

EAN-8 Composite with CC-A or CC-B Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter settings for an EAN.UCC Composite symbol using
the EAN-8 symbology with a CC-A or CC-B composite component.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "EAN8_CC"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2. Maximum is
8.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100.

374 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Command Ranges and Settings

BARFONT ON: The human readable for the linear bar will be printed under the
linear barcode. If BARSET<nexp10> is set to 1, the human readable for
the 2D barcode is printed also.

OFF: No human readable is printed.

BARSET Data
The next table includes ranges and settings for use with the BARSET command.

BARSET Instruction Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "EAN8_CC"

<nexp1-2> Placeholder. Value insignificant. 0 is not allowed.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.
<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.
<nexp5> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp6> Character exclusion in Always 1 (default). The barcode and
barcode (does not affect the human readable field will
human readables). include exactly the same data.
<nexp7> Height of separator pat- Value insignificant.
tern row in dots.
<nexp8> Height of each row in 2D Value must be 1-2 × BARMAG. For
barcode in dots. example, if BARMAG = 5, 5-10 is
OK.
<nexp9> Separator character ASCII 2-255 decimal. Default is
between data to linear ASCII 124 decimal. ASCII 48-57
barcode and 2D barcode. decimal not allowed.
<nexp10> 2D human readables 0: No human readable 2D field.
On/Off.
1: Print human readable 2D field.

Input Data
Parameter Ranges and Settings Notes

Number of characters 7
Check digit 1 Added automatically.
Digits 0 to 9.
Uppercase letters None.

Fingerprint Command Reference 375

 Parameter Ranges and Settings Notes

Lowercase letters None.

Punctuation marks None.
Start characters None.
Stop characters None.

EAN-13 Composite with CC-A or CC-B Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter settings for an EAN.UCC Composite symbol using
the EAN-13 symbology with a CC-A or CC-B composite component.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "EAN13_CC"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2. Maximum is
8.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100.
BARFONT ON: The human readable for the linear bar will be printed under the
linear barcode. If BARSET<nexp10> is set to 1, the human readable for
the 2D barcode is printed also.

OFF: No human readable is printed.

BARSET Data
The next table includes ranges and settings for use with the BARSET command.

BARSET Instruction Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "EAN13_CC"

<nexp1-2> Placeholder. Value insignificant. 0 is not allowed.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.
<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.
<nexp5> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp6> Character exclusion in bar- Always 1 (default). The barcode and the
code (does not affect human human readable field will include exactly
readables). the same data.

376 Fingerprint Command Reference

 BARSET Instruction Ranges and Settings

<nexp7> Height of separator pattern Value must be 1-2 × BARMAG. For

row in dots. example, if BARMAG = 5, 5-10 is OK.
<nexp8> Height of each row in 2D bar- Default: 0 (= 3 x BARMAG)
code in dots.
<nexp9> Separator character between ASCII 2-255 decimal Default is ASCII 124
data to linear barcode and 2D decimal. ASCII 48-57 decimal not allowed.
barcode.
<nexp10> 2D human readables On/Off. 0: No human readable 2D field.

1: Print human readable 2D field.

Input Data
Parameter Ranges and Settings Notes

Number of characters 12
Check digit 1 Added automatically.
Digits 0 to 9
Uppercase letters None.
Lowercase letters None.
Punctuation marks None.
Start characters None.
Stop characters None.

EAN.UCC 128 Composite with CC-A or CC-B Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter settings for an EAN.UCC Composite symbol using
the EAN.UCC 128 symbology with a CC-A or CC-B composite component.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "EAN128_CCAB"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100.

Fingerprint Command Reference 377

 Command Ranges and Settings

BARFONT ON: The human readable for the linear bar will be printed under the
linear barcode. If BARSET<nexp10> is set to 1, the human readable for
the 2D barcode is printed also.

OFF: No human readable is printed.

BARSET Data
The next table includes ranges and settings for use with the BARSET command.

BARSET Description Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "EAN128_CCAB"

<nexp1-2> Placeholder. Value insignificant. 0 is not allowed.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.
<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.
<nexp5> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp6> Character exclusion in 0: Barcode will not include space, comma (,), or
barcode (does not CR ([CHR$(13)]) characters, but they are printed
affect human read- in the human readable field. Carriage returns
ables). make it possible to print human readable in
multiple rows.

1: (Default) The barcode and the human readable

field will include exactly the same data.
<nexp7> Height of separator pat- Value must be 1-2 × BARMAG. For example, if
tern row in dots. BARMAG = 5, 5-10 is OK.
<nexp8> Height of each row in Default: 0 (= 3 × BARMAG)
2D barcode in dots.
<nexp9> Separator character ASCII 2-255 decimal. Default is ASCII 124
between data to linear decimal. ASCII 48-57 decimal not allowed.
barcode and 2D bar-
code.
<nexp10> 2D human readables 0: No human readable 2D field.
On/Off.
1: Print human readable 2D field.

For input data information and other remarks, see the Input Data section in the EAN-
128 symbology information.

378 Fingerprint Command Reference

EAN.UCC 128 Composite with CC-C Symbology Information
The next table includes parameter settings for an EAN.UCC Composite symbol using
the EAN.UCC 128 symbology with a CC-C composite component.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "EAN128_CCC"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100.
BARFONT ON: The human readable for the linear bar will be printed under the lin-
ear barcode. If BARSET<nexp10> is set to 1, the human readable for
the 2D barcode is printed also.

OFF: No human readable is printed.

BARSET Data
The next table includes ranges and settings for use with the BARSET command.

BARSET Description Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "EAN128_CCC"

<nexp1-2> Placeholder. Value insignificant. 0 is not allowed.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.
<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.
<nexp5> Number of 0 (default): Selects the largest number of
columns/row in 2D bar- columns for the 2D code to fit within the linear
code. barcode including its quiet zones.
<nexp6> Character exclusion in 0: Barcode will not include space, comma (,), or
barcode (does not CR ([CHR$(13)]) characters, but they are printed
affect human read- in the human readable field. Carriage returns
ables). make it possible to print human readable in
multiple rows.

1: (default) The barcode and the human readable

field will include exactly the same data.
<nexp7> Height of separator pat- Value must be 1-2 × BARMAG. For example, if
tern row in dots. BARMAG = 5, 5-10 is OK.
<nexp8> Height of each row in Default: 0 (= 3 × BARMAG)
2D barcode in dots.

Fingerprint Command Reference 379

 BARSET Description Ranges and Settings

<nexp9> Separator character ASCII 2-255 decimal. Default is ASCII 124

between data to linear decimal. ASCII 48-57 decimal not allowed.
barcode and 2D bar-
code.
<nexp10> 2D human readables 0: No human readable 2D field.
On/Off.
1: Print human readable 2D field.

For input data information and other remarks, see the Input Data section in the EAN-
128 symbology information.

RSS-14 Composite Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter settings for an EAN.UCC Composite symbol using
the RSS-14 symbology with a CC-A or CC-B composite component.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "RSS14"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100. See the
Remarks for more information.
BARFONT Not applicable.

BARSET Data
The next table includes ranges and settings for use with the BARSET command.

BARSET Description Notes

<sexp> Barcode type. "RSS14"

<nexp1-2> Placeholder. Value insignificant. 0 is not allowed.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.
<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.
<nexp5> Placeholder. Value insignificant.

380 Fingerprint Command Reference

 BARSET Description Notes

<nexp6> Character exclusion in 0: Barcode will not include space, comma (,), or
barcode (does not CR ([CHR$(13)]) characters, but they are printed
affect human-readable in the human-readable field. Carriage returns
fields). make it possible to print human-readable fields
in multiple rows.

1: (Default) The barcode and the human-

readable field will include exactly the same data.
<nexp7> Height of separator pat- Value must be 1-2 × BARMAG. For example, if
tern row in dots. BARMAG = 5, 5-10 is OK.
<nexp8> Height of each row in Default: 0 (= 3 × BARMAG)
2D barcode in dots.
<nexp9> Separator character ASCII 2-255 decimal. Default: ASCII 124 decimal.
between data to linear ASCII 48-57 decimal not allowed.
barcode and 2D bar-
code.
<nexp10> 2D human-readable 0: No human-readable 2D field.
fields On/Off.
1: Print human-readable 2D field.

Input Data
Ranges
Parameter and Set- Notes
tings

Number of 13 digits. If less than 13 digits are entered, leading zeroes are auto-
characters matically added so the string is 13 digits long.

Remarks
For RSS symbologies used in composite barcodes, width and height standards are
different because the barcode rows do not have the same height. BARHEIGHT or
BARSET<nexp4> specifies the height of the lower row. The height of the upper row is
automatically calculated from the height of the lower row.
For RSS-14, the width is 96X and the minimum height is 33X, where X is the width of
the most narrow element as specified by BARMAG or BARSET<nexp3>.

RSS-14 Expanded Composite Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter settings for an EAN.UCC Composite symbol using
the RSS-14 Expanded symbology with a CC-A or CC-B composite component.

Fingerprint Command Reference 381

 Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "RSS14E"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100. See the
Remarks for more information.
BARFONT Not applicable.

BARSET Data
The next table includes ranges and settings for use with the BARSET command.

BARSET Description Notes

<sexp> Barcode type. "RSS14E"

<nexp1-2> Placeholder. Value insignificant. 0 is not allowed.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.
<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.
<nexp5> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp6> Character exclusion in 0: Barcode will not include space, comma (,), or
barcode (does not CR ([CHR$(13)]) characters, but they are printed
affect human-readable in the human-readable field. Carriage returns
fields). make it possible to print human-readable fields
in multiple rows.

1: (Default) The barcode and the human-

readable field will include exactly the same data.
<nexp7> Height of separator pat- Value must be 1-2 × BARMAG. For example, if
tern row in dots. BARMAG = 5, 5-10 is OK.
<nexp8> Height of each row in Default: 0 (= 3 × BARMAG)
2D barcode in dots.
<nexp9> Separator character ASCII 2-255 decimal. Default: ASCII 124 decimal.
between data to linear ASCII 48-57 decimal not allowed.
barcode and 2D bar-
code.
<nexp10> 2D human-readable 0: No human-readable 2D field.
fields On/Off.
1: Print human-readable 2D field.

382 Fingerprint Command Reference

Input Data
Ranges
Parameter and Set- Notes
tings

Number of 13 digits. If less than 13 digits are entered, leading zeroes are auto-
characters matically added so the string is 13 digits long.

Remarks
For RSS symbologies used in composite barcodes, width and height standards are
different because the barcode rows do not have the same height. BARHEIGHT or
BARSET<nexp4> specifies the height of the lower row. The height of the upper row is
automatically calculated from the height of the lower row.
For RSS-14E, the width depends on input and the minimum height is 33X, where X is
the width of the most narrow element as specified by BARMAG or BARSET<nexp3>.

RSS-14 Expanded Stacked Composite Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter information for the RSS-14 Expanded Stacked
symbology.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "RSS14ES"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100. See the
Remarks for more information.
BARFONT No restrictions.

BARSET Data
The next table includes RSS-14 Expanded Stacked ranges and settings for use with
the BARSET command.

BARSET Description Notes

<sexp> Barcode type. "RSS14ES"

<nexp1> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp2> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.
<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.

Fingerprint Command Reference 383

 BARSET Description Notes

<nexp5> Segments per row. 2-22 (default 2). Multiples of 2 only.

<nexp6> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp7> Height of a separator The height for the pattern rows between the lin-
row. ear rows. If too low a height is entered, the height
will be changed to the smallest legal height for
the selected magnification. Minimum 1X, max-
imum 2X.
<nexp8> Height (in dots) of Default: 0 (=3 x BARMAG)
each row in the 2D bar-
code.
<nexp9> Separator character ASCII 2-255 decimal. ASCII 48-57 decimal. not
between data in linear allowed. Default is ASCII 124 decimal
barcode and 2D bar-
code.
<nexp10> 2D human-readable 0: Do not print human-readable field.
fields On/Off.
1: Print human-readable field.

Input Data
Barcodes in RSS-14 Expanded Stacked can be a maximum of 71 numeric or 41
alphanumeric characters long. Allowable characters include:
0-9
A-Z
a-z
Other characters: ! " % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? _ space FNC1 [CHR$(128)]

For More Information

See the Remarks and Example in the RSS-14 Expanded Stacked symbology
information.

RSS-14 Limited Composite Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter settings for an EAN.UCC Composite symbol using
the RSS-14 Limited symbology with a CC-A or CC-B composite component.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "RSS14L"
BARRATIO Not applicable.

384 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Command Ranges and Settings

BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100. See the
Remarks for more information.
BARFONT Not applicable.

BARSET Data
The next table includes ranges and settings for use with the BARSET command.

BARSET Description Notes

<sexp> Barcode type. "RSS14L"

<nexp1-2> Placeholder. Value insignificant. 0 is not allowed.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.
<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.
<nexp5> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp6> Character exclusion in 0: Barcode will not include space, comma (,), or
barcode (does not CR ([CHR$(13)]) characters, but they are printed
affect human-readable in the human-readable field. Carriage returns
fields). make it possible to print human-readable fields
in multiple rows.

1: (Default) The barcode and the human-

readable field will include exactly the same data.
<nexp7> Height of separator pat- Value must be 1-2 × BARMAG. For example, if
tern row in dots. BARMAG = 5, 5-10 is OK.
<nexp8> Height of each row in Default: 0 (= 3 × BARMAG)
2D barcode in dots.
<nexp9> Separator character ASCII 2-255 decimal. Default: ASCII 124 decimal.
between data to linear ASCII 48-57 decimal not allowed.
barcode and 2D bar-
code.
<nexp10> 2D human-readable 0: No human-readable 2D field.
fields On/Off.
1: Print human-readable 2D field.

Fingerprint Command Reference 385

Input Data
Ranges
Parameter and Set- Notes
tings

Number of 13 digits If less than 13 digits are entered, leading zeroes are auto-
characters matically added so the string is 13 digits long.

Remarks
For RSS symbologies used in composite barcodes, width and height standards are
different because the barcode rows do not have the same height. BARHEIGHT or
BARSET<nexp4> specifies the height of the lower row. The height of the upper row is
automatically calculated from the height of the lower row.
For RSS-14L, the width is 71X and the minimum height is 10X, where X is the width of
the most narrow element as specified by BARMAG or BARSET<nexp3>.

RSS-14 Stacked Composite Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter settings for an EAN.UCC Composite symbol using
the RSS-14 Stacked symbology with a CC-A or CC-B composite component.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "RSS14S"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100. See the
Remarks for more information.
BARFONT Not applicable.

BARSET Data
The next table includes ranges and settings for use with the BARSET command.

BARSET Description Notes

<sexp> Barcode type. "RSS14S"

<nexp1-2> Placeholder. Value insignificant. 0 is not allowed.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.
<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.
<nexp5> Placeholder. Value insignificant.

386 Fingerprint Command Reference

 BARSET Description Notes

<nexp6> Character exclusion in 0: Barcode will not include space, comma (,), or
barcode (does not CR ([CHR$(13)]) characters, but they are printed
affect human-readable in the human-readable field. Carriage returns
fields). make it possible to print human-readable fields
in multiple rows.

1: (Default) The barcode and the human-

readable field will include exactly the same data.
<nexp7> Height of separator pat- Value must be 1-2 × BARMAG. For example, if
tern row in dots. BARMAG = 5, 5-10 is OK.
<nexp8> Height of each row in Default: 0 (= 3 × BARMAG)
2D barcode in dots.
<nexp9> Separator character ASCII 2-255 decimal. Default: ASCII 124 decimal.
between data to linear ASCII 48-57 decimal not allowed.
barcode and 2D bar-
code.
<nexp10> 2D human-readable 0: No human-readable 2D field.
fields On/Off.
1: Print human-readable 2D field.

Input Data
Ranges
Parameter and Set- Notes
tings

Number of 13 digits. If less than 13 digits are entered, leading zeroes are auto-
characters matically added so the string is 13 digits long.

Remarks
For RSS symbologies used in composite barcodes, width and height standards are
different because the barcode rows do not have the same height. BARHEIGHT or
BARSET<nexp4> specifies the height of the lower row. The height of the upper row is
automatically calculated from the height of the lower row.
For RSS-14S, the width is 50X and the minimum height is 13X (upper row 5X + lower
row 7X + separator row 1X minimum), where X is the width of the most narrow element
as specified by BARMAG or BARSET<nexp3>.

Example
The example below produces an EAN.UCC composite barcode using RSS-14 and with
these characteristics:

Fingerprint Command Reference 387

 Placeholder (<nexp1>) 1
Placeholder (<nexp2>) 1
Narrowest element width in dots (<nexp3>) 3
Height in dots (<nexp4>) 21
Placeholder (<nexp5>) 1
Character exclusion (<nexp6>) 1
Height of separator pattern row (<nexp7>) 4
Height of rows in 2D barcode (<nexp8>) 4
Separator character (<nexp9>) 124
2D human-readable fields (<nexp10>) 1
Data for barcode 1234567890123|987654321

BARSET "RSS14S",1,1,2,21,1,1,4,4,124,1
PRBAR "1234567890123|987654321"

RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional Composite Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter settings for an EAN.UCC Composite symbol using
the RSS-14 Stacked Omnidirectional symbology with a CC-A or CC-B composite
component.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "RSS14SO"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100. See the
Remarks for more information.
BARFONT Not applicable.

BARSET Data
The next table includes ranges and settings for use with the BARSET command.

BARSET Description Notes

<sexp> Barcode type. "RSS14SO"

<nexp1-2> Placeholder. Value insignificant. 0 is not allowed.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.

388 Fingerprint Command Reference

 BARSET Description Notes

<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.

<nexp5> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp6> Character exclusion in 0: Barcode will not include space, comma (,), or
barcode (does not CR ([CHR$(13)]) characters, but they are printed
affect human-readable in the human-readable field. Carriage returns
fields). make it possible to print human-readable fields
in multiple rows.

1: (Default) The barcode and the human-

readable field will include exactly the same data.
<nexp7> Height of separator pat- Value must be 1-2 × BARMAG. For example, if
tern row in dots. BARMAG = 5, 5-10 is OK.
<nexp8> Height of each row in Default: 0 (= 3 × BARMAG)
2D barcode in dots.
<nexp9> Separator character ASCII 2-255 decimal. Default: ASCII 124 decimal.
between data to linear ASCII 48-57 decimal not allowed.
barcode and 2D bar-
code.
<nexp10> 2D human-readable 0: No human-readable 2D field.
fields On/Off.
1: Print human-readable 2D field.

Input Data
Ranges
Parameter and Set- Notes
tings

Number of 13 digits. If less than 13 digits are entered, leading zeroes are auto-
characters matically added so the string is 13 digits long.

Remarks
For RSS symbologies used in composite barcodes, width and height standards are
different because the barcode rows do not have the same height. BARHEIGHT or
BARSET<nexp4> specifies the height of the lower row. The height of the upper row is
automatically calculated from the height of the lower row.
For RSS-14SO, the width is 50X and the minimum height is 69X (upper row 33X +
lower row 33X + separator row 3*1X minimum), where X is the width of the most
narrow element as specified by BARMAG or BARSET<nexp3>.

Fingerprint Command Reference 389

RSS-14 Truncated Composite Symbology Information
The next table includes parameter settings for an EAN.UCC Composite symbol using
the RSS-14 Truncated symbology with a CC-A or CC-B composite component.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "RSS14T"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100.
BARFONT Not applicable.

BARSET Data
The next table includes ranges and settings for use with the BARSET command.

BARSET Description Notes

<sexp> Barcode type. "RSS14T"

<nexp1-2> Placeholder. Value insignificant. 0 is not allowed.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.
<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.
<nexp5> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp6> Character exclusion in 0: Barcode will not include space, comma (,), or
barcode (does not CR ([CHR$(13)]) characters, but they are printed
affect human-readable in the human-readable field. Carriage returns
fields). make it possible to print human readable fields
in multiple rows.

1: (Default) The barcode and the human-

readable field will include exactly the same data.
<nexp7> Height of separator pat- Value must be 1-2 × BARMAG. For example, if
tern row in dots. BARMAG = 5, 5-10 is OK.
<nexp8> Height of each row in Default: 0 (= 3 × BARMAG)
2D barcode in dots.
<nexp9> Separator character ASCII 2-255 decimal. Default: ASCII 124 decimal.
between data to linear ASCII 48-57 decimal not allowed.
barcode and 2D bar-
code.

390 Fingerprint Command Reference

 BARSET Description Notes

<nexp10> 2D human-readable 0: No human-readable 2D field.

fields On/Off.
1: Print human-readable 2D field.

Input Data
Ranges
Parameter and Set- Notes
tings

Number of 13 digits. If less than 13 digits are entered, leading zeroes are auto-
characters matically added so the string is 13 digits long.

UPC-A Composite with CC-A or CC-B Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter settings for an EAN.UCC Composite symbol using
the UPC-A symbology with a CC-A or CC-B composite component.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "UPCA_CC"
BARRATIO Not applicable.
BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2. Maximum is
8.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100.
BARFONT ON: The human readable for the linear bar will be printed under the
linear barcode. If BARSET<nexp10> is set to 1, the human readable for
the 2D barcode is printed also.

OFF: No human readable is printed.

BARSET Data
The next table includes ranges and settings for use with the BARSET command.

BARSET Instruction Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "UPCA_CC"

<nexp1-2> Placeholder. Value insignificant. 0 is not allowed.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.
<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.

Fingerprint Command Reference 391

 BARSET Instruction Ranges and Settings

<nexp5> Placeholder. Value insignificant.

<nexp6> Character exclusion in bar- Always 1 (default). The barcode and the
code (does not affect human- human-readable field will include exactly
readable fields). the same data.
<nexp7> Height of separator pattern Value must be 1-2 × BARMAG. For
row in dots. example, if BARMAG = 5, 5-10 is OK.
<nexp8> Height of each row in 2D bar- Default: 0 (= 3 x BARMAG)
code in dots.
<nexp9> Separator character between ASCII 2-255 decimal. Default is ASCII
data to linear barcode and 2D 124 decimal. ASCII 48-57 decimal not
barcode. allowed.
<nexp10> 2D human-readable fields 0: No human-readable 2D field.
On/Off.
1: Print human-readable 2D field.

Input Data
Parameter Ranges and Settings Notes

Number of characters 11
Check digit 1 Added automatically.
Digits 0 to 9.
Uppercase letters None.
Lowercase letters None.
Punctuation marks None.
Start characters None.
Stop characters None.

UPC-E Composite with CC-A or CC-B Symbology Information

The next table includes parameter settings for an EAN.UCC Composite symbol using
the UPC-E symbology with a CC-A or CC-B composite component.

Command Ranges and Settings

BARTYPE "UPCE_C"
BARRATIO Not applicable.

392 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Command Ranges and Settings

BARMAG Specifies the x-dimension width in dots of the most narrow element
for both the linear barcode and the 2D code. Default is 2. Maximum is
8.
BARHEIGHT Specifies the height of the linear barcode. Default is 100.
BARFONT ON: The human readable for the linear bar will be printed under the
linear barcode. If BARSET<nexp10> is set to 1, the human readable for
the 2D barcode is printed also.

OFF: No human readable is printed.

BARSET Data
The next table includes ranges and settings for use with the BARSET command.

BARSET Instruction Ranges and Settings

<sexp> Barcode type. "UPCE_CC"

<nexp1-2> Placeholder. Value insignificant. 0 is not allowed.
<nexp3> Barmag/Enlargement. See BARMAG.
<nexp4> Barheight. See BARHEIGHT.
<nexp5> Placeholder. Value insignificant.
<nexp6> Character exclusion in bar- Always 1 (default). The barcode and the
code (does not affect human- human-readable field will include exactly
readable fields). the same data.
<nexp7> Height of separator pattern Value must be 1-2 × BARMAG. For
row in dots. example, if BARMAG = 5, 5-10 is OK.
<nexp8> Height of each row in 2D bar- Default: 0 (= 3 x BARMAG)
code in dots.
<nexp9> Separator character between ASCII 2-255 decimal. Default is ASCII
data to linear barcode and 2D 124 decimal. ASCII 48-57 decimal not
barcode. allowed.
<nexp10> 2D human-readable fields 0: No human-readable 2D field.
On/Off.
1: Print human-readable 2D field.

Input Data
Parameter Ranges and Settings Notes

Number of characters 6

Fingerprint Command Reference 393

 Parameter Ranges and Settings Notes

Check digit 1 Added automatically.

Digits 0 to 9.
Uppercase letters None.
Lowercase letters None.
Punctuation marks None
Start characters None.
Stop characters None.

About AddOn Codes

The EAN and UPC barcode standards allow for two- and five-character supplemental
barcodes to be printed together with the normal code. It is possible to print these
barcodes simply by adding the desired characters to the PRBAR statement, separated
by a period (.). The placement of the AddOn barcode is done automatically.

Examples
The AddOn characters are added to the PRBAR statement by use of a period (.)
character as separator:

10 PRPOS 100, 100

20 BARSET "EAN8"
30 ALIGN 1
40 DIR 1
50 BARFONT ON
60 PRBAR "1234567.12345"
70 PRINTFEED
RUN
resulting in:

The AddOn code can be used in combination with any EAN and UPC barcode set. The
following example prints a composite barcode, with a two character AddOn code. For
more information, see About Composite Barcodes.

10 PRPOS 100,100
20 BARSET "EAN8_CC"
30 ALIGN 1
40 DIR 1
50 BARFONT ON
60 PRBAR "1234567.12|987654321"

394 Fingerprint Command Reference

 70 PRINTFEED
RUN
resulting in:

Fingerprint Command Reference 395

396 Fingerprint Command Reference
 CHAPTER
SUPPORTED RFID TAG
5 FORMATS

Detailed information for supported RFID tag formats. Use with the TAGREAD and
TAGWRITE commands.
Fingerprint supports the tag formats listed in the next table. For specific format
information, click the format name:

Type Formats

General Identifier GID-96

Global Individual Asset Identifier GIAI-96
Global Returnable Asset Identifier GRAI-96
Serialized Global Location Number SGLN-96
Serialized Global Trade Identification Number SGTIN-96
Serial Shipping Container Code SSCC-96
United States Department of Defense USDOD-96

These tag format types conform to revision 1.27 of the EPC Tag Data Standards,
version 1.1. Fingerprint supports 64-bit tags, although these tags are not mentioned
in the Gen 2 standard.
l Learn about other EPC tag input methods
l See an example of writing to an EPC tag
l Learn about tag memory allocation

About Tag Formats

Fingerprint includes commands to read, write, and format RFID tags. When writing to
tags, you use the same information from EAN.UCC encoding schemes normally
printed on barcodes.
The tag format information includes only the input data necessary to program the
tags by using Fingerprint. Header and partition information is contained by the tags:
l The header is uniquely defined by the tag format and not included in the input.
l Partition information is defined by the length of other fields (for example, "company
prefix" and "item reference") and is automatically calculated by Fingerprint.

Fingerprint Command Reference 397

 All values entered for EPC formats must be integers entered as strings. Be sure to
enter the correct number of digits in each field, including leading zeros as necessary.
United States Department of Defense (USDOD) formats may differ slightly from EPC
norms. More information on EPC and USDOD tag formats can be obtained from:
www.epcglobalinc.org
www.dodrfid.org

About the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI)

To simplify encoding, the EPC standard provides a standardized method for tag
writing. The Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) representations for EPC tag formats
contain just the fields necessary to distinguish objects from each other. EPC is a
namespace in the Uniform Resource Name (URN) encoding scheme. In order to use
the URIs, the tag format "EPC-URN" must be previously specified by the TAGFORMAT
command.
The next example shows how to specify the URI for an SSCC-96 tag format:

10 TAGFIELD "@EPC"
20 TAGFORMAT "EPC-URN"
30 TAGWRITE "urn:epc:tag:sscc-96:0.12345678.987654321"

Using Non-Standard Tag Formats

Fingerprint allows users to program RFID tags with other data than EPC tag data. The
available tag formats are "NUM", "HEX", and "ASCII", representing numeric,
hexadecimal, and ASCII data respectively. When reading tags, the data is assumed to
be in the format last specified by the TAGFORMAT command. The next example
demonstrates how the ASCII characters written as "RFID" are read as "52464944" if
the last format is "HEX".

10 TAGFIELD "@ID",2,4
20 TAGFORMAT "NUM"
30 TAGWRITE 1234
10 TAGFIELD "@DATA",10,12
20 TAGFORMAT "HEX"
30 TAGWRITE "11223344556677889900AABB"
10 TAGFIELD "@DATA",10,4
20 TAGFORMAT "ASCII"
30 TAGWRITE "RFID"
40 TAGFORMAT "HEX"
50 TAGREAD A$
60 PRINT A$
RUN
resulting in:

52464944

398 Fingerprint Command Reference

RFID Tag Formats: GIAI-96
Field Number of Digits Range

Filter Not applicable 0-7

Company Prefix Index (CoPrefIndex) 6-12 Not applicable
Individual Asset Reference (IndAsset) 18-12 Not applicable

URI Representation
"urn:epc:tag:giai 96:Filter.CoPrefIndex.IndAsset.SerialNo"

Notes
Total number of digits in Company Prefix and Individual Asset Reference must be 24.

RFID Tag Formats: GID-96

Field Number of Digits Range

General Manager Number (GMNo) Not applicable 0-268 435 455

Object Class (Object) Not applicable 0-16 777 215
Serial Number (SerialNo) Not applicable 0-549 755 813 887

URI Representation
"urn:epc:tag:gid-96:GMNo.Object.SerialNo"

RFID Tag Formats: GRAI-96

Field Number of Digits Range

Filter Not applicable 0-7

Company Prefix Index (CoPre- 6-12 Not applicable
fIndex)
Asset Type (Asset) 6-0 Not applicable
Serial Number (SerialNo) Not applicable 0-274 887 906 943

URI Representation
"urn:epc:tag:sgln-96:Filter.CoPrefIndex.Asset.SerialNo"

Fingerprint Command Reference 399

Notes
Total number of digits in Company Prefix and Asset Type must be 12.
An empty Asset Type must be entered as an empty string ("").

RFID Tag Formats: SGLN-96

Field Number of Digits Range

Filter Not applicable 0-7

Company Prefix Index (CoPrefIndex) 6-12 Not applicable
Location Reference (LocRef) 6-0 Not applicable
Serial Number (SerialNo) Not applicable 022 199 023 255 551

URI Representation
"urn:epc:tag:sgln-96:Filter.CoPrefIndex.LocRef.SerialNo"

Notes
Total number of digits in Company Prefix Index and Location Reference must be 12.
An empty Location Reference must be entered as an empty string (";").
The serial number can be left out when writing to a tag, as EAN.UCC specifications do
not yet allow the use of serial numbers in SGLN tags.

RFID Tag Formats: SGTIN-96

Field Number of Digits Range

Filter Not applicable 0-7

Company Prefix Index (CoPrefIndex) 6-12 Not applicable
Item Reference (ItemRef) 7-1 Not applicable
Serial Number (SerialNo) Not applicable 0-274 877 906 943

URI Representation
"urn:epc:tag:sgtin-96:Filter.CoPrefIndex.ItemRef.SerialNo"

Notes
Number of digits in Company Prefix and Item Reference must total 13.

400 Fingerprint Command Reference

RFID Tag Formats: SSCC-96
Field Number of Digits Range

Filter Not applicable 0-7

Company Prefix 6-12 Not applicable
(CoPref)
Serial Reference (Seri- 11-5 Not applicable
alRef)

URI Representation
"urn:epc:tag:sscc-96:Filter.CoPref.SerialRef"

Notes
Number of digits in Company Prefix and Serial Reference must total 17.

RFID Tag Formats: USDOD-96

Field Number of Digits Range

Filter Not applicable 0-15

Government Managed Identifier Exactly 5 char- 0-9, SPACE, and A-Z (not I or
(GMID) acters O)
Serial Number (SerialNo) Not applicable 0-68 719 476 735

URI Representation
"urn:epc:tag:usdod-64:Filter.GMID.SerialNo"

About Tag Memory Allocation Standards

Fingerprint supports the following tag memory standards. Click the standard name to
see more information.
l EPCglobal Class 1 Gen 2
l ISO 18000-6B
l EPC UCode 1.19
l EPC Class 1
Because these tags have different memory structures, you may need to use different
input parameters for the TAGFIELD and TAGFORMAT statement.

Fingerprint Command Reference 401

Class 1 (EPC Class 1 Version 1) Tag Memory Allocation
EPC 64 Tag Memory Allocation

Pointer value
Byte Row @ID EPC 96
(bit)

0 0 0 Tag CRC - no Read nor Write

1
2 1 16 0 Tag ID most significant bytes (EPC data) -
R/W
3 1
4 2 32 2 Tag ID (EPC data) - R/W
5 3
6 3 48 4 Tag ID (EPC data)- R/W
7 5
8 4 64 6 Tag ID (EPC data)- R/W
9 7
10 5 80 8 Tag Id (EPC data) - R/W
11 9
12 6 96 10 Tag ID least significant
bytes (EPC data) - R/W
13 11
14 7 112 12 Kill Passcode - R/W
15 Lock bits --/-

EPC 96 Tag Memory Allocation

Pointer value
Byte Row @ID EPC 96
(bit)

0 0 0 Tag CRC - no Read nor Write

1
2 1 16 0 Tag ID most significant bytes (EPC data) -
R/W
3 1
4 2 32 2 Tag ID (EPC data) - R/W
5 3

402 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Pointer value
Byte Row @ID EPC 96
(bit)

6 3 48 4 Tag ID (EPC data)- R/W

7 5
8 4 64 6 Tag ID (EPC data)- R/W
9 7
10 5 80 8 Tag Id (EPC data) - R/W
11 9
12 6 96 10 Tag ID least significant
bytes (EPC data) - R/W
13 11
14 7 112 12 Kill Passcode - R/W
15 Lock bits --/-

Notes
For Class 1 tags, EPC data is stored in the @ID segment, bytes 0-7 for 64-bit and
bytes 1-11 for 96-bit tags. The values for the parameters <nexp2> and <nexp3> for the
TAGFIELD command do not need to be entered when writing EPC data, as these are
assigned automatically.
The Kill passcode can be addressed as byte 12 in EPC-96 (byte 8 in EPC-64). It must
be addressed independently with a TAGFIELD,"@ID",12,1 command.
The Class 1 standard defines a tag CRC (cyclic redundancy check) for tag ID bits, and
if incorrect, the tag will not be detected by a TAGREAD operation.
Erasing all tag information is done by the following command:

TAGFIELD "@ID",0,0
TAGFORMAT "HEX"
TAGWRITE ""

EPCglobal Class 1 Gen 2 Tag Memory Allocation

RESERVED Field

@Reserved Content Read/Write

0-3 Kill Password Yes

4-7 Access Password Yes
8-n Optional Yes

Fingerprint Command Reference 403

EPC Field

@EPC Content Read/Write

0-1 CRC-16 Read-only

2-3 Protocol Control Bits Yes
4-15 EPC data Yes
16-n2 Optional data Yes

TID Field

@TID Content Read/Write

0 0xE2 Read-only
1 Tag mask designer identifier + vendor-defined tag Read-only
model number
2-n3 Optional Read-only

USER Field

@USER Content Read/Write

0-n4 Optional User Data Yes

Notes
The @RESERVED field contains kill and access passwords. These are not always
implemented, and the tag acts as if they were zero-valued passwords.
The @EPC segment is specifically designed to hold EPC values, and is at least 96 bits
long. When writing EPC information to the @EPC segment, values for the <nexp2> and
<nexp3> values in the TAGFIELD command need not be defined.
For EPCglobal applications, the @TID segment contains special tag and vendor-
specific data. This segment may contain an identifier for ISO/IEC 15963, but this is
not an EPCglobal application.
The @USER bank allows for user-specific data storage. The organization of user
memory for EPCglobal applications is vendor-defined.

404 Fingerprint Command Reference

ISO 18000-6B (UCode HSL) Tag Memory Allocation
Read/Wri-
Byte @ID @DATA @ALL Comment
te

0 ID 0 0 Read-only Unique ID
1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
6 6 6
7 7 7
8 Dat- 0 8 Read-only Tag Man-
a ufacturer
9 1 9
10 2 10 Read-only Tag Hard-
ware Type
11 3 11
12 4 12 Read/Wri- Tag
te Memory
13 5 13
Layout
14 6 14
15 7 15
16 8 16
17 9 17
18 10 18 Read/Wri- User Data:
te Definition
19 11 19
and format
20 12 20 determ-
. . . ined by Tag
. . . Memory
. . . Layout

. . .
. . .
. . .

. . .
. . .
. . .
223 215 223

Fingerprint Command Reference 405

 The actual byte length of the tag may vary.
When writing to an ISO 18000-6B tag, EPC data must be written to the @DATA field,
and valid start byte and field length parameters must be entered in the TAGFIELD
instruction.

Example
10 FILTER$ = "3"
20 PREFIX$ = "0614141"
30 ITEM$ = "100734"
40 SERIAL$ = "2"
50 TAGFIELD "@DATA",10,12
60 TAGFORMAT "SGTIN-96"
70 TAGWRITE FILTER$, PREFIX$, ITEM$, SERIAL$

UCode EPC 1.19 Tag Memory Allocation

Byte @ID @DATA Read/Write Comment

0 ID 0 Read only EPCGlobal

(HEX
1 1 EF04)
2 2 Read/Write EPC Data
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 Data 0 Read/Write User Data
9 1
10 2
11 3
12 4
13 5
14 6
15 7

406 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Byte @ID @DATA Read/Write Comment

16 ID 8 Read/Write EPC Data

17 9
18 10
19 11
20 12
21 13
22 14
23 15
24 Data 8 Read/Write User Data
25 9
26 10
... ...
...
...
...
...
47 31

Notes
When writing EPC data to the @ID segment of a UCode EPC 1.19 tag, Fingerprint
ignores input parameters (and other defaults) for the TAGFIELD command, and
automatically starts writing at byte 2 of the @ID segment. When writing to the @DATA
segment, valid start byte and field length parameters must be entered in the
TAGFIELD command.

Other EPC Tag Input Methods

Although Honeywell recommends that you use the syntax described for each format
to write to an EPC tag, it is possible to write the full length of the 64-bit or 96-bit chip
manually in hex format. You can use the tag formats "EPC-HEX64" and "EPC-HEX96"
to manually write to the tag.

EPC-HEX64 Format
Number of bytes: 8
Allowed values: 0 to 9, A to F in hex format
Example:
10 TAGFIELD "@ID"
20 TAGFORMAT "EPC-HEX64"
30 TAGWRITE "1122334455667788"

Fingerprint Command Reference 407

EPC-HEX96 Format
Number of bytes: 12
Allowed values: 0 to 9, A to F in hex format
Example:
10 TAGFIELD "@ID"
20 TAGFORMAT "EPC-HEX96"
30 TAGWRITE "11223344556677889900AABB"

EPC Tag Writing Example

The following example shows how to include EAN.UCC encoding schemes (as
currently used in printed barcodes) in writing to an RFID tag. This example uses a
Serialized Global Trade Item Number (SGTIN) formed by the GTIN 10614141007346
and serial number 2. The GTIN is formed by an indicator, company prefix and item
reference.
GTIN Indicator: 1
Company Prefix: 0614141
Item reference: 00734
Check digit: 6
Serial Number: 2
This would normally be encoded as an EAN128 barcode:

Callout Description Value in Example

A Application identifiers (01)

B GTIN indicator 1
C Company prefix index 0614141
D Item reference 00734
E Check digit 6
F Application identifier (21)
G Serial number 2

For the correct syntax, the application identifiers (AI) are dropped because this
information is included in the header. The check digit is dropped. The GTIN indicator
is repositioned at the leftmost position of the item reference, to form a new item
reference. A filter value of 3 is chosen for this example (signifying Standard Trade

408 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Item Group, though filter definitions are non-normative at this time). This gives us the
necessary values to program an SGTIN-96 tag, in this order:
Filter: 3
Company Prefix Index: 0614141
Item reference: 100734
Serial number: 2
We could use the following Fingerprint programs to program an SGTIN-96 tag with
this information, The first example assumes a Gen 2 tag, and the second an ISO
18000-6B chip:

Example 1: EPCglobal Class 1 Gen 2 Tag

10 FILTER$ = "3"
20 PREFIX$ = "0614141"
30 ITEM$ = "100734"
40 SERIAL$ = "2"
50 TAGFIELD "@EPC"
60 TAGFORMAT "SGTIN-96"
70 TAGWRITE FILTER$, PREFIX$, ITEM$, SERIAL$

Example 2: ISO 18000-6B Tag

10 TAGFIELD "@DATA",10,12
20 TAGFORMAT "EPC-URN"
30 TAGWRITE "urn:epc:tag:sgtin-96:3.0614141.100734.2"

Fingerprint Command Reference 409

410 Fingerprint Command Reference
 CHAPTER
REFERENCE INFORMATION
6
This section includes useful information used with a variety of Fingerprint commands:
l Fonts
l Character Sets
l Printer Keypad Layouts
l Illustrations of printer keypad layouts, with ID numbers and ASCII keypress values.
Use with the KEYBMAP$, KEY ON/OFF, and ON KEY GOSUB commands.
l Error Codes
l Fingerprint Syntax Conventions
l Fingerprint Variable and Line Label Names
l Fingerprint and Applicator Signals Behavior

Fonts
Fingerprint includes a variety of commands you can use to manage fonts and font
printing.

This section includes information on Fingerprint font support including:

l Default fonts
l How to install fonts
l How to create font aliases
l Complex scripts

Default Fonts
Fonts included by default with Honeywell printers include:
l Andale Mono (Regular and Bold)
l CG Times (Regular and Bold)
l Century Schoolbook Roman

Fingerprint Command Reference 411

 l Letter Gothic
l OCR-A
l OCR-B
l Univers (Regular, Bold, Condensed Bold, and Extra Condensed)
Bitmap fonts included by default with Honeywell printers include:
l IPLFONT0
l IPLFONT1
l IPLFONT2
l IPLFONT7
You can purchase additional fonts from Monotype. For more information, see
Installing Fonts.

Legacy Font Information

Many fonts included with legacy Honeywell printers are now automatically mapped to
new fonts as font aliases:

Legacy Font Alias

Swiss 721 BT Univers
DingDings SWA
OCR-A BT OCR-A
OCR-B 10 Pitch BT OCR-B
Prestige 12 Pitch Bold BT*
Century Schoolbook BT Century Schoolbook
Dutch 801 Roman BT CG Times
Dutch 801 Bold BT CG Times Bold
Letter Gothic 12 Pitch BT Letter Gothic
Monospace 821 BT Andale Mono
Monospace 821 Bold BT Andale Mono Bold
Swiss 721 Bold BT Univers Bold
Swiss 721 Bold Condensed BT Univers Condensed Bold
Extra Condensed BT Univers Extra Condensed
Futura Light BT*

412 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Legacy Font Alias

UPC11.1, UPC11.2, OCR-B

UPC21.1, UPC21.2,

UPC31.1, UPC31.2,

UPC51.1, UPC51.2,

UPC71.1, UPC71.2
OB035RM1, OB035RM1.1, OB035RM1.2 OCR-B
SW030RSN, SW030RSN.1, SW030RSN.2, Univers

SW050RSN, SW050RSN.1, SW050RSN.2

SW020BSN, SW020BSN.1, SW020BSN.2, Univers Bold

SW060BSN, SW060BSN.1, SW060BSN.2,

SW080BSN, SW080BSN.1, SW080BSN.2,

SW120BSN, SW120BSN.1, SW120BSN.2

MS030RMN, MS030RMN.1, MS030RMN.2, Andale Mono

MS050RMN, MS050RMN.1, MS050RMN.2

MS060BMN, MS060BMN.1, MS060BMN.2 Andale Mono Bold

* Prestige and Futura Light can be purchased from Monotype.

For more information on font mapping, see Font Aliases.

How to Install Fonts

You can install additional fonts using these methods:
l PrintSet
l Printer web page
l USB storage device
l FTP
l SmartSystems
User fonts can be stored in /home/user/fonts/, or its subdirectories. For more
information on the font installation process, see your printer user guide.

Getting More Fonts

Fingerprint can use any TrueType® or True-Type-based OpenType® font.

Fingerprint Command Reference 413

 You can also purchase additional fonts from Monotype at www.fonts.com that have
been tested for use with Fingerprint applications:

Monotype Font Language/Locale Supported NASC Values

Helvetica World Eastern Europe CP 1250, UTF-8

M Sung PRC Simplified Chinese CP 936, UTF-8
M Sung HK Traditional Chinese CP 950, UTF-8, BIG5HKSCS
HY Gothic Medium Korean CP 949, UTF-8
TypeBank Mincho Light Japanese CP 932, UTF-8, Shift-JIS
Narkis Hebrew, Arabic CP 1255, CP 1256
Helvetica World Mediterranean CP 1257
WorldType Collection J Japanese UTF-8
WorldType Collection S Simplified Chinese UTF-8
WorldType Collection T Traditional Chinese UTF-8
WorldType Collection K Korean UTF-8

How to Create Font Aliases

Purpose
Font aliasing provides flexibility when moving from a legacy or competitive printer
installation to aHoneywell printer installation in two ways:
l It removes the need to change font names in the data stream to match those res-
ident in the printer.
l It enables you to adjust the size, width, and height of a font to fine-tune the text fit
for any need.
An alias provides a link from the font name in a data stream to a currently installed
font. By using font aliasing, you can create a font alias that points an Arial font to use
Univers instead.
There are three ways to create aliases:
l Use the RUN command alias to create a single alias.
l Use the RUN command alias to create multiple aliases from an alias batch file.
l Manually copy an alias batch file to the printer and then restart the printer.

Syntax
RUN "alias [FONT] alias_namereference_font[font_size] [slant] [width]"

Parameters
FONT

414 Fingerprint Command Reference

 (Optional)
alias_name
The name of the font alias. Spaces in the alias name must be escaped, or preceded by
a backslash (\).
reference_font
The filename of the font to use in place of the alias. Spaces in the font filename must
be escaped, or preceded by a backslash (\).
font_size
(Optional) The size of the font.
slant
(Optional) The slant of the font.
width
(Optional) The width of the font.
If values are not supplied in the alias for optional parameters, they may be specified in
the data stream and will be used. If values are included in the alias and also specified
in the data stream, the values specified in the data stream will be ignored.
Aliases are available for immediate use.

Example
This command creates an alias for Courier New to Andale Mono, at 10 point, 90 slant,
and 94 width:
RUN "alias FONT Courier\ New Andale\ Mono 10 90 94"

Create Multiple Aliases from a Batch File

To create multiple font aliases at a time, use a RUN command to specify a text file:
RUN "alias [FONT] batch.txt"
This alias text file must have the following structure:
"alias_1_name", "reference_font", [size], [slant], [width]
"alias_2_name", "reference_font", [size], [slant], [width]
Example:
"FONT0101.0", "Univers", 10, 0, 60
"FONT0101.1", "Univers", 12, 0, 60

Copy an Alias Batch File to the Printer

You can copy a file named .FONTALIAS (with aliases defined using the batch alias
structure) to the /home/user/fonts folder on your printer and the aliases defined
within the file will be created. Here are the main differences between using the
.FONTALIAS method to create font aliases and using the RUN command:

Fingerprint Command Reference 415

 l The printer automatically creates <AliasName>.REF files in the /home/user/fonts
folder for each alias in .FONTALIAS.
l The file .FONTALIAS will no appear in the /home/user/fonts folder in a FILES lising
or if you view the folder with an FTP client.
l You must restart the printer before you can use aliases created using this method.

Complex Scripts
Fingerprint supports right-to-left and bidirectional text, as well as cursive glyphs,
character shaping, and connecting headstrokes. You must specify a valid font and
character set for your current language when printing complex scripts.
Script types currently supported by Fingerprint include:
l Arabic
l Bopomofo (Taiwan)
l Cyrillic
l Devanagari (Hindi)
l Greek
l Hebrew
l Hiragana (Japanese)
l Johab (Korean)
l Katakana (Japanese)
l Kanji (Japanese)
l Simplified Chinese
l Tajik
l Thai
l Traditional Chinese
l Uhangul (Korean)
l Wansung (Korean)

Character Sets
This section includes the character sets supported by Fingerprint and describes using
the UTF-8 character set.
The character sets in this manual are listed as follows
l numerically by ANSI or NASC number

416 Fingerprint Command Reference

Character Sets Listed by ANSI or NASC Names
l Roman 8 Character Set NASC 1
l French Character Set NASC 33
l Spanish Character Set NASC 34
l Italian Character Set NASC 39
l English (UK) Character Set NASC 44
l Swedish Character Set NASC 46
l Norwegian Character Set NASC 47
l German Character Set NASC 49
l Japanese Latin Character Set NASC 81
l Portuguese Character Set NASC 351
l PCMAP Character Set NASC-1
l ANSI Character Set NASC 2
l MS-DOS Latin 1 Character Set NASC 850
l MS-DOS Greek 1 Character Set NASC 851
l MS-DOS Latin 2 Character Set NASC 852
l MS-DOS Cyrillic Character Set NASC 855
l MS-DOS Turkish Character Set NASC 857
l Windows Latin 2 Character Set NASC 1250
l Windows Cyrillic Character Set NASC 1251
l Windows Latin 1 Character Set NASC 1252
l Windows Greek Character Set NASC 1253
l Windows Latin 5 Character Set NASC 1254
l Windows Baltic Rim Character Set NASC 1257
l OCR-A BT Character Set
l OCR-B 10 Pitch BT Character Set

Fingerprint Command Reference 417

Roman 8 Character Set NASC 1

418 Fingerprint Command Reference

French Character Set NASC 33

Fingerprint Command Reference 419

Spanish Character Set NASC 34

420 Fingerprint Command Reference

Italian Character Set NASC 39

Fingerprint Command Reference 421

English (UK) Character Set NASC 44

422 Fingerprint Command Reference

Swedish Character Set NASC 46

Fingerprint Command Reference 423

Norwegian Character Set NASC 47

424 Fingerprint Command Reference

German Character Set NASC 49

Fingerprint Command Reference 425

Japanese Latin Character Set NASC 81

426 Fingerprint Command Reference

Portuguese Character Set NASC 351

Fingerprint Command Reference 427

PCMAP Character Set NASC-1

428 Fingerprint Command Reference

ANSI Character Set NASC-2

Fingerprint Command Reference 429

MS-DOS Latin 1 Character Set NASC 850

430 Fingerprint Command Reference

MS-DOS Greek 1 Character Set NASC 851

Fingerprint Command Reference 431

MS-DOS Latin 2 Character Set NASC 852

432 Fingerprint Command Reference

MS-DOS Cyrillic Character Set NASC 855

Fingerprint Command Reference 433

MS-DOS Turkish Character Set NASC 857

434 Fingerprint Command Reference

Windows Latin 2 Chracter Set NASC 1250

Fingerprint Command Reference 435

Windows Cyrillic Character Set NASC 1251

436 Fingerprint Command Reference

Windows Latin 1 Character Set NASC 1252

Fingerprint Command Reference 437

Windows Greek Character Set NASC 1253

438 Fingerprint Command Reference

Windows Latin 5 Character Set NASC 1254

Fingerprint Command Reference 439

Windows Baltic Rim Character Set NASC 1257

440 Fingerprint Command Reference

OCR-A Character Set

Fingerprint Command Reference 441

OCR-B Character Set

442 Fingerprint Command Reference

NASC Encoding Format
You can create an encoding for use with the NASC command. The format is different
for single-byte or double-byte formats. Each encoding file contains a sequence of two
Unicode code points, or encoding value pairs.

Single-Bye Encoding Example

# Fingerprint NASC 1
Roman 8
1

00 0000
01 0001
02 0002
03 0003
04 0004
05 0005
06 0006
07 0007
…
F8 00BD
F9 00AA
FA 00BA
FB 00AB
FC 25A0
FD 00BB
FE 00B1
FF 0000

Double-Byte Encoding Example

# Fingerprint NASC 1361
Johab (Korean)
2

20 0020
21 0021
22 0022
23 0023
24 0024
25 0025
26 0026
27 0027
…
F9F7 7199
F9F8 71B9
F9F9 71BA
F9FA 72A7
F9FB 79A7
F9FC 7A00

Fingerprint Command Reference 443

 F9FD 7FB2
F9FE 8A70

Printer Keypad Layouts

Click the printer name in the list below for illustrations that include LED position
numbers, ID values, and ASCII values. Use these values with the KEY ON/OFF,
KEYBMAP$, or ON KEY GOSUB commands.
PC23d, PC43d, and PC43t Icon Layout
PC23d, PC43d, PC43t, PD43, PD43c, and PM42 Keypad Layout
PM23c, PM43, and PM43c Icon Layout
PM23c, PM43, and PM43c Keypad Layout
PX4ie and PX6ie Keypad Layout
PX940 Icon Layout
PX940 Keypad Layout
Virtual Numeric Keypad

PC23d, PC43d, and PC43t Icon Layout

PC23d, PC43d, and PC43t Icon Layout

LED
Icon/Button Label
ID

Wi-Fi Com- N/A

munications
Connectivity 0

Bluetooth N/A

Media 3

Configuration 7
Error

444 Fingerprint Command Reference

 LED
Icon/Button Label
ID

Ribbon 4

Printhead Hot 6

Printhead Lifted 5

General Error 1

Pause 8

Maintenance 9

Print/Feed But- 17
ton

PC23d, PC43d, PC43t, PD43, PD43c, and PM42 Keypad Layout

PC23d, PC43d, and PC43t Keypad Layout

ASCII value
Icon Key Label Key ID
(Shift: +128)

Menu/Home 10 1

Up 12 3

Down 14 5

Left 11 2

Right 13 4

Fingerprint Command Reference 445

 ASCII value
Icon Key Label Key ID
(Shift: +128)

Select 16 13

Back 20 8

Print/Feed 17 31

PM23c, PM43, and PM43c Printer Icon Layout

PM23c, PM43, and PM43c Printer Icon Layout

446 Fingerprint Command Reference

 LED
Icon/Button Label
ID

Wi-Fi Com- N/A

munications
Connectivity 0

Bluetooth N/A

Media 3

Configuration 7
Error
Ribbon 4

Printhead Hot 6

Printhead Lifted 5

General Error 1

Pause 8

Maintenance 9

Print/Feed But- 17
ton

Fingerprint Command Reference 447

PM23c, PM43, and PM43c Printer Keypad Layout

PM43 Printer Keypad Layout

PM23c and PM43c Printer Keypad Layout

ASCII value
Key Label Key ID
(Shift:+128)

Shift N/A N/A

448 Fingerprint Command Reference

 ASCII value
Key Label Key ID
(Shift:+128)

F1 10 1

F2 11 2

F3 12 3

F4 13 4

F5 14 5

1 1 49

2 2 50

3 3 51

4 4 52

5 5 53

6 6 54

7 7 55

8 8 56

9 9 57

0 0 48

./- 21 46

C 20 8

Enter 16 13

Print/Feed 17 31

Fingerprint Command Reference 449

PX4ie and PX6ie Printer Keypad Layout

PX4ie and PX6ie Keyboard Layout

Key/Label Key Position Key ID ASCII Value

Shift Shift N/A N/A

F1 23 10 1

450 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Key/Label Key Position Key ID ASCII Value

F2 24 11 2
F3 25 12 3
F4 26 13 4
F5 27 14 5
1 1 1 49
2 2 2 50
3 3 3 51
4 4 4 52
5 5 5 53
6 6 6 54
7 7 7 55
8 8 8 56
9 9 9 57
0 0 0 48
./- 21 21 46
C 29 20 8
Enter 28 16 13
Print/Feed 17 17 31
Left 11 11 2
Right 13 13 4
Up 12 12 3
Down 14 14 5
Home 10 10 1
Select 16 16 13
Back 20 20 8

Fingerprint Command Reference 451

PX940 Printer Icon Layout
LED
Icon/Button Label
ID

Wi-Fi Com- N/A

munications
Connectivity 0

Bluetooth N/A

Media 3

Ribbon 4

Printhead Lifted 5

Pause 8

Configuration 7
Error
General Error 1

Printhead Hot 6

Maintenance 9

Home N/A

Save N/A

Back N/A

Menu N/A

Printer N/A
Information

452 Fingerprint Command Reference

RTW LED
Ready-to-Work State Description

On The printer is Ready-to-Work

Off The printer is in a state where it is being used for purposes
other than printing or communicating as during a firmware
upgrade or while it is booting. It might also mean that there is
a severe error that requires a reboot. It might be off if the
printer is off.
Blink A blinking light (50% duty cycle @ 0.75Hz) indicates that the
printer is not ready to work and there is a printing or
communication error that requires attention.

Virtual Numeric Keypad

The Virtual Keypad will be available automatically when Fingerprint application is
running. The Key and ASCII values are the same as the PM43 physical keypad.
Note: Only PX940 and PM45 series printers support Virtual Keypad.

Tap the keyboard button above the F4 and F5 button to expand the virtual numeric
keyboard.

Fingerprint Command Reference 453

 Key Label Key ID ASCII value (Shift:+128)
Shift N/A N/A

F1 10 1

F2 11 2

F3 12 3

F4 13 4

F5 14 5

1 1 49

2 2 50

454 Fingerprint Command Reference

 3 3 51

4 4 52

5 5 53

6 6 54

7 7 55

8 8 56

9 9 57

0 0 48

./- 21 46

C 20 8

Enter 16 13

Print/Feed 17 31

The existing display area for the background image will be reduced slightsly by the
keyboard icon.

Fingerprint Command Reference 455

Error Codes
Click the following links to view a list of error codes:
l Error Codes 1 - 90
l Error Codes 1001 - 1095
l Error Codes 1101 - 1370
l Error Codes 1401 - 1730
l Error Codes 1801 - 1958

Error Codes 1 - 90
Code Message or Explanation Code Message or Explanation

0 No error. 46 Store already in progress.

1 Syntax error. 47 Unknown store protocol.
2 Unbalanced parentheses. 48 No store defined.
3 Feature not implemented. 49 NEXT without FOR.
4 Evaluation syntax error. 50 Bad store record header.
5 Unrecognized token. 51 Bad store address.
6 Tokenized line too long. 52 Bad store record.

456 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Code Message or Explanation Code Message or Explanation

7 Evaluation stack overflow. 53 Bad store checksum.

8 Error in exectab. 54 Bad store record end.
9 Undefined token. 55 Remove in ROM.
10 Non-executing token. 56 Illegal communication channel.
11 Evaluation stack underflow. 57 Subscript out of range.
12 Type mismatch. 58 Field overflow.
13 Line not found. 59 Bad record number.
14 Division with zero. 60 Too many strings.
15 Font not found. 61 Error in setup file.
16 Barcode device not found. 62 File is list protected.
17 Barcode type not imple- 63 ENTER function.
mented.
18 Disk full. 64 FOR without NEXT.
19 Error in file name. 65 Evaluation overflow.
20 Input line too long. 66 Bad optimizing type.
21 Error stack overflow. 67 Error from communication channel.
22 RESUME without error. 68 Unknown execution identity.
23 Image not found. 69 Not allowed in immediate mode.
24 Overflow in temporary string 70 Line label not found.
buffer.
25 Wrong number of para- 71 Line label already defined.
meters.
26 Parameter too large. 72 IF without ENDIF.
27 Parameter too small. 73 ENDIF without IF.
28 RETURN without GOSUB. 74 ELSE without ENDIF.
29 Error in startup file. 75 ELSE without IF.
30 Assign to a read-only vari- 76 WHILE without WEND.
able.
31 Illegal file number. 77 WEND without WHILE.
32 File is already open. 78 Not allowed in execution mode.
33 Too many files open. 79 Not allowed in a layout.

Fingerprint Command Reference 457

 Code Message or Explanation Code Message or Explanation

34 File is not open. 80 Download timeout.

35 Guru mode on. 81 Exit to system.
36 Guru mode off. 82 Invalid cont environment.
37 Cutter device not found. 83 ETX Timeout.
38 User break. 84 Application terminated by system.
39 Illegal line number. 85 XML format not found.
40 Run statement in program. 86 Comset conflict.
41 Parameter out of range. 87 Recursive call error.
42 Illegal barcode ratio. 88 Operation not allowed. Applicator port
disabled.
43 Memory overflow. 89 Operation not allowed. Applicator port
enabled.
44 File is write protected. 90 Operation not allowed in Direct Pro-
tocol.
45 Unknown store option

Error Codes 1001 - 1095

Code Message or Explanation Code Message or Explanation

1001 Not implemented. 1048 Too many processes.

1002 Memory too small. 1049 Invalid process.
1003 Field out of label. 1050 Invalid child.
1004 Wrong font to chosen direction. 1051 Dot resistance measure out of
limits.
1005 Out of media. 1052 Error in printhead.
1006 No field to print. 1053 Unable to complete a dot meas-
urement.
1007 Test feed failed. 1054 Error writing to device.
1008 Test feed failed. 1055 Error reading from device.
1009 Invalid parameter. 1056 O_BIT open error.
1010 Hardware error. 1057 File exists.
1011 I/O error. 1058 Ribbon installed.
1012 Too many files opened. 1059 Cutter not responding.

458 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Code Message or Explanation Code Message or Explanation

1013 Device not found. 1060 Ribbon save motor did not
start/stop.
1014 File not found. 1061 Wrong type of media.
1015 File is read-only. 1062 Not allowed.
1016 Illegal argument. 1063 E2BIG
1017 Results are too large. 1064 Device or resource is busy.
1018 Bad file descriptor. 1065 Resource deadlock would
occur.
1019 Invalid font. 1066 Bad address.
1020 Invalid image. 1067 Is a directory.
1021 Too large argument for MAG. 1068 Too many links.
1022 Printhead lifted. 1069 Exec format error.
1023 Incomplete label. 1070 No record locks available.
1024 File too large. 1071 No space left on device.
1025 Permission denied. 1072 Out of streams resources.
1026 Label pending. 1073 Directory not empty.
1027 Out of ribbon. 1074 Not a typewriter.
1028 Paper type is not selected. 1075 No such device or address.
1029 Printhead voltage too high. 1076 Operation not permitted.
1030 Character is missing in chosen font. 1077 Broken pipe.
1031 Next label not found. 1078 Illegal seek.
1032 File name too long. 1079 Cross-device link.
1033 Too many files are open. 1080 Address family not supported.
1034 Not a directory. 1081 Timer expired.
1035 File pointer is not inside the file. 1082 Unsupported protocol type.
1036 Subscript out of range. 1083 Ribbon low.
1037 No acknowledge received within spe- 1084 Media low.
cified time.
1038 Communication checksum error. 1085 Connection timed out.
1039 Not mounted. 1086 Secret not found.
1040 Unknown file operating system. 1087 Paper jam.
1041 Error in file system structure. 1088 Printhead too hot.

Fingerprint Command Reference 459

 Code Message or Explanation Code Message or Explanation

1042 Internal error in mcs. 1089 Error in XML attribute.

1043 Timer table full. 1091 XML unbalanced tag-close.
1044 Low battery in memory card. 1092 XML empty tag-definition.
1045 Media was removed. 1093 XML expecting more data.
1046 Memory checksum error. 1094 XML data overflow.
1047 Interrupted system call. 1095 Front arm lifted

Error Codes 1101 - 1370

Code Message or Explanation Code Message or Explanation

1101 Illegal character in barcode. 1221 Map table was not found.
1102 Illegal barcode font. 1222 Double byte map table is
missing.
1103 Too many characters in barcode. 1223 Single byte map table is
missing.
1104 Barcode too large. 1224 Character map function is
missing.
1105 Barcode parameter error. 1225 Double byte font is not selec-
ted.
1106 Wrong number of characters. 1301 Index is out of collection
bounds.
1107 Illegal barcode size. 1302 Collection could not be
expanded.
1108 Number or rows out of range. 1303 Parameter is not a collection.
1109 Number of columns out of range. 1304 Item is not a member of the
collection.
1110 No separator is entered. 1305 Missing or faulty compare
function.
1111 Barcode parameter out of range. 1306 Item is already a member of
the collection.
1112 Invalid or not supported ECI function. 1307 Over-current warning.
1201 Insufficient font data loaded. 1320 RFID not installed.
1202 Transformation matrix out of range. 1321 No RFID tag found.
1203 Font format error. 1322 Access outside tag memory.

460 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Code Message or Explanation Code Message or Explanation

1204 Requested specs not compatible with 1323 Tag format error.
output module.
1205 Intelligent transformation requested 1324 RFID inactive.
but not supported.
1206 Unsupported output mode requested. 1325 Not supported by tag type.
1207 Extended font loaded but only compact 1326 RFID module too hot.
fonts supported.
1208 Font specs not set prior to use of font. 1327 RFID duty cycle exceeded.
1209 Track kerning data not available. 1328 RFID lock error.
1210 Pair kerning data not available. 1329 RFID access error.
1211 Other Speedo error. 1340 Applicator error 1.
1212 Bitmap or outline device not specified. 1341 Applicator error 2.
1213 Speedo error six. 1342 Applicator error 3.
1214 Squeezing or clipping not supported. 1343 RTW external error.
1215 Character data not available. 1344 Dataready not enabled.
1216 Unknown font. 1360 Battery empty.
1217 Font format is not supported. 1361 Battery charging error.
1218 Correct mapping table is not found. 1362 Battery low.
1219 Font is in the wrong direction. 1370 Motor too hot.
1220 Error in external map table.

Error Codes 1401 - 1730

Code Message or Explanation Code Message or Explanation

1401 crpap: Illegal print speed. 1710 Power supply Generic Error.
1402 crpap: Illegal base value. 1711 Power supply Pending.
1403 crpap: Illegal profile number. 1712 Power Status OK.
1404 crpap: Illegal regulation factor. 1713 Power supply power fail.
1405 crpap: Syntax error in parameter file. 1714 Power supply over volt V24.
1406 crpap: Illegal print head resolution. 1715 Power supply under volt V24.
1407 crpap: Illegal print head version. 1716 Power supply over volt VSTM.
1601 Referenced Font Not Found. 1717 Power supply under volt VSTM.

Fingerprint Command Reference 461

 Code Message or Explanation Code Message or Explanation

1602 Error in Wand-Device. 1718 Power supply too hot.

1603 Error in Slave Processor. 1719 Power supply error.
1604 Print Shift Error. 1721 Verification Failed
1605 No Hardware Lock. 1722 Replace Verifier Head
1606 Testfeed not done. 1723 Clean Verifier Head
1608 Access Denied. 1724 Verifier Calibration
1609 Specified Feed Length Exceeded. 1725 Verifier hardware Error
1610 Illegal Character Map File. 1725 Verifier Calibration Expired
1611 Compression failed. 1727 Exceed Maximun
1612 Decompression failed. 1728 Unsupported Barcode
1613 Font alias could not be created. 1729 License Expiring Soon
1701 Cutter jammed. 1730 License expired

Error Codes 1801 - 1958

Code Message or Explanation Code Message or Explanation

1801 Socket operation on non-socket. 1919 Authentication failed.

1802 Destination address required. 1920 Authenticating.
1803 Protocol wrong type for socket. 1921 Printer in maintenance mode.
1804 Protocol not available. 1922 Printer in maintenance mode.
1805 Protocol not supported. 1923 Info mode entered.
1806 Operation not supported on socket. 1924 Pairing.
1807 Protocol family not supported. 1925 Pairing failed.
1808 Address already in use. 1926 Permission denied.
1809 Can't assign requested address. 1927 Connection timeout.
1810 Socket is not connected. 1928 Print job complete.
1811 No buffer space available. 1929 Odometer (user resettable).
1812 Software caused connection abort. 1930 Odometer (current printhead).
1813 Connection reset by peer. 1931 Odometer (printer).
1814 Network dropped connection on 1932 Replace printhead.
reset.

462 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Code Message or Explanation Code Message or Explanation

1815 Network is down. 1933 Clean printhead.

1816 Too many references: can't splice. 1934 Faulty dot.
1817 Operation already in progress. 1935 Printing.
1818 Operation now in progress. 1936 USB flash drive connected.
1819 Host is down. 1937 USB flash drive disconnected.
1820 No route to host. 1938 USB peripheral connected.
1821 Disc quota exceeded. 1939 USB host disconnected.
1833 Connection refused. 1940 Bluetooth device connected.
1838 Duplicate IP detected. 1941 Bluetooth device disconnected.
1901 No system light. 1942 Scanning.
1902 Printer is rebooting. 1943 Associating.
1903 Ready. 1944 Disconnected.
1904 Printer in pause mode. 1945 Completed.
1905 Printer in menu mode. 1946 Error in upgrading.
1906 Upgrading firmware. 1947 Printer in sleep mode.
1907 Application load error. 1948 Serial hardware connected.
1908 IP not acquired. 1949 Serial hardware disconnected.
1909 Network link error. 1950 Parallel hardware connected.
1910 Printhead not detected. 1951 Parallel hardware dis-
connected.
1911 Application break. 1952 Parallel hardware connected
1912 Shutting down printer. 1953 Parallel hardware disconnected
1913 Press feed not done. 1954 Duplicate IP address
1914 Ready-to-Work blink by application. 1955 Wireless Duplicate IP address
1915 Ready-to-Work off by application. 1956 Memory full
1916 Started. 1957 Memory Low
1917 Press a key to continue. 1958 USB flash drive mounted
1918 Label not taken.

Fingerprint Syntax Conventions

In the command syntax, certain punctuation marks are used to indicate various types
of data. Do not include punctuation marks unless noted for that command.

Fingerprint Command Reference 463

 Convention Description

[] Entries within brackets are optional.

keyword1 | keyword2 Indicates "either-or." Choose only one of the keywords.
<> Grouping of data.
..... Repetition of the preceding data type.
" Quotation mark (ASCII 34 decimal).
↵ Carriage return or linefeed.
<scon> String constant.
<ncon> Numeric constant.
<sexp> String expression.
<nexp> Numeric expression.
<svar> String variable.
<nvar> Numeric variable.
<stmt> Statement.
<linelabel> Line label.

Fingerprint Variable and Line Label Names

The naming rules for Fingerprint variables and line labels are more restrictive than
some other languages:
l Fingerprint variables and line labels must end with either a dollar sign ($) for string
variables, or a percent sign (%) for integer variables.
l Fingerprint variables and line labels may not start with Fingerprint keywords, includ-
ing abbreviations of Fingerprint commands.
Honeywell recommends that you start Fingerprint variables and line labels with the
letter "q". No Fingerprint commands or keywords will ever begin with this letter.

Invalid examples
PrintTest$ = "This is a test"
The variable begins with "Print", a Fingerprint command name.
pDispName$ = "Hello World"
The variable starts with a command name abbreviation, "pD" (PD/PRDIAGONAL).

Valid example
qPrintTest$ = "This is a test"
While the variable includes a command name, there are no commands that begin with
"q" or "test".

464 Fingerprint Command Reference

Fingerprint and Applicator Signals Behavior
In Fingerprint mode, all in signals and the Dataready out signal are handled by the
Fingerprint application.

Feed
When the Feed in signal is asserted, the application should move to a specified
subroutine that feeds labels until the Feed in signal is de-asserted.

Example
10 ON PORTIN.FEED GOSUB 200

...

200 FORMFEED

210 RETURN

Pause
When the Pause in signal is received, the application should move to a specified
subroutine to finish the current print job and then places the printer in a pause state,
and does not print any jobs.

Example
10 ON PORTIN.PAUSE GOSUB 90

...

90 pause printer

Startprint
When the Startprint signal is received, the application should move to a specified
subroutine that starts the print job. The Startprint signal must be preceded by the
dataready signal as seen in this

Example
10 PORTOUT.DATAREADY on

20 ON PORTIN.STARTPRINT GOSUB 60

...

60 my print routine

70 PRINTFEED

80 RETURN

Fingerprint Command Reference 465

Reprint
When the Reprint signal is received, the application should move to a specified
subroutine that reprints the last valid label.

Example
...

100 ON PORTIN.REPRINT GOSUB 150

...

150 PRINTFEED -1,1

160 RETURN

Printfeed
The dataready signal must be set manually by the Fingerprint application before a
printfeed is issued when using with an applicator.

Handling External Applicator Errors

When an error signal (apperr1, apperr2, apperr3 or RTWExternal) is received, the
application should move to a specified subroutine that takes action based on error
severity.

Example
...

60 ON PORTIN.APPERR1 GOSUB 100

...

100 perform error handling

110 RETURN

Handling Internal System Errors

For internal system errors, the system error signal status can be read any time within
the application so appropriate measures can be taken. When any of these errors
occur, the appropriate out signal (including the error) is asserted:

• Ribbon low

• Ribbon out

• Media low

• Media out

466 Fingerprint Command Reference

 • RFID tag error

• Verification failed

Example
10 IF PORTIN.RIBBONLOW GOTO 200

...

200 perform error handling

210 RETURN

Direct Protocol and Applicator Signals Behavior

In Direct Protocol, all in and out signals are handled by firmware.

Feed
There are two ways to trigger the feeding of blank labels.

One is by pressing the feed button on the printer panel and the other by using the
feed signal. When the feed signal is received, the printer will start feeding blank labels
as long as the feed signal is asserted.

If the feed button is pressed manually, the printer will feed only one blank label.

Pause
The applicator can toggle the current pause state by using the pause IN signal to
simulate pressing Pause on the printer front panel.

Startprint
When the printfeed command is executed, the print process sets the dataready signal
and then waits for the startprint signal to be detected before proceeding with the print
job.

The print process will not set another dataready signal until the current print job de-
asserts the previous dataready signal. This prevents the printer from printing a new
label before the previous label is completed.

Reprint
This signal works similar to startprint. The reprint signal is detected under two
conditions:

• when the printer is idle.

• when the printer is waiting for a startprint signal during the execution of a printfeed
command.

Fingerprint Command Reference 467

 The printer prints only one label at a time.

Handling External Applicator Errors

The external applicator error in signals (APPERR1, APPERR2, APPERR3, RTWINEXT)
should be asserted when external applicator errors occur. When one of these signals
is detected, an associated event is activated in the System Health Monitor (SHM).
When the issue causing the error has been resolved and the error signals are de-
asserted, the events are deactivated in the SHM.

Handling Internal System Errors

When a system error occurs that activates an event in the SHM, the “service required”
signal is asserted. The printer will indicate this by blinking the blue light on the printer
panel.

The external RTW out signal may be de-asserted based on clearing the errors that was
triggered.

When any of these errors occur, the appropriate out signal (including the error) is
asserted:

• Ribbon low

• Ribbon out

• Media low

• Media out

• RFID tag error

• Verification failed

General
The following limitations have been identified and will not be implemented:

Phoenix Platform
Applicator Interface not supported.

Kilimanjaro Platform
Applicator Interface not supported.

Atlas Platform
Output signals:

Service Required Signal

468 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Atlas platform does not support signals related to verifier functions.

Hydra Platform
Hydra Platform hardware does not have Ready-to-Work LED indicator on the printer
front panel.

S-Style Port Pinouts

Hydra hardware does not support 5V reference signal for port 8 for the S-Style port. It
is assigned as a reserved port.

Inline Text Formatting

This functionality allows the user to adjust formatting on-the-fly inside the data
stream, using inline commands.

Preparing for Inline Formatting

To enable inline text formatting, specify start and stop characters using two SYSVARs.
Each character is the decimal representation of the byte code (0-255).

SYSVAR Description

SYSVAR(84) Sets the start character.

SYSVAR(85) Sets the end character.

If either character is set to -1, inline formatting is disabled.

Using Inline Formatting

Text modifiers cause or discontinue either bold or italic attributes to be applied to
following text, according to the following syntax:
<sexp1>[/]b|i<sexp2>
where:

Parameter Description

<sexp1> The character previously assigned to SYSVAR(84).

[/] Optional forward slash character (“/”) turns off an active modifier, fol-
lowing text to the immediately preceding rendering. Turning off a non-
existent modifier is ignored.
b|i b: bold-face following text

i: italicize following text

Only one modifier (b or i) may be specified between a pair of <sexp1>

and <sexp2>, and the modifier must be lower-case.

Fingerprint Command Reference 469

 Parameter Description

<sexp2> The character previously assigned to SYSVAR(85).

Behavior
Modifiers can appear anywhere in the text string, and may be nested in either order to
create bold and italicized text.
Once a modifier is specified, all following text renders according to the modifier until
one of the following occurs:
1. The end of the text string is encountered (i.e. a modifier only has effect within the
current DP command).
2. A second modifier is specified (in which case all following text is modified with all
modifiers currently in effect).
3. The modifier is turned off.

Error Handling
Inline formatting commands not following the syntax are ignored and rendered as
normal text. An example of invalid syntax is using the space character inside the
formatting command.

Supported Fonts
Boldness can be applied to fonts which have a corresponding bold version named
"<regular font name> Bold" (for example the resident fonts: Andale Mono, CG Times,
Univers).
Italic can be applied to fonts supporting slant, and is implemented as a slant of 17
degrees.

Examples
The following examples are using start-character ‘<’ and stop-character ‘>’ for
readability. They illustrate the different styles supported, as well as different syntactic
alternatives. It also illustrates the resulting number of fields, which will be dependent
on the number of formatting switches within a PRTXT command.

Description Code Resulting Text

Enable inline text format- SYSVAR(84)=60 Not applicable.

ting. SYSVAR(85)=62
Apply boldface to text. CLL HELLO WORLD
PRTXT "Hello
<b>World</b>"
PRINT FIELDNO
2

470 Fingerprint Command Reference

 Description Code Resulting Text

Apply italicization to text. CLL HELLO WORLD

PRTXT "Hello
<i>World</i>"
PRINT FIELDNO
2
Apply boldface and italiciz- CLL HELLO WORLD
ation to text. PRTXT "Hello
<b><i>World</i></b>"
PRINT FIELDNO
2
Automatically end boldface CLL HELLO WORLD
text. PP 1,35 NORMAL
PRTXT "Hello <b>World"
PP 1,1
PRTXT "Normal"

Authenticate as Privileged User

Purpose
To run certain commands, you must first authenticate yourself as a privileged user.
Fingerprint uses two administrator accounts. Use the itadmin account to configure
network settings, including Ethernet, 802.11 wireless, and Bluetooth. Use the admin
account for all other commands which require privileges.

Syntax
run"su -p <sexp1> <sexp2>"

Parameters
<sexp1> is the password. Default is "pass."
<sexp2> is either "admin" or "itadmin".

Examples
run"su -p pass admin"
run"su -p pass itadmin"

Fingerprint Command Reference 471

Honeywell
855 S. Mint Street
Charlotte, NC 28202
sps.honeywell.com

FP-EN-CR-01 Rev C

6/24